



Produced by Alicia Williams, Brenda Lewis and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
book was produced from scanned images of public domain
material from the Google Print project.)









  [Illustration: DR. MONTESSORI GIVING A LESSON IN TOUCHING GEOMETRICAL
  INSETS]




  THE
  MONTESSORI METHOD

  SCIENTIFIC PEDAGOGY AS APPLIED TO CHILD
  EDUCATION IN "THE CHILDREN'S HOUSES"
  WITH ADDITIONS AND REVISIONS
  BY THE AUTHOR

  BY

  MARIA MONTESSORI

  TRANSLATED FROM THE ITALIAN BY
  ANNE E. GEORGE

  WITH AN INTRODUCTION BY
  PROFESSOR HENRY W. HOLMES
  OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY

  _WITH THIRTY-TWO ILLUSTRATIONS FROM PHOTOGRAPHS_

  NEW YORK
  FREDERICK A. STOKES COMPANY
  MCMXII




  _Copyright, 1912, by_

  FREDERICK A. STOKES COMPANY

  _All rights reserved, including that of translation into foreign
  languages, including the Scandinavian_




  _I place at the beginning of this volume, now appearing in the
  United States, her fatherland, the dear name of_

    _ALICE HALLGARTEN_

  _of New York, who by her marriage to Baron Leopold Franchetti
  became by choice our compatriot._

  _Ever a firm believer in the principles underlying the Case dei
  Bambini, she, with her husband, forwarded the publication of
  this book in Italy, and, throughout the last years of her short
  life, greatly desired the English translation which should
  introduce to the land of her birth the work so near her heart._

  _To her memory I dedicate this book, whose pages, like an
  ever-living flower, perpetuate the recollection of her
  beneficence._




  ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

    Grateful acknowledgment is made to Mrs. Guy Baring, of London, for
    the loan of her manuscript translation of "Pedagogia Scientifica";
    to Mrs. John R. Fisher (Dorothy Canfield) for translating a large
    part of the new work written by Dr. Montessori for the American
    Edition; and to The House of Childhood, Inc., New York, for use
    of the illustrations of the didactic apparatus. Dr. Montessori's
    patent rights in the apparatus are controlled, for the United
    States and Canada, by The House of Childhood, Inc.

                                                       THE PUBLISHERS.




PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION


In February, 1911, Professor Henry W. Holmes, of the Division of
Education of Harvard University, did me the honour to suggest that an
English translation be made of my Italian volume, "_Il Metodo della
Pedagogia Scientifica applicato all' educazione infantile nelle Case dei
Bambini_." This suggestion represented one of the greatest events in the
history of my educational work. To-day, that to which I then looked
forward as an unusual privilege has become an accomplished fact.

The Italian edition of "_Il Metodo della Pedagogia Scientifica_" had no
preface, because the book itself I consider nothing more than the
preface to a more comprehensive work, the aim and extent of which it
only indicates. For the educational method for children of from three to
six years set forth here is but the earnest of a work that, developing
the same principle and method, shall cover in a like manner the
successive stages of education. Moreover, the method which obtains in
the _Case dei Bambini_ offers, it seems to me, an experimental field for
the study of man, and promises, perhaps, the development of a science
that shall disclose other secrets of nature.

In the period that has elapsed between the publication of the Italian
and American editions, I have had, with my pupils, the opportunity to
simplify and render more exact certain practical details of the method,
and to gather additional observations concerning discipline. The results
attest the vitality of the method and the necessity for an extended
scientific collaboration in the near future, and are embodied in two new
chapters written for the American edition. I know that my method has
been widely spoken of in America, thanks to Mr. S. S. McClure, who has
presented it through the pages of his well-known magazine. Indeed, many
Americans have already come to Rome for the purpose of observing
personally the practical application of the method in my little schools.
If, encouraged by this movement, I may express a hope for the future, it
is that my work in Rome shall become the centre of an efficient and
helpful collaboration.

To the Harvard professors who have made my work known in America and to
_McClure's Magazine_, a mere acknowledgment of what I owe them is a
barren response; but it is my hope that the method itself, in its effect
upon the children of America, may prove an adequate expression of my
gratitude.

                                                     MARIA MONTESSORI.

ROME, 1912.




CONTENTS


                                                                  PAGE

  ACKNOWLEDGMENTS                                                    V

  THE AMERICAN EDITION                                             VII

  INTRODUCTION                                                    XVII


CHAPTER I

A CRITICAL CONSIDERATION OF THE NEW PEDAGOGY IN ITS RELATION TO
MODERN SCIENCE

    Influence of Modern Science upon Pedagogy                        1

    Italy's part in the development of Scientific Pedagogy           4

    Difference between scientific technique and the scientific
    spirit                                                           7

    Direction of the preparation should be toward the spirit
    rather than toward the mechanism                                 9

    The master to study man in the awakening of his intellectual
    life                                                            12

    Attitude of the teacher in the light of another example         13

    The school must permit the free natural manifestations of the
    child if in the school Scientific Pedagogy is to be born        15

    Stationary desks and chairs proof that the principle of
    slavery still informs the school                                16

    Conquest of liberty, what the school needs                      19

    What may happen to the spirit                                   20

    Prizes and punishments, the bench of the soul                   21

    All human victories, all human progress, stand upon the inner
    force                                                           24


CHAPTER II

HISTORY OF METHODS

    Necessity of establishing the method peculiar to Scientific
    Pedagogy                                                        28

    Origin of educational system in use in the "Children's
    Houses"                                                         31

    Practical application of the methods of Itard and Seguin in
    the Orthophrenic School at Rome                                 32

    Origin of the methods for the education of deficients           33

    Application of the methods in Germany and France                35

    Seguin's first didactic material was spiritual                  37

    Methods for deficients applied to the education of normal
    children                                                        42

    Social and pedagogic importance of the "Children's Houses"      44


CHAPTER III

INAUGURAL ADDRESS DELIVERED ON THE OCCASION OF THE OPENING OF ONE
OF THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"

    The Quarter of San Lorenzo before and since the establishment
    of the "Children's Houses"                                      48

    Evil of subletting the most cruel form of usury                 50

    The problem of life more profound than that of the
    intellectual elevation of the poor                              52

    Isolation of the masses of the poor, unknown to past
    centuries                                                       53

    Work of the Roman Association of Good Building and the moral
    importance of their reforms                                     56

    The "Children's House" earned by the parents through their
    care of the building                                            60

    Pedagogical organization of the "Children's House"              62

    The "Children's House" the first step toward the socialisation
    of the house                                                    65

    The communised house in its relation to the home and to the
    spiritual evolution of women                                    66

    Rules and regulations of the "Children's Houses"                70


CHAPTER IV

PEDAGOGICAL METHODS USED IN THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"

    Child psychology can be established only through the method of
    external observation                                            72

    Anthropological consideration                                   73

    Anthropological notes                                           77

    Environment and schoolroom furnishings                          80


CHAPTER V

DISCIPLINE

    Discipline through liberty                                      86

    Independence                                                    95

    Abolition of prizes and external forms of punishment           101

    Biological concept of liberty in pedagogy                      104


CHAPTER VI

HOW THE LESSON SHOULD BE GIVEN

    Characteristics of the individual lessons                      107

    Method of observation the fundamental guide                    108

    Difference between the scientific and unscientific methods
    illustrated                                                    109

    First task of educators to stimulate life, leaving it then
    free to develop                                                115


CHAPTER VII

EXERCISES OF PRACTICAL LIFE

    Suggested schedule for the "Children's Houses"                 119

    The child must be prepared for the forms of social life and
    his attention attracted to these forms                         121

    Cleanliness, order, poise, conversation                        122


CHAPTER VIII

REFECTION--THE CHILD'S DIET

    Diet must be adapted to the child's physical nature            125

    Foods and their preparation                                    126

    Drinks                                                         132

    Distribution of meals                                          133


CHAPTER IX

MUSCULAR EDUCATION--GYMNASTICS

    Generally accepted idea of gymnastics is inadequate            137

    The special gymnastics necessary for little children           138

    Other pieces of gymnastic apparatus                            141

    Free gymnastics                                                144

    Educational gymnastics                                         144

    Respiratory gymnastics, and labial, dental, and lingual
    gymnastics                                                     147


CHAPTER X

NATURE IN EDUCATION--AGRICULTURAL LABOUR: CULTURE OF PLANTS
AND ANIMALS

    The savage of the Aveyron                                      149

    Itard's educative drama repented in the education of little
    children                                                       153

    Gardening and horticulture basis of a method for education
    of children                                                    155

    The child initiated into observation of the phenomena of life
    and into foresight by way of auto-education                    156

    Children are initiated into the virtue of patience and into
    confident expectation, and are inspired with a feeling for
    nature                                                         159

    The child follows the natural way of development of the human
    race                                                           160


CHAPTER XI

MANUAL LABOUR--THE POTTER'S ART, AND BUILDING

    Difference between manual labour and manual gymnastics         162

    The School of Educative Art                                    163

    Archaeological, historical, and artistic importance of the
    vase                                                           164

    Manufacture of diminutive bricks and construction of
    diminutive walls and houses                                    165


CHAPTER XII

EDUCATION OF THE SENSES

    Aim of education to develop the energies                       168

    Difference in the reaction between deficient and normal
    children in the presentation of didactic material made up
    of graded stimuli                                              169

    Education of the senses has as its aim the refinement of
    the differential perception of stimuli by means of repeated
    exercises                                                      173

    Three Periods of Seguin                                        177


CHAPTER XIII

EDUCATION OF THE SENSES AND ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE DIDACTIC
MATERIAL: GENERAL SENSIBILITY: THE TACTILE, THERMIC, BARIC
AND STEREOGNOSTIC SENSES

    Education of the tactile, thermic and baric senses             185

    Education of the stereognostic sense                           188

    Education of the senses of taste and smell                     190

    Education of the sense of vision                               191

    Exercises with the three series of cards                       199

    Education of the chromatic sense                               200

    Exercise for the discrimination of sounds                      203

    Musical education                                              206

    Tests for acuteness of hearing                                 209

    A lesson in silence                                            212


CHAPTER XIV

GENERAL NOTES ON THE EDUCATION OF THE SENSES

    Aim in education biological and social                         215

    Education of the senses makes men observers and prepares them
    directly for practical life                                    218


CHAPTER XV

INTELLECTUAL EDUCATION

    Sense exercises a species of auto-education                    224

    Importance of an exact nomenclature, and how to teach it       225

    Spontaneous progress of the child the greatest triumph of
    Scientific Pedagogy                                            228

    Games of the blind                                             231

    Application of the visual sense to the observation of
    environment                                                    232

    Method of using didactic material: dimensions, form,
    design                                                         233

    Free plastic work                                              241

    Geometric analysis of figures                                  243

    Exercises in the chromatic sense                               244


CHAPTER XVI

METHOD FOR THE TEACHING OF READING AND WRITING

    Spontaneous development of graphic language: Seguin and
    Itard                                                          246

    Necessity of a special education that shall fit man for
    objective observation and direct logical thought               252

    Results of objective observation and logical thought           253

    Not necessary to begin teaching writing with vertical
    strokes                                                        257

    Spontaneous drawing of normal children                         258

    Use of Froebel mats in teaching children sewing                260

    Children should be taught how before they are made to execute
    a task                                                         261

    Two diverse forms of movement made in writing                  262

    Experiments with normal children                               267

    Origin of alphabets in present use                             269


CHAPTER XVII

DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD AND DIDACTIC MATERIAL USED

    Exercise tending to develop the muscular mechanism necessary
    in holding and using the instrument in writing                 271

    Didactic material for writing                                  271

    Exercise tending to establish the visual-muscular image of
    the alphabetical signs, and to establish the muscular memory
    of the movements necessary to writing                          275

    Exercises for the composition of words                         281

    Reading, the interpretation of an idea from written signs      296

    Games for the reading of words                                 299

    Games for the reading of phrases                               303

    Point education has reached in the "Children's Houses"         307


CHAPTER XVIII

LANGUAGE OF CHILDHOOD

    Physiological importance of graphic language                   310

    Two periods in the development of language                     312

    Analysis of speech necessary                                   319

    Defects of language due to education                           322


CHAPTER XIX

TEACHING OF NUMERATION: INTRODUCTION TO ARITHMETIC

    Numbers as represented by graphic signs                        328

    Exercises for the memory of numbers                            330

    Addition and subtraction from one to twenty: multiplication
    and division                                                   332

    Lessons on decimals: arithmetical calculations beyond ten      335


CHAPTER XX

SEQUENCE OF EXERCISES

    Sequence and grades in the presentation of material and in
    the exercises                                                  338

    First grade                                                    338

    Second grade                                                   339

    Third grade                                                    342

    Fourth grade                                                   343

    Fifth grade                                                    345


CHAPTER XXI

GENERAL REVIEW OF DISCIPLINE

    Discipline better than in ordinary schools                     346

    First dawning of discipline comes through work                 350

    Orderly action is the true rest for muscles intended by nature
    for action                                                     354

    The exercise that develops life consists in the repetition,
    not in the mere grasp of the idea                              358

    Aim of repetition that the child shall refine his senses
    through the exercise of attention, of comparison, of judgment  360

    Obedience is naturally sacrifice                               363

    Obedience develops will-power and the capacity to perform the
    act it becomes necessary to obey                               367


CHAPTER XXII

CONCLUSIONS AND IMPRESSIONS

    The teacher has become the director of spontaneous work in
    the "Children's Houses"                                        371

    The problems of religious education should be solved by
    positive pedagogy                                              372

    Spiritual influence of the "Children's Houses"                 376




ILLUSTRATIONS


  Dr. Montessori giving a lesson in touching geometrical
  insets                                                _Frontispiece_

                                                           FACING PAGE

  Dr. Montessori in the garden of the school at Via Giusti         144

  Children learning to button and lace. Ribbon and button frames   145

  Children playing a game with tablets of  silk            186

  Girl touching a letter and boy telling objects by weight         187

  Pupils arranging colours in chromatic order                      187

  Didactic apparatus to teach differentiation of objects           190

  Blocks by which children are taught thickness, length and size   191

  Geometric insets to teach form                                   194

  Geometric insets and cabinet                                     195

  Cards used in teaching form and contour                          196

  Frames illustrating lacing; shoe buttoning; buttoning
  of other garments; hooks and eyes                                200

  Tablets with silk, for educating the chromatic sense             201

  Didactic apparatus for training the sense of touch,
  and for teaching writing                                         282

  Children touching letters and making words with cardboard
  script                                                           283

  Montessori children eating dinner                                348

  School at Tarrytown, N. Y.                                       349




INTRODUCTION


An audience already thoroughly interested awaits this translation of a
remarkable book. For years no educational document has been so eagerly
expected by so large a public, and not many have better merited general
anticipation. That this widespread interest exists is due to the
enthusiastic and ingenious articles in _McClure's Magazine_ for May and
December, 1911, and January, 1912; but before the first of these
articles appeared a number of English and American teachers had given
careful study to Dr. Montessori's work, and had found it novel and
important. The astonishing welcome accorded to the first popular
expositions of the Montessori system may mean much or little for its
future in England and America; it is rather the earlier approval of a
few trained teachers and professional students that commends it to the
educational workers who must ultimately decide upon its value, interpret
its technicalities to the country at large, and adapt it to English and
American conditions. To them as well as to the general public this brief
critical Introduction is addressed.

It is wholly within the bounds of safe judgment to call Dr. Montessori's
work remarkable, novel, and important. It is remarkable, if for no other
reason, because it represents the constructive effort of a woman. We
have no other example of an educational system--original at least in its
systematic wholeness and in its practical application--worked out and
inaugurated by the feminine mind and hand. It is remarkable, also,
because it springs from a combination of womanly sympathy and intuition,
broad social outlook, scientific training, intensive and long-continued
study of educational problems, and, to crown all, varied and unusual
experience as a teacher and educational leader. No other woman who has
dealt with Dr. Montessori's problem--the education of young
children--has brought to it personal resources so richly diverse as
hers. These resources, furthermore, she has devoted to her work with an
enthusiasm, an absolute abandon, like that of Pestalozzi and Froebel,
and she presents her convictions with an apostolic ardour which commands
attention. A system which embodies such a capital of human effort could
not be unimportant. Then, too, certain aspects of the system are in
themselves striking and significant: it adapts to the education of
normal children methods and apparatus originally used for deficients; it
is based on a radical conception of liberty for the pupil; it entails a
highly formal training of separate sensory, motor, and mental
capacities; and it leads to rapid, easy, and substantial mastery of the
elements of reading, writing, and arithmetic. All this will be apparent
to the most casual reader of this book.

None of these things, to be sure, is absolutely new in the educational
world. All have been proposed in theory; some have been put more or less
completely into practice. It is not unjust, for instance, to point out
that much of the material used by Dr. Walter S. Fernald, Superintendent
of the Massachusetts Institution for the Feeble-Minded at Waverley, is
almost identical with the Montessori material, and that Dr. Fernald has
long maintained that it could be used to good effect in the education of
normal children. (It may interest American readers to know that Seguin,
on whose work that of Dr. Montessori is based, was once head of the
school at Waverley.) So, too, formal training in various <DW43>-physical
processes has been much urged of late by a good many workers in
experimental pedagogy, especially by Meumann. But before Montessori, no
one had produced a system in which the elements named above were
combined. She conceived it, elaborated it in practice, and established
it in schools. It is indeed the final result, as Dr. Montessori proudly
asserts, of years of experimental effort both on her own part and on the
part of her great predecessors; but the crystallisation of these
experiments in a programme of education for normal children is due to
Dr. Montessori alone. The incidental features which she has frankly
taken over from other modern educators she has chosen because they fit
into the fundamental form of her own scheme, and she has unified them
all in her general conception of method. The system is not original in
the sense in which Froebel's system was original; but as a system it is
the novel product of a single woman's creative genius.

As such, no student of elementary education ought to ignore it. The
system doubtless fails to solve all the problems in the education of
young children; possibly some of the solutions it proposes are partly or
completely mistaken; some are probably unavailable in English and
American schools; but a system of education does not have to attain
perfection in order to merit study, investigation, and experimental use.
Dr. Montessori is too large-minded to claim infallibility, and too
thoroughly scientific in her attitude to object to careful scrutiny of
her scheme and the thorough testing of its results. She expressly states
that it is not yet complete. Practically, it is highly probable that the
system ultimately adopted in our schools will combine elements of the
Montessori programme with elements of the kindergarten programme, both
"liberal" and "conservative." In its actual procedure school work must
always be thus eclectic. An all-or-nothing policy for a single system
inevitably courts defeat; for the public is not interested in systems as
systems, and refuses in the end to believe that any one system contains
every good thing. Nor can we doubt that this attitude is essentially
sound. If we continue, despite the pragmatists, to believe in absolute
principles, we may yet remain skeptical about the logic of their
reduction to practice--at least in any fixed programme of education. We
are not yet justified, at any rate, in adopting one programme to the
exclusion of every other simply because it is based on the most
intelligible or the most inspiring philosophy. The pragmatic test must
also be applied, and rigorously. We must try out several combinations,
watch and record the results, compare them, and proceed cautiously to
new experiments. This procedure is desirable for every stage and grade
of education, but especially for the earliest stage, because there it
has been least attempted and is most difficult. Certainly a system so
radical, so clearly defined, and so well developed as that of Dr.
Montessori offers for the thoroughgoing comparative study of methods in
early education new material of exceptional importance. Without
accepting every detail of the system, without even accepting
unqualifiedly its fundamental principles, one may welcome it, thus, as
of great and immediate value. If early education is worth studying at
all, the educator who devotes his attention to it will find it necessary
to define the differences in principle between the Montessori programme
and other programmes, and to carry out careful tests of the results
obtainable from the various systems and their feasible combinations.

One such combination this Introduction will suggest, and it will discuss
also the possible uses of the Montessori apparatus in the home; but it
may be helpful first to present the outstanding characteristics of the
Montessori system as compared with the modern kindergarten in its two
main forms.

Certain similarities in principle are soon apparent. Dr. Montessori's
views of childhood are in some respects identical with those of Froebel,
although in general decidedly more radical. Both defend the child's
right to be active, to explore his environment and develop his own inner
resources through every form of investigation and creative effort.
Education is to guide activity, not repress it. Environment cannot
create human power, but only give it scope and material, direct it, or
at most but call it forth; and the teacher's task is first to nourish
and assist, to watch, encourage, guide, induce, rather than to
interfere, prescribe, or restrict. To most American teachers and to all
kindergartners this principle has long been familiar; they will but
welcome now a new and eloquent statement of it from a modern viewpoint.
In the practical interpretation of the principle, however, there is
decided divergence between the Montessori school and the kindergarten.
The Montessori "directress" does not teach children in groups, with the
practical requirement, no matter how well "mediated," that each member
of the group shall join in the exercise. The Montessori pupil does about
as he pleases, so long as he does not do any harm.

Montessori and Froebel stand in agreement also on the need for training
of the senses; but Montessori's scheme for this training is at once more
elaborate and more direct than Froebel's. She has devised out of
Seguin's apparatus a comprehensive and scientific scheme for formal
gymnastic of the senses; Froebel originated a series of objects
designed for a much broader and more creative use by the children, but
by no means so closely adapted to the training of sensory
discrimination. The Montessori material carries out the fundamental
principle of Pestalozzi, which he tried in vain to embody in a
successful system of his own: it "develops piece by piece the pupil's
mental capacities" by training separately, through repeated exercises,
his several senses and his ability to distinguish, compare, and handle
typical objects. In the kindergarten system, and particularly in the
"liberal" modifications of it, sense training is incidental to
constructive and imaginative activity in which the children are pursuing
larger ends than the mere arrangement of forms or colours. Even in the
most formal work in kindergarten design the children are "making a
picture," and are encouraged to tell what it looks like--"a star," "a
kite," "a flower."

As to physical education, the two systems agree in much the same way:
both affirm the need for free bodily activity, for rhythmic exercises,
and for the development of muscular control; but whereas the
kindergarten seeks much of all this through group games with an
imaginative or social content, the Montessori scheme places the emphasis
on special exercises designed to give formal training in separate
physical functions.

In another general aspect, however, the agreement between the two
systems, strong in principle, leaves the Montessori system less formal
rather than more formal in practice. The principle in this case consists
of the affirmation of the child's need for social training. In the
conservative kindergarten this training is sought once more, largely in
group games. These are usually imaginative, and sometimes decidedly
symbolic: that is, the children play at being farmers, millers,
shoemakers, mothers and fathers, birds, animals, knights, or soldiers;
they sing songs, go through certain semi-dramatic activities--such as
"opening the pigeon house," "mowing the grass," "showing the good child
to the knights," and the like; and each takes his part in the
representation of some typical social situation. The social training
involved in these games is formal only in the sense that the children
are not engaged, as the Montessori children often are, in a real social
enterprise, such as that of serving dinner, cleaning the room, caring
for animals, building a toy house, or making a garden. It cannot be too
strongly emphasized that even the most conservative kindergarten does
not, on principle, exclude "real" enterprises of this latter sort; but
in a three-hour session it does rather little with them. Liberal
kindergartens do more, particularly in Europe, where the session is
often longer. Nor does the Montessori system wholly exclude imaginative
group games. But Dr. Montessori, despite an evidently profound interest
not only in social training, but also in aesthetic, idealistic, and even
religious development, speaks of "games and foolish stories" in a casual
and derogatory way, which shows that she is as yet unfamiliar with the
American kindergartner's remarkable skill and power in the use of these
resources. (Of course the American kindergartner does not use "foolish"
stories; but stories she does use, and to good effect.) The Montessori
programme involves much direct social experience, both in the general
life of the school and in the manual work done by the pupils; the
kindergarten extends the range of the child's social consciousness
through the imagination. The groupings of the Montessori children are
largely free and unregulated; the groupings of kindergarten children are
more often formal and prescribed.

On one point the Montessori system agrees with the conservative
kindergarten, but not with the liberal: it prepares directly for the
mastery of the school arts. There can be no doubt that Dr. Montessori
has devised a peculiarly successful scheme for teaching children to
write, an effective method for the introduction of reading, and good
material for early number work. Both types of kindergarten increase, to
be sure, the child's general capacity for expression: kindergarten
activity adds to his stock of ideas, awakens and guides his imagination,
increases his vocabulary, and trains him in the effective use of it.
Children in a good kindergarten hear stories and tell them, recount
their own experiences, sing songs, and recite verses, all in a company
of friendly but fairly critical listeners, which does even more to
stimulate and guide expression than does the circle at home. But even
the conservative kindergarten does not teach children to write and to
read. It does teach them a good deal about number; and it may fairly be
questioned whether it does not do more fundamental work in this field
than the Montessori system itself. The Froebelian gifts offer
exceptional opportunity for concrete illustration of the conceptions of
_whole_ and _part_, through the creation of wholes from parts, and the
breaking up of wholes into parts. This aspect of number is at least as
important as the series aspect, which children get in counting and for
which the Montessori "Long Stair" provides such good material. The
Froebelian material may be used very readily for counting, however, and
the Montessori material gives some slight opportunity for uniting and
dividing. So far as preparation for arithmetic is concerned, a
combination of the two bodies of material is both feasible and
desirable. The liberal kindergarten, meanwhile, abandoning the use of
the gifts and occupations for mathematical purposes, makes no attempt
to prepare its pupils directly for the school arts.

Compared with the kindergarten, then, the Montessori system presents
these main points of interest: it carries out far more radically the
principle of unrestricted liberty; its materials are intended for the
direct and formal training of the senses; it includes apparatus designed
to aid in the purely physical development of the children; its social
training is carried out mainly by means of present and actual social
activities; and it affords direct preparation for the school arts. The
kindergarten, on the other hand, involves a certain amount of
group-teaching, in which children are held--not necessarily by the
enforcement of authority, yet by authority, confessedly, when other
means fail--to definite activities; its materials are intended primarily
for creative use by the children and offer opportunity for mathematical
analysis and the teaching of design; and its procedure is rich in
resources for the imagination. One thing should be made entirely clear
and emphatic: in none of these characteristics are the two systems
rigidly antagonistic. Much kindergarten activity is free, and the
principle of prescription is not wholly given over by the "Houses of
Childhood"--witness their _Rules and Regulations_; the kindergarten
involves direct sense training, and the Montessori system admits some of
the Froebel blocks for building and design; there are many purely
muscular activities in the kindergarten, and some of the usual
kindergarten games are used by Montessori; the kindergarten conducts
some gardening, care of animals, construction-work, and domestic
business, and the Montessori system admits a few imaginative social
plays; both systems (but not the liberal form of the kindergarten) work
directly toward the school arts. Since the difference between the two
programmes is one of arrangement, emphasis, and degree, there is no
fundamental reason why a combination especially adapted to English and
American schools cannot be worked out.

The broad contrast between a Montessori school and a kindergarten
appears on actual observation to be this: whereas the Montessori
children spend almost all their time handling _things_, largely
according to their individual inclination and under individual guidance,
kindergarten children are generally engaged in group work and games with
an imaginative background and appeal. A possible principle of adjustment
between the two systems might be stated thus: work with objects designed
for formal sensory, motor, and intellectual training should be done
individually or in purely voluntary groups; imaginative and social
activity should be carried on in regulated groups. This principle is
suggested only as a possible basis for education during the kindergarten
age; for as children grow older they must be taught in classes, and they
naturally learn how to carry out imaginative and social enterprises in
free groups, and the former often alone. Nor should it be supposed that
the principle is suggested as a rule to which there can be no exception.
It is suggested simply as a general working hypothesis, the value of
which must be tested in experience. Although it has long been observed
by kindergartners themselves that group-work with the Froebelian
materials, especially such work as involves geometrical analysis and
formal design, soon tires the children, it has been held that the
kindergartner could safeguard her pupils from loss of interest or real
fatigue by watching carefully for the first signs of weariness and
stopping the work promptly on their appearance. For small groups of the
older children, who can do work of this sort with ease and enjoyment, no
doubt the inevitable restraint of group teaching is a negligible factor,
the fatiguing effects of which any good kindergartner can forestall. But
for younger children a regime of complete freedom would seem to promise
better results--at least so far as work with objects is concerned. In
games, on the other hand, group teaching means very little restraint and
the whole process is less tiring any way. To differentiate in method
between these two kinds of activity may be the best way to keep them
both in an effective educational programme.

To speak of an effective educational programme leads at once, however,
to an important aspect of the Montessori system, quite aside from its
relation to the kindergarten, with which this Introduction must now
deal. This is the social aspect, which finds its explanation in Dr.
Montessori's own story of her first school. In any discussion of the
availability of the Montessori system in English and American
schools--particularly in American public schools and English "Board"
schools--two general conditions under which Dr. Montessori did her early
work in Rome should be borne in mind. She had her pupils almost all day
long, practically controlling their lives in their waking hours; and her
pupils came for the most part from families of the laboring class. We
cannot expect to achieve the results Dr. Montessori has achieved if we
have our pupils under our guidance only two or three hours in the
morning, nor can we expect exactly similar results from children whose
heredity and experience make them at once more sensitive, more active,
and less amenable to suggestion than hers. If we are to make practical
application of the Montessori scheme we must not neglect to consider
the modifications of it which differing social conditions may render
necessary.

The conditions under which Dr. Montessori started her original school in
Rome do not, indeed, lack counterpart in large cities the world over.
When one reads her eloquent "Inaugural Address" it is impossible not to
wish that a "School within the Home" might stand as a centre of hopeful
child life in the midst of every close-built city block. Better, of
course, if there were no hive-like city tenements at all, and if every
family could give to its own children on its own premises enough of
"happy play in grassy places." Better if every mother and father were in
certain ways an expert in child psychology and hygiene. But while so
many unfortunate thousands still live in the hateful cliff-dwellings of
our modern cities, we must welcome Dr. Montessori's large conception of
the social function of her "Houses of Childhood" as a new gospel for the
schools which serve the city poor. No matter what didactic apparatus
such schools may use, they should learn of Dr. Montessori the need of
longer hours, complete care of the children, closer co-operation with
the home, and larger aims. In such schools, too, it is probable that the
two fundamental features of Dr. Montessori's work--her principle of
liberty and her scheme for sense training--will find their completest
and most fruitful application.

It is just these fundamental features, however, which will be most
bitterly attacked whenever the social status of the original _Casa dei
Bambini_ is forgotten. Anthropometric measurements, baths, training in
personal self-care, the serving of meals, gardening, and the care of
animals we may hear sweepingly recommended for all schools, even for
those with a three-hour session and a socially favored class of pupils;
but the need for individual liberty and for the training of the senses
will be denied even in the work of schools where the conditions
correspond closely to those at San Lorenzo. Of course no practical
educator will actually propose bathtubs for all schools, and no doubt
there will be plenty of wise conservatism about transferring to a given
school any function now well discharged by the homes that support it.
The problems raised by the proposal to apply in all schools the
Montessori conception of discipline and the Montessori sense-training
are really more difficult to solve. Is individual liberty a universal
educational principle, or a principle which must be modified in the case
of a school with no such social status as that of the original "House of
Childhood"? Do all children need sense training, or only those of
unfavorable inheritance and home environment? No serious discussion of
the Montessori system can avoid these questions. What is said in answer
to them here is written in the hope that subsequent discussion may be
somewhat influenced to keep in view the really deciding factor in each
case--the actual situation in the school.

There is occasion enough in these questions, to be sure, for
philosophical and scientific argument. The first question involves an
ethical issue, the second a psychological issue, and both may be
followed through to purely metaphysical issues. Dr. Montessori believes
in liberty for the pupil because she thinks of life "as a superb
goddess, ever advancing to new conquests." Submission, loyalty,
self-sacrifice seem to her, apparently, only incidental necessities of
life, not essential elements of its eternal form. There is obvious
opportunity here for profound difference of philosophic theory and
belief. She seems to hold, too, that sense perception forms the sole
basis for the mental and hence for the moral life; that "sense training
will prepare the ordered foundation upon which the child may build up a
clear and strong mentality," including, apparently, his moral ideals;
and that the cultivation of purpose and of the imaginative and creative
capacities of children is far less important than the development of the
power to learn from the environment by means of the senses. These views
seem to agree rather closely with those of Herbart and to some extent
with those of Locke. Certainly they offer material for both
psychological and ethical debate. Possibly, however, Dr. Montessori
would not accept the views here ascribed to her on the evidence of this
book; and in any case these are matters for the philosopher and the
psychologist. A pedagogical issue is never wholly an issue of high
principle.

Can it reasonably be maintained, then, that an actual situation like
that in the first "House of Childhood" at Rome is the only situation in
which the Montessori principle of liberty can justifiably find full
application? Evidently the Roman school is a true Republic of Childhood,
in which nothing need take precedence of the child's claim to pursue an
active purpose of his own. Social restraints are here reduced to a
minimum; the children must, to be sure, subordinate individual caprice
to the demands of the common good, they are not allowed to quarrel or to
interfere with each other, and they have duties to perform at stated
times; but each child is a citizen in a community governed wholly in the
interests of the equally privileged members thereof, his liberty is
rarely interfered with, he is free to carry out his own purposes, and he
has as much influence in the affairs of the commonwealth as the average
member of an adult democracy. This situation is never duplicated in the
home, for a child is not only a member of the family, whose interests
are to be considered with the rest, but literally a subordinate member,
whose interests must often be frankly set aside for those of an adult
member or for those of the household itself. Children must come to
dinner at dinner time, even if continued digging in the sand would be
more to their liking or better for their general development of muscle,
mind, or will. It is possible, of course, to refine on the theory of the
child's membership in the family community and of the right of elders to
command, but practically it remains true that the common conditions of
family life prohibit any such freedom as is exercised in a Montessori
school. In the same way a school of large enrollment that elects to
cover in a given time so much work that individual initiative cannot be
trusted to compass it, is forced to teach certain things at nine o'clock
and others at ten, and to teach in groups; and the individual whose life
is thus cabined and confined must get what he can. For a given school
the obvious question is, Considering the work to be done in the time
allowed, can we give up the safeguards of a fixed programme and group
teaching? The deeper question lies here: Is the work to be done in
itself so important that it is worth while to have the children go
through it under compulsion or on interest induced by the teacher? Or to
put it another way: May not the work be so much less important than the
child's freedom that we had better trust to native curiosity and
cleverly devised materials anyway and run the risk of his losing part of
the work, or even the whole of it?

For schools beyond the primary grade there will be no doubt as to the
answer to this question. There are many ways in which school work may
safely be kept from being the deadening and depressing process it so
often is, but the giving up of all fixed and limited schedules and the
prescriptions of class teaching is not one of them. Even if complete
liberty of individual action were possible in schools of higher grade,
it is not certain that it would be desirable: for we must learn to take
up many of our purposes in life under social imperative. But with young
children the question becomes more difficult. What work do we wish to
make sure that each child does? If our schools can keep but half a day,
is there time enough for every child to cover this work without group
teaching at stated times? Is the prescription and restraint involved in
such group teaching really enough to do the children any harm or to make
our teaching less effective? Can we not give up prescription altogether
for parts of the work and minimise it for others? The general question
of individual liberty is thus reduced to a series of practical problems
of adjustment. It is no longer a question of total liberty or no liberty
at all, but a question of the practical mediation of these extremes.
When we consider, furthermore, that the teacher's skill and the
attractiveness of her personality, the alluring power of the didactic
apparatus and the ease with which it enables children to learn, to say
nothing of a cheerful and pleasant room and the absence of set desks and
seats, may all work together to prevent scheduled teaching in groups
from becoming in the least an occasion for restraint, it is plain that
in any given school there may be ample justification for abating the
rigour of Dr. Montessori's principle of freedom. Every school must work
out its own solution of the problem in the face of its particular
conditions.

The adoption of sense-training would seem to be much less a matter for
variable decision. Some children may need less than others, but for all
children between the ages of three and five the Montessori material will
prove fascinating as well as profitable. A good deal of modern
educational theory has been based on the belief that children are
interested only in what has social value, social content, or "real use";
yet a day with any normal child will give ample evidence of the delight
that children take in purely formal exercises. The sheer fascination of
tucking cards under the edge of a rug will keep a baby happy until any
ordinary supply of cards is exhausted; and the wholly sensory appeal of
throwing stones into the water gives satisfaction enough to absorb for a
long time the attention of older children--to say nothing of grown-ups.
The Montessori apparatus satisfies sense hunger when it is keen for new
material, and it has besides a puzzle-interest which children eagerly
respond to. Dr. Montessori subordinates the value of the concrete mental
content her material supplies to its value in rendering the senses more
acute; yet it is by no means certain that this content--purely formal as
it is--does not also give the material much of its importance. Indeed,
the refinement of sensory discrimination may not in itself be
particularly valuable. What Professor G. M. Whipple says on this point
in his _Manual of Menial and Physical Tests_ (p. 130) has much weight:

    The use of sensory tests in correlation work is particularly
    interesting. In general, some writers are convinced that keen
    discrimination is a prerequisite to keen intelligence, while
    others are equally convinced that intelligence is essentially
    conditioned by "higher" processes, and only remotely by
    sensory capacity--barring, of course, such diminution of
    capacity as to interfere seriously with the experiencing of
    sensations, as in partial deafness or partial loss of vision.
    While it is scarcely the place here to discuss the
    evolutionary significance of discriminative sensitivity, it
    may be pointed out that the normal capacity is many times in
    excess of the actual demands of life, and that it is
    consequently difficult to understand why nature has been so
    prolific and generous; to understand, in other words, what
    is the sanction for the seemingly hypertrophied
    discriminative capacity of the human sense organs. The usual
    "teleological explanations" of our sensory life fail to
    account for this discrepancy. Again, the very fact of the
    existence of this surplus capacity seems to negative at the
    outset the notion that sensory capacity can be a conditioning
    factor in intelligence--with the qualification already noted.

It is quite possible that the real pedagogical value of the Montessori
apparatus is due to the fact that it keeps children happily engaged in
the exercise of their senses and their fingers when they crave such
exercise most and to the further fact that it teaches them without the
least strain a good deal about forms and materials. These values are not
likely to be much affected by differing school conditions.

In the use of the material for sense-training, English and American
teachers may find profit in two general warnings. First, it should not
be supposed that sense training alone will accomplish all that Dr.
Montessori accomplishes through the whole range of her school
activities. To fill up most of a morning with sense-training is to give
it (except perhaps in the case of the youngest pupils) undue importance.
It is not even certain that the general use of the senses will be much
affected by it, to say nothing of the loss of opportunity for larger
physical and social activity. Second, the isolation of the senses should
be used with some care. To shut off sight is to take one step toward
sleep, and the requirement that a child concentrate his attention, in
this situation, on the sense perceptions he gets by other means than
vision must not be maintained too long. No small strain is involved in
mental action without the usual means of information and control.

The proposal, mentioned above, of a feasible combination of the
Montessori system and the kindergarten may now be set forth. If it is
put very briefly and without defense or prophecy, it is because it is
made without dogmatism, simply in the hope that it will prove suggestive
to some open-minded teacher who is willing to try out any scheme that
promises well for her pupils. The conditions supposed are those of the
ordinary American public-school kindergarten, with a two-year programme
beginning with children three and a half or four years old, a
kindergarten with not too many pupils, with a competent kindergartner
and assistant kindergartner, and with some help from training-school
students.

The first proposal is for the use of the Montessori material during the
better part of the first year instead of the regular Froebelian
material. To the use of the Montessori devices--including the gymnastic
apparatus--some of the time now devoted to pictures and stories should
also be applied. It is not suggested that no Froebelian material should
be used, but that the two systems be woven into each other, with a
gradual transition from the free, individual use of the Montessori
objects to the same sort of use of the large sizes of the Froebel gifts,
especially the second, third, and fourth. When the children seem to be
ready for it, a certain amount of more formal work with the gifts should
be begun. In the second year the Froebelian gift work should
predominate, without absolute exclusion of the Montessori exercises. In
the latter part of the second year the Montessori exercises preparatory
to writing should be introduced. Throughout the second year the full
time for stories and picture work should be given to them, and in both
years the morning circle and the games should be carried on as usual.
The luncheon period should of course remain the same. One part of Dr.
Montessori's programme the kindergartner and her assistant should use
every effort to incorporate in their work--the valuable training in
self-help and independent action afforded in the care of the materials
and equipment by the children themselves. This need not be confined to
the Montessori apparatus. Children who have been trained to take out,
use, and put away the Montessori objects until they are ready for the
far richer variety of material in the Froebelian system, should be able
to care for it also. Of course if there are children who can return in
the afternoon, it would be very interesting to attempt the gardening,
which both Froebel and Montessori recommend, and the Montessori
vase-work.

For the possible scorn of those to whom all compromise is distasteful,
the author of this Introduction seeks but one compensation--that any
kindergartner who may happen to adopt his suggestion will let him study
the results.

As to the use of the Montessori system in the home, one or two remarks
must suffice. In the first place, parents should not expect that the
mere presence of the material in the nursery will be enough to work an
educational miracle. A Montessori directress does no common "teaching,"
but she is called upon for very skillful and very tiring effort. She
must watch, assist, inspire, suggest, guide, explain, correct, inhibit.
She is supposed, in addition, to contribute by her work to the
upbuilding of a new science of pedagogy; but her educational
efforts--and education is not an investigative and experimental effort,
but a practical and constructive one--are enough to exhaust all her
time, strength, and ingenuity. It will do no harm--except perhaps to the
material itself--to have the Montessori material at hand in the home,
but it must be used under proper guidance if it is to be educationally
effective. And besides, it must not be forgotten that the material is by
no means the most important feature of the Montessori programme. The
best use of the Montessori system in the home will come through the
reading of this book. If parents shall learn from Dr. Montessori
something of the value of child life, of its need for activity, of its
characteristic modes of expression, and of its possibilities, and shall
apply this knowledge wisely, the work of the great Italian educator will
be successful enough.

This Introduction cannot close without some discussion, however limited,
of the important problems suggested by the Montessori method of teaching
children to write and to read. We have in American schools admirable
methods for the teaching of reading; by the Aldine method, for instance,
children of fair ability read without difficulty ten or more readers in
the first school year, and advance rapidly toward independent power. Our
instruction in writing, however, has never been particularly noteworthy.
We have been trying recently to teach children to write a flowing hand
by the "arm movement," without much formation of separate letters by the
fingers, and our results seem to prove that the effort with children
before the age of ten is not worth while. Sensible school officers are
content to let children in the first four grades write largely by
drawing the letters, and there has been, a fairly general conviction
that writing is not in any case especially important before the age of
eight or nine. In view of Dr. Montessori's success in teaching children
of four and five to write with ease and skill, must we not revise our
estimate of the value of writing and our procedure in teaching it? What
changes may we profitably introduce in our teaching of reading?

Here again our theory and our practice have suffered from the headstrong
advocacy of general principles. Because by clumsy methods children used
to be kept at the task of learning the school arts to the undoubted
detriment of their minds and bodies, certain writers have advocated the
total exclusion of reading and writing from the early grades. Many
parents refuse to send their children to school until they are eight,
preferring to let them "run wild." This attitude is well justified by
school conditions in some places; but where the schools are good, it
ignores not only the obvious advantages of school life quite aside from
instruction in written language, but also the almost complete absence of
strain afforded by modern methods. Now that the Montessori system adds a
new and promising method to our resources, it is the more unreasonable:
for as a fact normal children are eager to read and write at six, and
have plenty of use for these accomplishments.

This does not mean, however, that reading and writing are so important
for young children that they should be unduly emphasised. If we can
teach them without strain, let us do so, and the more effectively the
better; but let us remember, as Dr. Montessori does, that reading and
writing should form but a subordinate part of the experience of a child
and should minister in general to his other needs. With the best of
methods the value of reading and writing before six is questionable. Our
conscious life is bookish enough as it is, and it would seem on general
grounds a safer policy to defer written language until the age of normal
interest in it, and even then not to devote to it more time than an easy
and gradual mastery demands.

Of the technical advantages of the Montessori scheme for writing there
can be little doubt. The child gains ready control over his pencil
through exercises which have their own simple but absorbing interest;
and if he does not learn to write with an "arm movement," we may be
quite content with his ability to draw a legible and handsome script.
Then he learns the letters--their forms, their names, and how to make
them--through exercises which have the very important technical
characteristic of involving a _thorough sensory analysis_ of the
material to be mastered. Meumann has taught us of late the great value
in all memory work of complete impression through prolonged and
intensive analytical study. In the teaching of spelling, for instance,
it is comparatively useless to devise schemes for remembering unless the
original impressions are made strong and elaborate; and it is only by
careful, varied, and detailed sense impression that such material as the
alphabet can be thus impressed. So effective is the Montessori scheme
for impressing the letters--especially because of its novel use of the
sense of touch--that the children learn how to make the whole alphabet
before the abstract and formal character of the material leads to any
diminution of interest or enthusiasm. Their initial curiosity over the
characters they see their elders use is enough to carry them through.

In Italian the next step is easy. The letters once learned, it is a
simple matter to combine them into words, for Italian spelling is so
nearly phonetic that it presents very little difficulty to any one who
knows how to pronounce. It is at just this point that the teaching of
English reading by the Montessori method will find its greatest
obstacle. Indeed, it is the unphonetic character of English spelling
that has largely influenced us to give up the alphabet method of
teaching children to read. Other reasons, to be sure, have also induced
us to teach by the word and the sentence method; but this one has been
and will continue to be the deciding factor. We have found it more
effective to teach children whole words, sentences, or rhymes by sight,
adding to sense impressions the interest aroused by a wide range of
associations, and then analysing the words thus acquired into their
phonetic elements to give the children independent power in the
acquisition of new words. Our marked success with this method makes it
by no means certain that it is "in the characteristic process of natural
development" for children to build up written words from their
elements--sounds and syllables. It would seem, on the contrary, as James
concluded, that the mind works quite as naturally in the opposite
direction--grasping wholes first, especially such as have a practical
interest, and then working down to their formal elements. In the
teaching of spelling, of course, the wholes (words) are already known at
sight--that is, the pupil recognises them easily in reading--and the
process aims at impressing upon the child's mind the exact order of
their constituent elements. It is because reading and spelling are in
English such completely separate processes that we can teach a child to
read admirably without making him a "good speller" and are forced to
bring him to the latter glorious state by new endeavours. We gain by
this separation both in reading and in spelling, as experience and
comparative tests--popular superstition to the contrary
notwithstanding--have conclusively proved. The mastery of the alphabet
by the Montessori method will be of great assistance in teaching our
children to write, but of only incidental assistance in teaching them to
read and to spell.

Once more, then, this Introduction attempts to suggest a compromise. In
the school arts the programme used to such good effect in the Italian
schools and the programme which has been so well worked out in English
and American schools may be profitably combined. We can learn much about
writing and reading from Dr. Montessori--especially from the freedom her
children have in the process of learning to write and in the use of
their newly acquired power, as well as from her device for teaching them
to read connected prose. We can use her materials for sense training and
lead as she does to easy mastery of the alphabetic symbols. Our own
schemes for teaching reading we can retain, and doubtless the phonetic
analysis they involve we shall find easier and more effective because of
our adoption of the Montessori scheme for teaching the letters. The
exact adjustment of the two methods is of course a task for teachers in
practice and for educational leaders.

To all educators this book should prove most interesting. Not many of
them will expect that the Montessori method will regenerate humanity.
Not many will wish to see it--or any method--produce a generation of
prodigies such as those who have been heralded recently in America. Not
many will approve the very early acquisition by children of the arts of
reading and writing. But all who are fair-minded will admit the genius
that shines from the pages which follow, and the remarkable
suggestiveness of Dr. Montessori's labors. It is the task of the
professional student of education to-day to submit all systems to
careful comparative study, and since Dr. Montessori's inventive power
has sought its tests in practical experience rather than in comparative
investigation, this duller task remains to be done. But however he may
scrutinise the results of her work, the educator who reads of it here
will honour in the Dottoressa Maria Montessori the enthusiasm, the
patience, and the constructive insight of the scientist and the friend
of humanity.

                                                      HENRY W. HOLMES.
  HARVARD UNIVERSITY,
  February 22, 1912.




THE MONTESSORI METHOD




CHAPTER I

A CRITICAL CONSIDERATION OF THE NEW PEDAGOGY IN ITS RELATION TO MODERN
SCIENCE


It is not my intention to present a treatise on Scientific Pedagogy. The
modest design of these incomplete notes is to give the results of an
experiment that apparently opens the way for putting into practice those
new principles of science which in these last years are tending to
revolutionise the work of education.

Much has been said in the past decade concerning the tendency of
pedagogy, following in the footsteps of medicine, to pass beyond the
purely speculative stage and base its conclusions on the positive
results of experimentation. Physiological or experimental psychology
which, from Weber and Fechner to Wundt, has become organised into a new
science, seems destined to furnish to the new pedagogy that fundamental
preparation which the old-time metaphysical psychology furnished to
philosophical pedagogy. Morphological anthropology applied to the
physical study of children, is also a strong element in the growth of
the new pedagogy.

But in spite of all these tendencies, Scientific Pedagogy has never yet
been definitely constructed nor defined. It is something vague of which
we speak, but which does not, in reality, exist. We might say that it
has been, up to the present time, the mere intuition or suggestion of a
science which, by the aid of the positive and experimental sciences that
have renewed the thought of the nineteenth century, must emerge from the
mist and clouds that have surrounded it. For man, who has formed a new
world through scientific progress, must himself be prepared and
developed through a new pedagogy. But I will not attempt to speak of
this more fully here.

Several years ago, a well-known physician established in Italy a _School
of Scientific Pedagogy_, the object of which was to prepare teachers to
follow the new movement which had begun to be felt in the pedagogical
world. This school had, for two or three years, a great success, so
great, indeed, that teachers from all over Italy flocked to it, and it
was endowed by the City of Milan with a splendid equipment of scientific
material. Indeed, its beginnings were most propitious, and liberal help
was afforded it in the hope that it might be possible to establish,
through the experiments carried on there, "the science of forming man."

The enthusiasm which welcomed this school was, in a large measure, due
to the warm support given it by the distinguished anthropologist,
Giuseppe Sergi, who for more than thirty years had earnestly laboured to
spread among the teachers of Italy the principles of a new civilisation
based upon education. "To-day in the social world," said Sergi, "an
imperative need makes itself felt--the reconstruction of educational
methods; and he who fights for this cause, fights for human
regeneration." In his pedagogical writings collected in a volume under
the title of "_Educazione ed Istruzione_" (Pensieri),[1] he gives a
resume of the lectures in which he encouraged this new movement, and
says that he believes the way to this desired regeneration lies in a
methodical study of the one to be educated, carried on under the
guidance of pedagogical anthropology and of experimental psychology.

  [1] Trevisini, 1892.

"For several years I have done battle for an idea concerning the
instruction and education of man, which appeared the more just and
useful the more deeply I thought upon it. My idea was that in order to
establish natural, rational methods, it was essential that we make
numerous, exact, and rational observations of man as an individual,
principally during infancy, which is the age at which the foundations of
education and culture must be laid.

"To measure the head, the height, etc., does not indeed mean that we are
establishing a system of pedagogy, but it indicates the road which we
may follow to arrive at such a system, since if we are to educate an
individual, we must have a definite and direct knowledge of him."

The authority of Sergi was enough to convince many that, given such a
knowledge of the individual, the art of educating him would develop
naturally. This, as often happens, led to a confusion of ideas among his
followers, arising now from a too literal interpretation, now from an
exaggeration, of the master's ideas. The chief trouble lay in confusing
the experimental study of the pupil, with his education. And since the
one was the road leading to the other, which should have grown from it
naturally and rationally, they straightway gave the name of Scientific
Pedagogy to what was in truth pedagogical anthropology. These new
converts carried as their banner, the "Biographical Chart," believing
that once this ensign was firmly planted upon the battle-field of the
school, the victory would be won.

The so-called School of Scientific Pedagogy, therefore, instructed the
teachers in the taking of anthropometric measurements, in the use of
esthesiometric instruments, in the gathering of Psychological Data--and
the army of new scientific teachers was formed.

It should be said that in this movement Italy showed herself to be
abreast of the times. In France, in England, and especially in America,
experiments have been made in the elementary schools, based upon a study
of anthropology and psychological pedagogy, in the hope of finding in
anthropometry and psychometry, the regeneration of the school. In these
attempts it has rarely been the _teachers_ who have carried on the
research; the experiments have been, in most cases, in the hands of
physicians who have taken more interest in their especial science than
in education. They have usually sought to get from their experiments
some contribution to psychology, or anthropology, rather than to attempt
to organise their work and their results toward the formation of the
long-sought Scientific Pedagogy. To sum up the situation briefly,
anthropology and psychology have never devoted themselves to the
question of educating children in the schools, nor have the
scientifically trained teachers ever measured up to the standards of
genuine scientists.

The truth is that the practical progress of the school demands a genuine
_fusion_ of these modern tendencies, in practice and thought; such a
fusion as shall bring scientists directly into the important field of
the school and at the same time raise teachers from the inferior
intellectual level to which they are limited to-day. Toward this
eminently practical ideal the University School of Pedagogy, founded in
Italy by Credaro, is definitely working. It is the intention of this
school to raise Pedagogy from the inferior position it has occupied as a
secondary branch of philosophy, to the dignity of a definite science,
which shall, as does Medicine, cover a broad and varied field of
comparative study.

And among the branches affiliated with it will most certainly be found
Pedagogical Hygiene, Pedagogical Anthropology, and Experimental
Psychology.

Truly, Italy, the country of Lombroso, of De-Giovanni, and of Sergi, may
claim the honour of being pre-eminent in the organisation of such a
movement. In fact, these three scientists may be called the founders of
the new tendency in Anthropology: the first leading the way in criminal
anthropology, the second in medical anthropology, and the third in
pedagogical anthropology. For the good fortune of science, all three of
them have been the recognised leaders of their special lines of thought,
and have been so prominent in the scientific world that they have not
only made courageous and valuable disciples, but have also prepared the
minds of the masses to receive the scientific regeneration which they
have encouraged. (For reference, see my treatise "Pedagogical
Anthropology.")[2]

  [2] Montessori: "L'Antropologia Pedagogica." Vallardi.

Surely all this is something of which our country may be justly proud.


To-day, however, those things which occupy us in the field of education
are the interests of humanity at large, and of civilisation, and before
such great forces we can recognise only one country--the entire world.
And in a cause of such great importance, all those who have given any
contribution, even though it be only an attempt not crowned with
success, are worthy of the respect of humanity throughout the civilised
world. So, in Italy, the schools of Scientific Pedagogy and the
Anthropological Laboratories, which have sprung up in the various cities
through the efforts of elementary teachers and scholarly inspectors, and
which have been abandoned almost before they became definitely
organised, have nevertheless a great value by reason of the faith which
inspired them, and because of the doors they have opened to thinking
people.

It is needless to say that such attempts were premature and sprang from
too slight a comprehension of new sciences still in the process of
development. Every great cause is born from repeated failures and from
imperfect achievements. When St. Francis of Assisi saw his Lord in a
vision, and received from the Divine lips the command--"Francis, rebuild
my Church!"--he believed that the Master spoke of the little church
within which he knelt at that moment. And he immediately set about the
task, carrying upon his shoulders the stones with which he meant to
rebuild the fallen walls. It was not until later that he became aware of
the fact that his mission was to renew the Catholic Church through the
spirit of poverty. But the St. Francis who so ingenuously carried the
stones, and the great reformer who so miraculously led the people to a
triumph of the spirit, are one and the same person in different stages
of development. So we, who work toward one great end, are members of one
and the same body; and those who come after us will reach the goal only
because there were those who believed and laboured before them. And,
like St. Francis, we have believed that by carrying the hard and barren
stones of the experimental laboratory to the old and crumbling walls of
the school, we might rebuild it. We have looked upon the aids offered by
the materialistic and mechanical sciences with the same hopefulness with
which St. Francis looked upon the squares of granite, which he must
carry upon his shoulders.

Thus we have been drawn into a false and narrow way, from which we must
free ourselves, if we are to establish true and living methods for the
training of future generations.


To prepare teachers in the method of the experimental sciences is not an
easy matter. When we shall have instructed them in anthropometry and
psychometry in the most minute manner possible, we shall have only
created machines, whose usefulness will be most doubtful. Indeed, if it
is after this fashion that we are to initiate our teachers into
experiment, we shall remain forever in the field of theory. The teachers
of the old school, prepared according to the principles of metaphysical
philosophy, understood the ideas of certain men regarded as authorities,
and moved the muscles of speech in talking of them, and the muscles of
the eye in reading their theories. Our scientific teachers, instead, are
familiar with certain instruments and know how to move the muscles of
the hand and arm in order to use these instruments; besides this, they
have an intellectual preparation which consists of a series of typical
tests, which they have, in a barren and mechanical way, learned how to
apply.

The difference is not substantial, for profound differences cannot exist
in exterior technique alone, but lie rather within the inner man. Not
with all our initiation into scientific experiment have we prepared _new
masters_, for, after all, we have left them standing without the door
of real experimental science; we have not admitted them to the noblest
and most profound phase of such study,--to that experience which makes
real scientists.

And, indeed, what is a scientist? Not, certainly, he who knows how to
manipulate all the instruments in the physical laboratory, or who in the
laboratory of the chemist handles the various reactives with deftness
and security, or who in biology knows how to make ready the specimens
for the microscope. Indeed, it is often the case that an assistant has a
greater dexterity in experimental technique than the master scientist
himself. We give the name scientist to the type of man who has felt
experiment to be a means guiding him to search out the deep truth of
life, to lift a veil from its fascinating secrets, and who, in this
pursuit, has felt arising within him a love for the mysteries of nature,
so passionate as to annihilate the thought of himself. The scientist is
not the clever manipulator of instruments, he is the worshipper of
nature and he bears the external symbols of his passion as does the
follower of some religious order. To this body of real scientists belong
those who, forgetting, like the Trappists of the Middle Ages, the world
about them, live only in the laboratory, careless often in matters of
food and dress because they no longer think of themselves; those who,
through years of unwearied use of the microscope, become blind; those
who in their scientific ardour inoculate themselves with tuberculosis
germs; those who handle the excrement of cholera patients in their
eagerness to learn the vehicle through which the diseases are
transmitted; and those who, knowing that a certain chemical preparation
may be an explosive, still persist in testing their theories at the risk
of their lives. This is the spirit of the men of science, to whom
nature freely reveals her secrets, crowning their labours with the glory
of discovery.

There exists, then, the "spirit" of the scientist, a thing far above his
mere "mechanical skill," and the scientist is at the height of his
achievement when the spirit has triumphed over the mechanism. When he
has reached this point, science will receive from him not only new
revelations of nature, but philosophic syntheses of pure thought.

It is my belief that the thing which we should cultivate in our teachers
is more the _spirit_ than the mechanical skill of the scientist; that
is, the _direction_ of the _preparation_ should be toward the spirit
rather than toward the mechanism. For example, when we considered the
scientific preparation of teachers to be simply the acquiring of the
technique of science, we did not attempt to make these elementary
teachers perfect anthropologists, expert experimental psychologists, or
masters of infant hygiene; we wished only to _direct them_ toward the
field of experimental science, teaching them to manage the various
instruments with a certain degree of skill. So now, we wish to _direct_
the teacher, trying to awaken in him, in connection with his own
particular field, the school, that scientific _spirit_ which opens the
door for him to broader and bigger possibilities. In other words, we
wish to awaken in the mind and heart of the educator an _interest in
natural phenomena_ to such an extent that, loving nature, he shall
understand the anxious and expectant attitude of one who has prepared an
experiment and who awaits a revelation from it.[3]

  [3] See in my treatise on Pedagogical Anthropology the chapter
      on "The Method Used In Experimental Sciences."

The instruments are like the alphabet, and we must know how to manage
them if we are to read nature; but as the book, which contains the
revelation of the greatest thoughts of an author, uses in the alphabet
the means of composing the external symbols or words, so nature, through
the mechanism of the experiment, gives us an infinite series of
revelations, unfolding for us her secrets.

Now one who has learned to spell mechanically all the words in his
spelling-book, would be able to read in the same mechanical way the
words in one of Shakespeare's plays, provided the print were
sufficiently clear. He who is initiated solely into the making of the
bare experiment, is like one who spells out the literal sense of the
words in the spelling-book; it is on such a level that we leave the
teachers if we limit their preparation to technique alone.

We must, instead, make of them worshippers and interpreters of the
spirit of nature. They must be like him who, having learned to spell,
finds himself, one day, able to read behind the written symbols the
_thought_ of Shakespeare, or Goethe, or Dante. As may be seen, the
difference is great, and the road long. Our first error was, however, a
natural one. The child who has mastered the spelling-book gives the
impression of knowing how to read. Indeed, he does read the signs over
the shop doors, the names of newspapers, and every word that comes under
his eyes. It would be very natural if, entering a library, this child
should be deluded into thinking that he knew how to read the sense of
all the books he saw there. But attempting to do this, he would soon
feel that "to know how to read mechanically" is nothing, and that he
needs to go back to school. So it is with the teachers whom we have
thought to prepare for scientific pedagogy by teaching them
anthropometry and psychometry.


But let us put aside the difficulty of preparing scientific masters in
the accepted sense of the word. We will not even attempt to outline a
programme of such preparation, since this would lead us into a
discussion which has no place here. Let us suppose, instead, that we
have already prepared teachers through long and patient exercises for
the _observation_ of _nature_, and that we have led them, for example,
to the point attained by those students of natural sciences who rise at
night and go into the woods and fields that they may surprise the
awakening and the early activities of some family of insects in which
they are interested. Here we have the scientist who, though he may be
sleepy and tired with walking, is full of watchfulness, who is not aware
that he is muddy or dusty, that the mist wets him, or the sun burns him;
but is intent only upon not revealing in the least degree his presence,
in order that the insects may, hour after hour, carry on peacefully
those natural functions which he wishes to observe. Let us suppose these
teachers to have reached the standpoint of the scientist who, half
blind, still watches through his microscope the spontaneous movements of
some particular infusory animalcule. These creatures seem to this
scientific watcher, in their manner of avoiding each other and in their
way of selecting their food, to possess a dim intelligence. He then
disturbs this sluggish life by an electric stimulus, observing how some
group themselves about the positive pole, and others about the negative.
Experimenting further, with a luminous stimulus, he notices how some run
toward the light, while others fly from it. He investigates these and
like phenomena; having always in mind this question: whether the fleeing
from or running to the stimulus be of the same character as the
avoidance of one another or the selection of food--that is, whether such
differences are the result of choice and are due to that dim
consciousness, rather than to physical attraction or repulsion similar
to that of the magnet. And let us suppose that this scientist, finding
it to be four o'clock in the afternoon, and that he has not yet lunched,
is conscious, with a feeling of pleasure, of the fact that he has been
at work in his laboratory instead of in his own home, where they would
have called him hours ago, interrupting his interesting observation, in
order that he might eat.

Let us imagine, I say, that the teacher has arrived, independently of
his scientific training, at such an attitude of interest in the
observation of natural phenomena. Very well, but such a preparation is
not enough. The master, indeed, is destined in his particular mission
not to the observation of insects or of bacteria, but of man. He is not
to make a study of man in the manifestations of his daily physical
habits as one studies some family of insects, following their movements
from the hour of _their morning awakening_. _The master is to study man
in_ the awakening of his intellectual life.

The interest in humanity to which we wish to educate the teacher must be
characterised by the intimate relationship between the observer and the
individual to be observed; a relationship which does not exist between
the student of zoology or botany and that form of nature which he
studies. Man cannot love the insect or the chemical reaction which he
studies, without sacrificing a part of himself. This self-sacrifice
seems to one who looks at it from the standpoint of the world, a
veritable renunciation of life itself, almost a martyrdom.

But the love of man for man in a far more tender thing, and so simple
that it is universal. To love in this way is not the privilege of any
especially prepared intellectual class, but lies within the reach of all
men.

To give an idea of this second form of preparation, that of the spirit,
let us try to enter into the minds and hearts of those first followers
of Christ Jesus as they heard Him speak of a Kingdom not of this world,
greater far than any earthly kingdom, no matter how royally conceived.
In their simplicity they asked of Him, "Master, tell us who shall be
greatest in the Kingdom of Heaven!" To which Christ, caressing the head
of a little child who, with reverent, wondering eyes, looked into His
face, replied, "Whosoever shall become as one of these little ones, he
shall be greatest in the Kingdom of Heaven." Now let us picture among
those to whom these words were spoken, an ardent, worshipping soul, who
takes them into his heart. With a mixture of respect and love, of sacred
curiosity and of a desire to achieve this spiritual greatness, he sets
himself to observe every manifestation of this little child. Even such
an observer placed in a classroom filled with little children will not
be the new educator whom we wish to form. But let us seek to implant in
the soul the self-sacrificing spirit of the scientist with the reverent
love of the disciple of Christ, and we shall have prepared the _spirit_
of the teacher. From the child itself he will learn how to perfect
himself as an educator.


Let us consider the attitude of the teacher in the light of another
example. Picture to yourself one of our botanists or zoologists
experienced in the technique of observation and experimentation; one who
has travelled in order to study "certain fungi" in their native
environment. This scientist has made his observations in open country
and, then, by the aid of his microscope and of all his laboratory
appliances, has carried on the later research work in the most minute
way possible. He is, in fact, a scientist who understands what it is to
study nature, and who is conversant with all the means which modern
experimental science offers for this study.


Now let us imagine such a man appointed, by reason of the original work
he has done, to a chair of science in some university, with the task
before him of doing further original research work with hymenoptera. Let
us suppose that, arrived at his post, he is shown a glass-covered case
containing a number of beautiful butterflies, mounted by means of pins,
their outspread wings motionless. The student will say that this is some
child's play, not material for scientific study, that these specimens in
the box are more fitly a part of the game which the little boys play,
chasing butterflies and catching them in a net. With such material as
this the experimental scientist can do nothing.

The situation would be very much the same if we should place a teacher
who, according to our conception of the term, is scientifically
prepared, in one of the public schools where the children are repressed
in the spontaneous expression of their personality till they are almost
like dead beings. In such a school the children, like butterflies
mounted on pins, are fastened each to his place, the desk, spreading the
useless wings of barren and meaningless knowledge which they have
acquired.

It is not enough, then, to prepare in our Masters the scientific spirit.
We must also make ready the _school_ for their observation. The school
must permit the _free_, _natural manifestations_ of the _child_ if in
the school scientific pedagogy is to be born. This is the essential
reform.

No one may affirm that such a principle already exists in pedagogy and
in the school. It is true that some pedagogues, led by Rousseau, have
given voice to impracticable principles and vague aspirations for the
liberty of the child, but the true concept of liberty is practically
unknown to educators. They often have the same concept of liberty which
animates a people in the hour of rebellion from slavery, or perhaps, the
conception of _social liberty_, which although it is a more elevated
idea is still invariably restricted. "Social liberty" signifies always
one more round of Jacob's ladder. In other words it signifies a partial
liberation, the liberation of a country, of a class, or of thought.

That concept of liberty which must inspire pedagogy is, instead,
universal. The biological sciences of the nineteenth century have shown
it to us when they have offered us the means for studying life. If,
therefore, the old-time pedagogy foresaw or vaguely expressed the
principle of studying the pupil before educating him, and of leaving him
free in his spontaneous manifestations, such an intuition, indefinite
and barely expressed, was made possible of practical attainment only
after the contribution of the experimental sciences during the last
century. This is not a case for sophistry or discussion, it is enough
that we state our point. He who would say that the principle of liberty
informs the pedagogy of to-day, would make us smile as at a child who,
before the box of mounted butterflies, should insist that they were
alive and could fly. The principle of slavery still pervades pedagogy,
and, therefore, the same principle pervades the school. I need only give
one proof--the stationary desks and chairs. Here we have, for example, a
striking evidence of the errors of the early materialistic scientific
pedagogy which, with mistaken zeal and energy, carried the barren stones
of science to the rebuilding of the crumbling walls of the school. The
schools were at first furnished with the long, narrow benches upon which
the children were crowded together. Then came science and perfected the
bench. In this work much attention was paid to the recent contributions
of anthropology. The age of the child and the length of his limbs were
considered in placing the seat at the right height. The distance between
the seat and the desk was calculated with infinite care, in order that
the child's back should not become deformed, and, finally, the seats
were separated and the width so closely calculated that the child could
barely seat himself upon it, while to stretch himself by making any
lateral movements was impossible. This was done in order that he might
be separated from his neighbour. These desks are constructed in such a
way as to render the child visible in all his immobility. One of the
ends sought through this separation is the prevention of immoral acts in
the schoolroom. What shall we say of such prudence in a state of society
where it would be considered scandalous to give voice to principles of
sex morality in education, for fear we might thus contaminate innocence?
And, yet, here we have science lending itself to this hypocrisy,
fabricating machines! Not only this; obliging science goes farther
still, perfecting the benches in such a way as to permit to the greatest
possible extent the immobility of the child, or, if you wish, to repress
every movement of the child.

It is all so arranged that, when the child is well-fitted into his
place, the desk and chair themselves force him to assume the position
considered to be hygienically comfortable. The seat, the foot-rest, the
desks are arranged in such a way that the child can never stand at his
work. He is allotted only sufficient space for sitting in an erect
position. It is in such ways that schoolroom desks and benches have
advanced toward perfection. Every cult of the so-called scientific
pedagogy has designed a model scientific desk. Not a few nations have
become proud of their "national desk,"--and in the struggle of
competition these various machines have been patented.

Undoubtedly there is much that is scientific underlying the construction
of these benches. Anthropology has been drawn upon in the measuring of
the body and the diagnosis of the age; physiology, in the study of
muscular movements; psychology, in regard to perversion of instincts;
and, above all, hygiene, in the effort to prevent curvature of the
spine. These desks were indeed scientific, following in their
construction the anthropological study of the child. We have here, as I
have said, an example of the literal application of science to the
schools.

I believe that before very long we shall all be struck with great
surprise by this attitude. It will seem incomprehensible that the
fundamental error of the desk should not have been revealed earlier
through the attention given to the study of infant hygiene,
anthropology, and sociology, and through the general progress of
thought. The marvel is greater when we consider that during the past
years there has been stirring in almost every nation a movement toward
the protection of the child.

I believe that it will not be many years before the public, scarcely
believing the descriptions of these scientific benches, will come to
touch with wondering bands the amazing seats that were constructed for
the purpose of preventing among our school children curvature of the
spine!

The development of these scientific benches means that the pupils were
subjected to a regime, which, even though they were born strong and
straight, made it possible for them to become humpbacked! The vertebral
column, biologically the most primitive, fundamental, and oldest part of
the skeleton, the most fixed portion, of our body, since the skeleton is
the most solid portion of the organism--the vertebral column, which
resisted and was strong through the desperate struggles of primitive man
when he fought against the desert-lion, when he conquered the mammoth,
when he quarried the solid rock and shaped the iron to his uses, bends,
and cannot resist, under the yoke of the school.

It is incomprehensible that so-called _science_ should have worked to
perfect an instrument of slavery in the school without being enlightened
by one ray from the movement of social liberation, growing and
developing throughout the world. For the age of scientific benches was
also the age of the redemption of the working classes from the yoke of
unjust labor.

The tendency toward social liberty is most evident, and manifests itself
on every hand. The leaders of the people make it their slogan, the
labouring masses repeat the cry, scientific and socialistic publications
voice the same movement, our journals are full of it. The underfed
workman does not ask for a tonic, but for better economic conditions
which shall prevent malnutrition. The miner who, through the stooping
position maintained during many hours of the day, is subject to inguinal
rupture, does not ask for an abdominal support, but demands shorter
hours and bettor working conditions, in order that he may be able to
lead a healthy life like other men.

And when, during this same social epoch, we find that the children in
our schoolrooms are working amid unhygienic conditions, so poorly
adapted to normal development that even the skeleton becomes deformed,
our response to this terrible revelation is an orthopedic bench. It is
much as if we offered to the miner the abdominal brace, or arsenic to
the underfed workman.

Some time ago a woman, believing me to be in sympathy with all
scientific innovations concerning the school, showed me with evident
satisfaction _a corset or brace for pupils_. She had invented this and
felt that it would complete the work of the bench.

Surgery has still other means for the treatment of spinal curvature. I
might mention orthopedic instruments, braces, and a method of
periodically suspending the child, by the head or shoulders, in such a
fashion that the weight of the body stretches and thus straightens the
vertebral column. In the school, the orthopedic instrument in the shape
of the desk is in great favour to-day; someone proposes the brace--one
step farther and it will be suggested that we give the scholars a
systematic course in the suspension method!

All this is the logical consequence of a material application of the
methods of science to the decadent school. Evidently the rational method
of combating spinal curvature in the pupils, is to change the form of
their work--so that they shall no longer be obliged to remain for so
many hours a day in a harmful position. It is a conquest of liberty
which the school needs, not the mechanism of a bench.

Even were the stationary seat helpful to the child's body, it would
still be a dangerous and unhygienic feature of the environment, through
the difficulty of cleaning the room perfectly when the furniture cannot
be moved. The foot-rests, which cannot be removed, accumulate the dirt
carried in daily from the street by the many little feet. To-day there
is a general transformation in the matter of house furnishings. They are
made lighter and simpler so that they may be easily moved, dusted, and
even washed. But the school seems blind to the transformation of the
social environment.


It behooves us to think of what may happen to the _spirit_ of the child
who is condemned to grow in conditions so artificial that his very bones
may become deformed. When we speak of the redemption of the workingman,
it is always understood that beneath the most apparent form of
suffering, such as poverty of the blood, or ruptures, there exists that
other wound from which the soul of the man who is subjected to any form
of slavery must suffer. It is at this deeper wrong that we aim when we
say that the workman must be redeemed through liberty. We know only too
well that when a man's very blood has been consumed or his intestines
wasted away through his work, his soul must have lain oppressed in
darkness, rendered insensible, or, it may be, killed within him. The
_moral_ degradation of the slave is, above all things, the weight that
opposes the progress of humanity--humanity striving to rise and held
back by this great burden. The cry of redemption speaks far more clearly
for the souls of men than for their bodies.

What shall we say then, when the question before us is that of
_educating children_?

We know only too well the sorry spectacle of the teacher who, in the
ordinary schoolroom, must pour certain cut and dried facts into the
heads of the scholars. In order to succeed in this barren task, she
finds it necessary to discipline her pupils into immobility and to force
their attention. Prizes and punishments are every-ready and efficient
aids to the master who must force into a given attitude of mind and body
those who are condemned to be his listeners.

It is true that to-day it is deemed expedient to abolish official
whippings and habitual blows, just as the awarding of prizes has become
less ceremonious. These partial reforms are another prop approved of by
science, and offered to the support of the decadent school. Such prizes
and punishments are, if I may be allowed the expression, the _bench_ of
the soul, the instrument of slavery for the spirit. Here, however, these
are not applied to lessen deformities, but to provoke them. The prize
and the punishment are incentives toward unnatural or forced effort,
and, therefore we certainly cannot speak of the natural development of
the child in connection with them. The jockey offers a piece of sugar to
his horse before jumping into the saddle, the coachman beats his horse
that he may respond to the signs given by the reins; and, yet, neither
of these runs so superbly as the free horse of the plains.

And here, in the case of education, shall man place the yoke upon man?

True, we say that social man is natural man yoked to society. But if we
give a comprehensive glance to the moral progress of society, we shall
see that little by little, the yoke is being made easier, in other
words, we shall see that nature, or life, moves gradually toward
triumph. The yoke of the slave yields to that of the servant, and the
yoke of the servant to that of the workman.

All forms of slavery tend little by little to weaken and disappear, even
the sexual slavery of woman. The history of civilisation is a history of
conquest and of liberation. We should ask in what stage of civilisation
we find ourselves and if, in truth, the good of prizes and of
punishments be necessary to our advancement. If we have indeed gone
beyond this point, then to apply such a form of education would be to
draw the new generation back to a lower level, not to lead them into
their true heritage of progress.

Something very like this condition of the school exists in society, in
the relation between the government and the great numbers of the men
employed in its administrative departments. These clerks work day after
day for the general national good, yet they do not feel or see the
advantage of their work in any immediate reward. That is, they do not
realise that the state carries on its great business through their daily
tasks, and that the whole nation is benefited by their work. For them
the immediate good is promotion, as passing to a higher class is for the
child in school. The man who loses sight of the really big aim of his
work is like a child who has been placed in a class below his real
standing: like a slave, he is cheated of something which is his right.
His dignity as a man is reduced to the limits of the dignity of a
machine which must be oiled if it is to be kept going, because it does
not have within itself the impulse of life. All those petty things such
as the desire for decorations or medals, are but artificial stimuli,
lightening for the moment the dark, barren path in which he treads.

In the same way we give prizes to school children. And the fear of not
achieving promotion, withholds the clerk from running away, and binds
him to his monotonous work, even as the fear of not passing into the
next class drives the pupil to his book. The reproof of the superior is
in every way similar to the scolding of the teacher. The correction of
badly executed clerical work is equivalent to the bad mark placed by the
teacher upon the scholar's poor composition. The parallel is almost
perfect.

But if the administrative departments are not carried on in a way which
would seem suitable to a nation's greatness; if corruption too easily
finds a place; it is the result of having extinguished the true
greatness of man in the mind of the employee, and of having restricted
his vision to those petty, immediate facts, which he has come to look
upon as prizes and punishments. The country stands, because the
rectitude of the greater number of its employees is such that they
resist the corruption of the prizes and punishments, and follow an
irresistible current of honesty. Even as life in the social environment
triumphs against every cause of poverty and death, and proceeds to new
conquests, so the instinct of liberty conquers all obstacles, going from
victory to victory.

It is this personal and yet universal force of life, a force often
latent within the soul, that sends the world forward.


But he who accomplishes a truly human work, he who does something really
great and victorious, is never spurred to his task by those trifling
attractions called by the name of "prizes," nor by the fear of those
petty ills which we call "punishments." If in a war a great army of
giants should fight with no inspiration beyond the desire to win
promotion, epaulets, or medals, or through fear of being shot, if these
men were to oppose a handful of pygmies who were inflamed by love of
country, the victory would go to the latter. When real heroism has died
within an army, prizes and punishments cannot do more than finish the
work of deterioration, bringing in corruption and cowardice.

All human victories, all human progress, stand upon the inner force.

Thus a young student may become a great doctor if he is spurred to his
study by an interest which makes medicine his real vocation. But if he
works in the hope of an inheritance, or of making a desirable marriage,
or if indeed he is inspired by any material advantage, he will never
become a true master or a great doctor, and the world will never make
one step forward because of his work. He to whom such stimuli are
necessary, had far better never become a physician. Everyone has a
special tendency, a special vocation, modest, perhaps, but certainly
useful. The system of prizes may turn an individual aside from this
vocation, may make him choose a false road, for him a vain one, and
forced to follow it, the natural activity of a human being may be
warped, lessened, even annihilated.

We repeat always that the world _progresses_ and that we must urge men
forward to obtain progress. But progress comes from the _new things that
are born_, and these, not being foreseen, are not rewarded with prizes:
rather, they often carry the leader to martyrdom. God forbid that poems
should ever be born of the desire to be crowned in the Capitol! Such a
vision need only come into the heart of the poet and the muse will
vanish. The poem must spring from the soul of the poet, when he thinks
neither of himself nor of the prize. And if he does win the laurel, he
will feel the vanity of such a prize. The true reward lies in the
revelation through the poem of his own triumphant inner force.

There does exist, however, an external prize for man; when, for example,
the orator sees the faces of his listeners change with the emotions he
has awakened, he experiences something so great that it can only be
likened to the intense joy with which one discovers that he is loved.
Our joy is to touch, and conquer souls, and this is the one prize which
can bring us a true compensation.

Sometimes there is given to us a moment when we fancy ourselves to be
among the great ones of the world. These are moments of happiness given
to man that he may continue his existence in peace. It may be through
love attained or because of the gift of a son, through a glorious
discovery or the publication of a book; in some such moment we feel that
there exists no man who is above us. If, in such a moment, someone
vested with authority comes forward to offer us a medal or a prize, he
is the important destroyer of our real reward--"And who are you?" our
vanished illusion shall cry, "Who are you that recalls me to the fact
that I am not the first among men? Who stands so far above me that he
may give me a prize?" The prize of such a man in such a moment can only
be Divine.

As for punishments, the soul of the normal man grows perfect through
expanding, and punishment as commonly understood is always a form of
_repression_. It may bring results with those inferior natures who grow
in evil, but these are very few, and social progress is not affected by
them. The penal code threatens us with punishment if we are dishonest
within the limits indicated by the laws. But we are not honest through
fear of the laws; if we do not rob, if we do not kill, it is because we
love peace, because the natural trend of our lives leads us forward,
leading us ever farther and more definitely away from the peril of low
and evil acts.

Without going into the ethical or metaphysical aspects of the question,
we may safely affirm that the delinquent before he transgresses the law,
has, _if he knows of the existence of a punishment_, felt the
threatening weight of the criminal code upon him. He has defined it, or
he has been lured into the crime, deluding himself with the idea that he
would be able to avoid the punishment of the law. But there has occurred
within his mind, a _struggle between the crime and the punishment_.
Whether it be efficacious in hindering crime or not, this penal code is
undoubtedly made for a very limited class of individuals; namely,
criminals. The enormous majority of citizens are honest without any
regard whatever to the threats of the law.

The real punishment of normal man is the loss of the consciousness of
that individual power and greatness which are the sources of his inner
life. Such a punishment often falls upon men in the fullness of success.
A man whom we would consider crowned by happiness and fortune may be
suffering from this form of punishment. Far too often man does not see
the real punishment which threatens him.


And it is just here that education may help.

To-day we hold the pupils in school, restricted by those instruments so
degrading to body and spirit, the desk--and material prizes and
punishments. Our aim in all this is to reduce them to the discipline of
immobility and silence,--to lead them,--where? Far too often toward no
definite end.

Often the education of children consists in pouring into their
intelligence the intellectual contents of school programmes. And often
these programmes have been compiled in the official department of
education, and their use is imposed by law upon the teacher and the
child.

Ah, before such dense and wilful disregard of the life which is growing
within these children, we should hide our heads in shame and cover our
guilty faces with our hands!

Sergi says truly: "To-day an urgent need imposes itself upon society:
the reconstruction of methods in education and instruction, and he who
fights for this cause, fights for human regeneration."




CHAPTER II

HISTORY OF METHODS


If we are to develop a system of scientific pedagogy, we must, then,
proceed along lines very different from those which have been followed
up to the present time. The transformation of the school must be
contemporaneous with the preparation of the teacher. For if we make of
the teacher an observer, familiar with the experimental methods, then we
must make it possible for her to observe and to experiment in the
school. The fundamental principle of scientific pedagogy must be,
indeed, the _liberty of the pupil_;--such liberty as shall permit a
development of individual, spontaneous manifestations of the child's
nature. If a new and scientific pedagogy is to arise from the _study of
the individual_, such study must occupy itself with the observation of
_free_ children. In vain should we await a practical renewing of
pedagogical methods from methodical examinations of pupils made under
the guidance offered to-day by pedagogy, anthropology, and experimental
psychology.

Every branch of experimental science has grown out of the application of
a method peculiar to itself. Bacteriology owes its scientific content to
the method of isolation and culture of microbes. Criminal, medical, and
pedagogical anthropology owe their progress to the application of
anthropological methods to individuals of various classes, such as
criminals, the insane, the sick of the clinics, scholars. So
experimental psychology needs as its starting point an exact definition
of the technique to be used in making the experiment.

To put it broadly, it is important to define _the method_, _the
technique_, and from its application to _await_ the definite result,
which must be gathered entirely from actual experience. One of the
characteristics of experimental sciences is to proceed to the making of
an experiment _without preconceptions of any sort_ as to the final
result of the experiment itself. For example, should we wish to make
scientific observations concerning the development of the head as
related to varying degrees of intelligence, one of the conditions of
such an experiment would be to ignore, in the taking of the
measurements, which were the most intelligent and which the most
backward among the scholars examined. And this because the preconceived
idea that the most intelligent should have the head more fully developed
will inevitably alter the results of the research.

He who experiments must, while doing so, divest himself of every
preconception. It is clear then that if we wish to make use of a method
of experimental psychology, the first thing necessary is to renounce all
former creeds and to proceed by means of the _method_ in the search for
truth.

We must not start, for example, from any dogmatic ideas which we may
happen to have held upon the subject of child psychology. Instead, we
must proceed by a method which shall tend to make possible to the child
complete liberty. This we must do if we are to draw from the observation
of his spontaneous manifestations conclusions which shall lead to the
establishment of a truly scientific child psychology. It may be that
such a method holds for us great surprises, unexpected possibilities.

Child psychology and pedagogy must establish their content by successive
conquests arrived at through the method of experimentation.


Our problem then, is this: to establish the _method peculiar_ to
experimental pedagogy. It cannot be that used in other experimental
sciences. It is true that scientific pedagogy is rounded out by hygiene,
anthropology, and psychology, and adopts in part the technical method
characteristic of all three, although limiting itself to a special study
of the individual to be educated. But in pedagogy this study of the
individual, though it must accompany the very different work of
_education_, is a limited and secondary part of the science as a whole.

This present study deals in part with the _method_ used in experimental
pedagogy, and is the result of my experiences during two years in the
"Children's Houses." I offer only a beginning of the method, which I
have applied to children between the ages of three and six. But I
believe that these tentative experiments, because of the surprising
results which they have given, will be the means of inspiring a
continuation of the work thus undertaken.

Indeed, although our educational system, which experience has
demonstrated to be excellent, is not yet entirely completed, it
nevertheless constitutes a system well enough established to be
practical in all institutions where young children are cared for, and in
the first elementary classes.

Perhaps I am not exact when I say that the present work springs from two
years of experience. I do not believe that these later attempts of mine
could alone have rendered possible all that I set forth in this book.
The origin of the educational system in use in the "Children's Houses"
is much more remote, and if this experience with normal children seems
indeed rather brief, it should be remembered that it sprang from
preceding pedagogical experiences with abnormal children, and that
considered in this way, it represents a long and thoughtful endeavour.

About fifteen years ago, being assistant doctor at the Psychiatric
Clinic of the University of Rome, I had occasion to frequent the insane
asylums to study the sick and to select subjects for the clinics. In
this way I became interested in the idiot children who were at that time
housed in the general insane asylums. In those days thyroid
organotherapy was in full development, and this drew the attention of
physicians to deficient children. I myself, having completed my regular
hospital services, had already turned my attention to the study of
children's diseases.

It was thus that, being interested in the idiot children, I became
conversant with the special method of education devised for these
unhappy little ones by Edward Seguin, and was led to study thoroughly
the idea, then beginning to be prevalent among the physicians, of the
efficacy of "pedagogical treatment" for various morbid forms of disease
such as deafness, paralysis, idiocy, rickets, etc. The fact that
pedagogy must join with medicine in the treatment of disease was the
practical outcome of the thought of the time. And because of this
tendency the method of treating disease by gymnastics became widely
popular. I, however, differed from my colleagues in that I felt that
mental deficiency presented chiefly a pedagogical, rather than mainly a
medical, problem. Much was said in the medical congresses of the
medico-pedagogic method for the treatment and education of the feeble
minded, and I expressed my differing opinion in an address on _Moral
Education_ at the Pedagogical Congress of Turin in 1898. I believe that
I touched a chord already vibrant, because the idea, making its way
among the physicians and elementary teachers, spread in a flash as
presenting a question of lively interest to the school.

In fact I was called upon by my master, Guido Baccelli, the great
Minister of Education, to deliver to the teachers of Rome a course of
lectures on the education of feeble-minded children. This course soon
developed into the State Orthophrenic School, which I directed for more
than two years.

In this school we had an all-day class of children composed of those who
in the elementary schools were considered hopelessly deficient. Later
on, through the help of a philanthropic organisation, there was founded
a Medical Pedagogic Institute where, besides the children from the
public schools, we brought together all of the idiot children from the
insane asylums in Rome.

I spent these two years with the help of my colleagues in preparing the
teachers of Rome for a special method of observation and education of
feeble-minded children. Not only did I train teachers, but what was much
more important, after I had been in London and Paris for the purpose of
studying in a practical way the education of deficients, I gave myself
over completely to the actual teaching of the children, directing at the
same time the work of the other teachers in our institute.

I was more than an elementary teacher, for I was present, or directly
taught the children, from eight in the morning to seven in the evening
without interruption. These two years of practice are my first and
indeed my true degree in pedagogy. From the very beginning of my work
with deficient children (1898 to 1900) I felt that the methods which I
used had in them nothing peculiarly limited to the instruction of
idiots. I believed that they contained educational principles _more
rational_ than those in use, so much more so, indeed, that through their
means an inferior mentality would be able to grow and develop. This
feeling, so deep as to be in the nature of an intuition, became my
controlling idea after I had left the school for deficients, and, little
by little, I became convinced that similar methods applied to normal
children would develop or set free their personality in a marvellous and
surprising way.

It was then that I began a genuine and thorough study of what is known
as remedial pedagogy, and, then, wishing to undertake the study of
normal pedagogy and of the principles upon which it is based, I
registered as a student of philosophy at the University. A great faith
animated me, and although I did not know that I should ever be able to
test the truth of my idea, I gave up every other occupation to deepen
and broaden its conception. It was almost as if I prepared myself for an
unknown mission.

The methods for the education of deficients had their origin at the time
of the French Revolution in the work of a physician whose achievements
occupy a prominent place in the history of medicine, as he was the
founder of that branch of medical science which to-day is known as
Otiatria (diseases of the ear).

He was the first to attempt a methodical education of the sense of
hearing. He made these experiments in the institute for deaf mutes
founded in Paris by Pereire, and actually succeeded in making the
semi-deaf hear clearly. Later on, having in charge for eight years the
idiot boy known as "the wild boy of Aveyron," he extended to the
treatment of all the senses those educational methods which had already
given such excellent results in the treatment of the sense of hearing. A
student of Pinel, Itard, was the first educator to practise _the
observation_ of the pupil in the way in which the sick are observed in
the hospitals, especially those suffering from diseases of the nervous
system.

The pedagogic writings of Itard are most interesting and minute
descriptions of educational efforts and experiences, and anyone reading
them to-day must admit that they were practically the first attempts at
experimental psychology. But the merit of having completed a genuine
educational system for deficient children was due to Edward Seguin,
first a teacher and then a physician. He took the experiences of Itard
as his starting point, applying these methods, modifying and completing
them during a period of ten years' experience with children taken from
the insane asylums and placed in, a little school in Rue Pigalle in
Paris. This method was described for the first time in a volume of more
than six hundred pages, published in Paris in 1846, with the title:
"Traitement Moral, Hygiene et Education des Idiots." Later Seguin
emigrated to the United States of America where he founded many
institutions for deficients, and where, after another twenty years of
experience, he published the second edition of his method, under a very
different title: "Idiocy and its Treatment by the Physiological Method."
This volume was published in New York in 1886, and in it Seguin had
carefully defined his method of education, calling it the _physiological
method_. He no longer referred in the title to a method for the
"education of idiots" as if the method were special to them, but spoke
now of idiocy treated by a physiological method. If we consider that
pedagogy always had psychology as its base, and that Wundt defines a
"physiological psychology," the coincidence of these ideas must strike
us, and lead us to suspect in the physiological method some connection
with physiological psychology.

While I was assistant at the Psychiatric Clinic, I had read Edward
Seguin's French book, with great interest. But the English book which
was published in New York twenty years later, although it was quoted in
the works about special education by Bourneville, was not to be found in
any library. I made a vain quest for it, going from house to house of
nearly all the English physicians, who were known to be specially
interested in deficient children, or who were superintendents of special
schools. The fact that this book was unknown in England, although it had
been published in the English language, made me think that the Seguin
system had never been understood. In fact, although Seguin was
constantly quoted in all the publications dealing with institutions for
deficients, the educational _applications_ described, were quite
different from the applications of Seguin's system.

Almost everywhere the methods applied to deficients are more or less the
same as those in use for normal children. In Germany, especially, a
friend who had gone there in order to help me in my researches, noticed
that although special materials existed here and there in the
pedagogical museums of the schools for deficients, these materials were
rarely used. Indeed, the German educators hold the principle that it is
well to adapt to the teaching of backward children, the same method used
for normal ones; but these methods are much more objective in Germany
than with us.

At the Bicetre, where I spent some time, I saw that it was the didactic
apparatus of Seguin far more than his _method_ which was being used,
although, the French text was in the hands of the educators. The
teaching there was purely mechanical, each teacher following the rules
according to the letter. I found, however, wherever I went, in London as
well as in Paris, a desire for fresh counsel and for new experiences,
since far too often Seguin's claim that with his methods the education
of idiots was actually possible, had proved only a delusion.

After this study of the methods in use throughout Europe I concluded my
experiments upon the deficients of Rome, and taught them throughout two
years. I followed Seguin's book, and also derived much help from the
remarkable experiments of Itard.

Guided by the work of these two men, I had manufactured a great variety
of didactic material. These materials, which I have never seen complete
in any institution, became in the hands of those who knew how to apply
them, a most remarkable and efficient means, but unless rightly
presented, they failed to attract the attention of the deficients.

I felt that I understood the discouragement of those working with
feeble-minded children, and could see why they had, in so many cases,
abandoned the method. The prejudice that the educator must place himself
on a level with the one to be educated, sinks the teacher of deficients
into a species of apathy. He accepts the fact that he is educating an
inferior personality, and for that very reason he does not succeed. Even
so those who teach little children too often have the idea that they are
educating babies and seek to place themselves on the child's level by
approaching him with games, and often with foolish stories. Instead of
all this, we must know how to call to the _man_ which lies dormant
within the soul of the child. I felt this, intuitively, and believed
that not the didactic material, but my voice which called to them,
_awakened_ the children, and encouraged them to use the didactic
material, and through it, to educate themselves. I was guided in my work
by the deep respect which I felt for their misfortune, and by the love
which these unhappy children know how to awaken in those who are near
them.

Seguin, too, expressed himself in the same way on this subject. Reading
his patient attempts, I understand clearly that the first didactic
material used by him was _spiritual_. Indeed, at the close of the French
volume, the author, giving a resume of his work, concludes by saying
rather sadly, that all he has established will be lost or useless, if
the _teachers_ are not prepared for their work. He holds rather original
views concerning the preparation of teachers of deficients. He would
have them good to look upon, pleasant-voiced, careful in every detail of
their personal appearance, doing everything possible to make themselves
attractive. They must, he says, render themselves attractive in voice
and manner, since it is their task to awaken souls which are frail and
weary, and to lead them forth to lay hold upon the beauty and strength
of life.

This belief that we must act upon the spirit, served as a sort of
_secret key_, opening to me the long series of didactic experiments so
wonderfully analysed by Edward Seguin,--experiments which, properly
understood, are really most efficacious in the education of idiots. I
myself obtained most surprising results through their application, but I
must confess that, while my efforts showed themselves in the
intellectual progress of my pupils, a peculiar form of exhaustion
prostrated me. It was as if I gave to them some vital force from within
me. Those things which we call encouragement, comfort, love, respect,
are drawn from the soul of man, and the more freely we give of them, the
more do we renew and reinvigorate the life about us.

Without such inspiration the most perfect _external stimulus_ may pass
unobserved. Thus the blind Saul, before the glory of the sun, exclaimed,
"This?--It is the dense fog!"

Thus prepared, I was able to proceed to new experiments on my own
account. This is not the place for a report of these experiments, and I
will only note that at this time I attempted an original method for the
teaching of reading and writing, a part of the education of the child
which was most imperfectly treated in the works of both Itard and
Seguin.

I succeeded in teaching a number of the idiots from the asylums both to
read and to write so well that I was able to present them at a public
school for an examination together with normal children. And they passed
the examination successfully.

These results seemed almost miraculous to those who saw them. To me,
however, the boys from the asylums had been able to compete with the
normal children only because they had been taught in a different way.
They had been helped in their psychic development, and the normal
children had, instead, been suffocated, held back. I found myself
thinking that if, some day, the special education which had developed
these idiot children in such a marvellous fashion, could be applied to
the development of normal children, the "miracle" of which my friends
talked would no longer be possible. The abyss between the inferior
mentality of the idiot and that of the normal brain can never be bridged
if the normal child has reached his full development.

While everyone was admiring the progress of my idiots, I was searching
for the reasons which could keep the happy healthy children of the
common schools on so low a plane that they could be equalled in tests of
intelligence by my unfortunate pupils!

One day, a directress in the Institute for Deficients, asked me to read
one of the prophecies of Ezekiel which had made a profound impression
upon her, as it seemed to prophesy the education of deficients.

"The hand of the Lord was upon me, and carried me out in the spirit of
the Lord, and set me down in the midst of the valley which was full of
bones.

"And caused me to pass by them round about: and, behold, there were very
many in the open valley; and, lo, they were very dry.

"And he said unto me, Son of man, can these bones live? And I answered,
O Lord God, thou knowest.

"Again he said unto me, Prophesy upon these bones, and say unto them, O
ye dry hones, hear the word of the Lord.

"Thus saith the Lord God unto these bones; Behold, I will cause breath
to enter into you, and ye shall live:

"And I will lay sinews upon you, and will bring up flesh upon you, and
cover you with skin, and put breath in you, and ye shall live; and ye
shall know that I am the Lord.

"So I prophesied as I was commanded: and as I prophesied, there was a
noise, and behold a shaking, and the bones came together, bone to his
bone.

"And when I beheld, lo, the sinews and the flesh came up upon them, and
the skin covered them above: but there was no breath in them.

"Then said he unto me, Prophesy unto the wind, prophesy, son of man, and
say to the wind, Thus saith the Lord God; Come from the four winds, O
breath, and breathe upon these slain, that they may live.

"So I prophesied as He commanded me, and the breath came into them, and
they lived, and stood up upon their feet, an exceeding great army.

"Then he said unto me, Son of man, these bones are the whole house of
Israel: behold, they say, Our bones are dried, and our hope is lost: we
are cut off for our parts."

In fact, the words--"I will cause breath to enter into you, and ye shall
live," seem to me to refer to the direct individual work of the master
who encourages, calls to, and helps his pupil, preparing him for
education. And the remainder--"I will lay sinews upon you, and will
bring up flesh upon you," recalled the fundamental phrase which sums up
Seguin's whole method,--"to lead the child, as it were, by the hand,
from the education of the muscular system, to that of the nervous
system, and of the senses." It was thus that Seguin taught the idiots
how to walk, how to maintain their equilibrium in the most difficult
movements of the body--such as going up stairs, jumping, etc., and
finally, to feel, beginning the education of the muscular sensations by
touching, and reading the difference of temperature, and ending with the
education of the particular senses.

But if the training goes no further than this, we have only led these
children to adapt themselves to a low order of life (almost a vegetable
existence). "Call to the Spirit," says the prophecy, and the spirit
shall enter into them, and they shall have life. Seguin, indeed, led
the idiot from the vegetative to the intellectual life, "from the
education, of the senses to general notions, from general notions to
abstract thought, from abstract thought to morality." But when this
wonderful work is accomplished, and by means of a minute physiological
analysis and of a gradual progression in method, the idiot has become a
man, he is still an inferior in the midst of his fellow men, an
individual who will never be able fully to adapt himself to the social
environment: "Our bones are dried, and our hope is lost; we are cut off
for our parts."

This gives us another reason why the tedious method of Seguin was so
often abandoned; the tremendous difficulty of the means, did not justify
the end. Everyone felt this, and many said, "There is still so much to
be done for normal children!"


Having through actual experience justified my faith in Seguin's method,
I withdrew from active work among deficients, and began a more thorough
study of the works of Itard and Seguin. I felt the need of meditation. I
did a thing which I had not done before, and which perhaps few students
have been willing to do,--I translated into Italian and copied out with
my own hand, the writings of these men, from beginning to end, making
for myself books as the old Benedictines used to do before the diffusion
of printing.

I chose to do this by hand, in order that I might have time to weigh the
sense of each word, and to read, in truth, the _spirit_ of the author. I
had just finished copying the 600 pages of Seguin's French volume when I
received from New York a copy of the English book published in 1866.
This old volume had been found among the books discarded from the
private library of a New York physician. I translated it with the help
of an English friend. This volume did not add much in the way of new
pedagogical experiments, but dealt with the philosophy of the
experiences described in the first volume. The man who had studied
abnormal children for thirty years expressed the idea that the
physiological method, which has as its base the individual study of the
pupil and which forms its educative methods upon the analysis of
physiological and psychological phenomena, must come also to be applied
to normal children. This step, he believed, would show the way to a
complete human regeneration.

The voice of Seguin seemed to be like the voice of the forerunner crying
in the wilderness, and my thoughts were filled with the immensity and
importance of a work which should be able to reform the school and
education.

At this time I was registered at the University as a student of
philosophy, and followed the courses in experimental psychology, which
had only recently been established in Italian universities, namely, at
Turin, Rome and Naples. At the same time I made researches in Pedagogic
Anthropology in the elementary schools, studying in this way the methods
in organisation used for the education of normal children. This work led
to the teaching of Pedagogic Anthropology in the University of Rome.


I had long wished to experiment with the methods for deficients in a
first elementary class of normal children, but I had never thought of
making use of the homes or institutions where very young children were
cared for. It was pure chance that brought this new idea to my mind.

It was near the end of the year 1906, and I had just returned from
Milan, where I had been one of a committee at the International
Exhibition for the assignment of prizes in the subjects of Scientific
Pedagogy and Experimental Psychology. A great opportunity came to me,
for I was invited by Edoardo Talamo, the Director General of the Roman
Association for Good Building, to undertake the organisation of infant
schools in its model tenements. It was Signor Talamo's happy idea to
gather together in a large room all the little ones between the ages of
three and seven belonging to the families living in the tenement. The
play and work of these children was to be carried on under the guidance
of a teacher who should have her own apartment in the tenement house. It
was intended that every house should have its school, and as the
Association for Good Building already owned more than 400 tenements in
Rome the work seemed to offer tremendous possibilities of development.
The first school was to be established in January, 1907, in a large
tenement house in the Quarter of San Lorenzo. In the same Quarter the
Association already owned fifty-eight buildings, and according to Signor
Talamo's plans we should soon be able to open sixteen of these "schools
within the house."

This new kind of school was christened by Signora Olga Lodi, a mutual
friend of Signor Talamo and myself, under the fortunate title of _Casa
dei Bambini_ or "The Children's House." Under this name the first of our
schools was opened on the sixth of January, 1907, at 58 Via dei Masi. It
was confided to the care of Candida Nuccitelli and was under my guidance
and direction.

From the very first I perceived, in all its immensity, the social and
pedagogical importance of such institutions, and while at that time my
visions of a triumphant future seemed exaggerated, to-day many are
beginning to understand that what I saw before was indeed the truth.

On the seventh of April of the same year, 1907, a second "Children's
House" was opened in the Quarter of San Lorenzo; and on the eighteenth
of October, 1908, another was inaugurated by the Humanitarian Society in
Milan in the Quarter inhabited by workingmen. The workshops of this same
society undertook the manufacture of the materials which we used.

On the fourth of November following, a third "Children's House" was
opened in Rome, this time not in the people's Quarter, but in a modern
building for the middle classes, situated in Via Famagosta, in that part
of the city known as the Prati di Castello; and in January, 1909,
Italian Switzerland began to transform its orphan asylums and children's
homes in which the Froebel system had been used, into "Children's
Houses" adopting our methods and materials.

The "Children's House" has a twofold importance: the social importance
which it assumes through its peculiarity of being a school within the
house, and its purely pedagogic importance gained through its methods
for the education of very young children, of which I now made a trial.

As I have said, Signor Talamo's invitation gave me a wonderful
opportunity for applying the methods used with deficients to normal
children, not of the elementary school age, but of the age usual in
infant asylums.

If a parallel between the deficient and the normal child is possible,
this will be during the period of early infancy _when the child who has
not the force to develop_ and _he who is not yet developed_ are in some
ways alike.

The very young child has not yet acquired a secure co-ordination of
muscular movements, and, therefore, walks imperfectly, and is not able
to perform the ordinary acts of life, such as fastening and unfastening
its garments. The sense organs, such as the power of accommodation of
the eye, are not yet completely developed; the language is primordial
and shows those defects common to the speech of the very young child.
The difficulty of fixing the attention, the general instability, etc.,
are characteristics which the normal infant and the deficient child have
in common. Preyer, also, in his psychological study of children has
turned aside to illustrate the parallel between pathological linguistic
defects, and those of normal children in the process of developing.

Methods which made growth possible to the mental personality of the
idiot ought, therefore, to _aid the development of young children_, and
should be so adapted as to constitute a hygienic education of the entire
personality of a normal human being. Many defects which become
permanent, such as speech defects, the child acquires through being
neglected during the most important period of his age, the period
between three and six, at which time he forms and establishes his
principal functions.

Here lies the significance of my pedagogical experiment in the
"Children's Houses." It represents the results of a series of trials
made by me, in the education of young children, with methods already
used with deficients. My work has not been in any way an application,
pure and simple, of the methods of Seguin to young children, as anyone
who will consult the works of the author will readily see. But it is
none the less true that, underlying these two years of trial, there is a
basis of experiment which goes back to the days of the French
Revolution, and which represents the earnest work of the lives of Itard
and Seguin.

As for me, thirty years after the publication of Seguin's second book, I
took up again the ideas and, I may even say, the work of this great
man, with the same freshness of spirit with which he received the
inheritance of the work and ideas of his master Itard. For _ten years_ I
not only made practical experiments according to their methods, but
through reverent meditation absorbed the works of these noble and
consecrated men, who have left to humanity most vital proof of their
obscure heroism.

Thus my ten years of work may in a sense be considered as a summing up
of the forty years of work done by Itard and Seguin. Viewed in this
light, fifty years of active work preceded and prepared for this
apparently brief trial of only two years, and I feel that I am not wrong
in saying that these experiments represent the successive work of three
physicians, who from Itard to me show in a greater or less degree the
first steps along the path of psychiatry.

As definite factors in the civilisation of the people, the "Children's
Houses" deserve a separate volume. They have, in fact, solved so many of
the social and pedagogic problems in ways which have seemed to be
Utopian, that they are a part of that modern transformation of the home
which must most surely be realised before many years have passed. In
this way they touch directly the most important side of the social
question--that which deals with the intimate or home life of the people.

It is enough here to reproduce the inaugural discourse delivered by me
on the occasion of the opening of the second "Children's House" in Rome,
and to present the rules and regulations[4] which I arranged in
accordance with the wishes of Signor Talamo.

  [4] See page 70.

It will be noticed that the club to which I refer, and the dispensary
which is also an out-patients' institution for medical and surgical
treatment (all such institutions being free to the inhabitants) have
already been established. In the modern tenement--Casa Moderna in the
Prati di Castello, opened November 4, 1908, through the philanthropy of
Signor Talamo--they are also planning to annex a "communal kitchen."




CHAPTER III

INAGURAL ADDRESS DELIVERED ON THE OCCASION OF THE OPENING OF ONE OF THE
"CHILDREN'S HOUSES"


It may be that the life lived by the very poor is a thing which some of
you here to-day have never actually looked upon in all its degradation.
You may have only felt the misery of deep human poverty through the
medium of some great book, or some gifted actor may have made your soul
vibrato with its horror.


Let us suppose that in some such moment a voice should cry to you, "Go
look upon these homes of misery and blackest poverty. For there have
sprung up amid the terror and the suffering, cases of happiness, of
cleanliness, of peace. The poor are to have an ideal house which shall
be their own. In Quarters where poverty and vice ruled, a work of moral
redemption is going on. The soul of the people is being set free from
the torpor of vice, from the shadows of ignorance. The little children
too have a 'House' of their own. The new generation goes forward to meet
the new era, the time when misery shall no longer be deplored but
destroyed. They go to meet the time when the dark dens of vice and
wretchedness shall have become things of the past, and when no trace of
them shall be found among the living." What a change of emotions we
should experience! and how we should hasten here, as the wise men
guided by a dream and a star hastened to Bethlehem!

I have spoken thus in order that you may understand the great
significance, the real beauty, of this humble room, which seems like a
bit of the house itself set apart by a mother's hand for the use and
happiness of the children of the Quarter. This is the second "Children's
House"[5] which has been established within the ill-favoured Quarter of
San Lorenzo.

  [5] Dr. Montessori no longer directs the work in the Casa dei
      Bambini in the Quarter of San Lorenzo.

The Quarter of San Lorenzo is celebrated, for every newspaper in the
city is filled with almost daily accounts of its wretched happenings.
Yet there are many who are not familiar with the origin of this portion
of our city.

It was never intended to build up here a tenement district for the
people. And indeed San Lorenzo is not the _People's_ Quarter, it is the
Quarter of the _poor_. It is the Quarter where lives the underpaid,
often unemployed workingman, a common type in a city which has no
factory industries. It is the home of him who undergoes the period of
surveillance to which he is condemned after his prison sentence is
ended. They are all here, mingled, huddled together.

The district of San Lorenzo sprang into being between 1884 and 1888 at
the time of the great building fever. No standards either social or
hygienic guided these new constructions. The aim in building was simply
to cover with walls square foot after square foot of ground. The more
space covered, the greater the gain of the interested Banks and
Companies. All this with a complete disregard of the disastrous future
which they were preparing. It was natural that no one should concern
himself with the stability of the building he was creating, since in no
case would the property remain in the possession of him who built it.

When the storm burst, in the shape of the inevitable building panic of
1888 to 1890, these unfortunate houses remained for a long time
untenanted. Then, little by little, the need of dwelling-places began to
make itself felt, and these great houses began to fill. Now, those
speculators who had been so unfortunate as to remain possessors of these
buildings could not, and did not wish to, add fresh capital to that
already lost, so the houses constructed in the first place in utter
disregard of all laws of hygiene, and rendered still worse by having
been used as temporary habitations, came to be occupied by the poorest
class in the city.

The apartments not being prepared for the working class, were too large,
consisting of five, six, or seven rooms. These were rented at a price
which, while exceedingly low in relation to the size, was yet too high
for any one family of very poor people. This led to the evil of
subletting. The tenant who has taken a six room apartment at eight
dollars a month sublets rooms at one dollar and a half or two dollars a
month to those who can pay so much, and a corner of a room, or a
corridor, to a poorer tenant, thus making an income of fifteen dollars
or more, over and above the cost of his own rent.


This means that the problem of existence is in great part solved for
him, and that in every case he adds to his income through usury. The one
who holds the lease traffics in the misery of his fellow tenants,
lending small sums at a rate which generally corresponds to twenty cents
a week for the loan of two dollars, equivalent to an annual rate of 500
per cent.

Thus we have in the evil of subletting the most cruel form of usury:
that which only the poor know how to practise upon the poor.

To this we must add the evils of crowded living, promiscuousness,
immorality, crime. Every little while the newspapers uncover for us one
of these _interieurs_: a large family, growing boys and girls, sleep in
one room; while one corner of the room is occupied by an outsider, a
woman who receives the nightly visits of men. This is seen by the girls
and the boys; evil passions are kindled that lead to the crime and
bloodshed which unveil for a brief instant before our eyes, in some
lurid paragraph, this little detail of the mass of misery.

Whoever enters, for the first time, one of these apartments is
astonished and horrified. For this spectacle of genuine misery is not at
all like the garish scene he has imagined. We enter here a world of
shadows, and that which strikes us first is the darkness which, even
though it be midday, makes it impossible to distinguish any of the
details of the room.

When the eye has grown accustomed to the gloom, we perceive, within, the
outlines of a bed upon which lies huddled a figure--someone ill and
suffering. If we have come to bring money from some society for mutual
aid, a candle must be lighted before the sum can be counted and the
receipt signed. Oh, when we talk of social problems, how often we speak
vaguely, drawing upon our fancy for details instead of preparing
ourselves to judge intelligently through a personal investigation of
facts and conditions.

We discuss earnestly the question of home study for school children,
when for many of them home means a straw pallet thrown down in the
corner of some dark hovel. We wish to establish circulating libraries
that the poor may read at home. We plan to send among these people books
which shall form their domestic literature--books through whose
influence they shall come to higher standards of living. We hope through
the printed page to educate these poor people in matters of hygiene, of
morality, of culture, and in this we show ourselves profoundly ignorant
of their most crying needs. For many of them have no light by which to
read!

There lies before the social crusader of the present day a problem more
profound than that of the intellectual elevation of the poor; the
problem, indeed, of _life_.

In speaking of the children born in these places, even the conventional
expressions must be changed, for they do not "first see the light of
day"; they come into a world of gloom. They grow among the poisonous
shadows which envelope over-crowded humanity. These children cannot be
other than filthy in body, since the water supply in an apartment
originally intended to be occupied by three or four persons, when
distributed among twenty or thirty is scarcely enough for drinking
purposes!

We Italians have elevated our word "casa" to the almost sacred
significance of the English word "home," the enclosed temple of domestic
affection, accessible only to dear ones.

Far removed from this conception is the condition of the many who have
no "casa," but only ghastly walls within which the most intimate acts of
life are exposed upon the pillory. Here, there can be no privacy, no
modesty, no gentleness; here, there is often not even light, nor air,
nor water! It seems a cruel mockery to introduce here our idea of the
home as essential to the education of the masses, and as furnishing,
along with the family, the only solid basis for the social structure. In
doing this we would be not practical reformers but visionary poets.

Conditions such as I have described make it more decorous, more
hygienic, for these people to take refuge in the street and to let their
children live there. But how often these streets are the scene of
bloodshed, of quarrel, of sights so vile as to be almost inconceivable.
The papers tell us of women pursued and killed by drunken husbands! Of
young girls with the fear of worse than death, stoned by low men. Again,
we see untellable things--a wretched woman thrown, by the drunken men
who have preyed upon her, forth into the gutter. There, when day has
come, the children of the neighbourhood crowd about her like scavengers
about their dead prey, shouting and laughing at the sight of this wreck
of womanhood, kicking her bruised and filthy body as it lies in the mud
of the gutter!

Such spectacles of extreme brutality are possible here at the very gate
of a cosmopolitan city, the mother of civilisation and queen of the fine
arts, because of a new fact which was unknown to past centuries, namely,
_the isolation of the masses of the poor_.

In the Middle Ages, leprosy was isolated: the Catholics isolated the
Hebrews in the Ghetto; but poverty was never considered a peril and an
infamy so great that it must be isolated. The homes of the poor were
scattered among those of the rich and the contrast between these was a
commonplace in literature up to our own times. Indeed, when I was a
child in school, teachers, for the purpose of moral education,
frequently resorted to the illustration of the kind princess who sends
help to the poor cottage next door, or of the good children from the
great house who carry food to the sick woman in the neighbouring attic.

To-day all this would be as unreal and artificial as a fairy tale. The
poor may no longer learn from their more fortunate neighbours lessons in
courtesy and good breeding, they no longer have the hope of help from
them in cases of extreme need. We have herded them together far from us,
without the walls, leaving them to learn of each other, in the abandon
of desperation, the cruel lessons of brutality and vice. Anyone in whom
the social conscience is awake must see that we have thus created
infected regions that threaten with deadly peril the city which, wishing
to make all beautiful and shining according to an aesthetic and
aristocratic ideal, has thrust without its walls whatever is ugly or
diseased.

When I passed for the first time through these streets, it was as if I
found myself in a city upon which some great disaster had fallen. It
seemed to me that the shadow of some recent struggle still oppressed the
unhappy people who, with something very like terror in their pale faces,
passed me in these silent streets. The very silence seemed to signify
the life of a community interrupted, broken. Not a carriage, not even
the cheerful voice of the ever-present street vender, nor the sound of
the hand-organ playing in the hope of a few pennies, not even these
things, so characteristic of poor quarters, enter here to lighten this
sad and heavy silence.

Observing these streets with their deep holes, the doorsteps broken and
tumbling, we might almost suppose that this disaster had been in the
nature of a great inundation which had carried the very earth away; but
looking about us at the houses stripped of all decorations, the walls
broken and scarred, we are inclined to think that it was perhaps an
earthquake which has afflicted this quarter. Then, looking still more
closely, we see that in all this thickly settled neighbourhood there is
not a shop to be found. So poor is the community that it has not been
possible to establish even one of those popular bazars where necessary
articles are sold at so low a price as to put them within the reach of
anyone. The only shops of any sort are the low wine shops which open
their evil-smelling doors to the passer-by. As we look upon all this, it
is borne upon us that the disaster which has placed its weight of
suffering upon these people is not a convulsion of nature, but
poverty--poverty with its inseparable companion, vice.

This unhappy and dangerous state of things, to which our attention is
called at intervals by newspaper accounts of violent and immoral crime,
stirs the hearts and consciences of many who come to undertake among
these people some work of generous benevolence. One might almost say
that every form of misery inspires a special remedy and that all have
been tried here, from the attempt to introduce hygienic principles into
each house, to the establishment of creches, "Children's Houses," and
dispensaries.

But what indeed is benevolence? Little more than an expression of
sorrow; it is pity translated into action. The benefits of such a form
of charity cannot be great, and through the absence of any continued
income and the lack of organisation it is restricted to a small number
of persons. The great and widespread peril of evil demands, on the other
hand, a broad and comprehensive work directed toward the redemption of
the entire community. Only such an organisation, as, working for the
good of others, shall itself grow and prosper through the general
prosperity which it has made possible, can make a place for itself in
this quarter and accomplish a permanent good work.

It is to meet this dire necessity that the great and kindly work of the
Roman Association of Good Building has been undertaken. The advanced and
highly modern way in which this work is being carried on is due to
Edoardo Talamo, Director General of the Association. His plans, so
original, so comprehensive, yet so practical, are without counterpart in
Italy or elsewhere.

This Association was incorporated three years ago in Rome, its plan
being to acquire city tenements, remodel them, put them into a
productive condition, and administer them as a good father of a family
would.

The first property acquired comprised a large portion of the Quarter of
San Lorenzo, where to-day the Association possesses fifty-eight houses,
occupying a ground space of about 30,000 square metres, and containing,
independent of the ground floor, 1,600 small apartments. Thousands of
people will in this way receive the beneficent influence of the
protective reforms of the Good Building Association. Following its
beneficent programme, the Association set about transforming these old
houses, according to the most modern standards, paying as much attention
to questions related to hygiene and morals as to those relating to
buildings. The constructional changes would make the property of real
and lasting value, while the hygienic and moral transformation, would,
through the improved condition of the inmates, make the rent from these
apartments a more definite asset.

The Association of Good Building therefore decided upon a programme
which would permit of a gradual attainment of their ideal. It is
necessary to proceed slowly because it is not easy to empty a tenement
house at a time when houses are scarce, and the humanitarian principles
which govern the entire movement make it impossible to proceed more
rapidly in this work of regeneration. So it is, that the Association has
up to the present time transformed only three houses in the Quarter of
San Lorenzo. The plan followed in this transformation is as follows:

A: To demolish in every building all portions of the structure not
originally constructed with the idea of making homes, but, from a purely
commercial standpoint, of making the rental roll larger. In other words,
the new management tore down those parts of the building which
encumbered the central court, thus doing away with dark, ill-ventilated
apartments, and giving air and light to the remaining portion of the
tenement. Broad airy courts take the place of the inadequate air and
light shafts, rendering the remaining apartments more valuable and
infinitely more desirable.

B: To increase the number of stairways, and to divide the room space in
a more practical way. The large six or seven room suites are reduced to
small apartments of one, two, or three rooms, and a kitchen.

The importance of such changes may be recognised from the economic point
of view of the proprietor as well as from the standpoint of the moral
and material welfare of the tenant. Increasing the number of stairways
diminishes that abuse of walls and stairs inevitable where so many
persons must pass up and down. The tenants more readily learn to respect
the building and acquire habits of cleanliness and order. Not only this,
but in reducing the chances of contact among the inhabitants of the
house, especially late at night, a great advance has been made in the
matter of moral hygiene.

The division of the house into small apartments has done much toward
this moral regeneration. Each family is thus set apart, _homes_ are made
possible, while the menacing evil of subletting together with all its
disastrous consequences of overcrowding and immorality is checked in the
most radical way.

On one side this arrangement lessens the burden of the individual lease
holders, and on the other increases the income of the proprietor, who
now receives those earnings which were the unlawful gain of the system
of subletting. When the proprietor who originally rented an apartment of
six rooms for a monthly rental of eight dollars, makes such an apartment
over into three small, sunny, and airy suites consisting of one room and
a kitchen, it is evident that he increases his income.

The moral importance of this reform as it stands to-day is tremendous,
for it has done away with those evil influences and low opportunities
which arise from crowding and from promiscuous contact, and has brought
to life among these people, for the first time, the gentle sentiment of
feeling themselves free within their own homes, in the intimacy of the
family.

But the project of the Association goes beyond even this. The house
which it offers to its tenants is not only sunny and airy, but in
perfect order and repair, almost shining, and as if perfumed with purity
and freshness. These good things, however, carry with them a
responsibility which the tenant must assume if he wishes to enjoy them.
He must pay an actual tax of _care_ and _good will_. The tenant who
receives a clean house must keep it so, must respect the walls from the
big general entrance to the interior of his own little apartment. He who
keeps his house in good condition receives the recognition and
consideration due such a tenant. Thus all the tenants unite in an
ennobling warfare for practical hygiene, an end made possible by the
simple task of _conserving_ the already perfect conditions.

Here indeed is something new! So far only our great national buildings
have had a continued _maintenance fund_. Here, in these houses offered
to the people, the maintenance is confided to a hundred or so
workingmen, that is, to all the occupants of the building. This care is
almost perfect. The people keep the house in perfect condition, without
a single spot. The building in which we find ourselves to-day has been
for two years under the sole protection of the tenants, and the work of
maintenance has been left entirely to them. Yet few of our houses can
compare in cleanliness and freshness with this home of the poor.

The experiment has been tried and the result is remarkable. The people
acquire together with the lore of home-making, that of cleanliness. They
come, moreover, to wish to beautify their homes. The Association helps
this by placing growing plants and trees in the courts and about the
halls.

Out of this honest rivalry in matters so productive of good, grows a
species of pride new to this quarter; this is the pride which the entire
body of tenants takes in having the best-cared-for building and in
having risen to a higher and more civilised plane of living. They not
only live in a house, but they _know how to live_, they _know how to
respect_ the house in which they live.

This first impulse has led to other reforms. From the clean home will
come personal cleanliness. Dirty furniture cannot be tolerated in a
clean house, and those persons living in a permanently clean house will
come to desire personal cleanliness.

One of the most important hygienic reforms of the Association is that
of _the baths_. Each remodeled tenement has a place set apart for
bathrooms, furnished with tubs or shower, and having hot and cold water.
All the tenants in regular turn may use these baths, as, for example, in
various tenements the occupants go according to turn, to wash their
clothes in the fountain in the court. This is a great convenience which
invites the people to be clean. These hot and cold baths _within the
house_ are a great improvement upon the general public baths. In this
way we make possible to these people, at one and the same time, health
and refinement, opening not only to the sun, but to progress, those dark
habitations once the _vile caves_ of misery.

But in striving to realise its ideal of a semi-gratuitous maintenance of
its buildings, the Association met with a difficulty in regard to those
children under school age, who must often be left alone during the
entire day while their parents went out to work. These little ones, not
being able to understand the educative motives which taught their
parents to respect the house, became ignorant little vandals, defacing
the walls and stairs. And here we have another reform the expense of
which may be considered as indirectly assumed by the tenants as was the
care of the building. This reform may be considered as the most
brilliant transformation of a tax which progress and civilisation have
as yet devised. The "Children's House" is earned by the parents through
the care of the building. Its expenses are met by the sum that the
Association would have otherwise been forced to spend upon repairs. A
wonderful climax, this, of moral benefits received! Within the
"Children's House," which belongs exclusively to those children under
school age, working mothers may safely leave their little ones, and may
proceed with a feeling of great relief and freedom to their own work.
But this benefit, like that of the care of the house, is not conferred
without a tax of care and of good will. [6]The Regulations posted on the
walls announce it thus:

  [6] See page 70.

"The mothers are obliged to send their children to the 'Children's
House' clean, and to co-operate with the Directress in the educational
work."

Two obligations: namely, the physical and moral care of their own
children. If the child shows through its conversation that the
educational work of the school is being undermined by the attitude taken
in his home, he will be sent back to his parents, to teach them thus how
to take advantage of their good opportunities. Those who give themselves
over to low-living, to fighting, and to brutality, shall feel upon them
the weight of those little lives, so needing care. They shall feel that
they themselves have once more cast into the darkness of neglect those
little creatures who are the dearest part of the family. In other words,
the parents must learn to _deserve_ the benefit of having within the
house the great advantage of a school for their little ones.

"Good will," a willingness to meet the demands of the Association is
enough, for the directress is ready and willing to teach them how. The
regulations say that the mother must go at least once a week, to confer
with the directress, giving an account of her child, and accepting any
helpful advice which the directress may be able to give. The advice thus
given will undoubtedly prove most illuminating in regard to the child's
health and education, since to each of the "Children's Houses" is
assigned a physician as well as a directress.

The directress is always at the disposition of the mothers, and her
life, as a cultured and educated person, is a constant example to the
inhabitants of the house, for she is obliged to live in the tenement and
to be therefore a co-habitant with the families of all her little
pupils. This is a fact of immense importance. Among these almost savage
people, into these houses where at night no one dared go about unarmed,
there has come not only to teach, _but to live the very life they live_,
a gentlewoman of culture, an educator by profession, who dedicates her
time and her life to helping those about her! A true missionary, a moral
queen among the people, she may, if she be possessed of sufficient tact
and heart, reap an unheard-of harvest of good from her social work.

This house is verily _new_; it would seem a dream impossible of
realisation, but it has been tried. It is true that there have been
before this attempts made by generous persons to go and live among the
poor to civilise them. But such work is not practical, unless the house
of the poor is hygienic, making it possible for people of better
standards to live there. Nor can such work succeed in its purpose unless
some common advantage or interest unites all of the tenants in an effort
toward better things.

This tenement is new also because of the pedagogical organisation of the
"Children's House." This is not simply a place where the children are
kept, not just an _asylum_, but a true school for their education, and
its methods are inspired by the rational principles of scientific
pedagogy.

The physical development of the children is followed, each child being
studied from the anthropological standpoint. Linguistic exercises, a
systematic sense-training, and exercises which directly fit the child
for the duties of practical life, form the basis of the work done. The
teaching is decidedly objective, and presents an unusual richness of
didactic material.

It is not possible to speak of all this in detail. I must, however,
mention that there already exists in connection with the school a
bathroom, where the children may be given hot or cold baths and where
they may learn to take a partial bath, hands, face, neck, ears. Wherever
possible the Association has provided a piece of ground in which the
children may learn to cultivate the vegetables in common use.

It is important that I speak here of the pedagogical progress attained
by the "Children's House" as an institution. Those who are conversant
with the chief problems of the school know that to-day much attention is
given to a great principle, one that is ideal and almost beyond
realisation,--the union of the family and the school in the matter of
educational aims. But the family is always something far away from the
school, and is almost always regarded as rebelling against its ideals.
It is a species of phantom upon which the school can never lay its
hands. The home is closed not only to pedagogical progress, but often to
social progress. We see here for the first time the possibility of
realising the long-talked-of pedagogical ideal. We have put _the school
within the house_; and this is not all. We have placed it within the
house as the _property of the collectivity_, leaving under the eyes of
the parents the whole life of the teacher in the accomplishment of her
high mission.

This idea of the collective ownership of the school is new and very
beautiful and profoundly educational.

The parents know that the "Children's House" is their property, and is
maintained by a portion of the rent they pay. The mothers may go at any
hour of the day to watch, to admire, or to meditate upon the life
there. It is in every way a continual stimulus to reflection, and a
fount of evident blessing and help to their own children. We may say
that the mothers _adore_ the "Children's House," and the directress. How
many delicate and thoughtful attentions these good mothers show the
teacher of their little ones! They often leave sweets or flowers upon
the sill of the schoolroom window, as a silent token, reverently, almost
religiously, given.

And when after three years of such a novitiate, the mothers send their
children to the common schools, they will be excellently prepared to
co-operate in the work of education, and will have acquired a sentiment,
rarely found even among the best classes; namely, the idea that they
must _merit_ through their own conduct and with their own virtue, the
possession of an educated son.

Another advance made by the "Children's Houses" as an institution is
related to scientific pedagogy. This branch of pedagogy, heretofore,
being based upon the anthropological study of the pupil whom it is to
educate, has touched only a few of the positive questions which tend to
transform education. For a man is not only a biological but a social
product, and the social environment of individuals in the process of
education, is the home. Scientific pedagogy will seek in vain to better
the new generation if it does not succeed in influencing also the
environment within which this new generation grows! I believe,
therefore, that in opening the house to the light of new truths, and to
the progress of civilisation we have solved the problem of being able to
modify directly, the _environment_ of the new generation, and have thus
made it possible to apply, in a practical way, the fundamental
principles of scientific pedagogy.

The "Children's House" marks still another triumph; it is the first step
toward the _socialisation of the house_. The inmates find under their
own roof the convenience of being able to leave their little ones in a
place, not only safe, but where they have every advantage.

And let it be remembered that _all_ the mothers in the tenement may
enjoy this privilege, going away to their work with easy minds. Until
the present time only one class in society might have this advantage.
Rich women were able to go about their various occupations and
amusements, leaving their children in the hands of a nurse or a
governess. To-day the women of the people who live in these remodeled
houses, may say, like the great lady, "I have left my son with the
governess and the nurse." More than this, they may add, like the
princess of the blood, "And the house physician watches over them and
directs their sane and sturdy growth." These women, like the most
advanced class of English and American mothers, possess a "Biographical
Chart," which, filled for the mother by the directress and the doctor,
gives her the most practical knowledge of her child's growth and
condition.

We are all familiar with the ordinary advantages of the communistic
transformation of the general environment. For example, the collective
use of railway carriages, of street lights, of the telephone, all these
are great advantages. The enormous production of useful articles,
brought about by industrial progress, makes possible to all, clean
clothes, carpets, curtains, table-delicacies, better tableware, etc. The
making of such benefits generally tends to level social caste. All this
we have seen in its reality. But the communising of _persons_ is new.
That the collectivity shall benefit from the services of the servant,
the nurse, the teacher--this is a modern ideal.

We have in the "Children's Houses" a demonstration of this ideal which
is unique in Italy or elsewhere. Its significance is most profound, for
it corresponds to a need of the times. We can no longer say that the
convenience of leaving their children takes away from the mother a
natural social duty of first importance; namely, that of caring for and
educating her tender offspring. No, for to-day the social and economic
evolution calls the working-woman to take her place among wage-earners,
and takes away from her by force those duties which would be most dear
to her! The mother must, in any event, leave her child, and often with
the pain of knowing him to be abandoned. The advantages furnished by
such institutions are not limited to the labouring classes, but extend
also to the general middle-class, many of whom work with the brain.
Teachers, professors, often obliged to give private lessons after school
hours, frequently leave their children to the care, of some rough and
ignorant maid-of-all-work. Indeed, the first announcement of the
"Children's House" was followed by a deluge of letters from persons of
the better class demanding that these helpful reforms be extended to
their dwellings.

We are, then, communising a "maternal function," a feminine duty, within
the house. We may see here in this practical act the solving of many of
woman's problems which have seemed to many impossible of solution. What
then will become of the home, one asks, if the woman goes away from it?
The home will be transformed and will assume the functions of the woman.

I believe that in the future of society other forms of communistic life
will come.

Take, for example, the infirmary; woman is the natural nurse for the
dear ones of her household. But who does not know how often in these
days she is obliged to tear herself unwillingly from the bedside of her
sick to go to her work? Competition is great, and her absence from her
post threatens the tenure of the position from which she draws the means
of support. To be able to leave the sick one in a "house-infirmary," to
which she may have access any free moments she may have, and where she
is at liberty to watch during the night, would be an evident advantage
to such a woman.

And how great would be the progress made in the matter of family
hygiene, in all that relates to isolation and disinfection! Who does not
know the difficulties of a poor family when one child is ill of some
contagions disease, and should be isolated from the others? Often such a
family may have no kindred or friends in the city to whom the other
children may be sent.

Much more distant, but not impossible, is the communal kitchen, where
the dinner ordered in the morning is sent at the proper time, by means
of a dumb-waiter, to the family dining-room. Indeed, this has been
successfully tried in America. Such a reform would be of the greatest
advantage to those families of the middle-class who must confide their
health and the pleasures of the table to the hands of an ignorant
servant who ruins the food. At present, the only alternative in such
cases is to go outside the home to some cafe where a cheap table d'hote
may be had.

Indeed, the transformation of the house must compensate for the loss in
the family of the presence of the woman who has become a social
wage-earner.

In this way the house will become a centre, drawing into itself all
those good things which have hitherto been lacking: schools, public
baths, hospitals, etc.

Thus the tendency will be to change the tenement houses, which have been
places of vice and peril, into centres of education, of refinement, of
comfort. This will be helped if, besides the schools for the children,
there may grow up also _clubs_ and reading-rooms for the inhabitants,
especially for the men, who will find there a way to pass the evening
pleasantly and decently. The tenement-club, as possible and as useful in
all social classes as is the "Children's House," will do much toward
closing the gambling-houses and saloons to the great moral advantage of
the people. And I believe that the Association of Good Building will
before long establish such clubs in its reformed tenements here in the
Quarter of San Lorenzo; clubs where the tenants may find newspapers and
books, and where they may hear simple and helpful lectures.

We are, then, very far from the dreaded dissolution of the home and of
the family, through the fact that woman has been forced by changed
social and economic conditions to give her time and strength to
remunerative work. The home itself assumes the gentle feminine
attributes of the domestic housewife. The day may come when the tenant,
having given to the proprietor of the house a certain sum, shall receive
in exchange whatever is necessary to the _comfort_ of life; in other
words, the administration shall become the _steward_ of the family.

The house, thus considered, tends to assume in its evolution a
significance more exalted than even the English word "home" expresses.
It does not consist of walls alone, though these walls be the pure and
shining guardians of that intimacy which is the sacred symbol of the
family. The home shall become more than this. It lives! It has a soul.
It may be said to embrace its inmates with the tender, consoling arms
of woman. It is the giver of moral life, of blessings; it cares for, it
educates and feeds the little ones. Within it, the tired workman shall
find rest and newness of life. He shall find there the intimate life of
the family, and its happiness.

The new woman, like the butterfly come forth from the chrysalis, shall
be liberated from all those attributes which once made her desirable to
man only as the source of the material blessings of existence. She shall
be, like man, an individual, a free human being, a social worker; and,
like man, she shall seek blessing and repose within the house, the house
which has been reformed and communised.

She shall wish to be loved for herself and not as a giver of comfort and
repose. She shall wish a love free from every form of servile labour.
The goal of human love is not the egotistical end of assuring its own
satisfaction--it is the sublime goal of multiplying the forces of the
free spirit, making it almost Divine, and, within such beauty and light,
perpetuating the species.

This ideal love is made incarnate by Frederick Nietzsche, in the woman
of Zarathustra, who conscientiously wished her son to be better than
she. "Why do you desire me?" she asks the man. "Perhaps because of the
perils of a solitary life?

"In that case go far from me. I wish the man who has conquered himself,
who has made his soul great. I wish the man who has conserved a clean
and robust body. I wish the man who desires to unite with me, body and
soul, to create a son! A son better, more perfect, stronger, than any
created heretofore!"

To better the species consciously, cultivating his own health, his own
virtue, this should be the goal of man's married life. It is a sublime
concept of which, as yet, few think. And the socialised home of the
future, living, provident, kindly; educator and comforter; is the true
and worthy home of those human mates who wish to better the species, and
to send the race forward triumphant into the eternity of life!


RULES AND REGULATIONS OF THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"

The Roman Association of Good Building hereby establishes within its
tenement house number, a "Children's House," in which may be gathered
together all children under common school age, belonging to the families
of the tenants.

The chief aim of the "Children's House" is to offer, free of charge, to
the children of those parents who are obliged to absent themselves for
their work, the personal care which the parents are not able to give.

In the "Children's House" attention is given to the education, the
health, the physical and moral development of the children. This work is
carried on in a way suited to the age of the children.

There shall be connected with the "Children's House" a Directress, a
Physician, and a Caretaker.

The programme and hours of the "Children's House" shall be fixed by the
Directress.

There may be admitted to the "Children's House" all the children in the
tenement between the ages of three and seven.

The parents who wish to avail themselves of the advantages of the
"Children's House" pay nothing. They must, however, assume these binding
obligations:

    (a) To send their children to the "Children's House" at the
    appointed time, clean in body and clothing, and provided with
    a suitable apron.

    (b) To show the greatest respect and deference toward the
    Directress and toward all persons connected with the
    "Children's House," and to co-operate with the Directress
    herself in the education of the children. Once a week, at
    least, the mothers may talk with the Directress, giving her
    information concerning the home life of the child, and
    receiving helpful advice from her.

There shall be expelled from the "Children's House":

    (a) Those children who present themselves unwashed, or in
    soiled clothing.

    (b) Those who show themselves to be incorrigible.

    (c) Those whose parents fail in respect to the persons
    connected with the "Children's House," or who destroy through
    bad conduct the educational work of the institution.




CHAPTER IV

PEDAGOGICAL METHODS USED IN THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"


As soon as I knew that I had at my disposal a class of little children,
it was my wish to make of this school a field for scientific
experimental pedagogy and child psychology. I started with a view in
which Wundt concurs; namely, that child psychology does not exist.
Indeed, experimental researches in regard to childhood, as, for example,
those of Preyer and Baldwin, have been made upon not more than two or
three subjects, children of the investigators. Moreover, the instruments
of psychometry must be greatly modified and simplified before they can
be used with children, who do not lend themselves passively as subjects
for experimentation. Child psychology can be established only through
the method of external observation. We must renounce all idea of making
any record of internal states, which can be revealed only by the
introspection of the subject himself. The instruments of psychometric
research, as applied to pedagogy, have up to the present time been
limited to the esthesiometric phase of the study.

My intention was to keep in touch with the researches of others, but to
make myself independent of them, proceeding to my work without
preconceptions of any kind. I retained as the only essential, the
affirmation, or, rather, the definition of Wundt, that "all methods of
experimental psychology may be reduced to one; namely, carefully
recorded observation of the subject."

Treating of children, another factor must necessarily intervene: the
study of the development. Here too, I retained the same general
criterion, but without clinging to any dogma about the activity of the
child according to age.


ANTHROPOLOGICAL CONSIDERATION

In regard to physical development, my first thought was given to the
regulating of anthropometric observations, and to the selection of the
most important observations to be made.

I designed an anthropometer provided with the metric scale, varying
between .50 metre and 1.50 metres. A small stool, 30 centimetres high,
could be placed upon the floor of the anthropometer for measurements
taken in a sitting position. I now advise making the anthropometer with
a platform on either side of the pole bearing the scale, so that on one
side the total stature can be measured, and on the other the height of
the body when seated. In the second case, the zero is indicated at 30
centimetres; that is, it corresponds to the seat of the stool, which is
fixed. The indicators on the vertical post are independent one of the
other and this makes it possible to measure two children at the same
time. In this way the inconvenience and waste of time caused by having
to move the seat about, is obviated, and also the trouble of having to
calculate the difference in the metric scale.

Having thus facilitated the technique of the researches, I decided to
take the measurements of the children's stature, seated and standing,
every month, and in order to have these regulated as exactly as possible
in their relation to development, and also to give greater regularity
to the research work of the teacher, I made a rule that the measurements
should be taken on the day on which the child completed each month of
his age. For this purpose I designed a register arranged on the
following plan:--

  ==========================================================
           ||      SEPTEMBER     |       OCTOBER
  ---------++--------------------+--------------------------
    Day of ||       Stature      |       Stature       Etc.
    month  |+----------+---------+----------+---------------
           || Standing | Sitting | Standing | Sitting
  ---------++----------+---------+----------+---------------
      1    ||          |         |          |
           |+----------+---------+----------+---------------
      2    ||          |         |          |
           |+----------+---------+----------+---------------
      3    ||          |         |          |
           |+----------+---------+----------+---------------
      4    ||          |         |          |
           |+----------+---------+----------+---------------
     Etc.  ||          |         |          |
  ---------++----------+---------+----------+---------------

The spaces opposite each number are used to register the name of the
child born on that day of the month. Thus the teacher knows which
scholars she must measure on the days which are marked on the calendar,
and she fills in his measurements to correspond with the month in which
he was born. In this way a most exact registration can be arrived at
without having the teacher feel that she is overburdened, or fatigued.

With regard to the weight of the child, I have arranged that it shall be
taken every week on a pair of scales which I have placed in the
dressing-room where the children are given their bath. According to the
day on which the child is born, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, etc., we
have him weighed when he is ready to take a bath. Thus the children's
baths (no small matter when we consider a class of fifty) are
sub-divided into seven days, and from three to five children go to the
bath every day. Certainly, theoretically, a daily bath would be
desirable, but in order to manage this a large bath or a number of small
ones would be necessary, so that a good many children could be bathed at
once. Even a weekly bath entails many difficulties, and sometimes has to
be given up. In any case, I have distributed the taking of the weight in
the order stated with the intention of thus arranging for and making
sure of periodical baths.[7]

  [7] Incidentally, I may say, that I have invented a means
      of bathing children contemporaneously, without having a
      large bath. In order to manage this, I thought of having a
      long trough with supports at the bottom, on which small,
      separate tubs could rest, with rather large holes in the
      bottom. The little tubs are filled from the large trough, into
      which the water runs and then goes into all the little tubs
      together, by the law of the levelling of liquids, going
      through the holes in the bottom. When the water is settled, it
      does not pass from tub to tub, and the children will each have
      their own bath. The emptying of the trough brings with it the
      simultaneous emptying of the little tubs, which being of light
      metal, will be easily moved from the bottom of the big tub, in
      order to clean it. It is not difficult to imagine arranging a
      cork for the hole at the bottom. These are only projects for
      the future!

The form here given shows the register which we use in recording the
weight of the children. Every page of the register corresponds to a
month.

It seems to me that the anthropological measurements, the taking and
recording of which I have just described, should be the only ones with
which the schoolmistress need occupy herself; and, therefore, the only
ones which should be taken actually within the school. It is my plan
that other measurements should be taken by a physician, who either is,
or is preparing to be, a specialist in infant anthropology. In the
meantime, I take these special measurements myself.

  ======================================================
            |                 SEPTEMBER
            +----------+----------+----------+----------
            | 1st week | 2nd week | 3rd week | 4th week
            |   Lbs.   |   Lbs.   |   Lbs.   |   Lbs.
            +----------+----------+----------+----------
  Monday____|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
  Tuesday___|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
  Wednesday_|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
      ______|__________|__________|__________|__________
  Etc.      |          |          |          |
            |          |          |          |
  ----------+----------+----------+----------+----------

The examination made by the physician must necessarily be complex, and
to facilitate and regulate the taking of these measurements I have
designed and had printed biological charts, of which I here give an
example.

  _Number_ _____________                   _Date_ _________________

  _Name and Surname_ ______________________________  _Age_ ________

  _Name of Parents_ ________ _Mother's Age_ ___ _Father's Age_ ___

  _Professions_ __________________________________________

  _Details of Hereditary Antecedents_ ____________________________
  _______________________________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________

  _Personal Antecedents_ ________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________
  _______________________________________________________________


  ANTHROPOLOGICAL NOTES

  +-------------------------------------------------------------+
  | Standing | Weight | Chest | Seated  | Index of   | Ponderal |
  | Stature  |        | Meas. | Stature | Stature[8] | Index[9] |
  |----------+--------+-------+---------+------------+----------|
  |          |        |       |         |            |          |
  |----------+--------+-------+---------+------------+----------|
  |          |        |       |         |            |          |
  +----------+--------+-------+---------+------------+----------+

  +------------------------------------+
  |               HEAD                 |
  |----------------+-------------------|
  |      |   Dia.  |  Dia.  | Cephalic |
  | Cir. |  Front  | Across |   Index  |
  |      | to Back |        |          |
  |------+---------+--------+----------|
  |      |         |        |          |
  |------+---------+--------+----------|
  |      |         |        |          |
  +------+---------+--------+----------+

  _Physical Constitution_ ________________________________
  _Condition of Muscles_ ________________________________
  _Colour of Skin_ ______________________________________
  _Colour of Hair_ ______________________________________


  NOTES
    _______________________________________________________________
    _______________________________________________________________
    _______________________________________________________________
    _______________________________________________________________


  [8] For the Index of Stature Dr. Montessori combines the seated and
      standing statures.

  [9] The Ponderal Index is found by combining the height and weight.

As will be seen, these charts are very simple. I made them so because I
wished the doctor and the schoolmistress to be able to use them freely
and independently.

By this method the anthropometrical records are arranged in an orderly
way, while the simplicity of the mechanism, and the clearness of the
charts, guarantee the making of such observations as I have considered
fundamental. Referring to the physician's biographical chart, I advise
that once a year the following measurements be taken: Circumference of
the head; the two greater diameters of the head; the circumference of
the chest; and the cephalic, ponderal, and stature indices. Further
information concerning the selection of these measurements may be found
in my treatise, "Antropologia Pedagogica." The physician is asked to
take these measurements during the week, or at least within the month,
in which the child completes a year of his age, and, if it is possible,
on the birthday itself. In this way the task of the physician will also
be made easier, because of its regularity. We have, at the most, fifty
children in each of our schools, and the birthdays of these scattered
over the 365 days of the year make it possible for the physician to take
his measurements from time to time, so that the burden of his work is
not heavy. It is the duty of the teacher to inform the doctor of the
birthdays of the children.

The taking of these anthropometrical measurements has also an
educational side to it, for the pupils, when they leave the "Children's
House," know how to answer with clearness and certainty the following
questions:--

On what day of the week were you born?

On what day of the month?

When does your birthday come?

And with all this they will have acquired habits of order, and, above
all, they will have formed the habit of observing themselves. Indeed, I
may say here, that the children take a great pleasure in being measured;
at the first glance of the teacher and at the word stature, the child
begins instantly to take off his shoes, laughing and running to place
himself upon the platform of the anthropometer; placing himself of his
own accord in the normal position so perfectly that the teacher needs
only to arrange the indicator and read the result.

Aside from the measurements which the physician takes with the ordinary
instruments (calipers and metal yard measure), he makes observations
upon the children's colouring, condition of their muscles, state of
their lymphatic glands, the condition of the blood, etc. He notices any
malformations; describes any pathological conditions with care (any
tendency to rickets, infant paralysis, defective sight, etc.). This
objective study of the child will guide the doctor when he finds it
advisable to talk with the parents concerning its condition. Following
this, when the doctor has found it desirable, he makes a thorough,
sanitary inspection of the home of the child, prescribing necessary
treatment and eventually doing away with such troubles as eczema,
inflammation of the ear, feverish conditions, intestinal disturbances,
etc. This careful following of the case in hand is greatly assisted by
the existence of the _dispensary within the house_, which makes feasible
direct treatment and continual observation.

I have found that the usual question asked patients who present
themselves at the clinics, are not adapted for use in our schools, as
the members of the families living in these tenements are for the
greater part perfectly normal.

I therefore encourage the directress of the school to gather from her
conversations with the mothers information of a more practical sort. She
informs herself as to the education of the parents, their habits, the
wages earned, the money spent for household purposes, etc., and from all
this she outlines a history of each family, much on the order of those
used by Le-Play. This method is, of course, practical only where the
directress lives among the families of her scholars.

In every case, however, the physician's advice to the mothers concerning
the hygienic care of each particular child, as well as his directions
concerning hygiene in general, will prove most helpful. The directress
should act as the go-between in these matters, since she is in the
confidence of the mothers, and since from her, such advice comes
naturally.


ENVIRONMENT: SCHOOLROOM FURNISHINGS

The method of _observation_ must undoubtedly include the _methodical
observation_ of the morphological growth of the pupils. But let me
repeat that, while this element necessarily enters, it is not upon this
particular kind of observation that the method is established.

The method of observation is established upon one fundamental base--_the
liberty of the pupils in their spontaneous manifestations_.

With this in view, I first turned my attention to the question of
environment, and this, of course, included the furnishing of the
schoolroom. In considering an ample playground with space for a garden
as an important part of this school environment, I am not suggesting
anything new.

The novelty lies, perhaps, in my idea for the use of this open-air
space, which is to be in direct communication with the schoolroom, so
that the children may be free to go and come as they like, throughout
the entire day. I shall speak of this more fully later on.

The principal modification in the matter of school furnishings is the
abolition of desks, and benches or stationary chairs. I have had tables
made with wide, solid, octagonal legs, spreading in such a way that the
tables are at the same time solidly firm and very light, so light,
indeed, that two four-year-old children can easily carry them about.
These tables are rectangular and sufficiently large to accommodate two
children on the long side, there being room for three if they sit rather
close together. There are smaller tables at which one child may work
alone.

I also designed and had manufactured little chairs. My first plan for
these was to have them cane seated, but experience has shown the wear on
these to be so great, that I now have chairs made entirely of wood.
These are very light and of an attractive shape. In addition to these, I
have in each schoolroom a number of comfortable little armchairs, some
of wood and some of wicker.

Another piece of our school furniture consists of a little washstand, so
low that it can be used by even a three-year-old child. This is painted
with a white waterproof enamel and, besides the broad, upper and lower
shelves which hold the little white enameled basins and pitchers, there
are small side shelves for the soap-dishes, nail-brushes, towels, etc.
There is also a receptacle into which the basins may be emptied.
Wherever possible, a small cupboard provides each child with a space
where he may keep his own soap, nail-brush, tooth-brush, etc.

In each of our schoolrooms we have provided a series of long low
cupboards, especially designed for the reception of the didactic
materials. The doors of these cupboards open easily, and the care of the
materials is confided to the children. The tops of these cases furnish
room for potted plants, small aquariums, or for the various toys with
which the children are allowed to play freely. We have ample blackboard
space, and these boards are so hung as to be easily used by the smallest
child. Each blackboard is provided with a small case in which are kept
the chalk, and the white cloths which we use instead of the ordinary
erasers.

Above the blackboards are hung attractive pictures, chosen carefully,
representing simple scenes in which children would naturally be
interested. Among the pictures in our "Children's Houses" in Rome we
have hung a copy of Raphael's "Madonna della Seggiola," and this picture
we have chosen as the emblem of the "Children's Houses." For indeed,
these "Children's Houses" represent not only social progress, but
universal human progress, and are closely related to the elevation of
the idea of motherhood, to the progress of woman and to the protection
of her offspring. In this beautiful conception, Raphael has not only
shown us the Madonna as a Divine Mother holding in her arms the babe who
is greater than she, but by the side of this symbol of all motherhood,
he has placed the figure of St. John, who represents humanity.
So in Raphael's picture we see humanity rendering homage to
maternity,--maternity, the sublime fact in the definite triumph of
humanity. In addition to this beautiful symbolism, the picture has a
value as being one of the greatest works of art of Italy's greatest
artist. And if the day shall come when the "Children's Houses" shall be
established throughout the world, it is our wish that this picture of
Raphael's shall have its place in each of the schools, speaking
eloquently of the country in which they originated.

The children, of course, cannot comprehend the symbolic significance of
the "Madonna of the Chair," but they will see something more beautiful
than that which they feel in more ordinary pictures, in which they see
mother, father, and children. And the constant companionship with this
picture will awaken in their heart a religious impression.

This, then, is the environment which I have selected for the children we
wish to educate.


I know the first objection which will present itself to the minds of
persons accustomed to the old-time methods of discipline;--the children
in these schools, moving about, will overturn the little tables and
chairs, producing noise and disorder; but this is a prejudice which has
long existed in the minds of those dealing with little children, and for
which there is no real foundation.

Swaddling clothes have for many centuries been considered necessary to
the new-born babe, walking-chairs to the child who is learning to walk.
So in the school, we still believe it necessary to have heavy desks and
chairs fastened to the floor. All these things are based upon the idea
that the child should grow in immobility, and upon the strange prejudice
that, in order to execute any educational movement, we must maintain a
special position of the body;--as we believe that we must assume a
special position when we are about to pray.

Our little tables and our various types of chairs are all light and
easily transported, and we permit the child to _select_ the position
which he finds most comfortable. He can _make himself comfortable_ as
well as seat himself in his own place. And this freedom is not only an
external sign of liberty, but a means of education. If by an awkward
movement a child upsets a chair, which falls noisily to the floor, he
will have an evident proof of his own incapacity; the same movement had
it taken place amid stationary benches would have passed unnoticed by
him. Thus the child has some means by which he can correct himself, and
having done so he will have before him the actual proof of the power he
has gained: the little tables and chairs remain firm and silent each in
its own place. It is plainly seen that the _child has learned to command
his movements_.

In the old method, the proof of discipline attained lay in a fact
entirely contrary to this; that is, in the immobility and silence of the
child himself. Immobility and silence which _hindered_ the child from
learning to move with grace and with discernment, and left him so
untrained, that, when he found himself in an environment where the
benches and chairs were not nailed to the floor, he was not able to move
about without overturning the lighter pieces of furniture. In the
"Children's Houses" the child will not only learn to move gracefully and
properly, but will come to understand the reason for such deportment.
The ability to move which he acquires here will be of use to him all his
life. While he is still a child, he becomes capable of conducting
himself correctly, and yet, with perfect freedom.

The Directress of the Casa dei Bambini at Milan constructed under one of
the windows a long, narrow shelf upon which she placed the little tables
containing the metal geometric forms used in the first lessons in
design. But the shelf was too narrow, and it often happened that the
children in selecting the pieces which they wished to use would allow
one of the little tables to fall to the floor, thus upsetting with great
noise all the metal pieces which it held. The directress intended to
have the shelf changed, but the carpenter was slow in coming, and while
waiting for him she discovered that the children had learned to handle
these materials so carefully that in spite of the narrow and sloping
shelf, the little tables no longer fell to the floor.

The children, by carefully directing their movements, had overcome the
defect in this piece of furniture. The simplicity or imperfection of
external objects often serves to develop the _activity_ and the
dexterity of the pupils. This has been one of the surprises of our
method as applied in the "Children's Houses."

It all seems very logical, and now that it has been actually tried and
put into words, it will no doubt seem to everyone as simple as the egg
of Christopher Columbus.




CHAPTER V.

DISCIPLINE


The pedagogical method of _observation_ has for its base the _liberty_
of the child; and _liberty is activity_.

Discipline must come through liberty. Here is a great principle which is
difficult for followers of common-school methods to understand. How
shall one obtain _discipline_ in a class of free children? Certainly in
our system, we have a concept of discipline very different from that
commonly accepted. If discipline is founded upon liberty, the discipline
itself must necessarily be _active_. We do not consider an individual
disciplined only when he has been rendered as artificially silent as a
mute and as immovable as a paralytic. He is an individual _annihilated_,
not _disciplined_.

We call an individual disciplined when he is master of himself, and can,
therefore, regulate his own conduct when it shall be necessary to follow
some rule of life. Such a concept of _active discipline_ is not easy
either to comprehend or to apply. But certainly it contains a great
_educational_ principle, very different from the old-time absolute and
undiscussed coercion to immobility.

A special technique is necessary to the teacher who is to lead the child
along such a path of discipline, if she is to make it possible for him
to continue in this way all his life, advancing indefinitely toward
perfect self-mastery. Since the child now learns to _move_ rather than
to _sit still_, he prepares himself not for the school, but for life;
for he becomes able, through habit and through practice, to perform
easily and correctly the simple acts of social or community life. The
discipline to which the child habituates himself here is, in its
character, not limited to the school environment but extends to society.

The liberty of the child should have as its _limit_ the collective
interest; as its _form_, what we universally consider good breeding. We
must, therefore, check in the child whatever offends or annoys others,
or whatever tends toward rough or ill-bred acts. But all the
rest,--every manifestation having a useful scope,--whatever it be, and
under whatever form it expresses itself, must not only be permitted, but
must be _observed_ by the teacher. Here lies the essential point; from
her scientific preparation, the teacher must bring not only the
capacity, but the desire, to observe natural phenomena. In our system,
she must become a passive, much more than an active, influence, and her
passivity shall be composed of anxious scientific curiosity, and of
absolute _respect_ for the phenomenon which she wishes to observe. The
teacher must understand and _feel_ her position of _observer_: the
_activity_ must lie in the _phenomenon_.

Such principles assuredly have a place in schools for little children
who are exhibiting the first psychic manifestations of their lives. We
cannot know the consequences of suffocating a _spontaneous action_ at
the time when the child is just beginning to be active: perhaps we
suffocate _life itself_. Humanity shows itself in all its intellectual
splendour during this tender age as the sun shows itself at the dawn,
and the flower in the first unfolding of the petals; and we must
_respect_ religiously, reverently, these first indications of
individuality. If any educational act is to be efficacious, it will be
only that which tends to _help_ toward the complete unfolding of this
life. To be thus helpful it is necessary rigorously to avoid the
_arrest_ of _spontaneous movements and the imposition of arbitrary
tasks_. It is of course understood, that here we do not speak of useless
or dangerous acts, for these must be _suppressed_, _destroyed_.


Actual training and practice are necessary to fit for this method
teachers who have not been prepared for scientific observation, and such
training is especially necessary to those who have been accustomed to
the old domineering methods of the common school. My experiences in
training teachers for the work in my schools did much to convince me of
the great distance between these methods and those. Even an intelligent
teacher, who understands the principle, finds much difficulty in putting
it into practice. She can not understand that her new task is apparently
_passive_, like that of the astronomer who sits immovable before the
telescope while the worlds whirl through space. This idea, that _life
acts of itself_, and that in order to study it, to divine its secrets or
to direct its activity, it is necessary to observe it and to understand
it without intervening--this idea, I say, is very difficult for anyone
to _assimilate_ and _to put into practice_.

The teacher has too thoroughly learned to be the one free activity of
the school; it has for too long been virtually her duty to suffocate the
activity of her pupils. When in the first days in one of the "Children's
Houses" she does not obtain order and silence, she looks about her
embarrassed as if asking the public to excuse her, and calling upon
those present to testify to her innocence. In vain do we repeat to her
that the disorder of the first moment is necessary. And finally, when we
oblige her to do nothing but _watch_, she asks if she had not better
resign, since she is no longer a teacher.

But when she begins to find it her duty to discern which are the acts to
hinder and which are those to observe, the teacher of the old school
feels a great void within herself and begins to ask if she will not be
inferior to her new task. In fact, she who is not prepared finds herself
for a long time abashed and impotent; whereas the broader the teacher's
scientific culture and practice in experimental psychology, the sooner
will come for her the marvel of unfolding life, and her interest in it.

Notari, in his novel, "My Millionaire Uncle," which is a criticism of
modern customs, gives with that quality of vividness which is peculiar
to him, a most eloquent example of the old-time methods of discipline.
The "uncle" when a child was guilty of such a number of disorderly acts
that he practically upset the whole town, and in desperation he was
confined in a school. Here "Fufu," as he was called, experiences his
first wish to be kind, and feels the first moving of his soul when he is
near to the pretty little Fufetta, and learns that she is hungry and has
no luncheon.

"He glanced around, looked at Fufetta, rose, took his little lunch
basket, and without saying a word placed it in her lap.

"Then he ran away from her, and, without knowing why he did so, hung his
head and burst into tears.

"My uncle did not know how to explain to himself the reason for this
sudden outburst.

"He had seen for the first time two kind eyes full of sad tears, and he
had felt moved within himself, and at the same time a great shame had
rushed over him; the shame of eating near to one who had nothing to eat.

"Not knowing how to express the impulse of his heart, nor what to say in
asking her to accept the offer of his little basket, nor how to invent
an excuse to justify his offering it to her, he remained the victim of
this first deep movement of his little soul.

"Fufetta, all confused, ran to him quickly. With great gentleness she
drew away the arm in which he had hidden his face.

"'Do not cry, Fufu,' she said to him softly, almost as if pleading with
him. She might have been speaking to her beloved rag doll, so motherly
and intent was her little face, and so full of gentle authority, her
manner.

"Then the little girl kissed him, and my uncle yielding to the influence
which had filled his heart, put his arms around her neck, and, still
silent and sobbing, kissed her in return. At last, sighing deeply, he
wiped from his face and eyes the damp traces of his emotion, and smiled
again.

"A strident voice called out from the other end of the courtyard:

"'Here, here, you two down there--be quick with you; inside, both of
you!'

"It was the teacher, the guardian. She crushed that first gentle
stirring in the soul of a rebel with the same blind brutality that she
would have used toward two children engaged in a fight.

"It was the time for all to go back into the school--and everybody had
to obey the rule."

Thus I saw my teachers act in the first days of my practice school in
the "Children's Houses." They almost involuntarily recalled the children
to immobility without _observing_ and _distinguishing_ the nature of
the movements they repressed. There was, for example, a little girl who
gathered her companions about her and then, in the midst of them, began
to talk and gesticulate. The teacher at once ran to her, took hold of
her arms, and told her to be still; but I, observing the child, saw that
she was playing at being teacher or mother to the others, and teaching
them the morning prayer, the invocation to the saints, and the sign of
the cross: she already showed herself as a _director_. Another child,
who continually made disorganised and misdirected movements, and who was
considered abnormal, one day, with an expression of intense attention,
set about moving the tables. Instantly they were upon him to make him
stand still because he made too much noise. Yet this was one of the
_first manifestations_, in this child, of _movements_ that were
_co-ordinated_ and _directed toward a useful end_, and it was therefore
an action that should have been respected. In fact, after this the child
began to be quiet and happy like the others whenever he had any small
objects to move about and to arrange upon his desk.

It often happened that while the directress replaced in the boxes
various materials that had been used, a child would draw near, picking
up the objects, with the evident desire of imitating the teacher. The
first impulse was to send the child back to her place with the remark,
"Let it alone; go to your seat." Yet the child expressed by this act a
desire to be useful; the time, with her, was ripe for a lesson in order.

One day, the children had gathered themselves, laughing and talking,
into a circle about a basin of water containing some floating toys. We
had in the school a little boy barely two and a half years old. He had
been left outside the circle, alone, and it was easy to see that he was
filled with intense curiosity. I watched him from a distance with great
interest; he first drew near to the other children and tried to force
his way among them, but he was not strong enough to do this, and he then
stood looking about him. The expression of thought on his little face
was intensely interesting. I wish that I had had a camera so that I
might have photographed him. His eye lighted upon a little chair, and
evidently he made up his mind to place it behind the group of children
and then to climb up on it. He began to move toward the chair, his face
illuminated with hope, but at that moment the teacher seized him
brutally (or, perhaps, she would have said, gently) in her arms, and
lifting him up above the heads of the other children showed him the
basin of water, saying, "Come, poor little one, you shall see too!"

Undoubtedly the child, seeing the floating toys, did not experience the
joy that he was about to feel through conquering the obstacle with his
own force. The sight of those objects could be of no advantage to him,
while his intelligent efforts would have developed his inner powers.

The teacher _hindered_ the child, in this case, from educating himself,
without giving him any compensating good in return. The little fellow
had been about to feel himself a conqueror, and he found himself held
within two imprisoning arms, impotent. The expression of joy, anxiety,
and hope, which had interested me so much faded from his face and left
on it the stupid expression of the child who knows that others will act
for him.

When the teachers were weary of my observations, they began to allow the
children to do whatever they pleased. I saw children with their feet on
the tables, or with their fingers in their noses, and no intervention
was made to correct them. I saw others push their companions, and I saw
dawn in the faces of these an expression of violence; and not the
slightest attention on the part of the teacher. Then I had to intervene
to show with what absolute rigour it is necessary to hinder, and little
by little suppress, all those things which we must not do, so that the
child may come to discern clearly between good and evil.

If discipline is to be lasting, its foundations must be laid in this way
and these first days are the most difficult for the directress. The
first idea that the child must acquire, in order to be actively
disciplined, is that of the difference between _good_ and _evil_; and
the task of the educator lies in seeing that the child does not confound
_good_ with _immobility_, and _evil_ with _activity_, as often happens
in the case of the old-time discipline. And all this because our aim is
to discipline _for activity_, _for work_, _for good_; not for
_immobility_, not for _passivity_, not for _obedience_.

A room in which all the children move about usefully, intelligently, and
voluntarily, without committing any rough or rude act, would seem to me
a classroom very well disciplined indeed.


To seat the children in rows, as in the common schools, to assign to
each little one a place, and to propose that they shall sit thus quietly
observant of the order of the whole class as an assemblage--this can be
attained later, as _the starting place_ of _collective education_. For
also, in life, it sometimes happens that we must all remain seated and
quiet; when, for example, we attend a concert or a lecture. And we know
that even to us, as grown people, this costs no little sacrifice.

If we can, when we have established individual discipline, arrange the
children, sending each one to _his own place_, _in order_, trying to
make them understand the idea that thus placed they look well, and that
it is a _good thing_ to be thus placed in order, that it is a _good and
pleasing arrangement in the room_, this ordered and tranquil adjustment
of theirs--then their remaining in their places, _quiet_ and _silent_,
is the result of a species of _lesson_, not an _imposition_. To make
them understand the idea, without calling their attention too forcibly
to the practice, to have them _assimilate a principle of collective
order_--that is the important thing.

If, after they have understood this idea, they rise, speak, change to
another place, they no longer do this without knowing and without
thinking, but they do it because they _wish_ to rise, to speak, etc.;
that is, from that _state of repose and order_, well understood, they
depart in order to undertake _some voluntary action_; and knowing that
there are actions which are prohibited, this will give them a new
impulse to remember to discriminate between good and evil.

The movements of the children from the state of order become always more
co-ordinated and perfect with the passing of the days; in fact, they
learn to reflect upon their own acts. Now (with the idea of order
understood by the children) the observation of the way in which the
children pass from the first disordered movements to those which are
spontaneous and ordered--this is the book of the teacher; this is the
book which must inspire her actions; it is the only one in which she
must read and study if she is to become a real educator.

For the child with such exercises makes, to a certain extent, a
selection of his own _tendencies_, which were at first confused in the
unconscious disorder of his movements. It is remarkable how clearly
_individual differences_ show themselves, if we proceed in this way; the
child, conscious and free, _reveals himself_.

There are those who remain quietly in their seats, apathetic, or drowsy;
others who leave their places to quarrel, to fight, or to overturn the
various blocks and toys, and then there are those others who set out to
fulfil a definite and determined act--moving a chair to some particular
spot and sitting down in it, moving one of the unused tables and
arranging upon it the game they wish to play.

Our idea of liberty for the child cannot be the simple concept of
liberty we use in the observation of plants, insects, etc.

The child, because of the peculiar characteristics of helplessness with
which he is born, and because of his qualities as a social individual is
circumscribed by _bonds_ which _limit_ his activity.

An educational method that shall have _liberty_ as its basis must
intervene to help the child to a conquest of these various obstacles. In
other words, his training must be such as shall help him to diminish, in
a rational manner, the _social bonds_, which limit his activity.

Little by little, as the child grows in such an atmosphere, his
spontaneous manifestations will become more _clear, with the clearness
of truth_, revealing his nature. For all these reasons, the first form
of educational intervention must tend to lead the child toward
independence.


INDEPENDENCE

No one can be free unless he is independent: therefore, the first,
active manifestations of the child's individual liberty must be so
guided that through this activity he may arrive at independence. Little
children, from the moment in which they are weaned, are making their way
toward independence.

What is a weaned child? In reality it is a child that has become
independent of the mother's breast. Instead of this one source of
nourishment he will find various kinds of food; for him the means of
existence are multiplied, and he can to some extent make a selection of
his food, whereas he was at first limited absolutely to one form of
nourishment.

Nevertheless, he is still dependent, since he is not yet able to walk,
and cannot wash and dress himself, and since he is not yet able to _ask_
for things in a language which is clear and easily understood. He is
still in this period to a great extent the _slave_ of everyone. By the
age of three, however, the child should have been able to render himself
to a great extent _independent_ and free.

That we have not yet thoroughly assimilated the highest concept of the
term _independence_, is due to the fact that the social form in which we
live is still _servile_. In an age of civilisation where servants exist,
the concept of that _form of life_ which is _independence_ cannot take
root or develop freely. Even so in the time of slavery, the concept of
liberty was distorted and darkened.

Our servants are not our dependents, rather it is we who are dependent
upon them.

It is not possible to accept universally as a part of our social
structure such a deep human error without feeling the general effects of
it in the form of moral inferiority. We often believe ourselves to be
independent simply because no one commands us, and because we command
others; but the nobleman who needs to call a servant to his aid is
really a dependent through his own inferiority. The paralytic who
cannot take off his boots because of a pathological fact, and the prince
who dare not take them off because of a social fact, are in reality
reduced to the same condition.

Any nation that accepts the idea of servitude and believes that it is an
advantage for man to be served by man, admits servility as an instinct,
and indeed we all too easily lend ourselves to _obsequious service_,
giving to it such complimentary names as _courtesy_, _politeness_,
_charity_.

In reality, _he who is served is limited_ in his independence. This
concept will be the foundation of the dignity of the man of the future;
"I do not wish to be served, _because_ I am not an impotent." And this
idea must be gained before men can feel themselves to be really free.

Any pedagogical action, if it is to be efficacious in the training of
little children, must tend to _help_ the children to advance upon this
road of independence. We must help them to learn to walk without
assistance, to run, to go up and down stairs, to lift up fallen objects,
to dress and undress themselves, to bathe themselves, to speak
distinctly, and to express their own needs clearly. We must give such
help as shall make it possible for children to achieve the satisfaction
of their own individual aims and desires. All this is a part of
education for independence.

We habitually _serve_ children; and this is not only an act of servility
toward them, but it is dangerous, since it tends to suffocate their
useful, spontaneous activity. We are inclined to believe that children
are like puppets, and we wash them and feed them as if they were dolls.
We do not stop to think that the child _who does not do, does not know
how to do_. He must, nevertheless, do these things, and nature has
furnished him with the physical means for carrying on these various
activities, and with the intellectual means for learning how to do them.
And our duty toward him is, in every case, that of _helping him_ to make
a conquest of such useful acts as nature intended he should perform for
himself. The mother who feeds her child without making the least effort
to teach him to hold the spoon for himself and to try to find his mouth
with it, and who does not at least eat herself, inviting the child to
look and see how she does it, is not a good mother. She offends the
fundamental human dignity of her son,--she treats him as if he were a
doll, when he is, instead, a man confided by nature to her care.

Who does not know that to _teach_ a child to feed himself, to wash and
dress himself, is a much more tedious and difficult work, calling for
infinitely greater patience, than feeding, washing and dressing the
child one's self? But the former is the work of an educator, the latter
is the easy and inferior work of a servant. Not only is it easier for
the mother, but it is very dangerous for the child, since it doses the
way and puts obstacles in the path of the life which is developing.

The ultimate consequences of such an attitude on the part of the parent
may be very serious indeed. The grand gentleman who has too many
servants not only grows constantly more and more dependent upon them,
until he is, finally, actually their slave, but his muscles grow weak
through inactivity and finally lose their natural capacity for action.
The mind of one who does not work for that which he needs, but commands
it from others, grows heavy and sluggish. If such a man should some day
awaken to the fact of his inferior position and should wish to regain
once more his own independence, he would find that he had no longer the
force to do so. These dangers should be presented to the parents of the
privileged social classes, if their children are to use independently
and for right the special power which is theirs. Needless help is an
actual hindrance to the development of natural forces.

Oriental women wear trousers, it is true, and European women,
petticoats; but the former, even more than the latter, are taught as a
part of their education the art of _not moving_. Such an attitude toward
woman leads to the fact that man works not only for himself, but for
woman. And the woman wastes her natural strength and activity and
languishes in slavery. She is not only maintained and served, she is,
besides, diminished, belittled, in that individuality which is hers by
right of her existence as a human being. As an individual member of
society, she is a cypher. She is rendered deficient in all those powers
and resources which tend to the preservation of life. Let me illustrate
this:

A carriage containing a father, mother, and child, is going along a
country road. An armed brigand stops the carriage with the well-known
phrase, "Your money or your life." Placed in this situation, the three
persons in the carriage act in very different ways. The man, who is a
trained marksman, and who is armed with a revolver, promptly draws, and
confronts the assassin. The boy, armed only with the freedom and
lightness of his own legs, cries out and betakes himself to flight. The
woman, who is not armed in any way whatever, neither artificially nor
naturally (since her limbs, not trained for activity, are hampered by
her skirts), gives a frightened gasp, and sinks down unconscious.

These three diverse reactions are in close relation to the state of
liberty and independence of each of the three individuals. The swooning
woman is she whose cloak is carried for her by attentive cavaliers, who
are quick to pick up any fallen object that she may be spared all
exertion.

The peril of servilism and dependence lies not only in that "useless
consuming of life," which leads to helplessness, but in the development
of individual traits which indicate all too plainly a regrettable
perversion and degeneration of the normal man. I refer to the
domineering and tyrannical behaviour with examples of which we are all
only too familiar. The domineering habit develops side by side with
helplessness. It is the outward sign of the state of feeling of him who
conquers through the work of others. Thus it often happens that the
master is a tyrant toward his servant. It is the spirit of the
task-master toward the slave.

Let us picture to ourselves a clever and proficient workman, capable,
not only of producing much and perfect work, but of giving advice in his
workshop, because of his ability to control and direct the general
activity of the environment in which he works. The man who is thus
master of his environment will be able to smile before the anger of
others, showing that great mastery of himself which comes from
consciousness of his ability to do things. We should not, however, be in
the least surprised to know that in his home this capable workman
scolded his wife if the soup was not to his taste, or not ready at the
appointed time. In his home, he is no longer the capable workman; the
skilled workman here is the wife, who serves him and prepares his food
for him. He is a serene and pleasant man where he is powerful through
being efficient, but is domineering where he is served. Perhaps if he
should learn how to prepare his soup he might become a perfect man! The
man who, through his own efforts, is able to perform all the actions
necessary for his comfort and development in life, conquers himself, and
in doing so multiplies his abilities and perfects himself as an
individual.

We must make of the future generation, _powerful men_, and by that we
mean men who are independent and free.


ABOLITION OF PRIZES AND OF EXTERNAL FORMS OF PUNISHMENT

Once we have accepted and established such principles, the abolition of
prizes and external forms of punishment will follow naturally. Man,
disciplined through liberty, begins to desire the true and only prize
which will never belittle or disappoint him,--the birth of human power
and liberty within that inner life of his from which his activities must
spring.

In my own experience I have often marvelled to see how true this is.
During our first months in the "Children's Houses," the teachers had not
yet learned to put into practice the pedagogical principles of liberty
and discipline. One of them, especially, busied herself, when I was
absent, in _remedying_ my ideas by introducing a few of those methods to
which she had been accustomed. So, one day when I came in unexpectedly,
I found one of the most intelligent of the children wearing a large
Greek cross of silver, hung from his neck by a fine piece of white
ribbon, while another child was seated in an armchair which had been
conspicuously placed in the middle of the room.

The first child had been rewarded, the second was being punished. The
teacher, at least while I was present, did not interfere in any way,
and the situation remained as I had found it. I held my peace, and
placed myself where I might observe quietly.

The child with the cross was moving back and forth, carrying the objects
with which he had been working, from his table to that of the teacher,
and bringing others in their place. He was busy and happy. As he went
back and forth he passed by the armchair of the child who was being
punished. The silver cross slipped from his neck and fell to the floor,
and the child in the armchair picked it up, dangled it on its white
ribbon, looking at it from all sides, and then said to his companion:
"Do you see what you have dropped?" The child turned and looked at the
trinket with an air of indifference; his expression seemed to say;
"Don't interrupt me," his voice replied "I don't care." "Don't you care,
really?" said the punished one calmly. "Then I will put it on myself."
And the other replied, "Oh, yes, put it on," in a tone that seemed to
add, "and leave me in peace!"

The boy in the armchair carefully arranged the ribbon so that the cross
lay upon the front of his pink apron where he could admire its
brightness and its pretty form, then he settled himself more comfortably
in his little chair and rested his arms with evident pleasure upon the
arms of the chair. The affair remained thus, and was quite just. The
dangling cross could satisfy the child who was being punished, but not
the active child, content and happy with his work.

One day I took with me on a visit to another of the "Children's Houses"
a lady who praised the children highly and who, opening a box she had
brought, showed them a number of shining medals, each tied with a bright
red ribbon. "The mistress," she said "will put these on the breasts of
those children who are the cleverest and the best."

As I was under no obligation to instruct this visitor in my methods, I
kept silence, and the teacher took the box. At that moment, a most
intelligent little boy of four, who was seated quietly at one of the
little tables, wrinkled his forehead in an act of protest and cried out
over and over again;--"Not to the boys, though, not to the boys!"

What a revelation! This little fellow already knew that he stood among
the best and strongest of his class, although no one had ever revealed
this fact to him, and he did not wish to be offended by this prize. Not
knowing how to defend his dignity, he invoked the superior quality of
his masculinity!

As to punishments, we have many times come in contact with children who
disturbed the others without paying any attention to our corrections.
Such children were at once examined by the physician. When the case
proved to be that of a normal child, we placed one of the little tables
in a corner of the room, and in this way isolated the child; having him
sit in a comfortable little armchair, so placed that he might see his
companions at work, and giving him those games and toys to which he was
most attracted. This isolation almost always succeeded in calming the
child; from his position he could see the entire assembly of his
companions, and the way in which they carried on their work was an
_object lesson_ much more efficacious than any words of the teacher
could possibly have been. Little by little, he would come to see the
advantages of being one of the company working so busily before his
eyes, and he would really wish to go back and do as the others did. We
have in this way led back again to discipline all the children who at
first seemed to rebel against it. The isolated child was always made the
object of special care, almost as if he were ill. I myself, when I
entered the room, went first of all directly to him, caressing him, as
if he were a very little child. Then I turned my attention to the
others, interesting myself in their work, asking questions about it as
if they had been little men. I do not know what happened in the soul of
these children whom we found it necessary to discipline, but certainly
the conversion was always very complete and lasting. They showed great
pride in learning how to work and how to conduct themselves, and always
showed a very tender affection for the teacher and for me.


THE BIOLOGICAL CONCEPT OF LIBERTY IN PEDAGOGY

From a biological point of view, the concept of _liberty_ in the
education of the child in his earliest years must be understood as
demanding those conditions adapted to the most favourable _development_
of his entire individuality. So, from the physiological side as well as
from the mental side, this includes the free development of the brain.
The educator must be as one inspired by a deep _worship of life_, and
must, through this reverence, _respect_, while he observes with human
interest, the _development_ of the child life. Now, child life is not an
abstraction; _it is the life of individual children_. There exists only
one real biological manifestation: the _living individual_; and toward
single individuals, one by one observed, education must direct itself.
By education must be understood the active _help_ given to the normal
expansion of the life of the child. The child is a body which grows, and
a soul which develops,--these two forms, physiological and psychic, have
one eternal font, life itself. We must neither mar nor stifle the
mysterious powers which lie within these two forms of growth, but we
must _await from them_ the manifestations which we know will succeed one
another.

_Environment_ is undoubtedly a _secondary_ factor in the phenomena of
life; it can modify in that it can help or hinder, but it can never
_create_. The modern theories of evolution, from Naegeli to De Vries,
consider throughout the development of the two biological branches,
animal and vegetable, this interior factor as the essential force in the
transformation of the species and in the transformation of the
individual. The origins of the _development_, both in the species and in
the individual, _lie within_. The child does not grow _because_ he is
nourished, _because_ he breathes, _because_ he is placed in conditions
of temperature to which he is adapted; he grows because the potential
life within him develops, making itself visible; because the fruitful
germ from which his life has come develops itself according to the
biological destiny which was fixed for it by heredity. Adolescence does
not come _because_ the child laughs, or dances, or does gymnastic
exercises, or is well nourished; but because he has arrived at that
particular physiological state. Life makes itself manifest,--life
creates, life gives:--and is in its turn held within certain limits and
bound by certain laws which are insuperable. The _fixed_ characteristics
of the species do not change,--they can only vary.

This concept, so brilliantly set forth by De Vries in his Mutation
Theory, illustrates also the limits of education. We can act on the
_variations_ which are in relation to the environment, and whose limits
vary slightly in the species and in the individual, but we cannot act
upon the _mutations_. The mutations are bound by some mysterious tie to
the very font of life itself, and their power rises superior to the
modifying elements of the environment.

A species, for example, cannot _mutate_ or change into another species
through any phenomenon of _adaptation_, as, on the other hand, a great
human genius cannot be suffocated by any limitation, nor by any false
form of education.

The _environment_ acts more strongly upon the individual life the less
fixed and strong this individual life may be. But environment can act in
two opposite senses, favouring life, and stifling it. Many species of
palm, for example, are splendid in the tropical regions, because the
climatic conditions are favourable to their development, but many
species of both animals and plants have become extinct in regions to
which they were not able to adapt themselves.

Life is a superb goddess, always advancing, overthrowing the obstacles
which environment places in the way of her triumph. This is the basic
or fundamental truth,--whether it be a question of species or of
individuals, there persists always the forward march of those victorious
ones in whom this mysterious life-force is strong and vital.

It is evident that in the case of humanity, and especially in the case
of our civil humanity, which we call society, the important and
imperative question is that of the _care_, or perhaps we might say, the
_culture_ of human life.




CHAPTER VI

HOW THE LESSONS SHOULD BE GIVEN

    "Let all thy words be counted."
                                     _Dante, Inf., canto_ X.


Given the fact that, through the regime of liberty the pupils can
manifest their natural tendencies in the school, and that with this in
view we have prepared the environment and the materials (the objects
with which the child is to work), the teacher must not limit her action
to _observation_, but must proceed to _experiment_.

In this method the lesson corresponds to an _experiment_. The more fully
the teacher is acquainted with the methods of experimental psychology,
the better will she understand how to give the lesson. Indeed, a special
technique is necessary if the method is to be properly applied. The
teacher must at least have attended the training classes in the
"Children's Houses," in order to acquire a knowledge of the fundamental
principles of the method and to understand their application. The most
difficult portion of this training is that which refers to the method
for discipline.

In the first days of the school the children do not learn the idea of
collective order; this idea follows and comes as a result of those
disciplinary exercises through which the child learns to discern between
good and evil. This being the case, it is evident that, at the outset
the teacher _cannot give_ collective lessons. Such lessons, indeed, will
always be _very rare_, since the children being free are not obliged to
remain in their places quiet and ready to listen to the teacher, or to
watch what she is doing. The collective lessons, in fact, are of very
secondary importance, and have been almost abolished by us.


CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDIVIDUAL LESSONS:--CONCISENESS, SIMPLICITY,
OBJECTIVITY

The lessons, then, are individual, and _brevity_ must be one of their
chief characteristics. Dante gives excellent advice to teachers when he
says, "Let thy words be counted." The more carefully we cut away useless
words, the more perfect will become the lesson. And in preparing the
lessons which she is to give, the teacher must pay special attention to
this point, counting and weighing the value of the words which she is to
speak.

Another characteristic quality of the lesson in the "Children's Houses"
is its _simplicity_. It must be stripped of all that is not absolute
truth. That the teacher must not lose herself in vain words, is included
in the first quality of conciseness; this second, then, is closely
related to the first: that is, the carefully chosen words must be the
most simple it is possible to find, and must refer to the truth.

The third quality of the lesson is its _objectivity_. The lesson must be
presented in such a way that the personality of the teacher shall
disappear. There shall remain in evidence only the _object_ to which she
wishes to call the attention of the child. This brief and simple lesson
must be considered by the teacher as an explanation of the object and of
the use which the child can make of it.

In the giving of such lessons the fundamental guide must be the _method
of observation_, in which is included and understood the liberty of the
child. So the teacher shall _observe_ whether the child interests
himself in the object, how he is interested in it, for how long, etc.,
even noticing the expression of his face. And she must take great care
not to offend the principles of liberty. For, if she provokes the child
to make an unnatural effort, she will no longer know what is the
_spontaneous_ activity of the child. If, therefore, the lesson
rigorously prepared in this brevity, simplicity and truth is not
understood by the child, is not accepted by him as an explanation of the
object,--the teacher must be warned of two things:--first, not to
_insist_ by repeating the lesson; and second, _not to make the child
feel that he has made a mistake_, or that he is not understood, because
in doing so she will cause him to make an effort to understand, and will
thus alter the natural state which must be used by her in making her
psychological observation. A few examples may serve to illustrate this
point.

Let us suppose, for example, that the teacher wishes to teach to a child
the two colours, red and blue. She desires to attract the attention of
the child to the object. She says, therefore, "Look at this." Then, in
order to teach the colours, she says, showing him the red, "This is
_red_," raising her voice a little and pronouncing the word "red" slowly
and clearly; then showing him the other colour, "This is _blue_." In
order to make sure that the child has understood, she says to him, "Give
me the red,"--"Give me the blue." Let us suppose that the child in
following this last direction makes a mistake. The teacher does not
repeat and does not insist; she smiles, gives the child a friendly
caress and takes away the colours.

Teachers ordinarily are greatly surprised at such simplicity. They often
say, "But everybody knows how to do that!" Indeed, this again is a
little like the egg of Christopher Columbus, but the truth is that not
everyone knows how to do this simple thing (to give a lesson with such
simplicity). To _measure_ one's own activity, to make it conform to
these standards of clearness, brevity and truth, is practically a very
difficult matter. Especially is this true of teachers prepared by the
old-time methods, who have learned to labour to deluge the child with
useless, and often, false words. For example, a teacher who had taught
in the public schools often reverted to collectivity. Now in giving a
collective lesson much importance is necessarily given to the simple
thing which is to be taught, and it is necessary to oblige all the
children to follow the teacher's explanation, when perhaps not all of
them are disposed to give their attention to the particular lesson in
hand. The teacher has perhaps commenced her lesson in this
way:--"Children, see if you can guess what I have in my hand!" She knows
that the children cannot guess, and she therefore attracts their
attention by means of a falsehood. Then she probably says,--"Children,
look out at the sky. Have you ever looked at it before? Have you never
noticed it at night when it is all shining with stars? No! Look at my
apron. Do you know what colour it is? Doesn't it seem to you the same
colour as the sky? Very well then, look at this colour I have in my
hand. It is the same colour as the sky and my apron. It is _blue_. Now
look around you a little and see if you can find something in the room
which is blue. And do you know what colour cherries are, and the colour
of the burning coals in the fireplace, etc., etc."

Now in the mind of the child after he has made the useless effort of
trying to guess there revolves a confused mass of ideas,--the sky, the
apron, the cherries, etc. It will be difficult for him to extract from
all this confusion the idea which it was the scope of the lesson to
make clear to him; namely, the recognition of the two colours, blue and
red. Such a work of selection is almost impossible for the mind of a
child who is not yet able to follow a long discourse.

I remember being present at an arithmetic lesson where the children were
being taught that two and three make five. To this end, the teacher made
use of a counting board having  beads strung on its thin wires.
She arranged, for example, two beads on the top line, then on a lower
line three, and at the bottom five beads. I do not remember very clearly
the development of this lesson, but I do know that the teacher found it
necessary to place beside the two beads on the upper wire a little
cardboard dancer with a blue skirt, which she christened on the spot the
name of one of the children in the class, saying, "This is Mariettina."
And then beside the other three beads she placed a little dancer dressed
in a different colour, which she called "Gigina." I do not know exactly
how the teacher arrived at the demonstration of the same, but certainly
she talked for a long time with these little dancers, moving them about,
etc. If _I_ remember the dancers more clearly than I do the arithmetic
process, how must it have been with the children? If by such a method
they were able to learn that two and three make five, they must have
made a tremendous mental effort, and the teacher must have found it
necessary to talk with the little dancers for a long time.

In another lesson a teacher wished to demonstrate to the children the
difference between noise and sound. She began by telling a long story to
the children. Then suddenly someone in league with her knocked noisily
at the door. The teacher stopped and cried out--"What is it! What's
happened! What is the matter! Children, do you know what this person at
the door has done? I can no longer go on with my story, I cannot
remember it any more. I will have to leave it unfinished. Do you know
what has happened? Did you hear! Have you understood? That was a noise,
that is a noise. Oh! I would much rather play with this little baby
(taking up a mandolin which she had dressed up in a table cover). Yes,
dear baby, I had rather play with you. Do you see this baby that I am
holding in my arms?" Several children replied, "It isn't a baby." Others
said, "It's a mandolin." The teacher went on--"No, no, it is a baby,
really a baby. I love this little baby. Do you want me to show you that
it is a baby? Keep very, very quiet then. It seems to me that the baby
is crying. Or, perhaps it is talking, or perhaps it is going to say papa
or mamma." Putting her hand under the cover, she touched the strings of
the mandolin. "There! did you hear the baby cry! Did you hear it call
out?" The children cried out--"It's a mandolin, you touched the strings,
you made it play." The teacher then replied, "Be quiet, be quiet,
children. Listen to what I am going to do." Then she uncovered the
mandolin and began to play on it, saying, "This is sound."

To suppose that the child from such a lesson as this shall come to
understand the difference between noise and sound is ridiculous. The
child will probably get the impression that the teacher wished to play a
joke, and that she is rather foolish, because she lost the thread of her
discourse when she was interrupted by noise, and because she mistook a
mandolin for a baby. Most certainly, it is the figure of the teacher
herself that is impressed upon the child's mind through such a lesson,
and not the object for which the lesson was given.

To obtain a _simple lesson_ from a teacher who has been prepared
according to the ordinary methods, is a very difficult task. I remember
that, after having explained the material fully and in detail, I called
upon one of my teachers to teach, by means of the geometric insets, the
difference between a square and a triangle. The task of the teacher was
simply to fit a square and a triangle of wood into the empty spaces made
to receive them. She should then have shown the child how to follow with
his finger the contours of the wooden pieces and of the frames into
which they fit, saying, meanwhile, "This is a square--this is a
triangle." The teacher whom I had called upon began by having the child
touch the square, saying, "This is a line,--another,--another,--and
another. There are four lines: count them with your little finger and
tell me how many there are. And the corners,--count the corners, feel
them with your little finger. See, there are four corners too. Look at
this piece well. It is a square." I corrected the teacher, telling her
that in this way she was not teaching the child to recognise a form, but
was giving him an idea of sides, of angles, of number, and that this was
a very different thing from that which she was to teach in this lesson.
"But," she said, trying to justify herself, "it is the same thing." It
is not, however, the same thing. It is the geometric analysis and the
mathematics of the thing. It would be possible to have an idea of the
form of the quadrilateral without knowing how to count to four, and,
therefore, without appreciating the number of sides and angles. The
sides and the angles are abstractions which in themselves do not exist;
that which does exist is this piece of wood of a determined form. The
elaborate explanations of the teacher not only confused the child's
mind, but bridged over the distance that lies between the concrete and
the abstract, between the form of an object and the mathematics of the
form.

Let as suppose, I said to the teacher, that an architect shows you a
dome, the form of which interests you. He can follow one of two methods
in showing you his work: he can call attention to the beauty of line,
the harmony of the proportions, and may then take you inside the
building and up into the cupola itself, in order that you may appreciate
the relative proportion of the parts in such a way that your impression
of the cupola as a whole shall be founded on general knowledge of its
parts, or he can have you count the windows, the wide or narrow
cornices, and can, in fact, make you a design showing the construction;
he can illustrate for you the static laws and write out the algebraic
formulae necessary in the calculation of such laws. In the first place,
you will be able to retain in your mind the form of the cupola; in the
second, you will have understood nothing, and will come away with the
impression that the architect fancied himself speaking to a fellow
engineer, instead of to a traveller whose object was to become familiar
with the beautiful things about him. Very much the same thing happens if
we, instead of saying to the child, "This is a square," and by simply
having him touch the contour establish materially the idea of the form,
proceed rather to a geometrical analysis of the contour.

Indeed, we should feel that we are making the child precocious if we
taught him the geometric forms in the plane, presenting at the same time
the mathematical concept, but we do not believe that the child is too
immature to appreciate the simple _form_; on the contrary, it is no
effort for a child to look at a square window or table,--he sees all
these forms about him in his daily life. To call his attention to a
determined form is to clarify the impression he has already received of
it, and to fix the idea of it. It is very much as if, while we are
looking absent-mindedly at the shore of a lake, an artist should
suddenly say to us--"How beautiful the curve is that the shore makes
there under the shade of that cliff." At his words, the view which we
have been observing almost unconsciously, is impressed upon our minds as
if it had been illuminated by a sudden ray of sunshine, and we
experience the joy of having crystallised an impression which we had
before only imperfectly felt.

And such is our duty toward the child: to give a ray of light and to go
on our way.

I may liken the effects of these first lessons to the impressions of one
who walks quietly, happily, through a wood, alone, and thoughtful,
letting his inner life unfold freely. Suddenly, the chime of a distant
bell recalls him to himself, and in that awakening he feels more
strongly than before the peace and beauty of which he has been but dimly
conscious.

To stimulate life,--leaving it then free to develop, to unfold,--herein
lies the first task of the educator. In such a delicate task, a great
art must suggest the moment, and limit the intervention, in order that
we shall arouse no perturbation, cause no deviation, but rather that we
shall help the soul which is coming into the fulness of life, and which
shall live from its _own forces_. This _art_ must accompany the
_scientific method_.

When the teacher shall have touched, in this way, soul for soul, each
one of her pupils, awakening and inspiring the life within them as if
she were an invisible spirit, she will then possess each soul, and a
sign, a single word from her shall suffice; for each one will feel her
in a living and vital way, will recognise her and will listen to her.
There will come a day when the directress herself shall be filled with
wonder to see that all the children obey her with gentleness and
affection, not only ready, but intent, at a sign from her. They will
look toward her who has made them live, and will hope and desire to
receive from her, new life.

Experience has revealed all this, and it is something which forms the
chief source of wonder for those who visit the "Children's Houses."
Collective discipline is obtained as if by magic force. Fifty or sixty
children from two and a half years to six years of age, all together,
and at a single time know how to hold their peace so perfectly that the
absolute silence seems that of a desert. And, if the teacher, speaking
in a low voice, says to the children, "Rise, pass several times around
the room on the tips of your toes and then come back to your place in
silence" all together, as a single person, the children rise, and follow
the order with the least possible noise. The teacher with that one voice
has spoken to each one; and each child hopes from her intervention to
receive some light and inner happiness. And feeling so, he goes forth
intent and obedient like an anxious explorer, following the order in his
own way.


In this matter of discipline we have again something of the egg of
Christopher Columbus. A concert-master must prepare his scholars one by
one in order to draw from their collective work great and beautiful
harmony; and each artist must perfect himself as an individual before he
can be ready to follow the voiceless commands of the master's baton.

How different is the method which we follow in the public schools! It is
as if a concert-master taught the same monotonous and sometimes
discordant rhythm contemporaneously to the most diverse instruments and
voices.

Thus we find that the most disciplined members of society are the men
who are best trained, who have most thoroughly perfected themselves, but
this is the training or the perfection acquired through contact with
other people. The perfection of the collectivity cannot be that material
and brutal solidarity which comes from mechanical organisation alone.

In regard to infant psychology, we are more richly endowed with
prejudices than with actual knowledge bearing upon the subject. We have,
until the present day, wished to dominate the child through force, by
the imposition of external laws, instead of making an interior conquest
of the child, in order to direct him as a human soul. In this way, the
children have lived beside us without being able to make us know them.
But if we cut away the artificiality with which we have enwrapped them,
and the violence through which we have foolishly thought to discipline
them, they will reveal themselves to us in all the truth of child
nature.

Their gentleness is so absolute, so sweet, that we recognise in it the
infancy of that humility which can remain oppressed by every form of
yoke, by every injustice; and child love and _knowledge_ is such that it
surpasses every other love and makes us think that in very truth
humanity must carry within it that passion which pushes the minds of men
to the successive conquest of thought, making easier from century to
century the yokes of every form of slavery.




CHAPTER VII

EXERCISES OF PRACTICAL LIFE


PROPOSED WINTER SCHEDULE OF HOURS IN THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"

Opening at Nine O'clock--Closing at Four O'clock

    9-10. Entrance. Greeting. Inspection as to personal
    cleanliness. Exercises of practical life; helping one another
    to take off and put on the aprons. Going over the room to see
    that everything is dusted and in order. Language: Conversation
    period: Children give an account of the events of the day
    before. Religious exercises.

    10-11. Intellectual exercises. Objective lessons interrupted
    by short rest periods. Nomenclature, Sense exercises.

    11-11:30. Simple gymnastics: Ordinary movements done
    gracefully, normal position of the body, walking, marching in
    line, salutations, movements for attention, placing of objects
    gracefully.

    11:30-12. Luncheon: Short prayer.

    12-1. Free games.

    1-2. Directed games, if possible, in the open air. During this
    period the older children in turn go through with the
    exercises of practical life, cleaning the room, dusting,
    putting the material in order. General inspection for
    cleanliness: Conversation.

    2-3. Manual work. Clay modelling, design, etc.

    3-4. Collective gymnastics and songs, if possible in the open
    air. Exercises to develop forethought: Visiting, and caring
    for, the plants and animals.

As soon as a school is established, the question of schedule arises.
This must be considered from two points of view; the length of the
school-day and the distribution of study and of the activities of life.

I shall begin by affirming that in the "Children's Houses," as in the
school for deficients, the hours may be very long, occupying the entire
day. For poor children, and especially for the "Children's Houses"
annexed to workingmen's tenements, I should advise that the school-day
should be from nine in the morning to five in the evening in winter, and
from eight to six in summer. These long hours are necessary, if we are
to follow a directed line of action which shall be helpful to the growth
of the child. It goes without saying, that in the case of little
children such a long school-day should be interrupted by at least an
hour's rest in bed. And here lies the great practical difficulty. At
present we must allow our little ones to sleep in their seats in a
wretched position, but I foresee a time, not distant, when we shall be
able to have a quiet, darkened room where the children may sleep in
low-swung hammocks. I should like still better to have this nap taken in
the open air.

In the "Children's Houses" in Rome we send the little ones to their own
apartments for the nap, as this can be done without their having to go
out into the streets.

It must be observed that these long hours include not only the nap, but
the luncheon. This must be considered in such schools as the "Children's
Houses," whose aim is to help and to direct the growth of children in
such an important period of development as that from three to six years
of age.

The "Children's House" is a garden of child culture, and we most
certainly do not keep the children for so many hours in school with the
idea of making students of them!

The first step which we must take in our method is to _call_ to the
pupil. We call now to his attention, now to his interior life, now to
the life he leads with others. Making a comparison which must not be
taken in a literal sense,--it is necessary to proceed as in experimental
psychology or anthropology when one makes an experiment,--that is, after
having prepared the instrument (to which in this case the environment
may correspond) we prepare the subject. Considering the method as a
whole, we must begin our work by preparing the child for the forms of
social life, and we must attract his attention to these forms.

In the schedule which we outlined when we established the first
"Children's House," but which we have never followed entirely, (a sign
that a schedule in which the material is distributed in arbitrary
fashion is not adapted to the regime of liberty) we begin the day with a
series of exercises of practical life, and I must confess that these
exercises were the only part of the programme which proved thoroughly
stationary. These exercises were such a success that they formed the
beginning of the day in all of the "Children's Houses." First:

  Cleanliness.
  Order.
  Poise.
  Conversation.

As soon as the children arrive at school we make an inspection for
cleanliness. If possible, this should be carried on in the presence of
the mothers, but their attention should not be called to it directly. We
examine the hands, the nails, the neck, the ears, the face, the teeth;
and care is given to the tidiness of the hair. If any of the garments
are torn or soiled or ripped, if the buttons are lacking, or if the
shoes are not clean, we call the attention of the child to this. In this
way, the children become accustomed to observing themselves and take an
interest in their own appearance.

The children in our "Children's Houses" are given a bath in turn, but
this, of course, can not be done daily. In the class, however, the
teacher, by using a little washstand with small pitchers and basins,
teaches the children to take a partial bath: for example, they learn how
to wash their hands and clean their nails. Indeed, sometimes we teach
them how to take a foot-bath. They are shown especially how to wash
their ears and eyes with great care. They are taught to brush their
teeth and rinse their mouths carefully. In all of this, we call their
attention to the different parts of the body which they are washing, and
to the different means which we use in order to cleanse them: clear
water for the eyes, soap and water for the hands, the brush for the
teeth, etc. We teach the big ones to help the little ones, and, so,
encourage the younger children to learn quickly to take care of
themselves.

After this care of their persons, we put on the little aprons. The
children are able to put these on themselves, or, with the help of each
other. Then we begin our visit about the schoolroom. We notice if all of
the various materials are in order and if they are clean. The teacher
shows the children how to clean out the little corners where dust has
accumulated, and shows them how to use the various objects necessary in
cleaning a room,--dust-cloths, dust-brushes, little brooms, etc. All of
this, when the children are allowed _to do it by themselves_, is very
quickly accomplished. Then the children go each to his own place. The
teacher explains to them that the normal position is for each child to
be seated in his own place, in silence, with his feet together on the
floor, his hands resting on the table, and his head erect. In this way
she teaches them poise and equilibrium. Then she has them rise on their
feet in order to sing the hymn, teaching them that in rising and sitting
down it is not necessary to be noisy. In this way the children learn to
move about the furniture with poise and with care. After this we have a
series of exercises in which the children learn to move gracefully, to
go and come, to salute each other, to lift objects carefully, to receive
various objects from each other politely. The teacher calls attention
with little exclamations to a child who is clean, a room which is well
ordered, a class seated quietly, a graceful movement, etc.

From such a starting point we proceed to the free teaching. That is, the
teacher will no longer make comments to the children, directing them how
to move from their seats, etc., she will limit herself to correcting the
disordered movements.

After the directress has talked in this way about the attitude of the
children and the arrangement of the room, she invites the children to
talk with her. She questions them concerning what they have done the day
before, regulating her inquiries in such a way that the children need
not report the intimate happenings of the family but their individual
behaviour, their games, attitude to parents, etc. She will ask if they
have been able to go up the stairs without getting them muddy, if they
have spoken politely to their friends who passed, if they have helped
their mothers, if they have shown in their family what they have learned
at school, if they have played in the street, etc. The conversations are
longer on Monday after the vacation, and on that day the children are
invited to tell what they have done with the family; if they have gone
away from home, whether they have eaten things not usual for children to
eat, and if this is the case we urge them not to eat these things and
try to teach them that they are bad for them. Such conversations as
these encourage the _unfolding_ or development of language and are of
great educational value, since the directress can prevent the children
from recounting happenings in the house or in the neighbourhood, and can
select, instead, topics which are adapted to pleasant conversation, and
in this way can teach the children those things which it is desirable to
talk about; that is, things with which we occupy ourselves in life,
public events, or things which have happened in the different houses,
perhaps, to the children themselves--as baptism, birthday parties, any
of which may serve for occasional conversation. Things of this sort will
encourage children to describe, themselves. After this morning talk we
pass to the various lessons.




CHAPTER VIII

REFECTION--THE CHILD'S DIET


In connection with the exercises of practical life, it may be fitting
to consider the matter of refection.

In order to protect the child's development, especially in
neighbourhoods where standards of child hygiene are not yet prevalent in
the home, it would be well if a large part at least of the child's diet
could be entrusted to the school. It is well known to-day that the diet
must be adapted to the physical nature of the child; and as the medicine
of children is not the medicine of adults in reduced doses, so the diet
must not be that of the adult in lesser quantitative proportions. For
this reason I should prefer that even in the "Children's Houses" which
are situated in tenements and from which little ones, being at home, can
go up to eat with the family, school refection should be instituted.
Moreover, even in the case of rich children, school refection would
always be advisable until a scientific course in cooking shall have
introduced into the wealthier families the habit of specialising in
children's food.

The diet of little children must be rich in fats and sugar: the first
for reserve matter and the second for plastic tissue. In fact, sugar is
a stimulant to tissues in the process of formation.

As for the _form_ of preparation, it is well that the alimentary
substances should always be minced, because the child has not yet the
capacity for completely masticating the food, and his stomach is still
incapable of fulfilling the function of mincing food matter.

Consequently, soups, purees, and meat balls, should constitute the
ordinary form of dish for the child's table.

The nitrogenous diet for a child from two or three years of age ought to
be constituted chiefly of milk and eggs, but after the second year
broths are also to be recommended. After three years and a half meat can
be given; or, in the case of poor children, vegetables. Fruits are also
to be recommended for children.

Perhaps a detailed summary on child diet may be useful, especially for
mothers.

_Method of Preparing Broth for Little Children._ (Age three to six;
after that the child may use the common broth of the family.) The
quantity of meat should correspond to 1 gramme for every cubic
centimetre of broth and should be put in cold water. No aromatic herbs
should be used, the only wholesome condiment being salt. The meat should
be left to boil for two hours. Instead of removing the grease from the
broth it is well to add butter to it, or, in the case of the poor, a
spoonful of olive oil; but substitutes for butter, such as margerine,
etc., should never be used. The broth must be prepared _fresh_; it would
be well, therefore, to put the meat on the fire two hours before the
meal, because as soon as broth is cool there begins to take place a
separation of chemical substances, which are injurious to the child and
may easily cause diarrhea.

_Soups._ A very simple soup, and one to be highly recommended for
children, is bread boiled in salt water or in broth and abundantly
seasoned with oil. This is the classic soup of poor children and an
excellent means of nutrition. Very like this, is the soup which
consists of little cubes of bread toasted in butter and allowed to soak
in the broth which is itself fat with butter. Soups of grated bread also
belong in this class.

Pastine,[10] especially the glutinous pastine, which are of the same
nature, are undoubtedly superior to the others for digestibility, but
are accessible only to the privileged social classes.

  [10] Those very fine forms of vermicelli used in soups.

The poor should know how much more wholesome is a broth made from
remnants of stale bread, than soups of coarse spaghetti--often dry and
seasoned with meat juice. Such soups are most indigestible for little
children.

Excellent soups are those consisting of purees of vegetables (beans,
peas, lentils). To-day one may find in the shops dried vegetables
especially adapted for this sort of soups. Boiled in salt water, the
vegetables are peeled, put to cool and passed through a sieve (or simply
compressed, if they are already peeled). Butter is then added, and the
paste is stirred slowly into the boiling water, care being taken that it
dissolves and leaves no lumps.

Vegetable soups can also be seasoned with pork. Instead of broth,
sugared milk may be the base of vegetable purees.

I strongly recommend for children a soup of rice boiled in broth or
milk; also cornmeal broth, provided it be seasoned with abundant butter,
but not with cheese. (The porridge form--polenta, really cornmeal mush,
is to be highly recommended on account of the long cooking.)

The poorer classes who have no meat-broth can feed their children
equally well with soups of boiled bread and porridge seasoned with oil.

_Milk and Eggs._ These are foods which not only contain nitrogenous
substances in an eminently digestible form, but they have the so-called
_enzymes_ which facilitate assimilation into the tissues, and, hence, in
a particular way, favour the growth of the child. And they answer so
much the better this last most important condition if they are _fresh_
and _intact_, keeping in themselves, one may say, the life of the
animals which produced them.

Milk fresh from the cow, and the egg while it is still warm, are
assimilable to the highest degree. Cooking, on the other hand, makes the
milk and eggs lose their special conditions of assimilability and
reduces the nutritive power in them to the simple power of any
nitrogenous substance.

To-day, consequently, there are being founded _special dairies for
children_ where the milk produced is sterile; the rigorous cleanliness
of the surroundings in which the milk-producing animals live, the
sterilisation of the udder before milking, of the hands of the milker,
and of the vessels which are to contain the milk, the hermetic sealing
of these last, and the refrigerating bath immediately after the milking,
if the milk is to be carried far,--otherwise it is well to drink it
warm, procure a milk free from bacteria which, therefore, has no need of
being sterilised by boiling, and which preserves intact its natural
nutritive powers.

As much may be said of eggs; the best way of feeding them to a child is
to take them still warm from the hen and have him eat them just as they
are, and then digest them in the open air. But where this is not
practicable, eggs must be chosen fresh, and barely heated in water,
that is to say, prepared _a la coque_.

All other forms of preparation, milk-soup, omelettes, and so forth, do,
to be sure, make of milk and eggs an excellent food, more to be
recommended than others; but they take away the specific properties of
assimilation which characterise them.

_Meat._ All meats are not adapted to children, and even their
preparation must differ according to the age of the child. Thus, for
example, children from three to five years of age ought to eat only more
or less finely-ground meats, whereas at the age of five children are
capable of grinding meat completely by mastication; at that time it is
well to _teach the child accurately how to masticate_ because he has a
tendency to swallow food quickly, which may produce indigestion and
diarrhea.

This is another reason why school-refection in the "Children's Houses"
would be a very serviceable as well as convenient institution, as the
whole diet of the child could then be rationally cared for in connection
with the educative system of the Houses.

The meats most adapted to children are so-called white meats, that is,
in the first place, chicken, then veal; also the light flesh of fish,
(sole, pike, cod).

After the age of four, filet of beef may also be introduced into the
diet, but never heavy and fat meats like that of the pig, the capon, the
eel, the tunny, etc., which are to be _absolutely excluded_ along with
mollusks and crustaceans, (oysters, lobsters), from the child's diet.

Croquettes made of finely ground meat, grated bread, milk, and beaten
eggs, and fried in butter, are the most wholesome preparation. Another
excellent preparation is to mould into balls the grated meat, with
sweet fruit-preserve, and eggs beaten up with sugar.

At the age of five, the child may be given breast of roast fowl, and
occasionally veal cutlet or filet of beef.

Boiled meat must never be given to the child, because meat is deprived
of many stimulating and even nutritive properties by boiling and
rendered less digestible.

_Nerve Feeding Substances._ Besides meat a child who has reached the age
of four may be given fried brains and sweetbreads, to be combined, for
example, with chicken croquettes.

_Milk Foods._ All cheeses are to be excluded from the child's diet.

The only milk product suitable to children from three to six years of
age is fresh butter.

_Custard._ Custard is also to be recommended provided it be _freshly
prepared_, that is immediately before being eaten, and _with very fresh_
milk and eggs: if such conditions cannot be rigorously fulfilled, it is
preferable to do without custard, which is not a necessity.

_Bread._ From what we have said about soups, it may be inferred that
bread is an _excellent food_ for the child. It should be well selected;
the crumb is not very digestible, but it can be utilised, when it is
dry, to make a bread broth; but if one is to give the child simply a
piece of bread to eat, it is well to offer him the crust, the end of the
loaf. Bread sticks are excellent for those who can afford them.

Bread contains many nitrogenous substances and is very rich in starches,
but is lacking in fats; and as the fundamental substances of diet are,
as is well known, three in number, namely, proteids, (nitrogenous
substances), starches, and fats, bread is not a complete food; it is
necessary therefore to offer the child buttered bread, which constitutes
a complete food and may be considered as a sufficient and complete
breakfast.

_Green Vegetables._ Children must never eat raw vegetables, such as
salads and greens, but only cooked ones; indeed they are not to be
highly recommended either cooked or raw, with the exception of spinach
which may enter with moderation into the diet of children.

Potatoes prepared in a puree with much butter form, however, an
excellent complement of nutrition for children.

_Fruits._ Among fruits there are excellent foods for children. They too,
like milk and eggs, if freshly gathered, retain a _living_ quality which
aids assimilation.

As this condition, however, is not easily attainable in cities, it is
necessary to consider also the diet of fruits which are not perfectly
fresh and which, therefore, should be prepared and cooked in various
ways. All fruits are not to be advised for children; the chief
properties to be considered are the degree of _ripeness_, the
_tenderness_ and _sweetness_ of the pulp, and its _acidity_. Peaches,
apricots, grapes, currants, oranges, and mandarins, in their natural
state, can be given to little children with great advantage. Other
fruits, such as pears, apples, plums, should be cooked or prepared in
syrup.

Figs, pineapples, dates, melons, cherries, walnuts, almonds, hazelnuts,
and chestnuts, are excluded for various reasons from the diet of early
childhood.

The preparation of fruit must consist in removing from it all
indigestible parts, such as the peel, and also such parts as the child
inadvertently may absorb to his detriment, as, for example, the seed.

Children of four or five should be taught early how carefully the seeds
must be thrown away and how the fruits are peeled. Afterwards, the child
so educated may be promoted to the honour of receiving a fine fruit
intact, and he will know how to eat it properly.

The culinary preparation of fruits consists essentially in two
processes: cooking, and seasoning with sugar.

Besides simple cooking, fruits may be prepared as marmalades and
jellies, which are excellent but are naturally within the reach of the
wealthier classes only. While jellies and marmalades may be allowed,
candied fruits,--on the other hand,--_marrons glaces_, and the like, are
absolutely excluded from the child's diet.

_Seasonings._ An important phase of the hygiene of child diet concerns
seasonings--with a view to their rigorous limitation. As I have already
indicated, sugar and some fat substances along with kitchen salt (sodium
chloride) should constitute the principal part of the seasonings.

To these may be added _organic acids_ (acetic acid, citric acid) that
is, vinegar and lemon juice; this latter can be advantageously used on
fish, on croquettes, on spinach, etc.

Other condiments suitable to little children are some aromatic
vegetables like garlic and rue which disinfect the intestines and the
lungs, and also have a direct anthelminthic action.

Spices, on the other hand, such as pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, and
especially mustard, are to be absolutely abolished.

_Drinks._ The growing organism of the child is very rich in water, and,
hence, needs a constant supply of moisture. Among the beverages, the
best, and indeed the only one, to be unreservedly advised is pure fresh
spring water. To rich children might be allowed the so-called table
waters which are slightly alkaline, such as those of San Gemini, Acqua
Claudia, etc., mixed with syrups, as, for example, syrup of black
cherry.

It is now a matter of general knowledge that all fermented beverages,
and those exciting to the nervous system, are injurious to children;
hence, all alcoholic and caffeic beverages are absolutely eliminated
from child diet. Not only liquors, but wine and beer, ought to be
unknown to the child's taste, and coffee and tea should be inaccessible
to childhood.

The deleterious action of alcohol on the child organism needs no
illustration, but in a matter of such vital importance insistent
repetition is never superfluous. Alcohol is a poison especially fatal to
organisms in the process of formation. Not only does it arrest their
total development (whence infantilism, idiocy), but also predisposes the
child to nervous maladies (epilepsy, meningitis), and to maladies of the
digestive organs, and metabolism (cirrhosis of the liver, dyspepsia,
anaemia).

If the "Children's Houses" were to succeed in enlightening the people on
such truths, they would be accomplishing a very lofty hygienic work for
the new generations.

Instead of coffee, children may be given roasted and boiled barley,
malt, and especially chocolate which is an excellent child food,
particularly when mixed with milk.


DISTRIBUTION OF THE MEALS

Another chapter of child diet concerns the distribution of the meals.
Here, one principle must dominate, and must be diffused, among mothers,
namely, that the children shall be kept to rigorous meal hours in order
that they may enjoy good health and have excellent digestion. It is
true that there prevails among the people (and it is one of the forms of
maternal ignorance most fatal to children) the prejudice that children
in order to grow well must be eating almost continuously, without
regularity, nibbling almost habitually a crust of bread. On the
contrary, the child, in view of the special delicacy of his digestive
system, has more need of regular meals than the adult has. It seems to
me that the "Children's Houses" with very prolonged programmes are, for
this reason, suitable places for child culture, as they can direct the
child's diet. _Outside of their regular meal hours, children should not
eat._

In a "Children's House" with a long programme there ought to be two
meals, a hearty one about noon, and a light one about four in the
afternoon.

At the hearty meal, there should be soup, a meat dish, and bread, and,
in the case of rich children, also fruits or custard, and butter on the
bread.

At the four o'clock meal there should be prepared a light lunch, which
from a simple piece of bread can range to buttered bread, and to bread
accompanied by a fruit marmalade, chocolate, honey, custard, etc. Crisp
crackers, biscuits, and cooked fruits, etc., might also be usefully
employed. Very suitably the lunch might consist of bread soaked in milk
or an egg _a la coque_ with bread sticks, or else of a simple cup of
milk in which is dissolved a spoonful of Mellin's Food. I recommend
Mellin's Food very highly, not only in infancy, but also much later on
account of its properties of digestibility and nutrition, and on account
of its flavour, which is so pleasing to children.

Mellin's Food is a powder prepared from barley and wheat, and containing
in a concentrated and pure state the nutritive substances proper to
those cereals; the powder is slowly dissolved in hot water in the bottom
of the same cup which is to be used for drinking the mixture, and very
fresh milk is then poured on top.

The child would take the other two meals in his own home, that is, the
morning breakfast and the supper, which latter must be _very light_ for
children so that shortly after they may be ready to go to bed. On these
meals it would be well to give advice to mothers, urging them to help
complete the hygienic work of the "Children's Houses," to the profit of
their children.

The morning breakfast for the rich might be milk and chocolate, or milk
and extract of malt, with crackers, or, better, with toasted bread
spread with butter or honey; for the poor, a cup of fresh milk, with
bread.

For the evening meal, a soup is to be advised (children should eat soups
twice a day), and an egg _a la coque_ or a cup of milk; or rice soup
with a base of milk, and buttered bread, with cooked fruits, etc.

As for the alimentary rations to be calculated, I refer the reader to
the special treatises on hygiene: although practically such calculations
are of no great utility.


In the "Children's Houses," especially in the case of the poor, I should
make extensive use of the vegetable soups and I should have cultivated
in the garden plots vegetables which can be used in the diet, in order
to have them plucked in their freshness, cooked, and enjoyed. I should
try, possibly, to do the same for the fruits, and, by the raising of
animals, to have fresh eggs and pure milk. The milking of the goats
could be done directly by the larger children, after they had
scrupulously washed their hands. Another important educative
application which school-refection in the "Children's Houses" has to
offer, and which concerns "practical life," consists in the preparing of
the table, arranging the table linen, learning its nomenclature, etc.
Later, I shall show how this exercise can gradually increase in
difficulty and constitute a most important didactic instrument.

It is sufficient to intimate here that it is very important to teach the
children to eat with cleanliness, both with respect to themselves and
with respect to their surroundings (not to soil the napkins, etc.), and
to use the table implements (which, at least, for the little ones, are
limited to the spoon, and for the larger children extended to the fork
and knife).




CHAPTER IX

MUSCULAR EDUCATION--GYMNASTICS


The generally accepted idea of gymnastics is, I consider, very
inadequate. In the common schools we are accustomed to describe as
gymnastics a species of collective muscular discipline which has as its
aim that children shall learn to follow definite ordered movements given
in the form of commands. The guiding spirit in such gymnastics is
coercion, and I feel that such exercises repress spontaneous movements
and impose others in their place. I do not know what the psychological
authority for the selection of these imposed movements is. Similar
movements are used in medical gymnastics in order to restore a normal
movement to a torpid muscle or to give back a normal movement to a
paralysed muscle. A number of chest movements which are given in the
school are advised, for example, in medicine for those who suffer from
intestinal torpidity, but truly I do not well understand what office
such exercises can fulfil when they are followed by squadrons of normal
children. In addition to these formal gymnastics we have those which are
carried on in a gymnasium, and which are very like the first steps in
the training of an acrobat. However, this is not the place for criticism
of the gymnastics used in our common schools. Certainly in our case we
are not considering such gymnastics. Indeed, many who hear me speak of
gymnastics for infant schools very plainly show disapprobation and they
will disapprove more heartily when they hear me speak of a gymnasium for
little children. Indeed, if the gymnastic exercises and the gymnasium
were those of the common schools, no one would agree more heartily than
I in the disapproval expressed by these critics.

We must understand by _gymnastics_ and in general by muscular education
a series of exercises tending to _aid_ the normal development of
physiological movements (such as walking, breathing, speech), to protect
this development, when the child shows himself backward or abnormal in
any way, and to encourage in the children those movements which are
useful in the achievement of the most ordinary acts of life; such as
dressing, undressing, buttoning their clothes and lacing their shoes,
carrying such objects as balls, cubes, etc. If there exists an age in
which it is necessary to protect a child by means of a series of
gymnastic exercises, between three and six years is undoubtedly the age.
The special gymnastics necessary, or, better still, hygienic, in this
period of life, refer chiefly to walking. A child in the general
morphological growth of his body is characterised by having a torso
greatly developed in comparison with the lower limbs. In the new-born
child the length of the torso, from the top of the head to the curve of
the groin, is equal to 68 per cent of the total length of the body. The
limbs then are barely 32 per cent of the stature. During growth these
relative proportions change in a most noticeable way; thus, for example,
in the adult the torso is fully half of the entire stature and,
according to the individual, corresponds to 51 or 52 per cent of it.

This morphological difference between the new-born child and the adult
is bridged so slowly during growth that in the first years of the
child's life the torso still remains tremendously developed as compared
with the limbs. In one year the height of the torso corresponds to 65
per cent of the total stature, in two years to 63, in three years to 62.

At the age when a child enters the infant school his limbs are still
very short as compared with his torso; that is, the length of his limbs
barely corresponds to 38 per cent of the stature. Between the years of
six and seven the proportion of the torso to the stature is from 57 to
56 per cent In such a period therefore the child not only makes a
noticeable growth in height, (he measures indeed at the age of three
years about 0.85 metre and at six years 1.05 metres) but, changing so
greatly the relative proportions between the torso and the limbs, the
latter make a most decided growth. This growth is related to the layers
of cartilage which still exist at the extremity of the long bones and is
related in general to the still incomplete ossification of the entire
skeleton. The tender bones of the limbs must therefore sustain the
weight of the torso which is then disproportionately large. We cannot,
if we consider all these things, judge the manner of walking in little
children by the standard set for our own equilibrium. If a child is not
strong, the erect posture and walking are really sources of fatigue for
him, and the long bones of the lower limbs, yielding to the weight of
the body, easily become deformed and usually bowed. This is particularly
the case among the badly nourished children of the poor, or among those
in whom the skeleton structure, while not actually showing the presence
of rickets, still seems to be slow in attaining normal ossification.

We are wrong then if we consider little children from this physical
point of view as _little men_. They have, instead, characteristics and
proportions that are entirely special to their age. The tendency of the
child to stretch out on his back and kick his legs in the air is an
expression of physical needs related to the proportions of his body. The
baby loves to walk on all fours just because, like the quadruped
animals, his limbs are short in comparison with his body. Instead of
this, we divert these natural manifestations by foolish habits which we
impose on the child. We hinder him from throwing himself on the earth,
from stretching, etc., and we oblige him to walk with grown people and
to keep up with them; and excuse ourselves by saying that we don't want
him to become capricious and think he can do as he pleases! It is indeed
a fatal error and one which has made bow-legs common among little
children. It is well to enlighten the mothers on these important
particulars of infant hygiene. Now we, with the gymnastics, can, and,
indeed, should, help the child in his development by making our
exercises correspond to the movement which he _needs to make_, and in
this way save his limbs from fatigue.

One very simple means for helping the child in his activity was
suggested to me by my observation of the children themselves. The
teacher was having the children march, leading them about the courtyard
between the walls of the house and the central garden. This garden was
protected by a little fence made of strong wires which were stretched in
parallel lines, and were supported at intervals by wooden palings driven
into the ground. Along the fence, ran a little ledge on which the
children were in the habit of sitting down when they were tired of
marching. In addition to this, I always brought out little chairs, which
I placed against the wall. Every now and then, the little ones of two
and one half and three years would drop out from the marching line,
evidently being tired; but instead of sitting down on the ground or on
the chairs, they would run to the little fence and catching hold of the
upper line of wire they would walk along sideways, resting their feet on
the wire which was nearest the ground. That this gave them a great deal
of pleasure, was evident from the way in which they laughed as, with
bright eyes, they watched their larger companions who were marching
about. The truth was that these little ones had solved one of my
problems in a very practical way. They moved themselves along on the
wires, pulling their bodies sideways. In this way, they moved their
limbs _without throwing upon them the weight of the body_. Such an
apparatus placed in the gymnasium for little children, will enable them
to fulfil the need which they feel of throwing themselves on the floor
and kicking their legs in the air; for the movements they make on the
little fence correspond even more correctly to the same physical needs.
Therefore, I advise the manufacture of this little fence for use in
children's playrooms. It can be constructed of parallel bars supported
by upright poles firmly fixed on to the heavy base. The children, while
playing upon this little fence, will be able to look out and see with,
great pleasure what the other children are doing in the room.

Other pieces of gymnasium apparatus can be constructed upon the same
plan, that is, having as their aim the furnishing of the child with a
proper outlet for his individual activities. One of the things invented
by Seguin to develop the lower limbs, and especially to strengthen the
articulation of the knee in weak children, is the trampolino.

This is a kind of swing, having a very wide seat, so wide, indeed, that
the limbs of the child stretched out in front of him are entirely
supported by this broad seat. This little chair is hung from strong
cords and is left swinging. The wall in front of it is reinforced by a
strong smooth board against which the children press their feet in
pushing themselves back and forth in the swing. The child seated in this
swing exercises his limbs, pressing his feet against the board each time
that he swings toward the wall. The board against which he swings may be
erected at some distance from the wall, and may be so low that the child
can see over the top of it. As he swings in this chair, he strengthens
his limbs through the species of gymnastics limited to the lower limbs,
and this he does without resting the weight of his body upon his legs.
Other pieces of gymnastic apparatus, less important from the hygienic
standpoint, but very amusing to the children, may be described briefly.
"The Pendulum," a game which may be played by one child or by several,
consists of rubber balls hung on a cord. The children seated in their
little armchairs strike the ball, sending it from one to another. It is
an exercise for the arms and for the spinal column, and is at the same
time an exercise in which the eye gauges the distance of bodies in
motion. Another game, called "The Cord," consists of a line, drawn on
the earth with chalk, along which the children walk. This helps to order
and to direct their free movements in a given direction. A game like
this is very pretty, indeed, after a snowfall, when the little path made
by the children shows the regularity of the line they have traced, and
encourages a pleasant war among them in which each one tries to make his
line in the snow the most regular.

The little round stair is another game, in which a little wooden
stairway, built on the plan of the spiral, is used. This little stair is
enclosed on one side by a balustrade on which the children can rest
their hands. The other side is open and circular. This serves to
habituate the children to climbing and descending stairs without holding
on to the balustrade, and teaches them to move up and down with
movements that are poised and self-controlled. The steps must be very
low and very shallow. Going up and down on this little stair, the very
smallest children can learn movements which they cannot follow properly
in climbing ordinary stairways in their homes, in which the proportions
are arranged for adults.

Another piece of gymnasium apparatus, adapted for the broad-jump,
consists of a low wooden platform painted with various lines, by means
of which the distance jumped may be gauged. There is a small flight of
stairs which may be used in connection with this plane, making it
possible to practise and to measure the high-jump.

I also believe that rope-ladders may be so adapted as to be suitable for
use in schools for little children. Used in pairs, these would, it seems
to me, help to perfect a great variety of movements, such as kneeling,
rising, bending forward and backward, etc.; movements which the child,
without the help of the ladder, could not make without losing his
equilibrium. All of these movements are useful in that they help the
child to acquire, first, equilibrium, then that co-ordination of the
muscular movements necessary to him. They are, moreover, helpful in that
they increase the chest expansion. Besides all this, such movements as I
have described, reinforce the _hand_ in its most primitive and essential
action, _prehension_;--the movement which necessarily precedes all the
finer movements of the hand itself. Such apparatus was successfully
used by Seguin to develop the general strength and the movement of
prehension in his idiotic children.

The gymnasium, therefore, offers a field for the most varied exercises,
tending to establish the co-ordination of the movements common in life,
such as walking, throwing objects, going up and down stairs, kneeling,
rising, jumping, etc.


FREE GYMNASTICS

By free gymnastics I mean those which are given without any apparatus.
Such gymnastics are divided into two classes: directed and required
exercises, and free games. In the first class, I recommend the march,
the object of which should be not rhythm, but poise only. When the march
is introduced, it is well to accompany it with the singing of little
songs, because this furnishes a breathing exercise very helpful in
strengthening the lungs. Besides the march, many of the games of Froebel
which are accompanied by songs, very similar to those which the children
constantly play among themselves, may be used. In the free games, we
furnish the children with balls, hoops, bean bags and kites. The trees
readily offer themselves to the game of "Pussy wants a corner," and many
simple games of tag.

[Illustration: DR. MONTESSORI IN THE GARDEN OF THE SCHOOL AT VIA GIUSTI]

[Illustration: (A) CHILDREN THREE AND ONE-HALF AND FOUR YEARS OLD
LEARNING TO BUTTON AND LACE. (B) RIBBON AND BUTTON FRAMES. These
are among the earliest exercises.]


EDUCATIONAL GYMNASTICS

Under the name of educational gymnastics, we include two series of
exercises which really form a part of other school work, as, for
instance, the cultivation of the earth, the care of plants and animals
(watering and pruning the plants, carrying the grain to the chickens,
etc.). These activities call for various co-ordinated movements, as,
for example, in hoeing, in getting down to plant things, and in
rising; the trips which children make in carrying objects to some
definite place, and in making a definite practical use of these objects,
offer a field for very valuable gymnastic exercises. The scattering of
minute objects, such as corn and oats, is valuable, and also the
exercise of opening and closing the gates to the garden and to the
chicken yard. All of these exercises are the more valuable in that they
are carried on in the open air. Among our educational gymnastics we have
exercises to develop co-ordinated movements of the fingers, and these
prepare the children for the exercises of practical life, such as
dressing and undressing themselves. The didactic material which forms
the basis of these last named gymnastics is very simple, consisting of
wooden frames, each mounted with two pieces of cloth, or leather, to be
fastened and unfastened by means of the buttons and buttonholes, hooks
and eyes, eyelets and lacings, or automatic fastenings.

In our "Children's Houses" we use ten of these frames, so constructed
that each one of them illustrates a different process in dressing or
undressing.

One: mounted with heavy pieces of wool which are to be fastened by means
of large bone buttons--corresponds to children's dresses.

Two: mounted with pieces of linen to be fastened with pearl
buttons--corresponds to a child's underwear.

Three: leather pieces mounted with shoe buttons--in fastening these
leather pieces the children make use of the button-hook--corresponds to
a child's shoes.

Four: pieces of leather which are laced together by means of eyelets and
shoe laces.

Five: two pieces of cloth to be laced together. (These pieces are boned
and therefore correspond to the little bodices worn by the peasants in
Italy.)

Six: two pieces of stuff to be fastened by means of large hooks and
eyes.

Seven: two pieces of linen, to be fastened by means of small hooks and
worked eyelets.

Eight: two pieces of cloth to be fastened by means of broad 
ribbon, which is to be tied into bows.

Nine: pieces of cloth laced together with round cord, on the same order
as the fastenings on many of the children's underclothes.

Ten: two pieces to be fastened together by means of the modern automatic
fasteners.

Through the use of such toys, the children can practically analyse the
movements necessary in dressing and undressing themselves, and can
prepare themselves separately for these movements by means of repeated
exercises. We succeed in teaching the child to dress himself without his
really being aware of it, that is, without any direct or arbitrary
command we have led him to this mastery. As soon as he knows how to do
it, he begins to wish to make a practical application of his ability,
and very soon he will be proud of being sufficient unto himself, and
will take delight in an ability which makes his body free from the hands
of others, and which leads him the sooner to that modesty and activity
which develops far too late in those children of to-day who are deprived
of this most practical form of education. The fastening games are very
pleasing to the little ones, and often when ten of them are using the
frames at the same time, seated around the little tables, quiet and
serious, they give the impression of a workroom filled with tiny
workers.


RESPIRATORY GYMNASTICS

The purpose of these gymnastics is to regulate the respiratory
movements: in other words, to teach the _art of breathing_. They also
help greatly the correct formation of the child's _speech habits_. The
exercises which we use were introduced into school literature by
Professor Sala. We have chosen the simple exercises described by him in
his treatise, "Cura della Balbuzie."[11] These include a number of
respiratory gymnastic exercises with which are co-ordinated muscular
exercises. I give here an example:

  [11] "Cura della Balbuzie e del Difetti di Pronunzia." Sala.
       Ulrico Hoepli, publisher, Milan, Italy.

Mouth wide open, tongue held flat, hands on hips.

Breathe deeply, lift the shoulders rapidly, lowering the diaphragm.

Expel breath slowly, lowering shoulders slowly, returning to normal
position.

The directress should select or devise simple breathing exercises, to be
accompanied with arm movements, etc.

Exercises for proper use of _lips, tongue, and teeth_. These exercises
teach the movements of the lips and tongue in the pronunciation of
certain fundamental consonant sounds, reinforcing the muscles, and
making them ready for these movements. These gymnastics prepare the
organs used in the formation of language.

In presenting such exercises we begin with the entire class, but finish
by testing the children individually. We ask the child to pronounce,
_aloud_ and with _force_, the first syllable of a word. When all are
intent upon putting the greatest possible force into this, we call each
child separately, and have him repeat the word. If he pronounces it
correctly, we send him to the right, if badly, to the left. Those who
have difficulty with the word, are then encouraged to repeat it several
times. The teacher takes note of the age of the child, and of the
particular defects in the movements of the muscles used in articulating.
She may then touch the muscles which should be used, tapping, for
example, the curve of the lips, or even taking hold of the child's
tongue and placing it against the dental arch, or showing him clearly
the movements which she herself makes when pronouncing the syllable. She
must seek in every way to aid the normal development of the movements
necessary to the exact articulation of the word.

As the basis for these gymnastics we have the children pronounce the
words: _pane_--_fame_--_tana_--_zina_--_stella_--_rana_--_gatto_.

In the pronunciation of _pane_, the child should repeat with much force,
_pa_, _pa_, _pa_, thus exercising the muscles producing orbicular
contraction of the lips.

In _fame_ repeating _fa_, _fa_, _fa_, the child exercises the movements
of the lower lip against the upper dental arch.

In _tana_, having him repeat _ta_, _ta_, _ta_, we cause him to exercise
the movement of the tongue against the upper dental arch.

In _zina_, we provoke the contact of the upper and lower dental arches.

With _stella_ we have him repeat the whole word, bringing the teeth
together, and holding the tongue (which has a tendency to protrude)
close against the upper teeth.

In _rana_ we have him repeat _r_, _r_, _r_, thus exercising the tongue
in the vibratory movements. In _gatto_ we hold the voice upon the
guttural _g_.




CHAPTER X

NATURE IN EDUCATION--AGRICULTURAL LABOUR: CULTURE OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS


Itard, in a remarkable pedagogical treatise: "_Des premiers
developpements du jeune sauvage de l'Aveyron_," expounds in detail the
drama of a curious, gigantic education which attempted to overcome the
psychical darkness of an idiot and at the same time to snatch a man from
primitive nature.

The savage of the Aveyron was a child who had grown up in the natural
state: criminally abandoned in a forest where his assassins thought they
had killed him, he was cured by natural means, and had survived for many
years free and naked in the wilderness, until, captured by hunters, he
entered into the civilised life of Paris, showing by the scars with
which his miserable body was furrowed the story of the struggles with
wild beasts, and of lacerations caused by falling from heights.

The child was, and always remained, mute; his mentality, diagnosed by
Pinel as idiotic, remained forever almost inaccessible to intellectual
education.

To this child are due the first steps of positive pedagogy. Itard, a
physician of deaf-mutes and a student of philosophy, undertook his
education with methods which he had already partially tried for treating
defective hearing--believing at the beginning that the savage showed
characteristics of inferiority, not because he was a degraded organism,
but for want of education. He was a follower of the principles of
Helvetius: "Man is nothing without the work of man"; that is, he
believed in the omnipotence of education, and was opposed to the
pedagogical principle which Rousseau had promulgated before the
Revolution: "_Tout est bien sortant des mains de l'Auteur des choses,
tout degenere dans les mains de l'homme_,"--that is, the work of
education is deleterious and spoils the man.

The savage, according to the erroneous first impression of Itard,
demonstrated experimentally by his characteristics the truth of the
former assertion. When, however, he perceived, with the help of Pinel,
that he had to do with an idiot, his philosophical theories gave place
to the most admirable, tentative, experimental pedagogy.

Itard divides the education of the savage into two parts. In the first,
he endeavours to lead the child from natural life to social life; and in
the second, he attempts the intellectual education of the idiot. The
child in his life of frightful abandonment had found one happiness; he
had, so to speak, immersed himself in, and unified himself with, nature,
taking delight in it--rains, snow, tempests, boundless space, had been
his sources of entertainment, his companions, his love. Civil life is a
renunciation of all this: but it is an acquisition beneficent to human
progress. In Itard's pages we find vividly described the moral work
which led the savage to civilisation, multiplying the needs of the child
and surrounding him with loving care. Here is a sample of the admirably
patient work of Itard as _observer of the spontaneous expressions_ of
his pupil: it can most truly give teachers, who are to prepare for the
experimental method, an idea of the patience and the self-abnegation
necessary in dealing with a phenomenon which is to be observed:

"When, for example, he was observed within his room, he was seen to be
lounging with oppressive monotony, continually directing his eyes toward
the window, with his gaze wandering in the void. If on such occasions a
sudden storm blew up, if the sun, hidden behind the clouds, peeped out
of a sudden, lighting the atmosphere brilliantly, there were loud bursts
of laughter and almost convulsive joy. Sometimes, instead of these
expressions of joy, there was a sort of frenzied rage: he would twist
his arms, put his clenched fists upon his eyes, gnashing his teeth and
becoming dangerous to those about him.

"One morning, when the snow fell abundantly while he was still in bed,
he uttered a cry of joy upon awaking, leaped from his bed, ran to the
window and then to the door; went and came impatiently from one to the
other; then ran out undressed as he was into the garden. There, giving
vent to his joy with the shrillest of cries, he ran, rolled in the snow,
gathered it up in handfuls, and swallowed it with incredible avidity.

"But his sensations at sight of the great spectacles of nature did not
always manifest themselves in such a vivid and noisy manner. It is
worthy of note that in certain cases they were expressed by a quiet
regret and melancholy. Thus, it was when the rigour of the weather drove
everybody from the garden that the savage of the Aveyron chose to go
there. He would walk around it several times and finally sit down upon
the edge of the fountain.

"I have often stopped for _whole hours_, and with indescribable
pleasure, to watch him as he sat thus--to see how his face, inexpressive
or contracted by grimaces, gradually assumed an expression of sadness,
and of melancholy reminiscence, while his eyes were fixed upon the
surface of the water into which from time to time he would throw a few
dead leaves.

"If when there was a full moon, a sheaf of mild beams penetrated into
his room, he rarely failed to wake and to take his place at the window.
He would remain there _for a large part of the night_, erect,
motionless, with his head thrust forward, his eyes fixed on the
countryside lighted by the moon, plunged in a sort of contemplative
ecstasy, the immobility and silence of which were only interrupted at
long intervals by a breath as deep as a sigh, which died away in a
plaintive sound of lamentation."

Elsewhere, Itard relates that the boy did not know the _walking gait_
which we use in civilised life, but only the _running gait_, and tells
how he, Itard, ran after him at the beginning, when he took him out into
the streets of Paris, rather than violently check the boy's running.

The gradual and gentle leading of the savage through all the
manifestations of social life, the early adaptation of the teacher to
the pupil rather than of the pupil to the teacher, the successive
attraction to a new life which was to win over the child by its charms,
and not be imposed upon him violently so that the pupil should feel it
as a burden and a torture, are as many precious educative expressions
which may be generalised and applied to the education of children.

I believe that there exists no document which offers so poignant and so
eloquent a contrast between the life of nature and the life of society,
and which so graphically shows that society is made up solely of
renunciations and restraints. Let it suffice to recall the run, checked
to a walk, and the loud-voiced cry, checked to the modulations of the
ordinary speaking voice.

And, yet, without any violence, leaving to social life the task of
charming the child little by little, Itard's education triumphs. It is
true that civilised life is made by renunciation of the life of nature;
it is almost the snatching of a man from the lap of earth; it is like
snatching the new-born child from its mother's breast; but it is also a
new life.

In Itard's pages we see the final triumph of the love of man over the
love of nature: the savage of the Aveyron ends by _feeling_ and
preferring the affection of Itard, the caresses, the tears shed over
him, to the joy of immersing himself voluptuously in the snow, and of
contemplating the infinite expanse of the sky on a starry night: one day
after an attempted escape into the country, he returns of his own
accord, humble and repentant, to find his good soup and his warm bed.

It is true that man has created enjoyments in social life and has
brought about a vigorous human love in community life. But nevertheless
he still belongs to nature, and, especially when he is a child, he must
needs draw from it the forces necessary to the development of the body
and of the spirit. We have intimate communications with nature which
have an influence, even a material influence, on the growth of the body.
(For example, a physiologist, isolating young guinea pigs from
terrestrial magnetism by means of insulators, found that they grew up
with rickets.)

In the education of little children Itard's educative drama is repeated:
we must prepare man, who is one among the living creatures and therefore
belongs to nature, for social life, because social life being his own
peculiar work, must also correspond to the manifestation of his natural
activity.

But the advantages which we prepare for him in this social life, in a
great measure escape the little child, who at the beginning of his life
is a predominantly vegetative creature.

To soften this transition in education, by giving a large part of the
educative work to nature itself, is as necessary as it is not to snatch
the little child suddenly and violently from its mother and to take him
to school; and precisely this is done in the "Children's Houses," which
are situated within the tenements where the parents live, where the cry
of the child reaches the mother and the mother's voice answers it.

Nowadays, under the form of child hygiene, this part of education is
much cultivated: children are allowed to grow up in the open air, in the
public gardens, or are left for many hours half naked on the seashore,
exposed to the rays of the sun. It has been understood, through the
diffusion of marine and Apennine colonies, that the best means of
invigorating the child is to immerse him in nature.

Short and comfortable clothing for children, sandals for the feet,
nudity of the lower extremities, are so many liberations from the
oppressive shackles of civilisation.

It is an obvious principle that we should sacrifice to natural liberties
in education only as much as is _necessary_ for the acquisition of the
greater pleasures which are offered by civilisation without _useless
sacrifices_.

But in all this progress of modern child education, we have not freed
ourselves from the prejudice which denies children spiritual expression
and spiritual needs, and makes us consider them only as amiable
vegetating bodies to be cared for, kissed, and set in motion. The
_education_ which a good mother or a good modern teacher gives to-day
to the child who, for example, is running about in a flower garden is
the counsel _not to touch the flowers_, not to tread on the grass; as if
it were sufficient for the child to satisfy the physiological needs of
his body by moving his legs and breathing fresh air.

But if for the physical life it is necessary to have the child exposed
to the vivifying forces of nature, it is also necessary for his
psychical life to place the soul of the child in contact with creation,
in order that he may lay up for himself treasure from the directly
educating forces of living nature. The method for arriving at this end
is to set the child at agricultural labour, guiding him to the
cultivation of plants and animals, and so to the intelligent
contemplation of nature.

Already, in England Mrs. Latter has devised the _basis_ for a method of
child education by means of _gardening_ and _horticulture_. She sees in
the contemplation of developing life the bases of religion, since the
soul of the child may go from the creature to the Creator. She sees in
it also the point of departure for intellectual education, which she
limits to drawing from life as a step toward art, to the ideas about
plants, insects, and seasons, which spring from agriculture, and to the
first notions of household life, which spring from the cultivation and
the culinary preparation of certain alimentary products that children
later serve upon the table, providing afterwards also for the washing of
the utensils and tableware.

Mrs. Latter's conception is too one-sided; but her institutions, which
continue to spread in England, undoubtedly complete the natural
_education_ which, up to this time limited to the physical side, has
already been so efficacious in invigorating the bodies of English
children. Moreover, her experience offers a positive corroboration of
the practicability of agricultural teaching in the case of little
children.

As for deficients, I have seen agriculture applied on a large scale to
their education at Paris by the means which the kindly spirit of
Baccelli tried to introduce into the elementary schools when he
attempted to institute the "little educative gardens." In every _little
garden_ are sown different agricultural products, demonstrating
practically the proper method and the proper time for seeding and for
crop gathering, and the period of development of the various products;
the manner of preparing the soil, of enriching it with natural or
chemical manures, etc. The same is done for ornamental plants and for
gardening, which is the work yielding the best income for deficients,
when they are of an age to practise a profession.

But this side of education, though it contains, in the first place, an
objective method of intellectual culture, and, in addition, a
professional preparation, is not, in my opinion, to be taken into
serious consideration for child education. The educational conception of
this age must be solely that of aiding the <DW43>-physical development
of the individual; and, this being the case, agriculture and animal
culture contain in themselves precious means of moral education which
can be analysed far more than is done by Mrs. Latter, who sees in them
essentially a method of conducting the child's soul to religious
feeling. Indeed, in this method, which is a progressive ascent, several
gradations can be distinguished: I mention here the principal ones:

_First._ _The child is initiated into observation_ of the phenomena of
life. He stands with respect to the plants and animals in relations
analogous to those in which the _observing_ teacher stands towards him.
Little by little, as interest and observation grow, his zealous care
for the living creatures grows also, and in this way, the child can
logically be brought to appreciate the care which the mother and the
teacher take of him.

_Second._ The child is initiated into _foresight_ by way of
_auto-education_; when he knows that the life of the plants that have
been sown depends upon his care in watering them, and that of the
animals, upon his diligence in feeding them, without which the little
plant dries up and the animals suffer hunger, the child becomes
vigilant, as one who is beginning to feel a mission in life. Moreover, a
voice quite different from that of his mother and his teacher calling
him to his duties, is speaking here, exhorting him never to forget the
task he has undertaken. It is the plaintive voice of the needy life
which lives by his care. Between the child and the living creatures
which he cultivates there is born a mysterious correspondence which
induces the child to fulfil certain determinate acts without the
intervention of the teacher, that is, leads him to an _auto-education_.

The rewards which the child reaps also remain between him and nature:
one fine day after long patient care in carrying food and straw to the
brooding pigeons, behold the little ones! behold a number of chickens
peeping about the setting hen which yesterday sat motionless in her
brooding place! behold one day the tender little rabbits in the hutch
where formerly dwelt in solitude the pair of big rabbits to which he had
not a few times lovingly carried the green vegetables left over in his
mother's kitchen!

I have not yet been able to institute in Rome the breeding of animals,
but in the "Children's Houses" at Milan there are several animals, among
them a pair of pretty little white American fowl that live in a
diminutive and elegant _chalet_, similar in construction to a Chinese
pagoda: in front of it, a little piece of ground inclosed by a rampart
is reserved for the pair. The little door of the _chalet_ is locked at
evening, and the children take care of it in turn. With what delight
they go in the morning to unlock the door, to fetch water and straw, and
with what care they watch during the day, and at evening lock the door
after having made sure that the fowl lack nothing! The teacher informs
me that among all the educative exercises this is the most welcome, and
seems also the most important of all. Many a time when the children are
tranquilly occupied in tasks, each at the work he prefers, one, two, or
three, get up silently, and go out to cast a glance at the animals to
see if they need care. Often it happens that a child absents himself for
a long time and the teacher surprises him watching enchantedly the fish
gliding ruddy and resplendent in the sunlight in the waters of the
fountain.

One day I received from the teacher in Milan a letter in which she spoke
to me with great enthusiasm of a truly wonderful piece of news. The
little pigeons were hatched. For the children it was a great festival.
They felt themselves to some extent the parents of these little ones,
and no artificial reward which had flattered their vanity would ever
have provoked such a truly fine emotion. Not less great are the joys
which vegetable nature provides. In one of the "Children's Houses" at
Rome, where there was no soil that could be cultivated, there have been
arranged, through the efforts of Signora Talamo, flower-pots all around
the large terrace, and climbing plants near the walls. The children
never forget to water the plants with their little watering-pots.

One day I found them seated on the ground, all in a circle, around a
splendid red rose which had bloomed in the night; silent and calm,
literally immersed in mute contemplation.

_Third._ The children are initiated into the virtue of _patience and
into confident expectation_, which is a form of faith and of philosophy
of life.

When the children put a seed into the ground, and wait until it
fructifies, and see the first appearance of the shapeless plant, and
wait for the growth and the transformations into flower and fruit, and
see how some plants sprout sooner and some later, and how the deciduous
plants have a rapid life, and the fruit-trees a slower growth, they end
by acquiring a peaceful equilibrium of conscience, and absorb the first
germs of that wisdom which so characterised the tillers of the soil in
the time when they still kept their primitive simplicity.

_Fourth._ _The children are inspired with a feeling for nature_, which
is maintained by the marvels of creation--that creation which _rewards_
with a generosity not measured by the labour of those who help it to
evolve the life of its creatures.

Even while at the work, a sort of correspondence arises between the
child's soul and the lives which are developed under his care. The child
loves naturally the manifestations of life: Mrs. Latter tells us how
easily little ones are interested even in earthworms and in the movement
of the larvae of insects in manure, without feeling that horror which we,
who have grown up isolated from nature, experience towards certain
animals. It is well then, to develop this feeling of trust and
confidence in living creatures, which is, moreover, a form of love, and
of union with the universe.

But what most develops a feeling of nature is the _cultivation_ of the
_living_ things, because they by their natural development give back far
more than they receive, and show something like infinity in their beauty
and variety. When the child has cultivated the iris or the <DW29>, the
rose or the hyacinth, has placed in the soil a seed or a bulb and
periodically watered it, or has planted a fruit-bearing shrub, and the
blossomed flower and the ripened fruit offer themselves as a _generous
gift_ of nature, a rich reward for a small effort; it seems almost as if
nature were answering with her gifts to the feeling of desire, to the
vigilant love of the cultivator, rather than striking a balance with his
material efforts.

It will be quite different when the child has to gather the _material_
fruits of his labour: motionless, uniform objects, which are consumed
and dispersed rather than increased and multiplied.

The difference between the products of nature and those of industry,
between divine products and human products--it is this that must be born
spontaneously in the child's conscience, like the determination of a
fact.

But at the same time, as the plant must give its fruit, so man must give
his labour.

_Fifth._ _The child follows the natural way of development of the human
race._ In short, such education makes the evolution of the individual
harmonise with that of humanity. Man passed from the natural to the
artificial state through agriculture: when he discovered the secret of
intensifying the production of the soil, he obtained the reward of
civilisation.

The same path must be traversed by the child who is destined to become a
civilised man.

The action of educative nature so understood is very practically
accessible. Because, even if the vast stretch of ground and the large
courtyard necessary for physical education are lacking, it will always
be possible to find a few square yards of land that may be cultivated,
or a little place where pigeons can make their nest, things sufficient
for spiritual education. Even a pot of flowers at the window can, if
necessary, fulfil the purpose.

In the first "Children's House" in Rome we have a vast courtyard,
cultivated as a garden, where the children are free to run in the open
air--and, besides, a long stretch of ground, which is planted on one
side with trees, has a branching path in the middle, and on the opposite
side, has broken ground for the cultivation of plants. This last, we
have divided into so many portions, reserving one for each child.

While the smaller children run freely up and down the paths, or rest in
the shade of the trees, the _possessors of the earth_ (children from
four years of age up), are sowing, or hoeing, watering or examining, the
surface of the soil watching for the sprouting of plants. It is
interesting to note the following fact: the little reservations of the
children are placed along the wall of the tenement, in a spot formerly
neglected because it leads to a blind road; the inhabitants of the
house, therefore, had the habit of throwing from those windows every
kind of offal, and at the beginning our garden was thus contaminated.

But, little by little, without any exhortation on our part, solely
through the respect born in the people's mind for the children's labour,
nothing more fell from the windows, except the loving glances and smiles
of the mothers upon the soil which was the beloved possession of their
little children.




CHAPTER XI

MANUAL LABOUR--THE POTTER'S ART AND BUILDING


Manual labour is distinguished from manual gymnastics by the fact that
the object of the latter is to exercise the hand, and the former, to
_accomplish a determinate work_, being, or simulating, a socially useful
object. The one perfects the individual, the other enriches the world;
the two things are, however, connected because, in general, only one who
has perfected his own hand can produce a useful product.

I have thought wise, after a short trial, to exclude completely
Froebel's exercises, because weaving and sewing on cardboard are ill
adapted to the physiological state of the child's visual organs where
the powers of the accommodation of the eye have not yet reached complete
development; hence, these exercises cause an _effort_ of the organ which
may have a fatal influence on the development of the sight. The other
little exercises of Froebel, such as the folding of paper, are exercises
of the hand, not work.

There is still left plastic work,--the most rational among all the
exercises of Froebel,--which consists in making the child reproduce
determinate objects in clay.

In consideration, however, of the system of liberty which I proposed, I
did not like to make the children _copy_ anything, and, in giving them
clay to fashion in their own manner, I did not direct the children to
_produce useful things_; nor was I accomplishing an educative result,
inasmuch as plastic work, as I shall show later, serves for the study
of the psychic individuality of the child in his spontaneous
manifestations, but not for his education.

I decided therefore to try in the "Children's Houses" some very
interesting exercises which I had seen accomplished by an artist,
Professor Randone, in the "School of Educative Art" founded by him. This
school had its origin along with the society for young people, called
_Giovinezza Gentile_, both school and society having the object of
educating youth in gentleness towards their surroundings--that is, in
respect for objects, buildings, monuments: a really important part of
civil education, and one which interested me particularly on account of
the "Children's Houses," since that institution has, as its fundamental
aim, to teach precisely this respect for the walls, for the house, for
the surroundings.

Very suitably, Professor Randone had decided that the society of
_Giovinezza Gentile_ could not be based upon sterile theoretical
preachings of the principles of citizenship, or upon moral pledges taken
by the children; but that it must proceed from an artistic education
which should lead the youth to appreciate and love, and consequently
respect, objects and especially monuments and historic buildings. Thus
the "School of Educative Art" was inspired by a broad artistic
conception including the reproduction of objects which are commonly met
in the surroundings; the history and pre-history of their production,
and the illustration of the principal civic monuments which, in Rome,
are in large measure composed of archaeological monuments. In order the
more directly to accomplish his object, Professor Randone founded his
admirable school in an opening in one of the most artistic parts of the
walls of Rome, namely, the wall of Belisarius, overlooking the Villa
Umberto Primo--a wall which has been entirely neglected by the
authorities and by no means respected by the citizens, and upon which
Randone lavished care, decorating it with graceful hanging gardens on
the outside, and locating within it the School of Art which was to shape
the _Giovinezza Gentile_.

Here Randone has tried, very fittingly, to rebuild and revive a form of
art which was once the glory of Italy and of Florence--the potter's art,
that is, the art of constructing vases.

The archaeological, historical, and artistic importance of the vase is
very great, and may be compared with the numismatic art. In fact the
first object of which humanity felt the need was the _vase_, which came
into being with the utilisation of fire, and before the discovery of the
_production_ of fire. Indeed the first food of mankind was cooked in a
vase.

One of the things most important, ethnically, in judging the
civilisation of a primitive people is the grade of perfection attained
in _pottery_; in fact, the _vase_ for domestic life and the axe for
social life are the first sacred symbols which we find in the
prehistoric epoch, and are the religious symbols connected with the
temples of the gods and with the cult of the dead. Even to-day,
religious cults have sacred vases in their Sancta Sanctorum.

People who have progressed in civilisation show their feeling for art
and their aesthetic feeling also in _vases_ which are multiplied in
almost infinite form, as we see in Egyptian, Etruscan, and Greek art.

The vase then comes into being, attains perfection, and is multiplied in
its uses and its forms, in the course of human civilisation; and the
history of the vase follows the history of humanity itself. Besides the
civil and moral importance of the vase, we have another and practical
one, its literal _adaptability_ to every modification of form, and its
susceptibility to the most diverse ornamentation; in this, it gives free
scope to the individual genius of the artist.

Thus, when once the handicraft leading to the construction of vases has
been learned (and this is the part of the progress in the work, learned
from the direct and graduated instruction of the teacher), anyone can
modify it according to the inspiration of his own aesthetic taste and
this is the artistic, individual part of the work. Besides this, in
Randone's school the use of the potter's wheel is taught, and also the
composition of the mixture for the bath of majolica ware, and baking the
pieces in the furnace, stages of manual labour which contain an
industrial culture.

Another work in the School of Educative Art is the manufacture of
diminutive bricks, and their baking in the furnace, and the construction
of diminutive _walls_ built by the same processes which the masons use
in the construction of houses, the bricks being joined by means of
mortar handled with a trowel. After the simple construction of the
wall,--which is very amusing for the children who build it, placing
brick on brick, superimposing row on row,--the children pass to the
construction of real _houses_,--first, resting on the ground, and, then,
really constructed with foundations, after a previous excavation of
large holes in the ground by means of little hoes and shovels. These
little houses have openings corresponding to windows and doors, and are
variously ornamented in their facades by little tiles of bright and
multi- majolica: the tiles themselves being manufactured by the
children.

Thus the children learn to _appreciate_ the objects and constructions
which surround them, while a real manual and artistic labour gives them
profitable exercise.

Such is the manual training which I have adopted in the "Children's
Houses"; after two or three lessons the little pupils are already
enthusiastic about the construction of vases, and they preserve very
carefully their own products, in which they take pride. With their
plastic art they then model little objects, eggs or fruits, with which
they themselves fill the vases. One of the first undertakings is the
simple vase of red clay filled with eggs of white clay; then comes the
modelling of the vase with one or more spouts, of the narrow-mouthed
vase, of the vase with a handle, of that with two or three handles, of
the tripod, of the amphora.

For children of the age of five or six, the work of the potter's wheel
begins. But what most delights the children is the work of building a
wall with little bricks, and seeing a little house, the fruit of their
own hands, rise in the vicinity of the ground in which are growing
plants, also cultivated by them. Thus the age of childhood epitomises
the principal primitive labours of humanity, when the human race,
changing from the nomadic to the stable condition, demanded of the earth
its fruit, built itself shelter, and devised vases to cook the foods
yielded by the fertile earth.




CHAPTER XII

EDUCATION OF THE SENSES


In a pedagogical method which is experimental the education of the
senses must undoubtedly assume the greatest importance. Experimental
psychology also takes note of movements by means of sense measurements.

Pedagogy, however, although it may profit by psychometry is not designed
to _measure_ the sensations, but _educate_ the senses. This is a point
easily understood, yet one which is often confused. While the
proceedings of esthesiometry are not to any great extent applicable to
little children, the _education_ of the _senses_ is entirely possible.

We do not start from the conclusions of experimental psychology. That
is, it is not the knowledge of the average sense conditions according to
the age of the child which leads us to determine the educational
applications we shall make. We start essentially from a method, and it
is probable that psychology will be able to draw its conclusions from
pedagogy so understood, and not _vice versa_.

The method used by me is that of making a pedagogical experiment with a
didactic object and awaiting the spontaneous reaction of the child. This
is a method in every way analogous to that of experimental psychology.

I make use of a material which, at first glance, may be confused with
psychometric material. Teachers from Milan who had followed the course
in the Milan school of experimental psychology, seeing my material
exposed, would recognise among it, measures of the perception of colour,
hardness, and weight, and would conclude that, in truth, I brought no
new contribution to pedagogy since these instruments were already known
to them.

But the great difference between the two materials lies in this: The
esthesiometer carries within itself the possibility of _measuring_; my
objects on the contrary, often do not permit a measure, but are adapted
to cause the child to _exercise_ the senses.

In order that an instrument shall attain such a pedagogical end, it is
necessary that it shall not _weary_ but shall _divert_ the child. Here
lies the difficulty in the selection of didactic material. It is known
that the psychometric instruments are great _consumers of energy_--for
this reason, when Pizzoli wished to apply them to the education of the
senses, he did not succeed because the child was annoyed by them, and
became tired. Instead, _the aim of education is to develop the
energies_.

Psychometric instruments, or better, the instruments of _esthesiometry_,
are prepared in their differential gradations upon the laws of Weber,
which were in truth drawn from experiments made upon adults.

With little children, we must proceed to the making of trials, and must
select the didactic materials in which they show themselves to be
interested.

This I did in the first year of the "Children's Houses" adopting a great
variety of stimuli, with a number of which I had already experimented in
the school for deficients.

Much of the material used for deficients is abandoned in the education
of the normal child--and much that is used has been greatly modified. I
believe, however, that I have arrived at a _selection of objects_ (which
I do not here wish to speak of in the technical language of psychology
as stimuli) representing the minimum _necessary_ to a practical sense
education.

These objects constitute the _didactic system_ (or set of didactic
materials) used by me. They are manufactured by the House of Labour of
the Humanitarian Society at Milan.

A description of the objects will be given as the educational scope of
each is explained. Here I shall limit myself to the setting forth of a
few general considerations.

_First._ _The difference in the reaction between deficient and normal
children, in the presentation of didactic material made up of graded
stimuli._ This difference is plainly seen from the fact that the same
didactic material used with deficients _makes education possible_, while
with normal children it _provokes auto-education_.

This fact is one of the most interesting I have met with in all my
experience, and it inspired and rendered possible the method of
_observation_ and _liberty_.

Let us suppose that we use our first object,--a block in which solid
geometric forms are set. Into corresponding holes in the block are set
ten little wooden cylinders, the bases diminishing gradually about the
millimetres. The game consists in taking the cylinders out of their
places, putting them on the table, mixing them, and then putting each
one back in its own place. The aim is to educate the eye to the
differential perception of dimensions.

With the deficient child, it would be necessary to begin with exercises
in which the stimuli were much more strongly contrasted, and to arrive
at this exercise only after many others had preceded it.

With normal children, this is, on the other hand, the first object which
we may present, and out of all the didactic material this is the game
preferred by the very little children of two and a half and three years.
Once we arrived at this exercise with a deficient child, it was
necessary continually and actively to recall his attention, inviting him
to look at the block and showing him the various pieces. And if the
child once succeeded in placing all the cylinders properly, he stopped,
and the game was finished. Whenever the deficient child committed an
error, it was necessary to correct it, or to urge him to correct it
himself, and when he was able to correct an error he was usually quite
indifferent.

Now the normal child, instead, takes spontaneously a lively interest in
this game. He pushes away all who would interfere, or offer to help him,
and wishes to be alone before his problem.

It had already been noted that little ones of two or three years take
the greatest pleasure in arranging small objects, and this experiment in
the "Children's Houses" demonstrates the truth of this assertion.

Now, and here is the important point, the normal child attentively
observes the relation between the size of the opening and that of the
object which he is to place in the mould, and is greatly interested in
the game, as is clearly shown by the expression of attention on the
little face.

If he mistakes, placing one of the objects in an opening that is small
for it, he takes it away, and proceeds to make various trials, seeking
the proper opening. If he makes a contrary error, letting the cylinder
fall into an opening that is a little too large for it, and then
collects all the successive cylinders in openings just a little too
large, he will find himself at the last with the big cylinder in his
hand while only the smallest opening is empty. The didactic material
_controls every error_. The child proceeds to correct himself, doing
this in various ways. Most often he feels the cylinders or shakes them,
in order to recognise which are the largest. Sometimes, he sees at a
glance where his error lies, pulls the cylinders from the places where
they should not be, and puts those left out where they belong, then
replaces all the others. The normal child always repeats the exercise
with growing interest.

Indeed, it is precisely in these errors that the educational importance
of the didactic material lies, and when the child with evident security
places each piece in its proper place, he has outgrown the exercise, and
this piece of material becomes useless to him.

This self-correction leads the child to concentrate his attention upon
the differences of dimensions, and to compare the various pieces. It is
in just this comparison that the _psycho-sensory_ exercise lies.

There is, therefore, no question here of teaching the child the
_knowledge_ of the dimensions, through the medium of these pieces.
Neither is it our aim that the child shall know how to use, _without an
error_, the material presented to him thus performing the exercises
well.

That would place our material on the same basis as many others, for
example that of Froebel, and would require again the _active_ work of
the _teacher_, who busies herself furnishing knowledge, and making haste
to correct every error in order that the child may _learn the use of the
objects_.

Here instead it is the work of the child, the auto-correction, the
auto-education which acts, for the _teacher must not interfere_ in the
_slightest_ way. No teacher can furnish the child with the _agility
which he acquires_ through gymnastic _exercises_: it is necessary that
the _pupil perfect himself_ through his own efforts. It is very much the
same with the _education of the senses_.

It might be said that the same thing is true of every form of education;
a man is not what he is because of the teachers he has had, but because
of what he has done.

One of the difficulties of putting this method into practice with
teachers of the old school, lies in the difficulty of preventing them
from intervening when the little child remains for some time puzzled
before some error, and with his eyebrows drawn together and his lips
puckered, makes repeated efforts to correct himself. When they see this,
the old-time teachers are seized with pity, and long, with an almost
irresistible force, to help the child. When we prevent this
intervention, they burst into words of compassion for the little
scholar, but he soon shows in his smiling face the joy of having
surmounted an obstacle.

Normal children repeat such exercises many times. This repetition varies
according to the individual. Some children after having completed the
exercise five or six times are tired of it. Others will remove and
replace the pieces at least _twenty times_, with an expression of
evident interest. Once, after I had watched a little one of four years
repeat this exercise sixteen times, I had the other children sing in
order to distract her, but she continued unmoved to take out the
cylinders, mix them up and put them back in their places.

An intelligent teacher ought to be able to make most interesting
individual psychological observations, and, to a certain point, should
be able to measure the length of time for which the various stimuli held
the attention.

In fact, when the child educates himself, and when the control and
correction of errors is yielded to the didactic material, there _remains
for the teacher nothing but to observe_. She must then be more of a
psychologist than a teacher, and this shows the importance of a
scientific preparation on the part of the teacher.

Indeed, with my methods, the teacher teaches _little_ and observes
_much_, and, above all, it is her function to direct the psychic
activity of the children and their physiological development. For this
reason I have changed the name of teacher into that of directress.

At first this name provoked many smiles, for everyone asked whom there
was for this teacher to direct, since she had no assistants, and since
she must leave her little scholars _in liberty_. But her direction is
much more profound and important than that which is commonly understood,
for this teacher directs _the life and the soul_.

_Second._ _The education of the senses has, as its aim, the refinement
of the differential perception of stimuli by means of repeated
exercises._

There exists a _sensory culture_, which is not generally taken into
consideration, but which is a factor in esthesiometry.

For example, in the mental _tests_ which are used in France, or in a
series of tests which De Sanctis has established for the _diagnosis_ of
the intellectual status, I have often seen used _cubes of different
sizes placed at varying distances_. The child was to select the
_smallest_ and the _largest_, while the chronometer measured the time of
reaction between the command and the execution of the act. Account was
also taken of the errors. I repeat that in such experiments the factor
of _culture_ is forgotten and by this I mean _sensory culture_.

Our children have, for example, among the didactic material for the
education of the senses, a series of ten cubes. The first has a base of
ten centimetres, and the others decrease, successively, one centimetre
as to base, the smallest cube having a base of one centimetre. The
exercise consists in throwing the blocks, which are pink in colour, down
upon a green carpet, and then building them up into a little tower,
placing the largest cube as the base, and then placing the others in
order of size until the little cube of one centimetre is placed at the
top.

The little one must each time select, from the blocks scattered upon the
green carpet, "the largest" block. This game is most entertaining to the
little ones of two years and a half, who, as soon as they have
constructed the little tower, tumble it down with little blows of the
hand, admiring the pink cubes as they lie scattered upon the green
carpet. Then, they begin again the construction, building and destroying
a definite number of times.

If we were to place before these tests one of my children from three to
four years, and one of the children from the first elementary (six or
seven years old), my pupil would undoubtedly manifest a shorter period
of reaction, and would not commit errors. The same may be said for the
tests of the chromatic sense, etc.

This educational method should therefore prove interesting to students
of experimental psychology as well as to teachers.

In conclusion, let me summarize briefly: Our didactic material renders
auto-education possible, permits a methodical education of the senses.
Not upon the ability of the teacher does such education rest, but upon
the didactic system. This presents objects which, first, attract the
spontaneous attention of the child, and, second, contain a rational
gradation of stimuli.

We must not confuse the _education_ of the senses, with the concrete
ideas which may be gathered from our environment by means of the senses.
Nor must this education of the senses be identical in our minds with the
language through which is given the nomenclature corresponding to the
concrete idea, nor with the acquisition of the abstract idea of the
exercises.

Let us consider what the music master does in giving instruction in
piano playing. He teaches the pupil the correct position of the body,
gives him the idea of the notes, shows him the correspondence between
the written notes and the touch and the position of the fingers, and
then he leaves the child to perform the exercise by himself. If a
pianist is to be made of this child, there must, between the ideas given
by the teacher and the musical exercises, intervene long and patient
application to those exercises which serve to give agility to the
articulation of the fingers and of the tendons, in order that the
co-ordination of special muscular movements shall become automatic, and
that the muscles of the hand shall become strong through their repeated
use.

The pianist must, therefore, _act for himself_, and the more his natural
tendencies lead him to _persist_ in these exercises the greater will be
his success. However, without the direction of the master the exercise
will not suffice to develop the scholar into a true pianist.

The directress of the "Children's House" must have a clear idea of the
two factors which enter into her work--the guidance of the child, and
the individual exercise.

Only after she has this concept clearly fixed in her mind, may she
proceed to the application of a _method_ to _guide_ the spontaneous
education of the child and to impart necessary notions to him.

In the opportune quality and in the manner of this intervention lies the
_personal art_ of the _educator_.

For example, in the "Children's House" in the Prati di Castello, where
the pupils belong to the middle-class, I found, a month after the
opening of the school, a child of five years who already knew how to
compose any word, as he knew the alphabet perfectly--he had learned it
in two weeks. He knew how to write on the blackboard, and in the
exercises in free design he showed himself not only to be an observer,
but to have some intuitive idea of perspective, drawing a house and
chair very cleverly. As for the exercises of the chromatic sense, he
could mix together the eight gradations of the eight colours which we
use, and from this mass of sixty-four tablets, each wound with silk of a
different colour or shade, he could rapidly separate the eight groups.
Having done this, he would proceed with ease to arrange each colour
series in perfect gradation. In this game the child would almost cover
one of the little tables with a carpet of finely-shaded colours. I made
the experiment, taking him to the window and showing him in full
daylight one of the  tablets, telling him to look at it well, so
that he might be able to remember it. I then sent him to the table on
which all the gradations were spread out, and asked him to find the
tablet like the one at which he had looked. He committed only very
slight errors, often choosing the exact shade but more often the one
next it, rarely a tint two grades removed from the right one. This boy
had then a power of discrimination and a colour memory which were almost
prodigious. Like all the other children, he was exceedingly fond of the
colour exercises. But when I asked the name of the white colour spool,
he hesitated for a long time before replying uncertainly "white." Now a
child of such intelligence should have been able, even without the
special intervention of the teacher, to learn the name of each colour.

The directress told me that having noticed that the child had great
difficulty in retaining the nomenclature of the colours, she had up
until that time left him to exercise himself freely with the games for
the colour sense. At the same time he had developed rapidly a power over
written language, which in my method as presented through a series
of problems to be solved. These problems are presented as sense
exercises. This child was, therefore, most intelligent. In him the
discriminative sensory perceptions kept pace with great intellectual
activities--attention and judgment. But his _memory for names_ was
inferior.

The directress had thought best not to interfere, as yet, in the
teaching of the child. Certainly, the education of the child was a
little disordered, and the directress had left the spontaneous
explanation of his mental activities excessively free. However desirable
it may be to furnish a sense education as a basis for intellectual
ideas, it is nevertheless advisable at the same time to associate the
_language_ with these _perceptions_.

In this connection I have found excellent for use with normal children
_the three periods_ of which the lesson according to Seguin consists:

_First Period._ The association of the sensory perception with the name.

For example, we present to the child, two colours, red and blue.
Presenting the red, we say simply, "This is red," and presenting the
blue, "This is blue." Then, we lay the spools upon the table under the
eyes of the child.

_Second Period._ Recognition of the object corresponding to the name. We
Say to the child, "Give me the red," and then, "Give me the blue."

_Third Period._ The remembering of the name corresponding to the object.
We ask the child, showing him the object, "What is this?" and he should
respond, "Red."

Seguin insists strongly upon these three periods, and urges that the
colours be left for several instants under the eyes of the child. He
also advises us never to present the colour singly, but always two at a
time, since the contrast helps the chromatic memory. Indeed, I have
proved that there cannot be a better method for teaching colour to the
deficients, who, with this method were able to learn the colours much
more perfectly than normal children in the ordinary schools who have had
a haphazard sense education. For normal children however there exists a
_period preceding_ the Three Periods of Seguin--a period which contains
the real _sense education_. This is the acquisition of a fineness of
differential perception, which can be obtained _only_ through
auto-education.

This, then, is an example of the great superiority of the normal child,
and of the greater effect of education which such pedagogical methods
may exercise upon the mental development of normal as compared with
deficient children.

The association of the name with the stimulus is a source of great
pleasure to the normal child. I remember, one day, I had taught a little
girl, who was not yet three years old, and who was a little tardy in the
development of language, the names of three colours. I had the children
place one of their little tables near a window, and seating myself in
one of the little chairs, I seated the little girl in a similar chair at
my right.

I had, on the table, six of the colour spools in pairs, that is two
reds, two blues, two yellows. In the First Period, I placed one of the
spools before the child, asking her to find the one like it. This I
repeated for all three of the colours, showing her how to arrange them
carefully in pairs. After this I passed to the Three Periods of Seguin.
The little girl learned to recognise the three colours and to pronounce
the name of each.

She was so happy that she looked at me for a long time, and then began
to jump up and down. I, seeing her pleasure, said to her, laughing, "Do
you know the colours?" and she replied, still jumping up and down, "Yes!
YES!" Her delight was inexhaustible; she danced about me, waiting
joyously for me to ask her the same question, that she might reply with
the same enthusiasm, "Yes! Yes!"

Another important particular in the technique of sense education lies in
_isolating the sense_, whenever this is possible. So, for example, the
exercises on the sense of hearing can be given more successfully in an
environment not only of silence, but even of darkness.

For the education of the senses in general, such as in the tactile,
thermic, baric, and stereognostic exercises, we blindfold the child. The
reasons for this particular technique have been fully set forth by
psychology. Here, it is enough to note that in the case of normal
children the blindfold greatly increases their interest, without making
the exercises degenerate into noisy fun, and without having the child's
attention attracted more to the _bandage_ than to the sense-stimuli upon
which we wish to _focus_ the attention.

For example, in order to test the acuteness of the child's sense of
hearing (a most important thing for the teacher to know), I use an
empiric test which is coming to be used almost universally by physicians
in the making of medical examinations. This test is made by modulating
the voice, reducing it to a whisper. The child is blindfolded, or the
teacher may stand behind him, speaking his name, in _a whisper_ and from
varying distances. I establish a _solemn silence_ in the schoolroom,
darken the windows, have the children bow their heads upon their hands
which they hold in front of their eyes. Then I call the children by
name, one by one, in a whisper, lighter for those who are nearer me, and
more clearly for those farther away. Each child awaits, in the darkness,
the faint voice which calls him, listening intently, ready to run with
keenest joy toward the mysterious and much, desired call.

The normal child may be blindfolded in the games where, for example, he
is to recognise various weights, for this does help him to intensify and
concentrate his attention upon the baric stimuli which he is to test.
The blindfold adds to his pleasure, since he is proud of having been
able to guess.

The effect of these games upon deficient children is very different.
When placed in darkness, they often go to sleep, or give themselves up
to disordered acts. When the blindfold is used, they fix their attention
upon the bandage itself, and change the exercise into a game, which does
not fulfil the end we have in view with the exercise.

We speak, it is true, of _games_ in education, but it must be made clear
that we understand by this term a free activity, ordered to a definite
end; not disorderly noise, which distracts the attention.

The following pages of Itard give an idea of the patient experiments
made by this pioneer in pedagogy. Their lack of success was due largely
to errors which successive experiments have made it possible to correct,
and in part to the mentality of his subject.

"IV: In this last experiment it was not necessary, as in the one
preceding, to demand that the pupil repeat the sounds which he
perceived. This double work, distributing his attention, was outside the
plane of my purpose, which was to educate each organ separately. I,
therefore, limited myself to following the simple perception of sounds.
To be certain of this result, I placed my pupil in front of me with his
eyes blinded, his fists closed, and had him extend a finger every time
that I made a sound. He understood this arrangement, and as soon as the
sound reached his ear, the finger was raised, with a species of
impetuosity, and often, with demonstrations of joy which left no doubt
as to the pleasure the pupil took in these bizarre lessons. Indeed,
whether it be that he found a real pleasure in the sound of the human
voice, or that he had at last conquered the annoyance he at first felt
on being deprived of the light for so long a time, the fact remains that
more than once, during the intervals of rest, he came to me with his
blindfold in his hand, holding it over his eyes, and jumping with joy
when he felt my hands tying it about his head.

"V: Having thoroughly assured myself, through such experiments as the
one described above, that all sounds of the voice, whatever their
intensity, were perceived by Vittorio, I proceeded to the attempt of
making him compare these sounds. It was no longer a case of simply
noting the sounds of the voice, but of perceiving the differences and of
appreciating all these modifications and varieties of tone which go to
make up the music of the word. Between this task and the preceding there
stretched a prodigious difference, especially for a being whose
development was dependent upon gradual effort, and who advanced toward
civilisation only because I led thitherward so gently that he was
unconscious of the progress. Facing the difficulty now presented, I had
need to arm myself more strongly than ever with patience and gentleness,
encouraged by the hope that once I had surmounted this obstacle all
would have been done for the sense of hearing.

"We began with the comparison of the vowel sounds, and here, too, made
use of the hand to assure ourselves as to the result of our experiments.
Each one of the fingers was made the sign of one of the five vowels.
Thus the thumb represented A and was to be raised whenever this vowel
was pronounced; the index finger was the sign for E; the middle finger
for I; and so on.

"VI: Not without fatigue, and not for a long time, was I able to give a
distinct idea of the vowels. The first to be clearly distinguished was
O, and then followed A. The three others presented much greater
difficulty, and were for a long time confused. At last, however, the ear
began to perceive distinctly, and, then, there returned in all their
vivacity, those demonstrations of joy of which I have spoken. This
continued until the pleasure taken in the lessons began to be
boisterous, the sounds became confused, and the finger was raised
indiscriminately. The outbursts of laughter became indeed so excessive
that I lost patience! As soon as I placed the blindfold over his eyes
the shouts of laughter began."

Itard, finding it impossible to continue his educational work, decided
to do away with the blindfold, and, indeed, the shouts ceased, but now
the child's attention was distracted by the slightest movement about
him. The blindfold was necessary, but the boy had to be made to
understand that he must not laugh so much and that he was having a
lesson. The corrective means of Itard and their touching results are
worth reporting here!

"I wished to intimidate him with my manner, not being able to do so with
my glance. I armed myself with a tambourine and struck it lightly
whenever he made a mistake. But he mistook this correction for a joke,
and his joy became more noisy than ever. I then felt that I must make
the correction a little more severe. It was understood, and I saw, with
a mixture of pain and pleasure, revealed in the darkened face of this
boy the fact that the feeling of injury surpassed the unhappiness of the
blow. Tears came from beneath the blindfold, he urged me to take it off,
but, whether from embarrassment or fear, or from some inner
preoccupation, when freed from the bandage he still kept his eyes
tightly closed. I could not laugh at the doleful expression of his face,
the closed eyelids from between which trickled an occasional tear! Oh,
in this moment, as in many others, ready to renounce my task, and
feeling that the time I had consecrated to it was lost, how I regretted
ever having known this boy, and bow severely I condemned the barren and
inhuman curiosity of the men who in order to make scientific advancement
had torn him away from a life, at least innocent and happy!"

Here also is demonstrated the great educative superiority of scientific
pedagogy for normal children.

Finally, one particular of the technique consists in the _distribution
of the stimuli_. This will be treated more fully in the description of
the didactic system (materials) and of the sense education. Here it is
enough to say that one should proceed from _few stimuli strongly
contrasting, to many stimuli in gradual differentiation always more fine
and imperceptible_. So, for example, we first present, together, red and
blue; the shortest rod beside the longest; the thinnest beside the
thickest, etc., passing from these to the delicately differing tints,
and to the discrimination of very slight differences in length and
size.




CHAPTER XIII

EDUCATION OF THE SENSES AND ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE DIDACTIC MATERIAL:
GENERAL SENSIBILITY; THE TACTILE, THERMIC, BARIC, AND STEREOGNOSTIC
SENSES


The education of the tactile and the thermic senses go together, since
the warm bath, and heat in general, render the tactile sense more acute.
Since to exercise the tactile sense it is necessary to _touch_, bathing
the hands in warm water has the additional advantage of teaching the
child a principle of cleanliness--that of not touching objects with
hands that are not clean. I therefore apply the general notions of
practical life, regarding the washing of the hands, care of the nails,
to the exercises preparatory to the discrimination of tactile stimuli.

The limitation of the exercises of the tactile sense to the cushioned
tips of the fingers, is rendered necessary by practical life. It must be
made a necessary phase of _education_ because it prepares for a life in
which man exercises and uses the tactile sense through the medium of
these finger tips. Hence, I have the child wash his hands carefully with
soap, in a little basin; and in another basin I have him rinse them in a
bath of tepid water. Then I show him how to dry and rub his hands
gently, in this way preparing for the regular bath. I next teach the
child how to _touch_, that is, the manner in which he should touch
surfaces. For this it is necessary to take the finger of the child and
to draw _it very, very lightly_ over the surface.

Another particular of the technique is to teach the child to hold his
eyes closed while he touches, encouraging him to do this by telling him
that he will be able to feel the differences better, and so leading him
to distinguish, without the help of sight, the change of contact. He
will quickly learn, and will show that he enjoys the exercise. Often
after the introduction of such exercises, it is a common thing to have a
child come to you, and, closing his eyes, touch with great delicacy the
palm of your hand or the cloth of your dress, especially any silken or
velvet trimmings. They do verily _exercise_ the tactile sense. They
enjoy keenly touching any soft pleasant surface, and become exceedingly
keen in discriminating between the differences in the sandpaper cards.

The Didactic Material consists of; _a_--a rectangular wooden board
divided into two equal rectangles, one covered with very smooth paper,
or having the wood polished until a smooth surface is obtained; the
other covered with sandpaper, _b_--a tablet like the preceding covered
with alternating strips of smooth paper and sandpaper.

I also make use of a collection of paper slips, varying through many
grades from smooth, fine cardboard to coarsest sandpaper. The stuffs
described elsewhere are also used in these lessons.


As to the Thermic Sense, I use a set of little metal bowls, which are
filled with water at different degrees of temperature. These I try to
measure with a thermometer, so that there may be two containing water of
the same temperature.

[Illustration: THE CLOISTER SCHOOL OF THE FRANCISCAN NUNS IN ROME
Children playing a game with tablets of  silk]

[Illustration: (A) GIRL TOUCHING A LETTER AND BOY TELLING OBJECTS BY
WEIGHT.]

[Illustration: (B) ARRANGING TABLETS OF SILK IN THEIR CHROMATIC ORDER.
There are eight colours, and eight shades of each colour, making
sixty-four gradations in all.]

I have designed a set of utensils which are to be made of very light
metal, and filled with water. These have covers, and to each is attached
a thermometer. The bowl touched from the outside gives the desired
impression of heat.

I also have the children put their hands into cold, tepid, and warm
water, an exercise which they find most diverting. I should like to
repeat this exercise with the feet, but I have not bad an opportunity to
make the trial.

For the education of the baric sense (sense of weight), I use with great
success little wooden tablets, six by eight centimetres, having a
thickness of 1/2 centimetre. These tablets are in three different
qualities of wood, wistaria, walnut, and pine. They weigh respectively,
24, 18, and 12 grammes, making them differ in weight by 6 grammes. These
tablets should be very smooth; if possible, varnished in such a way that
every roughness shall be eliminated, but so that the natural colour of
the wood shall remain. The child, _observing_ the colour, _knows_ that
they are of differing weights, and this offers a means of controlling
the exercise. He takes two of the tablets in his hands, letting them
rest upon the palm at the base of his outstretched fingers. Then he
moves his hands up and down in order to gauge the weight. This movement
should come to be, little by little, almost insensible. We lead the
child to make his distinction purely through the difference in weight,
leaving out the guide of the different colours, and closing his eyes. He
learns to do this of himself, and takes great interest in "guessing."

The game attracts the attention of those near, who gather in a circle
about the one who has the tablets, and who take turns in _guessing_.
Sometimes the children spontaneously make use of the blindfold, taking
turns, and interspersing the work with peals of joyful laughter.


EDUCATION OF THE STEREOGNOSTIC SENSE

The education of this sense leads to the recognition of objects through
feeling, that is, through the simultaneous help of the tactile and
muscular senses.

Taking this union as a basis, we have made experiments which have given
marvellously successful educational results. I feel that for the help of
teachers these exercises should be described.

The first didactic material used by us is made up of the bricks and
cubes of Froebel. We call the attention of the child to the form of the
two solids, have him feel them carefully and accurately, with his eyes
open, repeating some phrase serving to fix his attention upon the
particulars of the forms presented. After this the child is told to
place the cubes to the right, the bricks to the left, always feeling
them, and without looking at them. Finally the exercise is repeated, by
the child blindfolded. Almost all the children succeed in the exercise,
and after two or three times, are able to eliminate every error. There
are twenty-four of the bricks and cubes in all, so that the attention
may be held for some time through this "game"--but undoubtedly the
child's pleasure is greatly increased by the fact of his being watched
by a group of his companions, all interested and eager.

One day a directress called my attention to a little girl of three
years, one of our very youngest pupils, who had repeated this exercise
perfectly. We seated the little girl comfortably in an armchair, close
to the table. Then, placing the twenty-four objects before her upon the
table, we mixed them, and calling the child's attention to the
difference in form, told her to place the cubes to the right and the
bricks to the left. When she was blindfolded she began the exercise as
taught by us, taking an object in each hand, feeling each and putting it
in its right place. Sometimes she took two cubes, or two bricks,
sometimes she found a brick in the right hand, a cube in the left. The
child had to recognise the form, and to remember throughout the exercise
the proper placing of the different objects. This seemed to me very
difficult for a child of three years.

But observing her I saw that she not only performed the exercise easily,
but that the movements with which we had taught her to feel the form
were superfluous. Indeed the instant she had taken the two objects in
her hands, if it so happened that she had taken a cube with the left
hand and a brick in the right, she _exchanged_ them _immediately_, and
_then_ began the laborious feeling the form which we had taught and
which she perhaps, believed to be obligatory. But the objects had been
recognised by her through _the first light touch_, that is, the
_recognition_ was _contemporaneous_ to _the taking_.

Continuing my study of the subject, I found that this little girl was
possessed of a remarkable _functional ambidexterity_--I should be very
glad to make a wider study of this phenomenon having in view the
desirability of a simultaneous education of both hands.

I repeated the exercise with other children and found that they
_recognise_ the objects before feeling their contours. This was
particularly true of the _little ones_. Our educational methods in this
respect furnished a remarkable exercise in associative gymnastics,
leading to a rapidity of judgment which was truly surprising and had
the advantage of being perfectly adapted to very young children.

These exercises of the stereognostic sense may be multiplied in many
ways--they amuse the children who find delight in the recognition of a
stimulus, as in the thermic exercises; for example--they may raise any
small objects, toy soldiers, little balls, and, above all, the various
_coins_ in common use. They come to discriminate between small forms
varying very slightly, such as corn, wheat, and rice.

They are very proud of _seeing without eyes_, holding out their hands
and crying, "Here are my eyes!" "I can see with my hands!" Indeed, our
little ones walking in the ways we have planned, make us marvel over
their unforeseen progress, surprising us daily. Often, while they are
wild with delight over some new conquest,--we watch, in deepest wonder
and meditation.


EDUCATION OF THE SENSES OF TASTE AND SMELL

This phase of sense education is most difficult, and I have not as yet
had any satisfactory results to record. I can only say that the
exercises ordinarily used in the tests of psychometry do not seem to me
to be practical for use with young children.

The olfactory sense in children is not developed to any great extent,
and this makes it difficult to attract their attention by means of this
sense. We have made use of one test which has not been repeated often
enough to form the basis of a method. We have the child smell fresh
violets, and jessamine flowers. We then blindfold him, saying, "Now we
are going to present you with flowers." A little friend then holds a
bunch of violets under the child's nose, that he may guess the name of
the flower. For greater or less intensify we present fewer flowers, or
even one single blossom.

[Illustration: (A) DRAWING TABLE AND INSET. (B) WOODEN TABLETS. These
are partly covered with sandpaper to give rough and smooth surfaces.
(C) SOLID INSETS. With these the child, working by himself, learns to
differentiate objects according to thickness, height, and size.

  _Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir_]

[Illustration: (A) BROAD STAIR. (B) LONG STAIR. (C) TOWER. Blocks by
which children are taught thickness, length, size.

  _Copyright, 1912 by Carl R. Byoir_]

But this part of education, like that of the sense of taste, can be
obtained by the child during the luncheon hour;--when he can learn to
recognise various odours.

As to taste, the method of touching the tongue with various solutions,
bitter or acid, sweet, salty, is perfectly applicable. Children of four
years readily lend themselves to such games, which serve as a reason for
showing them how to rinse their mouths perfectly. The children enjoy
recognising various flavours, and learn, after each test, to fill a
glass with tepid water, and carefully rinse their months. In this way
the exercise for the sense of taste is also an exercise in hygiene.


EDUCATION OF THE SENSE OF VISION

_I. Differential Visual Perception of Dimensions_

_First._ Solid Insets: This material consists of three solid blocks of
wood each 55 centimetres long, 6 centimetres high and 8 centimetres
wide. Each block contains ten wooden pieces, set into corresponding
holes. These pieces are cylindrical in shape and are to be handled by
means of a little wooden or brass button which is fixed in the centre of
the top. The cases of cylinders are in appearance much like the cases of
weights used by chemists. In the first set of the series, the cylinders
are all of equal height (55 millimetres) but differ in diameter. The
smallest cylinder has a diameter of 1 centimetre, and the others
increase in diameter at the rate of 1/2 centimetre. In the second set,
the cylinders are all of equal diameter, corresponding to half the
diameter of the largest cylinder in the preceding series--(27
millimetres). The cylinders in this set differ in height, the first
being merely a little disk only a centimetre high, the others increase 5
millimetres each, the tenth one being 55 millimetres high. In the third
set, the cylinders differ both in height and diameter, the first being
1 centimetre high and 1 centimetre in diameter and each succeeding one
increasing 1/2 centimetre in height and diameter. With these insets, the
child, working by himself, learns to differentiate objects according to
_thickness_, according to _height_, and according to _size_.

In the schoolroom, these three sets may be played with by three children
gathered about a table, an exchange of games adding variety. The child
takes the cylinders out of the moulds, mixes them upon the table, and
then puts each back into its corresponding opening. These objects are
made of hard pine, polished and varnished.

_Second._ Large pieces in graded dimensions:--There are three sets of
blocks which come under this head, and it is desirable to have two of
each of these sets in every school.

(_a_) Thickness: this set consists of objects which vary from _thick_ to
_thin_. There are ten quadrilateral prisms, the largest of which has a
base of 10 centimetres, the others decreasing by 1 centimetre. The
pieces are of equal length, 20 centimetres. These prisms are stained a
dark brown. The child mixes them, scattering them over the little
carpet, and then puts them in order, placing one against the other
according to the graduations of thickness, observing that the length
shall correspond exactly. These blocks, taken from the first to the
last, form a species of _stair_, the steps of which grow broader toward
the top. The child may begin with the thinnest piece or with the
thickest, as suits his pleasure. The control of the exercise is not
_certain_, as it was in the solid cylindrical insets. There, the large
cylinders could not enter the small opening, the taller ones would
project beyond the top of the block, etc. In this game of the Big Stair,
the _eye_ of the child can easily recognise an error, since if he
mistakes, the _stair_ is irregular, that is, there will be a high step,
behind which, the step which should have ascended, decreases.

(_b_) Length: Long and Short Objects:--This set consists of _ten rods_.
These are four-sided, each face being 3 centimetres. The first rod is a
metre long, and the last a decimetre. The intervening rods decrease,
from first to last, 1 decimetre each. Each space of 1 decimetre is
painted alternately _red_ or _blue_. The rods, when placed close to each
other, must be so arranged that the colours correspond, forming so many
transverse stripes--the whole set when arranged has the appearance of a
rectangular triangle made up of organ pipes, which decrease on the side
of the hypothenuse.

The child arranges the rods which have first been scattered and mixed.
He puts them together according to the graduation of length, and
observes the correspondence of colours. This exercise also offers a very
evident control of error, for the regularity of the decreasing length of
the stairs along the hypothenuse will be altered if the rods are not
properly placed.

This most important set of blocks will have its principal application in
arithmetic, as we shall see. With it, one may count from one to ten and
may construct the addition and other tables, and it may constitute the
first steps in the study of the decimal and metric system.

(_c_) Size: Objects, Larger and Smaller:--This set is made up of ten
wooden cubes painted in rose- enamel. The largest cube has a
base of 10 centimetres, the smallest, of 1 centimetre, the intervening
ones decrease 1 centimetre each. A little green cloth carpet goes with
these blocks. This may be of oilcloth or cardboard. The game consists of
building the cubes up, one upon another, in the order of their
dimensions, constructing a little tower of which the largest cube forms
the base and the smallest the apex. The carpet is placed on the floor,
and the cubes are scattered upon it. As the tower is built upon the
carpet, the child goes through the exercise of kneeling, rising, etc.
The control is given by the irregularity of the tower as it decreases
toward the apex. A cube misplaced reveals itself, because it breaks the
line. The most common error made by the children in playing with these
blocks at first, is that of placing the second cube as the base and
placing the first cube upon it, thus confusing the two largest blocks. I
have noted that the same error was made by deficient children in the
repeated trials I made with the tests of De Sanctis. At the question,
"Which is the largest?" the child would take, not the largest, but that
nearest it in size.

Any of these three sets of blocks may be used by the children in a
slightly different game. The pieces may be mixed upon a carpet or table,
and then put in order upon another table at some distance. As he carries
each piece, the child must walk without letting his attention wander,
since he must remember the dimensions of the piece for which he is to
look among the mixed blocks.

The games played in this way are excellent for children of four or five
years; while the simple work of arranging the pieces in order upon the
same carpet where they have been mixed is more adapted to the little
ones between three and four years of age. The construction of the tower
with the pink cubes is very attractive to little ones of less than three
years, who knock it down and build it up time after time.

[Illustration: A FEW OF THE MANY GEOMETRIC INSETS OF WOOD USED TO TEACH
FORM

  _Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir_]

[Illustration: (A) GEOMETRIC INSETS OF WOOD, AND FRAME. The frame
furnishes the control necessary for exactness of work. (B) CABINET.
(For storing geometric inset frames.)

  _Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir_]


_II. Differential Visual Perception of Form and Visual-tactile-muscular
Perception_

_Didactic Material._ Plane geometric _insets of wood_: The idea of these
insets goes back to Itard and was also applied by Seguin.

In the school for deficients I had made and applied these insets in the
same form used by my illustrious predecessors. In these there were two
large tablets of wood placed one above the other and fastened together.
The lower board was left solid, while the upper one was perforated by
various geometric figures. The game consisted in placing in these
openings the corresponding wooden figures which, in order that they
might be easily handled, were furnished with a little brass knob.

In my school for deficients, I had multiplied the games calling for
these insets, and distinguished between those used to teach colour and
those used to teach form. The insets for teaching colour were all
circles, those used for teaching form were all painted blue. I had great
numbers of these insets made in graduations of colour and in an infinite
variety of form. This material was most expensive and exceedingly
cumbersome.

In many later experiments with normal children, I have, after many
trials, completely excluded the plane geometric insets as an aid to the
teaching of colour, since this material offers no control of errors, the
child's task being that of _covering_ the forms before him.

I have kept the geometric insets, but have given them a new and original
aspect. The form in which they are now made was suggested to me by a
visit to the splendid manual training school in the Reformatory of St.
Michael in Rome. I saw there wooden models of geometric figures, which
could be set into corresponding frames or placed above corresponding
forms. The scope of these materials was to lead to exactness in the
making of the geometric pieces in regard to control of dimension and
form; the _frame_ furnishing the _control_ necessary for the exactness
of the work.

This led me to think of making modifications in my geometric insets,
making use of the frame as well as of the inset I therefore made a
rectangular tray, which measured 30 x 20 centimetres. This tray was
painted a dark blue and was surrounded by a dark frame. It was furnished
with a cover so arranged that it would contain six of the square frames
with their insets. The advantage of this tray is that the forms may be
changed, thus allowing us to present any combination we choose. I have a
number of blank wooden squares which make it possible to present as few
as two or three geometric forms at a time, the other spaces being filled
in by the blanks. To this material I have added a set of white cards, 10
centimetres square. These cards form a series presenting the geometric
forms in other aspects. In the _first_ of the series, the form is cut
from blue paper and mounted upon the card. In the _second_ box of cards,
the _contour_ of the same figures is mounted in the same blue paper,
forming an outline one centimetre in width. On the _third_ set of cards
the contour of the geometric form is _outlined by a blank line_. We have
then the tray, the collection of small frames with their corresponding
insets, and the set of the cards in three series.

[Illustration: Some of the Card Forms used in the exercises with the
three series of cards.

  _Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir_]

I also designed a case containing six trays. The front of this box may
be lowered when the top is raised and the trays may be drawn out as one
opens the drawers of a desk. Each _drawer_ contains six of the small
frames with their respective insets. In the first drawer I keep the four
plain wooden squares and two frames, one containing a rhomboid, and the
other a trapezoid. In the second, I have a series consisting of a
square, and five rectangles of the same length, but varying in width.
The third drawer contains six circles which diminish in diameter. In the
fourth are six triangles, in the fifth, five polygons from a pentagon to
a decagon. The sixth drawer contains six curved figures (an ellipse, an
oval, etc., and a flower-like figure formed by four crossed arcs).

_Exercise with the Insets._ This exercise consists in presenting to the
child the large frame or tray in which we may arrange the figures as we
wish to present them. We proceed to take out the insets, mix them upon
the table, and then invite the child to put them back in place. This
game may be played by even the younger children and holds the attention
for a long period, though not for so long a time as the exercise with
the cylinders. Indeed, I have never seen a child repeat this exercise
more than five or six times. The child, in fact, expends much energy
upon this exercise. He must _recognise_ the form and must look at it
carefully.

At first many of the children only succeed in placing the insets after
many attempts, trying for example to place a triangle in a trapezoid,
then in a rectangle, etc. Or when they have taken a rectangle, and
recognise where it should go, they will still place it with the long
side of the inset across the short side of the opening, and will only
after many attempts, succeed in placing it. After three or four
successive lessons, the child recognises the geometric figures with
_extreme_ facility and places the insets with a security which has a
tinge of nonchalance, or of _slight contempt for an exercise that is too
easy_. This is the moment in which the child may be led to a methodical
observation of the forms. We change the forms in the frame and pass from
contrasted frames to analogous ones. The exercise is easy for the child,
who habituates himself to placing the pieces in their frames without
errors or false attempts.

The first period of these exercises is at the time when the child is
obliged to make repeated _trials_ with figures that are strongly
contrasted in form. The _recognition_ is greatly helped by associating
with the visual sense the muscular-tactile perception of the forms. I
have the child touch[12] the contour of the piece with the _index
finger_ of _his right hand_, and then have him repeat this with the
contour of the frame into which the pieces must fit. We succeed in
making this a _habit_ with the child. This is very easily attained,
since all children love to _touch_ things. I have already learned,
through my work with deficient children, that among the various forms of
sense memory that of the muscular sense is the most precocious. Indeed,
many children who have not arrived at the point of recognising a _figure
by looking at it_, could recognise it by _touching it_, that is, by
computing the movements necessary to the following of its contour. The
same is true of the greater number of normal children;--confused as to
where to place a figure, they turn it about trying in vain to fit it in,
yet as soon as they have touched the two contours of the piece and its
frame, they succeed in placing it perfectly. Undoubtedly, the
association of the _muscular-tactile_ sense with that of _vision_, aids
in a most remarkable way the perception of forms and fixes them in
memory.

  [12] Here and elsewhere throughout the book the word "touch" is
       used not only to express contact between the fingers and an
       object, but the moving of fingers or hand over an object or
       its outline.

In such exercises, the control is absolute, as it was in the solid
insets. The figure can only enter the corresponding frame. This makes it
possible for the child to work by himself, and to accomplish a genuine
sensory auto-education, in the visual perception of form.

_Exercise with the three series of cards. First series._ We give the
child the wooden forms and the cards upon which the white figure is
mounted. Then we mix the cards upon the table; the child must arrange
them in a line upon his table (which he loves to do), and then place the
corresponding wooden pieces upon the cards. Here the control lies in the
eyes. The child must _recognise_ this figure, and place the wooden piece
upon it so perfectly that it will cover and hide the paper figure. The
eye of the child here corresponds to the frame, which _materially_ led
him at first to bring the two pieces together. In addition to covering
the figure, the child is to accustom himself to _touching_ the contour
of the mounted figures as a part of the exercise (the child always
voluntarily follows those movements); and after he has placed the wooden
inset he again touches the contour, adjusting with his finger the
superimposed piece until it exactly covers the form beneath.

_Second Series._ We give a number of cards to the child together with
the corresponding wooden insets. In this second series, the figures are
repeated by an outline of blue paper. The child through these exercises
is passing gradually from the _concrete_ to the _abstract_. At first, he
handled only _solid objects_. He then passed to a _plane figure_, that
is, to the plane which in itself does not exist. He is now passing to
the _line_, but this line does not represent for him the abstract
contour of a plane figure. It is to him the _path which he has so often
followed with his index finger_; this line is the _trace_ of a
_movement_. Following again the contour of the figure with his finger,
the child receives the impression of actually leaving a trace, for the
figure is covered by his finger and appears as he moves it. It is the
eye now which guides the movement, but it must be remembered that this
movement was _already prepared_ for when the child touched the contours
of the solid pieces of wood.

_Third Series._ We now present to the child the cards upon which the
figures are drawn in black, giving him, as before, the corresponding
wooden pieces. Here, he has actually passed to the _line_; that is, to
an abstraction, yet here, too, there is the idea of the result of a
movement.

This cannot be, it is true, the trace left by the finger, but, for
example, that of a pencil which is guided by the hand in the same
movements made before. These geometric figures in simple outline _have
grown out_ of a gradual series of representations which were concrete to
vision and touch. These representations return to the mind of the child
when he performs the exercise of superimposing the corresponding wooden
figures.


_III. Differential Visual Perception of Colours:--Education of the
Chromatic Sense_

In many of our _lessons on the colours_, we make use of pieces of
brightly- stuffs, and of balls covered with wool of different
colours. The didactic material for the _education of the chromatic_
sense is the following, which I have established after a long series of
tests made upon normal children, (in the institute for deficients, I
used as I have said above, the geometric insets). The present material
consists of small flat tablets, which are wound with  wool or
silk. These tablets have a little wooden border at each end which
prevents the silk-covered card from touching the table. The child is
also taught to take hold of the piece by these wooden extremities, so
that he need not soil the delicate colours. In this way, we are able to
use this material for a long time without having to renew it.

[Illustration: (A) LACING. (B) SHOE BUTTONING. (C) BUTTONING OF OTHER
GARMENTS. (D) HOOKS AND EYES. Frames illustrating the different
processes of dressing and undressing.

  _Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir_]

[Illustration: TABLETS WOUND WITH  SILK

Used for educating the chromatic sense. The tablets are shown in the
boxes in which they are kept.

  _Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir_]

I have chosen eight tints, and each one has with it eight gradations of
different intensity of colour. There are, therefore, sixty-four
colour-tablets in all. The eight tints selected are _black_ (_from grey
to white_), _red_, _orange_, _yellow_, _green_, _blue_, _violet_ and
_brown_. We have duplicate boxes of these sixty-four colours, giving us
two of each exercise. The entire set, therefore, consists of one hundred
twenty-eight tablets. They are contained in two boxes, each divided into
eight equal compartments so that one box may contain sixty-four tablets.

_Exercises with the Colour-tablets._ For the earliest of these
exercises, we select three strong colours: for example, _red_, _blue_,
and _yellow_, in pairs. These six tablets we place upon the table before
the child. Showing him one of the colours, we ask him to find its
duplicate among the mixed tablets upon the table. In this way, we have
him arrange the colour-tablets in a column, two by two, pairing them
according to colour.

The number of tablets in this game may be increased until the eight
colours, or sixteen tablets, are given at once. When the strongest tones
have been presented, we may proceed to the presentation of lighter
tones, in the same way. Finally, we present two or three tablets of the
same colour, but of different tone, showing the child how to arrange
these in order of gradation. In this way, the eight gradations are
finally presented.

Following this, we place before the child the eight gradations of two
different colours (red and blue); he is shown how to separate the groups
and then arrange each group in gradation. As we proceed we offer groups
of more nearly related colours; for example, blue and violet, yellow and
orange, etc.

In one of the "Children's Houses," I have seen the following game played
with the greatest success and interest, and with surprising _rapidity_.
The directress places upon a table, about which the children are seated,
as many colour groups as there are children, for example, three. She
then calls each child's attention to the colour each is to select, or
which she assigns to him. Then, she mixes the three groups of colours
upon the table. Each child takes rapidly from the mixed heap of tablets
all the gradations of his colour, and proceeds to arrange the tablets,
which, when thus placed in a line, give the appearance of a strip of
shaded ribbon.

In another "House," I have seen the children take the entire box, empty
the sixty-four colour-tablets upon the table and after carefully mixing
them, rapidly collect them into groups and arrange them in gradation,
constructing a species of little carpet of delicately  and
intermingling tints. The children very quickly acquire an ability before
which we stand amazed. Children of three years are able to put all of
the tints into gradation.

_Experiments in Colour-memory._ Experiments in colour-memory may be made
by showing the child a tint, allowing him to look at it as long as he
will, and then asking him to go to a distant table upon which all of the
colours are arranged and to select from among them the tint similar to
the one at which he has looked. The children succeed in this game
remarkably, committing only slight errors. Children of five years enjoy
this immensely, taking great pleasure in comparing the two spools and
judging as to whether they have chosen correctly.

At the beginning of my work, I made use of an instrument invented by
Pizzoli. This consisted of a small brown disk having a half-moon shape
opening at the top. Various colours were made to pass behind this
opening, by means of a rotary disk which was composed of strips of
various colours. The teacher called the attention of the child to a
certain colour, then turned the disk, asking him to indicate the same
disk when it again showed itself in the opening. This exercise rendered
the child inactive, preventing him from controlling the material. It is
not, therefore, an instrument which can promote the _education_ of the
senses.


EXERCISE FOR THE DISCRIMINATION OF SOUNDS

It would be desirable to have in this connection the didactic material
used for the "auricular education" in the principal institutions for
deaf mutes in Germany and America. These exercises are an introduction
to the acquisition of language, and serve in a very special way to
centre the children's discriminative attention upon the "modulations of
the sound of the human voice."

With very young children linguistic education must occupy a most
important place. Another aim of such exercises is to educate the ear of
the child to noises so that he shall accustom himself to distinguish
every slight noise and compare it with _sounds_, coming to resent harsh
or disordered noises. Such sense education has a value in that it
exercises aesthetic taste, and may be applied in a most noteworthy way
to practical discipline. We all know how the younger children disturb
the order of the room by shouts, and by the noise of over-turned
objects.

The rigorous scientific education of the sense of hearing is not
practically applicable to the didactic method. This is true because the
child cannot _exercise himself through his own activity_ as he does for
the other senses. Only one child at a time can work with any instrument
producing the gradation of sounds. In other words, _absolute silence_ is
necessary for the discrimination of sounds.

[Illustration]

Signorina Maccheroni, Directress, first of the "Children's House" in
Milan and later in the one in Franciscan Convent at Rome, has invented
and has had manufactured a series of thirteen bells hung upon a wooden
frame. These bells are to all appearances, identical, but the vibrations
brought about by a blow of a hammer produce the following thirteen
notes:

The set consists of a double series of thirteen bells and there are four
hammers. Having struck one of the bells in the first series, the child
must find the corresponding sound in the second. This exercise presents
grave difficulty, as the child does not know how to strike each time
with the same force, and therefore produces sounds which vary in
intensity. Even when the teacher strikes the bells, the children have
difficulty in distinguishing between sounds. So we do not feel that this
instrument in its present form is entirely practical.

For the discrimination of sounds, we use Pizzoli's series of little
whistles. For the gradation of noises, we use small boxes filled with
different substances, more or less fine (sand or pebbles). The noises
are produced by shaking the boxes.

In the lessons for the sense of hearing I proceed as follows: I have the
teachers establish silence in the usual way and then I _continue_ the
work, making the silence more profound. I say, "St! St!" in a series of
modulations, now sharp and short, now prolonged and light as a whisper.
The children, little by little, become fascinated by this. Occasionally
I say, "More silent still--more silent."

I then begin the sibilant St! St! again, making it always lighter and
repeating "More silent still," in a barely audible voice. Then I say
still in a low whisper, "Now, I hear the clock, now I can hear the
buzzing of a fly's wings, now I can hear the whisper of the trees in the
garden."

The children, ecstatic with joy, sit in such absolute and complete
silence that the room seems deserted; then I whisper, "Let us close our
eyes." This exercise repeated, so habituates the children to immobility
and to absolute silence that, when one of them interrupts, it needs only
a syllable, a gesture to call him back immediately to perfect order.

In the silence, we proceeded to the production of sounds and noises,
making these at first strongly contrasted, then, more nearly alike.
Sometimes we present the comparisons between noise and sound. I believe
that the best results can be obtained with the primitive means employed
by Itard in 1805. He used the drum and the bell. His plan was a
graduated series of drums for the noises,--or, better, for the heavy
harmonic sounds, since these belong to a musical instrument,--and a
series of bells. The diapason, the whistles, the boxes, are not
attractive to the child, and do not educate the sense of hearing as do
these other instruments. There is an interesting suggestion in the fact
that the two great human institutions, that of hate (war), and that of
love (religion), have adopted these two opposite instruments, the drum
and the bell.

I believe that after establishing silence it would be educational to
ring well-toned bells, now calm and sweet, now clear and ringing,
sending their vibrations through the child's whole body. And when,
besides the education of the ear, we have produced a _vibratory_
education of the whole body, through these wisely selected sounds of the
bells, giving a peace that pervades the very fibres of his being, then I
believe these young bodies would be sensitive to crude noises, and the
children would come to dislike, and to cease from making, disordered and
ugly noises.

In this way one whose ear has been trained by a musical education
suffers from strident or discordant notes. I need give no illustration
to make clear the importance of such education for the masses in
childhood. The new generation would be more calm, turning away from the
confusion and the discordant sounds, which strike the ear to-day in one
of the vile tenements where the poor live, crowded together, left by us
to abandon themselves to the lower, more brutal human instincts.


_Musical Education_

This must be carefully guided by method. In general, we see little
children pass by the playing of some great musicians as an animal would
pass. They do not perceive the delicate complexity of sounds. The street
children gather about the organ grinder, crying out as if to hail with
joy the _noises_ which will come instead of sounds.

For the musical education we must _create instruments_ as well as music.
The scope of such an instrument in addition to the discrimination of
sounds, is to awaken a sense of rhythm, and, so to speak, to give the
_impulse_ toward calm and co-ordinate movements to those muscles already
vibrating in the peace and tranquillity of immobility.

I believe that stringed instruments (perhaps some very much simplified
harp) would be the most convenient. The stringed instruments together
with the drum and the bells form the trio of the classic instruments of
humanity. The harp is the instrument of "the intimate life of the
individual." Legend places it in the hand of Orpheus, folk-lore puts it
into fairy hands, and romance gives it to the princess who conquers the
heart of a wicked prince.

The teacher who turns her back upon her scholars to play, (far too often
badly), will never be the _educator_ of their musical sense.

The child needs to be charmed in every way, by the glance as well as by
the pose. The teacher who, bending toward them, gathering them about
her, and leaving them free to stay or go, touches the chords, in a
simple rhythm, puts herself in communication with them, _in relation
with their very souls_. So much the better if this touch can be
accompanied by her _voice_, and the children left free to follow her, no
one being obliged to sing. In this way she can select as "adapted to
education," those songs which were followed by all the children. So she
may regulate the complexity of rhythm to various ages, for she will see
now only the older children following the rhythm, now, also the little
ones. At any rate, I believe that simple and primitive instruments are
the ones best adapted to the awakening of music in the soul of the
little child.

I have tried to have the Directress of the "Children's House" in Milan,
who is a gifted musician, make a number of trials, and experiments,
with a view to finding out more about the muscular capacity of young
children. She has made many trials with the pianoforte, observing how
the children _are not sensitive_ to the musical _tone_, but only to the
_rhythm_. On a basis of rhythm she arranged simple little dances, with
the intention of studying the influence of the rhythm itself upon the
co-ordination of muscular movements. She was greatly surprised to
discover the _educational disciplinary_ effect of such music. Her
children, who had been led with great wisdom and art through liberty to
a _spontaneous_ ordering of their acts and movements, had nevertheless
lived in the streets and courts, and had an almost universal habit of
jumping.

Being a faithful follower of the method of liberty, and not considering
that _jumping_ was a wrong act, she had never corrected them.

She now noticed that as she multiplied and repeated the rhythm
exercises, the children little by little left off their ugly jumping,
until finally it was a thing of the past. The directress one day asked
for an explanation of this change of conduct. Several little ones looked
at her without saying anything. The older children gave various replies,
whose meaning was the same.

"It isn't nice to jump."

"Jumping is ugly."

"It's rude to jump."

This was certainly a beautiful triumph for our method!

This experience shows that it is possible to educate the child's
_muscular sense_, and it shows how exquisite the refinement of this
sense may be as it develops in relation to the _muscular memory_, and
side by side with the other forms of sensory memory.


_Tests for Acuteness of Hearing_

The only entirely successful experiments which we have made so far in
the "Children's Houses" are those of the _clock_, and of the _lowered_
or whispered _voice_. The trial is purely empirical, and does not lend
itself to the measuring of the sensation, but it is, however, most
useful in that it helps us to an approximate knowledge of the child's
auditory acuteness.

The exercise consists in calling attention, when perfect silence has
been established, to the ticking of the clock, and to all the little
noises not commonly audible to the ear. Finally we call the little ones,
one by one from an adjoining room, pronouncing each name in a low voice.
In preparing for such an exercise it is necessary to _teach_ the
children the real meaning of _silence_.

Toward this end I have several _games_ of _silence_, which help in a
surprising way to strengthen the remarkable discipline of our children.

I call the children's attention to myself, telling them to see how
silent I can be. I assume different positions; standing, sitting, and
maintain each pose _silently, without movement_. A finger moving can
produce a noise, even though it be imperceptible. We may breathe so that
we may be heard. But I maintain _absolute_ silence, which is not an easy
thing to do. I call a child, and ask him to do as I am doing. He adjusts
his feet to a better position, and this makes a noise! He moves an arm,
stretching it out upon the arm of his chair; it is a noise. His
breathing is not altogether silent, it is not tranquil, absolutely
unheard as mine is.

During these manoeuvres on the part of the child, and while my brief
comments are followed by intervals of immobility and silence, the other
children are watching and listening. Many of them are interested in the
fact, which they have never noticed before; namely, that we make so many
noises of which we are not conscious, and that there are _degrees of
silence_. There is an absolute silence where nothing, _absolutely
nothing_ moves. They watch me in amazement when I stand in the middle of
the room, so quietly that it is really as if "I were not." Then they
strive to imitate me, and to do even better. I call attention here and
there to a foot that moves, almost inadvertently. The attention of the
child is called to every part of his body in an anxious eagerness to
attain to immobility.

When the children are trying in this way, there is established a silence
very different from that which we carelessly call by that name.

It seems as if life gradually vanishes, and that the room becomes,
little by little, empty, as if there were no longer anyone in it. Then
we begin to hear the tick-tock of the clock, and this sound seems to
grow in intensity as the silence becomes absolute. From without, from
the court which before seemed silent, there come varied noises, a bird
chirps, a child passes. The children sit fascinated by that silence as
if by some conquest of their own. "Here," says the directress, "here
there is no longer anyone; the children have all gone away."

Having arrived at that point, we darken the windows, and tell the
children to close their eyes, resting their heads upon their hands. They
assume this position, and in the darkness the absolute silence returns.

"Now listen," we say. "A soft voice is going to call your name." Then
going to a room behind the children, and standing within the open door,
I call in a low voice, lingering over the syllables as if I were
calling from across the mountains. This voice, almost occult, seems to
reach the heart and to call to the soul of the child. Each one as he is
called, lifts his head, opens his eyes as if altogether happy, then
rises, silently seeking not to move the chair, and walks on the tips of
his toes, so quietly that he is scarcely heard. Nevertheless his step
resounds in the silence, and amid the immobility which persists.

Having reached the door, with a joyous face, he leaps into the room,
choking back soft outbursts of laughter. Another child may come to hide
his face against my dress, another, turning, will watch his companions
sitting like statues silent and waiting. The one who is called feels
that he is privileged, that he has received a gift, a prize. And yet
they know that all will be called, "beginning with the most silent one
in all the room." So each one tries to merit by his perfect silence the
certain call. I once saw a little one of three years try to suffocate a
sneeze, and succeed! She held her breath in her little breast, and
resisted, coming out victorious. A most surprising effort!

This game delights the little ones beyond measure. Their intent faces,
their patient immobility, reveal the enjoyment of a great pleasure. In
the beginning, when the soul of the child was unknown to me, I had
thought of showing them sweetmeats and little toys, promising to give
them to the ones who were _called_, supposing that the gifts would be
necessary to persuade the child to make the necessary effort. But I soon
found that this was unnecessary.

The children, after they had made the effort necessary to maintain
silence, enjoyed the sensation, took pleasure in the _silence_ itself.
They were like ships safe in a tranquil harbour, happy in having
experienced something new, and to have won a victory over themselves.
This, indeed, was their recompense. They _forgot_ the promise of sweets,
and no longer cared to take the toys, which I had supposed would attract
them. I therefore abandoned that useless means, and saw, with surprise,
that the game became constantly more perfect, until even children of
three years of age remained immovable in the silence throughout the time
required to call the entire forty children out of the room! It was then
that I learned that the soul of the child has its own reward, and its
peculiar spiritual pleasures. After such exercises it seemed to me that
the children came closer to me, certainly they became more obedient,
more gentle and sweet. We had, indeed, been isolated from the world, and
had passed several minutes during which the communion between us was
very close, I wishing for them and calling to them, and they receiving
in the perfect silence the voice which was directed personally toward
each one of them, crowning each in turn with happiness.


_A Lesson in Silence_

I am about to describe a lesson which _proved_ most successful in
teaching the perfect silence to which it is possible to attain. One day
as I was about to enter one of the "Children's Houses," I met in the
court a mother who held in her arms her little baby of four months. The
little one was swaddled, as is still the custom among the people of
Rome--an infant thus in the swaddling bands is called by us a _pupa_.
This tranquil little one seemed the incarnation of peace. I took her in
my arms, where she lay quiet and good. Still holding her I went toward
the schoolroom, from which the children now ran to meet me. They always
welcomed me thus, throwing their arms about me, clinging to my skirts,
and almost tumbling me over in their eagerness. I smiled at them,
showing them the "_pupa_." They understood and skipped about me looking
at me with eyes brilliant with pleasure, but did not touch me through
respect for the little one that I held in my arms.

I went into the schoolroom with the children clustered about me. We sat
down, I seating myself in a large chair instead of, as usual, in one of
their little chairs. In other words, I seated myself solemnly. They
looked at my little one with a mixture of tenderness and joy. None of us
had yet spoken a word. Finally I said to them, "I have brought you a
little teacher." Surprised glances and laughter. "A little teacher, yes,
because none of you know how to be quiet as she does." At this all the
children changed their positions and became quiet. "Yet no one holds his
limbs and feet as quietly as she." Everyone gave closer attention to the
position of limbs and feet. I looked at them smiling, "Yes, but they can
never be as quiet as hers. You move a little bit, but she, not at all;
none of you can be as quiet as she." The children looked serious. The
idea of the superiority of the little teacher seemed to have reached
them. Some of them smiled, and seemed to say with their eyes that the
swaddling bands deserved all the merit. "Not one of you can be silent,
voiceless as she." General silence. "It is not possible to be as silent
as she, because,--listen to her breathing--how delicate it is; come near
to her on your tiptoes."

Several children rose, and came slowly forward on tiptoe, bending toward
the baby. Great silence. "None of you can breathe so silently as she."
The children looked about amazed, they had never thought that even when
sitting quietly they were making noises, and that the silence of a
little babe is more profound than the silence of grown people. They
almost ceased to breathe. I rose. "Go out quietly, quietly," I said,
"walk on the tips of your toes and make no noise." Following them I
said, "And yet I still hear some sounds, but she, the baby, walks with
me and makes no sound. She goes out silently!" The children smiled. They
understood the truth and the jest of my words. I went to the open
window, and placed the baby in the arms of the mother who stood watching
us.

The little one seemed to have left behind her a subtle charm which
enveloped the souls of the children. Indeed, there is in nature nothing
more sweet than the silent breathing of a new-born babe. There is an
indescribable majesty about this human life which in repose and silence
gathers strength and newness of life. Compared to this, Wordsworth's
description of the silent peace of nature seems to lose its force. "What
calm, what quiet! The one sound the drip of the suspended oar." The
children, too, felt the poetry and beauty in the peaceful silence of a
new-born human life.




CHAPTER XIV

GENERAL NOTES ON THE EDUCATION OF THE SENSES


I do not claim to have brought to perfection the method of sense
training as applied to young children. I do believe, however, that it
opens a new field for psychological research, promising rich and
valuable results.

Experimental psychology has so far devoted its attention to _perfecting
the instruments by which the sensations are measured_. No one has
attempted the _methodical_ preparation _of the individual for the
sensations_. It is my belief that the development of psychometry will
owe more to the attention given to the preparation of the _individual_
than to the perfecting of the _instrument_.

But putting aside this purely scientific side of the question, the
_education of the senses_ must be of the greatest _pedagogical_
interest.

Our aim in education in general is two-fold, biological and social. From
the biological side we wish to help the natural development of the
individual, from the social standpoint it is our aim to prepare the
individual for the environment. Under this last head technical education
may be considered as having a place, since it teaches the individual to
make use of his surroundings. The education of the senses is most
important from both these points of view. The development of the senses
indeed precedes that of superior intellectual activity and the child
between three and seven years is in the period of formation.

We can, then, help the development of the senses while they are in this
period. We may graduate and adapt the stimuli just as, for example, it
is necessary to help the formation of language before it shall be
completely developed.

All education of little children must be governed by this principle--to
help the natural _psychic_ and _physical development_ of the child.

The other aim of education (that of adapting the individual to the
environment) should be given more attention later on when the period of
intense development is past.

These two phases of education are always interlaced, but one or the
other has prevalence according to the age of the child. Now, the period
of life between the ages of three and seven years covers a period of
rapid physical development. It is the time for the formation of the
sense activities as related to the intellect The child in this age
develops his senses. His attention is further attracted to the
environment under the form of passive curiosity.

The stimuli, and not yet the reasons for things, attract his attention.
This is, therefore, the time when we should methodically direct the
sense stimuli, in such a way that the sensations which he receives shall
develop in a rational way. This sense training will prepare the ordered
foundation upon which he may build up a clear and strong mentality.

It is, besides all this, possible with the education of the senses to
discover and eventually to correct defects which to-day pass unobserved
in the school. Now the time comes when the defect manifests itself in an
evident and irreparable inability to make use of the forces of life
about him. (Such defects as deafness and near-sightedness.) This
education, therefore, is physiological and prepares directly for
intellectual education, perfecting the organs of sense, and the
nerve-paths of projection and association.

But the other part of education, the adaptation of the individual to his
environment, is indirectly touched. We prepare with our method the
infancy of the _humanity of our time_. The men of the present
civilisation are preeminently observers of their environment because
they must utilise to the greatest possible extent all the riches of this
environment.

The art of to-day bases itself, as in the days of the Greeks, upon
observation of the truth.

The progress of positive science is based upon its observations and all
its discoveries and their applications, which in the last century have
so transformed our civic environment, were made by following the same
line--that is, they have come through observation. We must therefore
prepare the new generation for this attitude, which has become necessary
in our modern civilised life. It is an indispensable means--man must be
so armed if he is to continue efficaciously the work of our progress.

We have seen the discovery of the Roentgen Rays born of observation. To
the same methods are due the discovery of Hertzian waves, and vibrations
of radium, and we await wonderful things from the Marconi telegraph.
While there has been no period in which thought has gained so much from
positive study as the present century, and this same century promises
new light in the field of speculative philosophy and upon spiritual
questions, the theories upon the matter have themselves led to most
interesting metaphysical concepts. We may say that in preparing the
method of observation, we have also prepared the way leading to
spiritual discovery.


The education of the senses makes men observers, and not only
accomplishes the general work of adaptation to the present epoch of
civilisation, but also prepares them directly for practical life. We
have had up to the present time, I believe, a most imperfect idea of
what is necessary in the practical living of life. We have always
started from ideas, and have _proceeded thence_ to _motor activities_;
thus, for example, the method of education has always been to teach
intellectually, and then to have the child follow the principles he has
been taught. In general, when we are teaching, we talk about the object
which interests us, and then we try to lead the scholar, when he has
understood, to perform some kind of work with the object itself; but
often the scholar who has understood the idea finds great difficulty in
the execution of the work which we give him, because we have left out of
his education a factor of the utmost importance, namely, the perfecting
of the senses. I may, perhaps, illustrate this statement with a few
examples. We ask the cook to buy only 'fresh fish.' She understands the
idea, and tries to follow it in her marketing, but, if the cook has not
been trained to recognise through sight and smell the signs which
indicate freshness in the fish, she will not know how to follow the
order we have given her.

Such a lack will show itself much more plainly in culinary operations. A
cook may be trained in book matters, and may know exactly the recipes
and the length of time advised in her cook book; she may be able to
perform all the manipulations necessary to give the desired appearance
to the dishes, but when it is a question of deciding from the odor of
the dish the exact moment of its being properly cooked, or with the eye,
or the taste, the time at which she must put in some given condiment,
then she will make a mistake if her senses have not been sufficiently
prepared.

She can only gain such ability through long practice, and such practice
on the part of the cook is nothing else than a _belated education_ of
the senses--an education which often can never be properly attained by
the adult. Thia is one reason why it is so difficult to find good cooks.

Something of the same kind is true of the physician, the student of
medicine who studies theoretically the character of the pulse, and sits
down by the bed of the patient with the best will in the world to read
the pulse, but, if his fingers do not know how to read the sensations
his studies will have been in vain. Before he can become a doctor, he
must gain a _capacity for discriminating between sense stimuli_.

The same may be said for the _pulsations_ of the _heart_, which the
student studies in theory, but which the ear can learn to distinguish
only through practice.

We may say the same for all the delicate vibrations and movements, in
the reading of which the hand of the physician is too often deficient.
The thermometer is the more indispensable to the physician the more his
sense of touch is unadapted and untrained in the gathering of the
thermic stimuli. It is well understood that the physician may be
learned, and most intelligent, without being a good practitioner, and
that to make a good practitioner long practice is necessary. In reality,
this _long practice_ is nothing else than a tardy, and often
inefficient, _exercise_ of the senses. After he has assimilated the
brilliant theories, the physician sees himself forced to the unpleasant
labor of the semiography, that is to making a record of the symptoms
revealed by his observation of and experiments with the patients. He
must do this if he is to receive from these theories any practical
results.

Here, then, we have the beginner proceeding in a stereotyped way to
tests of _palpation_, percussion, and auscultation, for the purpose of
identifying the throbs, the resonance, the tones, the breathings, and
the various sounds which _alone_ can enable him to formulate a
diagnosis. Hence the deep and unhappy discouragement of so many young
physicians, and, above all, the loss of time; for it is often a question
of lost years. Then, there is the immorality of allowing a man to follow
a profession of so great responsibility, when, as is often the case, he
is so unskilled and inaccurate in the taking of symptoms. The whole art
of medicine is based upon an education of the senses; the schools,
instead, _prepare_ physicians through a study of the classics. All very
well and good, but the splendid intellectual development of the
physician falls, impotent, before the insufficiency of his senses.

One day, I heard a surgeon giving, to a number of poor mothers, a lesson
on the recognition of the first deformities noticeable in little
children from the disease of rickets. It was his hope to lead these
mothers to bring to him their children who were suffering from this
disease, while the disease was yet in the earliest stages, and when
medical help might still be efficacious. The mothers understood the
idea, but they did not know how to recognise these first signs of
deformity, because they were lacking in the sensory education through
which they might discriminate between signs deviating only slightly from
the normal.

Therefore those lessons were useless. If we think of it for a minute,
we will see that almost all the forms of adulteration in food stuffs are
rendered possible by the torpor of the senses, which exists in the
greater number of people. Fraudulent industry feeds upon the lack of
sense education in the masses, as any kind of fraud is based upon the
ignorance of the victim. We often see the purchaser throwing himself
upon the honesty of the merchant, or putting his faith in the company,
or the label upon the box. This is because purchasers are lacking in the
capacity of judging directly for themselves. They do not know how to
distinguish with their senses the different qualities of various
substances. In fact, we may say that in many cases intelligence is
rendered useless by lack of practice, and this practice is almost always
sense education. Everyone knows in practical life the fundamental
necessity of judging with exactness between various stimuli.

But very often sense education is most difficult for the adult, just as
it is difficult for him to educate his hand when he wishes to become a
pianist. It is necessary to begin the education of the senses in the
formative period, if we wish to perfect this sense development with the
education which is to follow. The education of the senses should be
begun methodically in infancy, and should continue during the entire
period of instruction which is to prepare the individual for life in
society.

AEsthetic and moral education are closely related to this sensory
education. Multiply the sensations, and develop the capacity of
appreciating fine differences in stimuli, and we _refine_ the
sensibility and multiply man's pleasures.

Beauty lies in harmony, not in contrast; and harmony is refinement;
therefore, there must be a fineness of the senses if we are to
appreciate harmony. The aesthetic harmony of nature is lost upon him who
has coarse senses. The world to him is narrow and barren. In life about
us, there exist inexhaustible fonts of aesthetic enjoyment, before which
men pass as insensible as the brutes seeking their enjoyment in those
sensations which are crude and showy, since they are the only ones
accessible to them.

Now, from the enjoyment of gross pleasures, vicious habits very often
spring. Strong stimuli, indeed, do not render acute, but blunt the
senses, so that they require stimuli more and more accentuated and more
and more gross.

_Onanism_, so often found among normal children of the lower classes,
alcoholism, fondness for watching sensual acts of adults--these things
represent the enjoyment of those unfortunate ones whose intellectual
pleasures are few, and whose senses are blunted and dulled. Such
pleasures kill the man within the individual, and call to life the
beast.

[Illustration: _S_--Sense, _C_--Nerve centre, _M_--Motor.]

Indeed from the physiological point of view, the importance of the
education of the senses is evident from an observation of the scheme of
the diagrammatic arc which represents the functions of the nervous
system. The external stimulus acts upon the organ of sense, and the
impression is transmitted along the centripetal way to the nerve
centre--the corresponding motor impulse is elaborated, and is
transmitted along the centrifugal path to the organ of motion, provoking
a movement. Although the arc represents diagrammatically the mechanism
of reflex spinal actions, it may still be considered as a fundamental
key explaining the phenomena of the more complex nervous mechanisms.
Man, with the peripheral sensory system, gathers various stimuli from
his environment. He puts himself thus in direct communication with his
surroundings. The psychic life develops, therefore, in relation to the
system of nerve centres; and human activity which is eminently social
activity, manifests itself through acts of the individual--manual work,
writing, spoken language, etc.--by means of the psychomotor organs.

Education should guide and perfect the development of the three periods,
the two peripheral and the central; or, better still, since the process
fundamentally reduces itself to the nerve centres, education should give
to psychosensory exercises the same importance which it gives to
psychomotor exercises.

Otherwise, we _isolate_ man from his _environment_. Indeed, when with
_intellectual culture_ we believe ourselves to have completed education,
we have but made thinkers, whose tendency will be to live without the
world. We have not made practical men. If, on the other hand, wishing
through education to prepare for practical life; we limit ourselves to
exercising the psychomotor phase, we lose sight of the chief end of
education, which is to put man in direct communication with the external
world.

Since _professional work_ almost always requires man to make _use of his
surroundings_, the technical schools are not forced to return to the
very beginnings of education, sense exercises, in order to supply the
great and universal lack.




CHAPTER XV

INTELLECTUAL EDUCATION

   "... To lead the child from the education of the senses to ideas."
                                                      _Edward Seguin._


The sense exercises constitute a species of auto-education, which, if
these exercises be many times repeated, leads to a perfecting of the
child's psychosensory processes. The directress must intervene to lead
the child from sensations to ideas--from the concrete to the abstract,
and to the association of ideas. For this, she should use a method
tending to isolate the inner attention of the child and to fix it upon
the perceptions--as in the first lessons his objective attention was
fixed, through isolation, upon single stimuli.

The teacher, in other words, when she gives a lesson must seek to limit
the field of the child's consciousness to the object of the lesson, as,
for example, during sense education she isolated the sense which she
wished the child to exercise.

For this, knowledge of a special technique is necessary. The educator
must, "_to the greatest possible extent, limit his intervention; yet he
must not allow the child to weary himself in an undue effort of
auto-education_."

It is here, that the factor of individual limitation and differing
degrees of perception are most keenly felt in the teacher. In other
words, in the quality of this intervention lies the art which makes up
the individuality of the teacher.

A definite and undoubted part of the teacher's work is that of teaching
an exact nomenclature.

She should, in most cases, pronounce the necessary names and adjectives
without adding anything further. These words she should pronounce
distinctly, and in a clear strong voice, so that the _various sounds_
composing the word may be distinctly and plainly perceived by the child.

So, for example, touching the smooth and rough cards in the first
tactile exercise, she should say, "This is smooth. This is rough,"
repeating the words with varying modulations of the voice, always
letting the tones be clear and the enunciation very distinct. "Smooth,
smooth, smooth. Rough, rough, rough."

In the same way, when treating of the sensations of heat and cold, she
must say, "This is cold." "This is hot." "This is ice-cold." "This is
tepid." She may then begin to use the generic terms, "heat," "more
heat," "less heat," etc.

_First._ "The lessons in nomenclature must consist simply in provoking
the association of the name with the object, or with the abstract idea
which the name represents." Thus the _object_ and the _name_ must be
united when they are received by the child's mind, and this makes it
most necessary that no other word besides the name be spoken.

_Second._ The teacher must always _test_ whether or not her lesson has
attained the end she had in view, and her tests must be made to come
within the restricted field of consciousness, provoked by the lesson on
nomenclature.

The first test will be to find whether the name is still associated in
the child's mind with the object. She must allow the necessary time to
elapse, letting a short period of silence intervene between the lesson
and the test. Then she may ask the child, pronouncing slowly and very
clearly the name or the adjective she has taught: "Which is _smooth_?
Which is _rough_?"

The child will point to the object with his finger, and the teacher will
know that he has made the desired association. But if he has not done
this, that is, if he makes a mistake, _she must not correct him_, but
must suspend her lesson, to take it up again another day. Indeed, why
correct him? If the child has not succeeded in associating the name with
the object, the only way in which to succeed would be to _repeat_ both
the action of the sense stimuli and the _name_; in other words, to
repeat the lesson. But when the child has failed, we should know that he
was not at that instant ready for the psychic association which we
wished to provoke in him, and we must therefore choose another moment.

If we should say, in correcting the child, "No, you have made a
mistake," all these words, which, being in the form of a reproof, would
strike him more forcibly than others (such as smooth or rough), would
remain in the mind of the child, retarding the learning of the names. On
the contrary, the _silence_ which follows the error leaves the field of
consciousness clear, and the next lesson may successfully follow the
first. In fact, by revealing the error we may lead the child to make an
undue _effort_ to remember, or we may discourage him, and it is our duty
to avoid as much as possible all unnatural effort and all depression.

_Third._ If the child has not committed any error, the teacher may
provoke the _motor activity_ corresponding to the idea of the object:
that is, to the _pronunciation of the name_. She may ask him, "What is
this?" and the child should respond, "Smooth." The teacher may then
interrupt, teaching him how to pronounce the word correctly and
distinctly, first, drawing a deep breath and, then, saying in a rather
loud voice, "Smooth." When he does this the teacher may note his
particular speech defect, or the special form of baby talk to which he
may be addicted.

In regard to the _generalisation_ of the ideas received, and by that I
mean the application of these ideas to his environment, I do not advise
any lessons of this sort for a certain length of time, even for a number
of months. There will be children who, after having touched a few times
the stuffs, or merely the smooth and rough cards, _will quite
spontaneously touch the various surfaces about them_, repeating "Smooth!
Rough! It is velvet! etc." In dealing with normal children, we must
_await_ this spontaneous investigation of the surroundings, or, as I
like to call it, this _voluntary explosion_ of the exploring spirit. In
such cases, the children experience a joy at each _fresh discovery_.
They are conscious of a sense of dignity and satisfaction which
encourages them to seek for new sensations from their environment and to
make themselves spontaneous _observers_.

The teacher should _watch_ with the most solicitous care to see when and
how the child arrives at this generalisation of ideas. For example, one
of our little four-year-olds while running about in the court one day
suddenly stood still and cried out, "Oh! the sky is blue!" and stood for
some time looking up into the blue expanse of the sky.

One day, when I entered one of the "Children's Houses," five or six
little ones gathered quietly about me and began caressing, lightly, my
hands, and my clothing, saying, "It is smooth." "It is velvet." "This is
rough." A number of others came near and began with serious and intent
faces to repeat the same words, touching me as they did so. The
directress wished to interfere to release me, but I signed to her to be
quiet, and I myself did not move, but remained silent, admiring this
spontaneous intellectual activity of my little ones. The greatest
triumph of our educational method should always be this: _to bring about
the spontaneous progress of the child_.

One day, a little boy, following one of our exercises in design, had
chosen to fill in with  pencils the outline of a tree. To colour
the trunk he laid hold upon a red crayon. The teacher wished to
interfere, saying, "Do you think trees have red trunks?" I held her back
and allowed the child to colour the tree red. This design was precious
to us; it showed that the child was not yet an observer of his
surroundings. _My way of treating this was to encourage the child to
make use of the games for the chromatic sense._ He went daily into the
garden with the other children, and could at any time see the tree
trunks. When the sense exercises should have succeeded in attracting the
child's spontaneous attention to colours about him, then, in some _happy
moment_ he would become aware that the tree trunks were not red, just as
the other child during his play had become conscious of the fact that
the sky was blue. In fact, the teacher continued to give the child
outlines of trees to fill in. He one day chose a brown pencil with which
to colour the trunk, and made the branches and leaves green. Later, he
made the branches brown, also, using green only for the leaves.

Thus we have _the test_ of the child's intellectual progress. We can not
create observers by saying, "_observe_," but by giving them the power
and the means for this observation, and these means are procured through
education of the senses. Once we have _aroused_ such activity,
auto-education is assured, for refined well-trained senses lead us to
a closer observation of the environment, and this, with its infinite
variety, attracts the attention and continues the psychosensory
education.

If, on the other hand, in this matter of sense education we single out
definite concepts of the quality of certain objects, these very objects
become associated with, or a part of, the training, which is in this way
limited to those concepts taken and recorded. So the sense training
remains unfruitful. When, for example, a teacher has given in the old
way a lesson on the names of the colours, she has imparted an idea
concerning that particular _quality_, but she has not educated the
chromatic sense. The child will know these colours in a superficial way,
forgetting them from time to time; and at best his appreciation of them
will lie within the limits prescribed by the teacher. When, therefore,
the teacher of the old methods shall have provoked the generalisation of
the idea, saying, for example, "What is the colour of this flower!" "of
this ribbon?" the attention of the child will in all probability remain
torpidly fixed upon the examples suggested by her.

We may liken the child to a clock, and may say that with the old-time
way it is very much as if we were to hold the wheels of the clock quiet
and move the hands about the clock face with our fingers. The hands will
continue to circle the dial just so long as we apply, through our
fingers, the necessary motor force. Even so is it with that sort of
culture which is limited to the work which the teacher does with the
child. The new method, instead, may be compared to the process of
winding, which sets the entire mechanism in motion.

This motion is in direct relation with the machine, and not with the
work of winding. So the spontaneous psychic development of the child
continues indefinitely and is in direct relation to the psychic
potentiality of the child himself, and not with the work of the teacher.
The movement, or the _spontaneous psychic activity_ starts in our case
from the education of the senses and is maintained by the observing
intelligence. Thus, for example, the hunting dog receives his ability,
not from the education given by his master, but from the _special
acuteness_ of his senses; and as soon as this physiological quality is
applied to the right environment, the _exercise of hunting_, the
increasing refinement of the sense perceptions, gives the dog the
pleasure and then the passion for the chase. The same is true of the
pianist who, refining at the same time his musical sense and the agility
of his hand, comes to love more and more to draw new harmonies from the
instrument. Thia double perfection proceeds until at last the pianist is
launched upon a course which will be limited only by the personality
which lies within him. Now a student of physics may know all the laws of
harmony which form a part of his scientific culture, and yet he may not
know how to follow a most simple musical composition. His culture,
however vast, will be bound by the definite limits of his science. Our
educational aim with very young children must be to _aid the spontaneous
development of the mental, spiritual, and physical personality_, and not
to make of the child a cultured individual in the commonly accepted
sense of the term. So, after we have offered to the child such didactic
material as is adapted to provoke the development of his senses, we must
wait until the activity known as observation develops. And herein lies
the _art of the educator_; in knowing how to measure the action by which
we help the young child's personality to develop. To one whose attitude
is right, little children soon reveal _profound individual differences_
which call for very different kinds of help from the teacher. Some of
them require almost no intervention on her part, while others demand
actual _teaching_. It is necessary, therefore, that the teaching shall
be rigorously guided by the principle of limiting to the greatest
possible point the active intervention of the educator.

Here are a number of games and problems which we have used effectively
in trying to follow this principle.


GAMES OF THE BLIND

The Games of the Blind are used for the most part as exercises in
general sensibility as follows:

_The Stuffs._ We have in our didactic material a pretty little chest
composed of drawers within which are arranged rectangular pieces of
stuff in great variety. There are velvet, satin, silk, cotton, linen,
etc. We have the child touch each of these pieces, teaching the
appropriate nomenclature and adding something regarding the quality, as
coarse, fine, soft. Then, we call the child and seat him at one of the
tables where he can be seen by his companions, blindfold him, and offer
him the stuffs one by one. He touches them, smooths them, crushes them
between his fingers and decides, "It is velvet,--It is fine linen,--It
is rough cloth," etc. This exercise provokes general interest. When we
offer the child some unexpected foreign object, as, for example, a sheet
of paper, a veil, the little assembly trembles as it awaits his
response.

_Weight._ We place the child in the same position, call his attention
to the tablets used for the education of the sense of weight, have him
notice again the already well-known differences of weight, and then tell
him to put all the dark tablets, which are the heavier ones, at the
right, and all the light ones, which are the lighter, to the left. We
then blindfold him and he proceeds to the game, taking each time two
tablets. Sometimes he takes two of the same colour, sometimes two of
different colours, but in a position opposite to that in which he must
arrange them on his desk. These exercises are most exciting; when, for
example, the child has in his hands two of the dark tablets and changes
them from one hand to the other uncertain, and finally places them
together on the right, the children watch in a state of intense
eagerness, and a great sigh often expresses their final relief. The
shouts of the audience when the entire game is followed without an
error, gives the impression that their little friend _sees with his
hands_ the colours of the tablets.

_Dimension and Form._ We use games similar to the preceding one, having
the child distinguish between different coins, the cubes and bricks of
Froebel, and dry seeds, such as beans and peas. But such games never
awaken the intense interest aroused by the preceding ones. They are,
however, useful and serve to associate with the various objects those
qualities peculiar to them, and also to fix the nomenclature.


APPLICATION OF THE EDUCATION OF THE VISUAL SENSE TO THE OBSERVATION OF
THE ENVIRONMENT

_Nomenclature._ This is one of the most important phases of education.
Indeed, nomenclature prepares for an _exactness_ in the use of language
which is not always met with in our schools. Many children, for
example, use interchangeably the words thick and big, long and high.
With the methods already described, the teacher may easily establish, by
means of the didactic material, ideas which are very exact and clear,
and may associate the proper word with these ideas.


_Method of Using the Didactic Material_

_Dimensions._ The directress, after the child has played for a long time
with the three sets of solid insets and has acquired a security in the
performance of the exercise, takes out all the cylinders of equal height
and places them in a horizontal position on the table, one beside the
other. Then she selects the two extremes, saying, "This is the
_thickest_--This is the _thinnest_." She places them side by side so
that the comparison may be more marked, and then taking them by the
little button, she compares the bases, calling attention to the great
difference. She then places them again beside each other in a vertical
position in order to show that they are equal in height, and repeats
several times, "thick--thin." Having done this, she should follow it
with the test, asking, "Give me the thickest--Give me the thinnest," and
finally she should proceed to the test of nomenclature, asking, "What is
this?" In the lessons which follow this, the directress may take away
the two extreme pieces and may repeat the lesson with the two pieces
remaining at the extremities, and so on until she has used all the
pieces. She may then take these up at random, saying, "Give me one a
little thicker than this one," or "Give me one a little thinner than
this one." With the second set of solid insets she proceeds in the same
way. Here she stands the pieces upright, as each one has a base
sufficiently broad to maintain it in this position, saying, "This is the
highest" and "This is the lowest." Then placing the two extreme pieces
side by side she may take them out of the line and compare the bases,
showing that they are equal. From the extremes she may proceed as
before, selecting each time the two remaining pieces most strongly
contrasted.

With the third solid inset, the directress, when she has arranged the
pieces in gradation, calls the child's attention to the first one,
saying, "This is the largest," and to the last one, saying, "This is the
smallest." Then she places them side by side and observes how they
differ both in height and in base. She then proceeds in the same way as
in the other two exercises.

Similar lessons may be given with the series of graduated prisms, of
rods, and of cubes. The prisms are _thick_ and _thin_ and of equal
_length_. The rods are _long_ and _short_ and of equal _thickness_. The
cubes are _big_ and _little_ and differ in size and in height.

The application of these ideas to environment will come most easily when
we measure the children with the anthropometer. They will begin among
themselves to make comparisons, saying, "I am taller,--you are thicker."
These comparisons are also made when the children hold out their little
hands to show that they are clean, and the directress stretches hers out
also, to show that she, too, has clean hands. Often the contrast between
the dimensions of the hands calls forth laughter. The children make a
perfect game of measuring themselves. They stand side by side; they look
at each other; they decide. Often they place themselves beside grown
persons, and observe with curiosity and interest the great difference in
height.

_Form._ When the child shows that he can with security distinguish
between the forms of the plane geometric insets, the directress may
begin the lessons in nomenclature. She should begin with two
strongly-contrasted forms, as the square and the circle, and should
follow the usual method, using the three periods of Seguin. We do not
teach all the names relative to the geometric figures, giving only those
of the most familiar forms, such as square, circle, rectangle, triangle,
oval. We now call attention to the fact that there are _rectangles which
are narrow and long_, and others which are _broad and short_, while the
_squares_ are equal on all sides and can be only big and little. These
things are most easily shown with the insets, for, though we turn the
square about, it still enters its frame, while the rectangle, if placed
across the opening, will not enter. The child is much interested in this
exercise, for which we arrange in the frame a square and a series of
rectangles, having the longest side equal to the side of the square, the
other side gradually decreasing in the five pieces.

In the same way we proceed to show the difference between the oval, the
ellipse, and the circle. The circle enters no matter how it is placed,
or turned about; the ellipse does not enter when placed transversely,
but if placed lengthwise will enter even if turned upside down. The
oval, however, not only cannot enter the frame if placed transversely,
but not even when turned upside down; it must be placed with the _large_
curve toward the large part of the opening, and with the _narrow_ curve
toward the _narrow_ portion of the opening.

The circles, _big_ and _little_, enter their frames no matter how they
are turned about. I do not reveal the difference between the oval and
the ellipse until a very late stage of the child's education, and then
not to all children, but only to those who show a special interest in
the forms by choosing the game often, or by asking about the
differences. I prefer that such differences should be recognised later
by the child, spontaneously, perhaps in the elementary school.

It seems to many persons that in teaching these forms we are teaching
_geometry_, and that this is premature in schools for such young
children. Others feel that, if we wish to present geometric forms, we
should use the _solids_, as being more concrete.

I feel that I should say a word here to combat such prejudices. To
_observe_ a geometric form is not to _analyse_ it, and in the analysis
geometry begins. When, for example, we speak to the child of sides and
angles and explain these to him, even though with objective methods, as
Froebel advocates (for example, the square has four sides and can be
constructed with four sticks of equal length), then indeed we do enter
the field of geometry, and I believe that little children are too
immature for these steps. But the _observation of the form_ cannot be
too advanced for a child at this age. The plane of the table at which
the child sits while eating his supper is probably a rectangle; the
plate which contains his food is a circle, and we certainly do not
consider that the child is too _immature_ to be allowed to look at the
table and the plate.

The insets which we present simply call the attention to a given _form_.
As to the name, it is analogous to other names by which the child learns
to call things. Why should we consider it premature to teach the child
the words _circle_, _square_, _oval_, when in his home he repeatedly
hears the word _round_ used in connection with plates, etc. He will hear
his parents speak of the _square_ table, the _oval_ table, etc., and
these words in common use will remain for a long time _confused_ in his
mind and in his speech, if we do not interpose such help as that we give
in the teaching of forms.

We should reflect upon the fact that many times a child, left to
himself, makes an undue effort to comprehend the language of the adults
and the meaning of the things about him. Opportune and rational
instruction _prevents_ such an effort, and therefore does not _weary_,
but _relieves_, the child and satisfies his desire for knowledge.
Indeed, he shows his contentment by various expressions of pleasure. At
the same time, his attention is called to the word which, if he is
allowed to pronounce badly, develops in him an imperfect use of the
language.

This often arises from an effort on his part to imitate the careless
speech of persons about him, while the teacher, by pronouncing clearly
the word referring to the object which arouses the child's curiosity,
prevents such effort and such imperfections.

Here, also, we face a widespread prejudice; namely, the belief that the
child left to himself gives absolute repose to his mind. If this were so
he would remain a stranger to the world, and, instead, we see him,
little by little, spontaneously conquer various ideas and words. He is a
traveller through life, who observes the new things among which he
journeys, and who tries to understand the unknown tongue spoken by those
about him. Indeed, he makes a great and _voluntary effort_ to understand
and to imitate. The instruction given to little children should be so
directed as to _lessen this expenditure_ of poorly directed effort,
converting it instead into the enjoyment of conquest made easy and
infinitely broadened. We are _the guides_ of these travellers just
entering the great world of human thought. We should see to it that we
are intelligent and cultured guides, not losing ourselves in vain
discourse, but illustrating briefly and concisely the work of art in
which the traveller shows himself interested, and we should then
respectfully allow him to observe it as long as he wishes to. It is our
privilege to lead him to observe the most important and the most
beautiful things of life in such a way that he does not lose energy and
time in useless things, but shall find pleasure and satisfaction
throughout his pilgrimage.

I have already referred to the prejudice that it is more suitable to
present the geometric forms to the child in the _solid_ rather than in
the _plane_, giving him, for example, the _cube_, the _sphere_, the
_prism_. Let us put aside the physiological side of the question showing
that the visual recognition of the solid figure is more complex than
that of the plane, and let us view the question only from the more
purely pedagogical standpoint of _practical life_.

The greater number of objects which we look upon every day present more
nearly the aspect of our plane geometric insets. In fact, doors,
window-frames, framed pictures, the wooden or marble top of a table, are
indeed _solid_ objects, but with one of the dimensions greatly reduced,
and with the two dimensions determining the form of the plane surface
made most evident.

When the plane form prevails, we say that the window is rectangular, the
picture frame oval, this table square, etc. _Solids having a determined
form prevailing in the plane surface_ are almost the only ones which
come to our notice. And such solids are clearly represented by our
_plane geometric insets_.

The child will _very often_ recognise in his environment forms which he
has learned in this way, but he will rarely recognise the _solid
geometric forms_.

That the table leg is a prism, or a truncated cone, or an elongated
cylinder, will come to his knowledge long after he has observed that the
top of the table upon which he places things is rectangular. We do not,
therefore, speak of the fact of recognising that a house is a prism or a
cube. Indeed, the pure solid geometric forms _never exist_ in the
ordinary objects about us; these present, instead, a _combination of
forms_. So, putting aside the difficulty of taking in at a glance the
complex form of a house, the child recognises in it, not an _identity_
of form, but an _analogy_.

He will, however, see the plane geometric forms perfectly represented in
windows and doors, and in the faces of many solid objects in use at
home. Thus the knowledge of the forms given him in the plane geometric
insets will be for him a species of magic _key_, opening the external
world, and making him feel that he knows its secrets.

I was walking one day upon the Pincian Hill with a boy from the
elementary school. He had studied geometric design and understood the
analysis of plane geometric figures. As we reached the highest terrace
from which we could see the Piazza del Popolo with the city stretching
away behind it, I stretched out my hand saying, "Look, all the works of
man are a great mass of geometric figures;" and, indeed, rectangles,
ovals, triangles, and semicircles, perforated, or ornamented, in a
hundred different ways the grey rectangular facades of the various
buildings. Such uniformity in such an expanse of buildings seemed to
prove the _limitation_ of human intelligence, while in an adjoining
garden plot the shrubs and flowers spoke eloquently of the infinite
variety of forms in nature.

The boy had never made these observations; he had studied the angles,
the sides and the construction of outlined geometric figures, but
without thinking beyond this, and feeling only annoyance at this arid
work. At first he laughed at the idea of man's massing geometric figures
together, then he became interested, looked long at the buildings before
him, and an expression of lively and thoughtful interest came into his
face. To the right of the Ponte Margherita was a factory building in the
process of construction, and its steel framework delineated a series of
rectangles. "What tedious work!" said the boy, alluding to the workmen.
And, then, as we drew near the garden, and stood for a moment in silence
admiring the grass and the flowers which sprang so freely from the
earth, "It is beautiful!" he said. But that word "beautiful" referred to
the inner awakening of his own soul.

This experience made me think that in the observation of the plane
geometric forms, and in that of the plants which they saw growing in
their own little gardens, there existed for the children precious
sources of spiritual as well as intellectual education. For this reason,
I have wished to make my work broad, leading the child, not only to
observe the forms about him, but to distinguish the work of man from
that of nature, and to appreciate the fruits of human labour.

(_a_) _Free Design._ I give the child a sheet of white paper and a
pencil, telling him that he may draw whatever he wishes to. Such
drawings have long been of interest to experimental psychologists. Their
importance lies in the fact that they reveal the _capacity_ of the child
for observing, and also show his individual tendencies. Generally, the
first drawings are unformed and confused, and the teacher should ask
the child _what he wished to draw_, and should write it underneath the
design that it may be a record. Little by little, the drawings become
more intelligible, and verily reveal the progress which the child makes
in the observation of the forms about him. Often the most minute details
of an object have been observed and recorded in the crude sketch. And,
since the child draws what he wishes, he reveals to us which are the
objects that most strongly attract his attention.

(_b_) _Design Consisting of the Filling in of Outlined Figures._ These
designs are most important as they constitute "the preparation for
writing." They do for the colour sense what _free design_ does for the
sense of _form_. In other words, they reveal the capacity of the child
_in the matter of observation of colours_, as the free design showed us
the extent to which he was an observer of form in the objects
surrounding him. I shall speak more fully of this work in the chapter on
_writing_. The exercises consist in filling in with  pencil,
certain outlines drawn in black. These outlines present the simple
geometric figures and various objects with which the child is familiar
in the schoolroom, the home, and the garden. The child must _select_ his
colour, and in doing so he shows us whether he has observed the colours
of the things surrounding him.


_Free Plastic Work_

These exercises are analogous to those in free design and in the filling
in of figures with  pencils. Here the child makes whatever he
wishes with _clay_; that is, he models those objects which he remembers
most distinctly and which have impressed him most deeply. We give the
child a wooden tray containing a piece of clay, and then we await his
work. We possess some very remarkable pieces of clay work done by our
little ones. Some of them reproduce, with surprising minuteness of
detail, objects which they have seen. And what is most surprising, these
models often record not only the form, but even the _dimensions_ of the
objects which the child handled in school.

Many little ones model the objects which they have seen at home,
especially kitchen furniture, water-jugs, pots, and pans. Sometimes, we
are shown a simple cradle containing a baby brother or sister. At first
it is necessary to place written descriptions upon these objects, as it
is necessary to do with the free design. Later on, however, the models
are easily recognisable, and the children learn to reproduce the
geometric solids. These clay models are undoubtedly very valuable
material for the teacher, and make clear many individual differences,
thus helping her to understand her children more fully. In our method
they are also valuable as psychological manifestations of development
according to age. Such designs are precious guides also for the teacher
in the matter of her intervention in the child's education. The children
who, in this work reveal themselves as observers, will probably become
spontaneous observers of all the world about them, and may be led toward
such a goal by the indirect help of exercises tending to fix and to make
more exact the various sensations and ideas.

These children will also be those who arrive most quickly at the act of
_spontaneous writing_. Those whose clay work remains unformed and
indefinite will probably need the direct revelation of the directress,
who will need to call their attention in some material manner to the
objects around them.


_Geometric Analysis of Figures; Sides, Angles, Centre, Base_

The geometric analysis of figures is not adapted to very young children.
I have tried a means for the _introduction_ of such analysis, limiting
this work to the _rectangle_ and making use of a game which includes the
analysis without fixing the attention of the child upon it. This game
presents the concept most clearly.

The _rectangle_ of which I make use is the plane of one of the
children's tables, and the game consists in laying the table for a meal.
I have in each of the "Children's Houses" a collection of toy
table-furnishings, such as may be found in any toy-store. Among these
are dinner-plates, soup-plates, soup-tureen, saltcellars, glasses,
decanters, little knives, forks, spoons, etc. I have them lay the table
for six, putting _two places_ on each of the longer sides, and one place
on each of the shorter sides. One of the children takes the objects and
places them as I indicate. I tell him to place the soup tureen in the
_centre_ of the table; this napkin in a _corner_. "Place this plate in
the centre of the short _side_."

Then I have the child look at the table, and I say, "Something is
lacking in this _corner_. We want another glass on this _side_. Now let
us see if we have everything properly placed on the two longer sides. Is
everything ready on the two shorter sides? Is there anything lacking in
the four corners?"

I do not believe that we may proceed to any more complex analysis than
this before the age of six years, for I believe that the child should
one day take up one of the plane insets and _spontaneously_ begin to
count the sides and the angles. Certainly, if we taught them such ideas
they would be able to learn them, but it would be a mere learning of
formulae, and not applied experience.


_Exercises in the Chromatic Sense_

I have already indicated what colour exercises we follow. Here I wish to
indicate more definitely the succession of these exercises and to
describe them more fully.

_Designs and Pictures._ We have prepared a number of outline drawings
which the children are to fill in with  pencil, and, later on,
with a brush, preparing for themselves the water-colour tints which they
will use. The first designs are of flowers, butterflies, trees and
animals, and we then pass to simple landscapes containing grass, sky,
houses, and human figures.

These designs help us in our study of the natural development of the
child as an observer of his surroundings; that is, in regard to colour.
The children _select the colours_ and are left entirely free in their
work. If, for example, they colour a chicken red, or a cow green, this
shows that they have not yet become observers. But I have already spoken
of this in the general discussion of the method. These designs also
reveal the effect of the education of the chromatic sense. As the child
selects delicate and harmonious tints, or strong and contrasting ones,
we can judge of the progress he has made in the refinement of his colour
sense.

The fact that the child must _remember_ the colour of the objects
represented in the design encourages him to observe those things which
are about him. And then, too, he wishes to be able to fill in more
difficult designs. Only those children who know how to keep the colour
_within_ the outline and to reproduce the _right colours_ may proceed to
the more ambitious work. These designs are very easy, and often very
effective, sometimes displaying real artistic work. The directress of
the school in Mexico, who studied for a long time with me, sent me two
designs; one representing a cliff in which the stones were  most
harmoniously in light violet and shades of brown, trees in two shades of
green, and the sky a soft blue. The other represented a horse with a
chestnut coat and black mane and tail.




CHAPTER XVI

METHODS FOR THE TEACHING OF READING AND WRITING


_Spontaneous Development of Graphic Language._ While I was directress of
the Orthophrenic School at Rome, I had already began to experiment with
various didactic means for the teaching of reading and writing. These
experiments were practically original with me.

Itard and Seguin do not present any rational method through which
writing may be learned. In the pages above quoted, it may be seen how
Itard proceeded in the teaching of the alphabet and I give here what
Seguin says concerning the teaching of writing.

"To have a child pass from design, to writing, which is its most
immediate application, the teacher need only call D, a portion of a
circle, resting its extremities upon a vertical; A, two obliques
reunited at the summit and cut by a horizontal, etc., etc.

"We no longer need worry ourselves as to how the child shall learn to
write: he designs, _then_ writes. It need not be said that we should
have the child draw the letters according to the laws of contrast and
analogy. For instance, O beside I; B with P; T opposite L, etc."

According to Seguin, then, we do not need to _teach_ writing. The child
who draws, will write. But writing, for this author, means printed
capitals! Nor does he, in any other place, explain whether his pupil
shall write in any other way. He instead, gives much space to the
description of _the design which prepares for_, and which _includes_
writing. This method of design is full of difficulties and was only
established by the combined attempts of Itard and Seguin.

"Chapter XL: DESIGN. In design the first idea to be acquired is that of
the plane destined to receive the design. The second is that of the
trace or delineation. Within these two concepts lies all design, all
linear creation.

"These two concepts are correlative, their relation generates the idea,
or the capacity to produce the lines in this sense; that lines may only
be called such when they follow a methodical and determined direction:
the trace without direction is not a line; produced by chance, it has no
name.

"The rational sign, on the contrary, has a name because it has a
direction and since all writing or design is nothing other than a
composite of the diverse directions followed by a line, we must, before
approaching what is commonly called writing, _insist_ upon these notions
of plane and line. The ordinary child acquires these by instinct, but an
insistence upon them is necessary in order to render the idiot careful
and sensitive in their application. Through methodical design he will
come into rational contact with all parts of the plane and will, guided
by imitation, produce lines at first simple, but growing more
complicated.

"The pupil may be taught: First, to trace the diverse species of lines.
Second, to trace them in various directions and in different positions
relative to the plane. Third, to reunite these lines to form figures
varying from simple to complex. We must therefore, teach the pupil to
distinguish straight lines from curves, vertical from horizontal, and
from the various oblique lines; and must finally make clear the
principal points of conjunction of two or more lines in forming a
figure.

"This rational analysis of design, _from which writing will spring_, is
so essential in all its parts, that a child who, before being confided
to my care, already wrote many of the letters, has taken six days to
learn to draw a perpendicular or a horizontal line; he spent fifteen
days before imitating a curve and an oblique. Indeed the greater number
of my pupils, are for a long time incapable of even imitating the
movements of my hand upon the paper, before attempting to draw a line in
a determined direction. The most imitative, or the least stupid ones,
produce a sign diametrically opposite to that which I show them and all
of them confound the points of conjunction of two lines no matter how
evident this is. It is true that the thorough knowledge I have given
them of lines and of configuration helps them to make the connection
which must be established between the plane and the various marks with
which they must cover the surface, but in the study rendered necessary
by the deficiency of my pupils, the progression in the matter of the
vertical, the horizontal, the oblique, and the curve must be determined
by the consideration of the difficulty of comprehension and of execution
which each offers to a torpid intelligence and to a weak unsteady hand.

"I do not speak here of merely having them perform a difficult thing,
since I have them surmount a _series_ of difficulties and for this
reason I ask myself if some of these difficulties are not greater and
some less, and if they do not grow one from the other, like theorems.
Here are the ideas which have guided me in this respect.

"The vertical is a line which the eye and the hand follow directly,
going up and down. The horizontal line is not natural to the eye, nor to
the hand, which lowers itself and follows a curve (like the horizon from
which it has taken its name), starting from the centre and going to the
lateral extremity of the plane.

"The oblique line presupposes more complex comparative ideas, and the
curve demands such firmness and so many differences in its relation to
the plane that we would only lose time in taking up the study of these
lines. The most simple line then, is the vertical, and this is how I
have given my pupils an idea of it.

"The first geometric formula is this: only straight lines may be drawn
from one given point to another.

"Starting from this axiom, which the hand alone can demonstrate, I have
fixed two points upon the blackboard and have connected them by means of
a vertical. My pupils try to do the same between the dots they have upon
their paper, but with some the vertical descends to the right of the
point and with others, to the left, to say nothing of those whose hand
diverges in all directions. To arrest these various deviations which are
often far more defects of the intelligence and of the vision, than of
the hand, I have thought it wise to restrict the field of the plane,
drawing two vertical lines to left and right of the points which the
child is to join by means of a parallel line half way between the two
enclosing lines. If these two lines are not enough, I place two rulers
vertically upon the paper, which arrest the deviations of the hand
absolutely. These material barriers are not, however, useful for very
long. We first suppress the rulers and return to the two parallel lines,
between which the idiot learns to draw the third line. We then take
away one of the guiding lines, and leave, sometimes that on the right,
sometimes that on the left, finally taking away this last line and at
last, the dots, beginning by erasing the one at the top which indicates
the starting point of the line and of the hand. The child thus learns to
draw a vertical without material control, without points of comparison.

"The same method, the same difficulty, the same means of direction are
used for the straight horizontal lines. If, by chance, these lines begin
well, we must await until the child curves them, departing from the
centre and proceeding to the extremity _as nature commands him_, and
because of the reason which I have explained. If the two dots do not
suffice to sustain the hand, we keep it from deviating by means of the
parallel lines or of the rulers.

"Finally, have him trace a horizontal line, and by uniting with it a
vertical ruler we form a right angles. The child will begin to
understand, in this way, what the vertical and horizontal lines really
are, and will see the relation of these two ideas as he traces a figure.

"In the sequence of the development of lines, it would seem that the
study of the oblique should immediately follow that of the vertical and
the horizontal, but this is not so! The oblique which partakes of the
vertical in its inclination, and of the horizontal in its direction, and
which partakes of both in its nature (since it is a straight line),
presents perhaps, because of its relation to other lines, an idea too
complex to be appreciated without preparation."

Thus Seguin goes on through many pages, to speak of the oblique in all
directions, which he has his pupils trace between two parallels. He then
tells of the four curves which he has them draw to right and left of a
vertical and above and below a horizontal, and concludes: "So we find
the solution of the problems for which we sought--the vertical line, the
horizontal, the oblique, and the four curves, whose union forms the
circle, contain all possible lines, _all writing_.

"Arrived at this point, Itard and I were for a long time at a
standstill. The lines being known, the next step was to have the child
trace regular figures, beginning of course, with the simplest. According
to the general opinion, Itard had advised me to begin with the square
and I had followed this advice _for three months_, without being able to
make the child understand me."

After a long series of experiments, guided by his ideas of the genesis
of geometric figures, Seguin became aware that the triangle is the
figure most easily drawn.

"When three lines meet thus, they always form a triangle, while four
lines may meet in a hundred different directions without remaining
parallel and therefore without presenting a perfect square.

"From these experiments and many others, I have deduced the first
principles of writing and of design for the idiot; principles whose
application is _too simple_ for me to discuss further."

Such was the proceeding used by my predecessors in the teaching of
writing to deficients. As for reading, Itard proceeded thus: he drove
nails into the wall and hung upon them, geometric figures of wood, such
as triangles, squares, circles. He then drew the exact imprint of these
upon the wall, after which he took the figures away and had the "boy of
Aveyron" replace them upon the proper nails, guided by the design. From
this design Itard conceived the idea of the plane geometric insets. He
finally had large print letters made of wood and proceeded in the same
way as with the geometric figures, that is, using the design upon the
wall and arranging the nails in such a way that the child might place
the letters upon them and then take them off again. Later, Seguin used
the horizontal plane instead of the wall, drawing the letters on the
bottom of a box and having the child superimpose solid letters. After
twenty years, Seguin had not changed his method of procedure.

A criticism of the method used by Itard and Seguin for reading and
writing seems to me superfluous. The method has two fundamental errors
which make it inferior to the methods in use for normal children,
namely: writing in printed capitals, and the preparation for writing
through a study of rational geometry, which we now expect only from
students in the secondary schools.

Seguin here confuses ideas in a most extraordinary way. He has suddenly
jumped from the psychological observation of the child and from his
relation to his environment, to the study of the origin of lines and
their relation to the plane.

He says that the child _will readily design a vertical line_, but that
the horizontal will soon become a curve, because "_nature commands it_"
and this _command of nature_ is represented by the fact that man sees
the horizon as a curved line!

The example of Seguin serves to illustrate the necessity of a _special
education_ which shall fit man for _observation_, and shall direct
_logical thought_.

The observation must be absolutely objective, in other words, stripped
of preconceptions. Seguin has in this case the preconception that
geometric design must prepare for writing, and that hinders him from
discovering the truly natural proceeding necessary to such preparation.
He has, besides, the preconception that the deviation of a line, as well
as the inexactness with which the child traces it, are due to "_the mind
and the eye, not to the hand_," and so he wearies himself _for weeks and
months in explaining_ the direction of lines and in guiding _the vision_
of the idiot.

It seems as if Seguin felt that a good method must start from a superior
point, geometry; the intelligence of the child is only considered worthy
of attention in its relation to abstract things. And is not this a
common defect?

Let us observe mediocre men; they pompously assume erudition and disdain
simple things. Let us study the clear thought of those whom we consider
men of genius. Newton is seated tranquilly in the open air; an apple
falls from the tree, he observes it and asks, "Why?" Phenomena are never
insignificant; the fruit which falls and universal gravitation may rest
side by side in the mind of a genius.

If Newton had been a teacher of children he would have led the child to
look upon the worlds on a starry night, but an erudite person might have
felt it necessary first to prepare the child to understand the sublime
calculus which is the key to astronomy--Galileo Galilei observed the
oscillation of a lamp swung on high, and discovered the laws of the
pendulum.

In the intellectual life _simplicity_ consists in divesting one's mind
of every preconception, and this leads to the discovery of new things,
as, in the moral life, humility and material poverty guide us toward
high spiritual conquests.

If we study the history of discoveries, we will find that they have
come from _real objective observation_ and _from logical thought_. These
are simple things, but rarely found in one man.

Does it not seem strange, for instance, that after the discovery by
Laveran of the malarial parasite which invades the red blood-corpuscles,
we did not, in spite of the fact that we know the blood system to be a
system of closed vessels, even so much as _suspect the possibility_ that
a stinging insect might inoculate us with the parasite? Instead, the
theory that the evil emanated from low ground, that it was carried by
the African winds, or that it was due to dampness, was given credence.
Yet these were vague ideas, while the parasite was a definite biological
specimen.

When the discovery of the malarial mosquito came to complete logically
the discovery of Laveran, this seemed marvellous, stupefying. Yet we
know in biology that the reproduction of molecular vegetable bodies is
by scission with alternate sporation, and that of molecular animals is
by scission with alternate conjunction. That is, after a certain period
in which the primitive cell has divided and sub-divided into fresh
cells, equal among themselves, there comes the formation of two diverse
cells, one male and one female, which must unite to form a single cell
capable of recommencing the cycle of reproduction by division. All this
being known at the time of Laveran, and the malarial parasite being
known to be a protozoon, it would have seemed logical to consider its
segmentation in the stroma of the red corpuscle as the phase of scission
and to await until the parasite gave place to the sexual forms, which
must necessarily come in the phase succeeding scission. Instead, the
division was looked upon as spore-formation, and neither Laveran, nor
the numerous scientists who followed the research, knew how to give an
explanation of the appearance of the sexual forms. Laveran expressed an
idea, which was immediately received, that these two forms were
degenerate forms of the malarial parasite, and therefore incapable of
producing the changes determining the disease. Indeed, the malaria was
apparently cured at the appearance of the two sexual forms of the
parasite, the conjunction of the two cells being impossible in the human
blood. The theory--then recent--of Morel upon human degeneration
accompanied by deformity and weakness, inspired Laveran in his
interpretation, and everybody found the idea of the illustrious
pathologist a fortunate one, because it was inspired by the great
concepts of the Morellian theory.

Had anyone, instead, limited himself to reasoning thus: the original
form of the malarial insect is a protozoon; it reproduces itself by
scission, under our eyes; when the scission is finished, we see two
diverse cells, one a half-moon, the other threadlike. These are the
feminine and masculine cells which must, by conjunction, alternate the
scission,--such a reasoner would have opened the way to the discovery.
But _so simple_ a process of reasoning did not come. We might almost ask
ourselves how great would be the world's progress if a special form of
education prepared men for pure observation and logical thought.

A great deal of time and intellectual force are lost in the world,
because the false seems great and the truth so small and insignificant.

I say all this to defend the necessity, which I feel we face, of
preparing the coming generations by means of more rational methods. It
is from these generations that the world awaits its progress. We have
already learned to make use of our surroundings, but I believe that we
have arrived at a time when the necessity presents itself for
_utilising_ human force, through a scientific education.

To return to Seguin's method of writing, it illustrates another truth,
and that is the tortuous path we follow in our teaching. This, too, is
allied to an instinct for complicating things, analogous to that which
makes us so prone to appreciate complicated things. We have Seguin
teaching _geometry_ in order to teach a child to write; and making the
child's mind exert itself to follow geometrical abstractions only to
come down to the simple effort of drawing a printed D. After all, must
the child not have to make another effort in order to _forget_ the
print, and _learn_ the script!

And even we in these days still believe that in order to learn to write
the child must first make vertical strokes. This conviction is very
general. Yet it does not seem natural that to write the letters of the
alphabet, which are all rounded, it should be necessary to begin with
straight lines and acute angles.

In all good faith, we wonder that it should be difficult to do away
with the angularity and stiffness with which the beginner traces the
beautiful curve of the O.[13] Yet, through what effort on our part, and
on his, was he forced to fill pages and pages with rigid lines and acute
angles! To whom is due this time-honoured idea that the first sign to be
traced must be a straight line? And why do we so avoid preparing for
curves as well as angles?

  [13] It will, of course, be understood that this is a criticism
       of the system in use in Italian schools. A. E. G.

Let us, for a moment, divest ourselves of such preconceptions and
proceed in a more simple way. We may be able to relieve future
generations of _all effort_ in the matter of learning to write.

Is it necessary to begin writing with the making of vertical strokes? A
moment of clear and logical thinking is enough to enable us to answer,
no. The child makes too painful an effort in following such an exercise.
The first steps should be the easiest, and the up and down stroke, is,
on the contrary, one of the most difficult of all the pen movements.
Only a professional penman could fill a whole page and preserve the
regularity of such strokes, but a person who writes only moderately well
would be able to complete a page of presentable writing. Indeed, the
straight line is unique, expressing the shortest distance between two
points, while _any deviation_ from that direction signifies a line which
is not straight. These infinite deviations are therefore easier than
that _one_ trace which is perfection.

If we should give to a number of adults the order to draw a straight
line upon the blackboard, each person would draw a long line proceeding
in a different direction, some beginning from one side, some from
another, and almost all would succeed in making the line straight.
Should we then ask that the line be drawn in a _particular direction_,
starting from a determined point, the ability shown at first would
greatly diminish, and we would see many more irregularities, or errors.
Almost all the lines would be long--for the individual _must needs
gather impetus_ in order to succeed in making his line straight.

Should we ask that the lines be made short, and included within precise
limits, the errors would increase, for we would thus impede the impetus
which helps to conserve the definite direction. In the methods
ordinarily used in teaching writing, we add, to such limitations, the
further restriction that the instrument of writing must be held in a
certain way, not as instinct prompts each individual.

Thus we approach in the most conscious and restricted way the first act
of writing, which should be voluntary. In this first writing we still
demand that the single strokes be kept parallel, making the child's task
a difficult and barren one, since it has no purpose for the child, who
does not understand the meaning of all this detail.

I had noticed in the note-books of the deficient children in France (and
Voisin also mentions this phenomenon) that the pages of vertical
strokes, although they began as such, ended in lines of C's. This goes
to show that the deficient child, whose mind is less resistant than that
of the normal child, exhausts, little by little, the initial effort of
imitation, and the natural movement gradually comes to take the place of
that which was forced or stimulated. So the straight lines are
transformed into curves, more and more like the letter C. Such a
phenomenon does not appear in the copy-books of normal children, for
they resist, through effort, until the end of the page is reached, and,
thus, as often happens, conceal the didactic error.

But let us observe the spontaneous drawings of normal children. When,
for example, picking up a fallen twig, they trace figures in the sandy
garden path, we never see short straight lines, but long and variously
interlaced curves.

Seguin saw the same phenomenon when the horizontal lines he made his
pupils draw became curves so quickly instead. And he attributed the
phenomenon to the imitation of the horizon line!

That vertical strokes should prepare for alphabetical writing, seems
incredibly illogical. The alphabet is made up of curves, therefore we
must prepare for it by learning to make straight lines.

"But," says someone, "in many letters of the alphabet, the straight line
does exist," True, but there is no reason why as a beginning of writing,
we should select one of the details of a complete form. We may analyse
the alphabetical signs in this way, discovering straight lines and
curves, as by analysing discourse, we find grammatical rules. But we all
_speak_ independently of such rules, why then should we not write
independently of such analysis, and without the separate execution of
the parts constituting the letter?

It would be sad indeed if we could _speak_ only _after_ we had studied
grammar! It would be much the same as demanding that before we _looked_
at the stars in the firmament, we must study infinitesimal calculus; it
is much the same thing to feel that before teaching an idiot to write,
we must make him understand the abstract derivation of lines and the
problems of geometry!

No less are we to be pitied if, in order to write, we must follow
analytically the parts constituting the alphabetical signs. In fact the
_effort_ which we believe to be a necessary accompaniment to learning to
write is a purely artificial effort, allied, not to writing, but to the
_methods_ by which it is taught.

Let us for a moment cast aside every dogma in this connection. Let us
take no note of culture, or custom. We are not, here, interested in
knowing how humanity began to write, nor what may have been the origin
of writing itself. Let us put away the conviction, that long usage has
given us, of the necessity of beginning writing by making vertical
strokes; and let us try to be as clear and unprejudiced in spirit as
the truth which, we are seeking.

"_Let us observe an individual who is writing, and let us seek to
analyse the acts he performs in writing_," that is, the mechanical
operations which enter into the execution of writing. This would be
undertaking the _philosophical study of writing_, and it goes without
saying that we should examine the individual who writes, not the
_writing_; the _subject_, not the _object_. Many have begun with the
object, examining the writing, and in this way many methods have been
constructed.

But a method starting from the individual would be decidedly
original--very different from other methods which preceded it. It would
indeed signify a new era in writing, _based upon anthropology_.

In fact, when I undertook my experiments with normal children, if I had
thought of giving a name to this new method of writing, I should have
called it without knowing what the results would be, the
_anthropological method_. Certainly, my studies in anthropology inspired
the method, but experience has given me, as a surprise, another title
which seems to me the natural one, "the method of _spontaneous_
writing."

While teaching deficient children I happened to observe the following
fact: An idiot girl of eleven years, who was possessed of normal
strength and motor power in her hands, could not learn to sew, or even
to take the first step, darning, which consists in passing the needle
first over, then under the woof, now taking up, now leaving, a number of
threads.

I set the child to weaving with the Froebel mats, in which a strip of
paper is threaded transversely in and out among vertical strips of paper
held fixed at top and bottom. I thus came to think of the analogy
between the two exercises, and became much interested in my observation
of the girl. When she had become skilled in the Froebel weaving, I led
her back again to the sewing, and saw with pleasure that she was now
able to follow the darning. From that time on, our sewing classes began
with a regular course in the Froebel weaving.

I saw that the necessary movements of the hand in sewing _had been
prepared without having the child sew_, and that we should really find
the way to _teach_ the child _how_, before _making him execute_ a task.
I saw especially that preparatory movements could be carried on, and
reduced to a mechanism, by means of repeated exercises not in the work
itself but in that which prepares for it. Pupils could then come to the
real work, able to perform it without ever having directly set their
hands to it before.

I thought that I might in this way prepare for writing, and the idea
interested me tremendously. I marvelled at its simplicity, and was
annoyed that _I had not thought before_ of the method which was
suggested to me by my observation of the girl who could not sew.

In fact, seeing that I had already taught the children to touch the
contours of the plane geometric insets, I had now only to teach them to
touch with their fingers the _forms of the letters of the alphabet_.

I had a beautiful alphabet manufactured, the letters being in flowing
script, the low letters 8 centimetres high, and the taller ones in
proportion. These letters were in wood, 1/2 centimetre in thickness, and
were painted, the consonants in blue enamel, the vowels in red. The
under side of these letter-forms, instead of being painted, were covered
with bronze that they might be more durable. We had only one copy of
this wooden alphabet; but there were a number of cards upon which the
letters were painted in the same colours and dimensions as the wooden
ones. These painted letters were arranged upon the cards in groups,
according to contrast, or analogy of form.

Corresponding to each letter of the alphabet, we had a picture
representing some object the name of which began, with the letter. Above
this, the letter was painted in large script, and near it, the same
letter, much smaller and in its printed form. These pictures served to
fix the memory of the sound of the letter, and the small printed letter
united to the one in script, was to form the passage to the reading of
books. These pictures do not, indeed, represent a new idea, but they
completed an arrangement which did not exist before. Such an alphabet
was undoubtedly most expensive and when made by hand the cost was fifty
dollars.

The interesting part of my experiment was, that after I had shown the
children how to place the movable wooden letters upon those painted in
groups upon the cards, I had them _touch them repeatedly in the fashion
of flowing writing_.

I multiplied these exercises in various ways, and the children thus
learned to make _the movements necessary to reproduce the form of the
graphic signs without writing_.

I was struck by an idea which had never before entered my mind--that in
writing we make _two diverse_ forms of movement, for, besides the
movement by which the form is reproduced, there is also that of
_manipulating the instrument of writing_. And, indeed, when the
deficient children had become expert in touching all the letters
according to form, _they did not yet know how to hold a pencil_. To hold
and to manipulate a little stick securely, corresponds to the
_acquisition of a special muscular mechanism which is independent of the
writing movement_; it must in fact go along with the motions necessary
to produce all of the various letter forms. It is, then, _a distinct
mechanism_, which must exist together with the motor memory of the
single graphic signs. When I provoked in the deficients the movements
characteristic of writing by having them touch the letters with their
fingers, I exercised mechanically the <DW43>-motor paths, and fixed the
muscular memory of each letter. There remained the preparation of the
muscular mechanism necessary in holding and managing the instrument of
writing, and this I provoked by adding two periods to the one already
described. In the second period, the child touched the letter, not only
with the index finger of his right hand, but with two, the index and the
middle finger. In the third period, he touched the letters with a little
wooden stick, held as a pen in writing. In substance I was making him
repeat the same movements, now with, and now without, holding the
instrument.

I have said that the child was to follow the _visual_ image of the
outlined letter. It is true that his finger had already been trained
through touching the contours of the geometric figures, but this was not
always a sufficient preparation. Indeed, even we grown people, when we
trace a design through glass or tissue paper, cannot follow perfectly
the line which we see and along which we should draw our pencil. The
design should furnish some sort of control, some mechanical guide, for
the pencil, in order to follow with _exactness_ the trace, _sensible in
reality only to the eye_.

The deficients, therefore, did not always follow the design exactly with
either the finger or the stick. The didactic material did not offer _any
control_ in the work, or rather it offered only the uncertain control of
the child's glance, which could, to be sure, see if the finger continued
upon the sign, or not. I now thought that in order to have the pupil
follow the movements more exactly, and to guide the execution more
directly, I should need to prepare letter forms so indented, as to
represent a _furrow_ within which the wooden stick might run. I made the
designs for this material, but the work being too expensive I was not
able to carry out my plan.

After having experimented largely with this method, I spoke of it very
fully to the teachers in my classes in didactic methods at the State
Orthophrenic School. These lectures were printed, and I give below the
words which, though they were placed in the hands of more than 200
elementary teachers, did not draw from them a single helpful idea.
Professor Ferreri[14] in an article speaks with amazement of this
fact.[15]

  [14] G. Ferreri--Per l'insegnamento della scrittura (Sistema della
       Dott M. Montessori) Bollettino dell' Associazione Romana per
       la cura medico--pedigogica dei fanciulli anormali e deficienti
       poveri, anno 1, n. 4, ottobre 1907. Roma Tipografia delle Terme
       Diocleziane.

  [15] Riassunto delle lezion di didattica, della dott. Montessori
       anno 1900, Stab. lit. Romano, via Frattina 62, Disp. 6a,
       pag. 46: "_Lettura e Scrittura simultanee._"

"At this point we present the cards bearing the vowels painted in red.
The child sees irregular figures painted in red. We give him the vowels
in wood, painted red, and have him superimpose these upon the letters
painted on the card. We have him touch the wooden vowels in the fashion
of writing, and give him the name of each letter. The vowels are
arranged on the cards according to analogy of form:

  _o_  _e_  _a_
  _i_       _u_

"We then say to the child, for example, 'Find o. Fat it in its place.'
Then, 'What letter is this?' We here discover that many children make
mistakes in the letters if they only look at the letter.

"They could however tell the letter by touching it. Most interesting
observations may be made, revealing various individual types: visual,
motor.

"We have the child touch the letters drawn upon the cards,--using first
the index finger only, then the index with the middle finger,--then with
a small wooden stick held as a pen. The letter must be traced in the
fashion of writing.

"The consonants are painted in blue, and are arranged upon the cards
according to analogy of form. To these cards are annexed a movable
alphabet in blue wood, the letters of which are to be placed upon the
consonants as they were upon the vowels. In addition to these materials
there is another series of cards, where, besides the consonant, are
painted one or two figures the names of which begin with that particular
letter. Near the script letter, is a smaller printed letter painted in
the same colour.

"The teacher, naming the consonant according to the phonetic method,
indicates the letter, and then the card, pronouncing the names of the
objects painted there, and emphasizing the first letter, as, for
example, '_p-pear_: give me the consonant _p_--put it in its place,
touch it,' etc. _In all this we study the linguistic defects of the
child._

"Tracing the letter, in the fashion of writing, begins the muscular
education which prepares for writing. One of our little girls taught by
this method has reproduced all the letters with the pen, though she does
not as yet recognise them all. She has made them about eight centimetres
high, and with surprising regularity. This child also does well in hand
work. The child who looks, recognises, and touches the letters in the
manner of writing, prepares himself simultaneously for reading and
writing.

"Touching the letters and looking at them at the same time, fixes the
image more quickly through the co-operation of the senses. Later, the
two facts separate; looking becomes reading; touching becomes writing.
According to the type of the individual, some learn to read first,
others to write."

I had thus, about the year 1899, initiated my method for reading and
writing upon the fundamental lines it still follows. It was with great
surprise that I noted the _facility_ with which a deficient child, to
whom I one day gave a piece of chalk, traced upon the blackboard, in a
firm hand, the letters of the entire alphabet, writing for the first
time.

This had arrived much more quickly than I had supposed. As I have said,
some of the children wrote the letters _with a pen and yet could not
recognise one of them_. I have noticed, also, in normal children, that
the muscular sense is most easily developed in infancy, and this makes
writing exceedingly easy for children. It is not so with reading, which
requires a much longer course of instruction, and which calls for a
superior intellectual development, since it treats of the
_interpretation of signs_, and of the _modulation of accents of the
voice_, in order that the word may be understood. And all this is a
purely mental task, while in writing, the child, under dictation,
_materially translates_ sounds into signs, and _moves_, a thing which is
always easy and pleasant for him. Writing develops in the little child
with _facility_ and _spontaneity_, analogous to the development of
spoken language--which is a motor translation of audible sounds.
Reading, on the contrary, makes part of an abstract intellectual
culture, which is the interpretation of ideas from graphic symbols, and
is only acquired later on.

My first experiments with normal children were begun in the first half
of the month of November, 1907.

In the two "Children's Houses" in San Lorenzo, I had, from the date of
their respective inaugurations (January 6 in one and March 7 in the
other), used only the games of practical life, and of the education of
the senses. I had not presented exercises for writing, because, like
everybody else, I held the prejudice that it was necessary to begin as
late as possible the teaching of reading and writing, and certainly to
avoid it before the age of six.

But the children seemed to demand some _conclusion_ of the exercises,
which had already developed them intellectually in a most surprising
way. They knew how to dress and undress, and to bathe, themselves; they
knew how to sweep the floors, dust the furniture, put the room in order,
to open and close boxes, to manage the keys in the various locks; they
could replace the objects in the cupboards in perfect order, could care
for the plants; they knew how to observe things, and how to see objects
with their hands. A number of them came to us and frankly demanded to be
taught to read and write. Even in the face of our refusal several
children came to school and proudly showed us that they knew how to
make an O on the blackboard.

Finally, many of the mothers came to beg us as a favour to teach the
children to write, saying, "Here in the 'Children's Houses' the children
are awakened, and learn so many things easily that if you only teach
reading and writing they will soon learn, and will then be spared the
great fatigue this always means in the elementary school." This faith of
the mothers, that their little ones would, from us, be _able to learn to
read and write without fatigue_, made a great impression upon me.
Thinking upon the results I had obtained in the school for deficients, I
decided during the August vacation to make a trial upon the reopening of
the school in September. Upon second thought I decided that it would be
better to take up the interrupted work in September, and not to approach
reading and writing until October, when the elementary schools opened.
This presented the added advantage of permitting us to compare the
progress of the children of the first elementary with that made by ours,
who would have begun the same branch of instruction at the same time.

In September, therefore, I began a search for someone who could
manufacture didactic materials, but found no one willing to undertake
it. I wished to have a splendid alphabet made, like the one used with
the deficients. Giving this up, I was willing to content myself with the
ordinary enamelled letters used upon shop windows, but I could find them
in script form nowhere. My disappointments were many.

So passed the whole mouth of October. The children in the first
elementary had already filled pages of vertical strokes, and mine were
still waiting. I then decided to cut out large paper letters, and to
have one of my teachers colour these roughly on one side with a blue
tint. As for the touching of the letters, I thought of cutting the
letters of the alphabet out of sandpaper, and of gluing them upon smooth
cards, thus making objects much like those used in the primitive
exercises for the tactile sense.

Only after I had made these simple things, did I become aware of the
superiority of this alphabet to that magnificent one I had used for my
deficients, and in the pursuit of which I had wasted two months! If I
had been rich, I would have had that beautiful but barren alphabet of
the past! We wish the old things because we cannot understand the new,
and we are always seeking after that gorgeousness which belongs to
things already on the decline, without recognising in the humble
simplicity of new ideas the germ which shall develop in the future.

I finally understood that a paper alphabet could easily be multiplied,
and could be used by many children at one time, not only for the
recognition of letters, but for the composition of words. I saw that in
the sandpaper alphabet I had found the looked-for guide for the fingers
which touched the letter. This was furnished in such a way that no
longer the sight alone, but the touch, lent itself directly to teaching
the movement of writing with exactness of control.

In the afternoon after school, the two teachers and I, with great
enthusiasm, set about cutting out letters from writing-paper, and others
from sandpaper. The first, we painted blue, the second, we mounted on
cards, and, while we worked, there unfolded before my mind a clear
vision of the method in all its completeness, so simple that it made me
smile to think I had not seen it before.

The story of our first attempts is very interesting. One day one of the
teachers was ill, and I sent as a substitute a pupil of mine, Signorina
Anna Fedeli, a professor of pedagogy in a Normal school. When I went to
see her at the close of the day, she showed me two modifications of the
alphabet which she had made. One consisted in placing behind each
letter, a transverse strip of white paper, so that the child might
recognise the direction of the letter, which he often turned about and
upside down. The other consisted in the making of a cardboard case where
each letter might be put away in its own compartment, instead of being
kept in a confused mass as at first. I still keep this rude case made
from an old pasteboard box, which Signorina Fedeli had found in the
court and roughly sewed with white thread.

She showed it to me laughing, and excusing herself for the miserable
work, but I was most enthusiastic about it. I saw at once that the
letters in the case were a precious aid to the teaching. Indeed, it
offered to the eye of the child the possibility of comparing all of the
letters, and of selecting those he needed. In this way the didactic
material described below had its origin.

I need only add that at Christmas time, less than a month and a half
later, while the children in the first elementary were laboriously
working to forget their wearisome pothooks and to prepare for making the
curves of O and the other vowels, two of my little ones of four years
old, wrote, each one in the name of his companions, a letter of good
wishes and thanks to Signor Edoardo Talamo. These were written upon note
paper without blot or erasure and the writing was adjudged equal to that
which is obtained in the third elementary grade.




CHAPTER XVII

DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD AND DIDACTIC MATERIAL USED


FIRST PERIOD: EXERCISE TENDING TO DEVELOP THE MUSCULAR MECHANISM
NECESSARY IN HOLDING AND USING THE INSTRUMENT IN WRITING

_Design Preparatory to Writing.--Didactic Material._ Small wooden
tables; metal insets, outline drawings,  pencils. I have among
my materials two little wooden tables, the tops of which form an
inclined plane sloping toward a narrow cornice, which prevents objects
placed upon the table from slipping off. The top of each table is just
large enough to hold four of the square frames, into which the metal
plane geometric insets are fitted, and is so painted as to represent
three of these brown frames, each containing a square centre of the same
dark blue as the centres of the metal insets.

The metal insets are in dimension and form a reproduction of the series
of plane geometric insets in wood already described.

_Exercises_. Placed side by side upon the teacher's desk, or upon one of
the little tables belonging to the children, these two little tables may
have the appearance of being one long table containing eight figures.
The child may select one or more figures, taking at the same time the
frame of the inset. The analogy between these metal insets and the plane
geometric insets of wood is complete. But in this case, the child can
freely use the pieces, where before, he arranged them in the wooden
frame. He first takes the metal frame, places it upon a sheet of white
paper, and with a  pencil _draws around the contour of the empty
centre_. Then, he takes away the frame, and upon the paper there remains
a geometric figure.

This is the first time that the child has reproduced through design, a
geometric figure. Until now, he has only placed the geometric insets
above the figures delineated on the three series of cards. He now places
upon the figure, which he himself has drawn, the metal inset, just as he
placed the wooden inset upon the cards. His next act is to follow the
contour of this inset with a pencil of a different colour. Lifting the
metal piece, he sees the figure reproduced upon the paper, in two
colours.

Here, for the first time is born the abstract concept of the geometric
figure, for, from two metal pieces so different in form as the frame and
the inset, there has resulted the same design, which is a _line_
expressing a determined figure. This fact strikes the attention of the
child. He often marvels to find the same figure reproduced by means of
two pieces so different, and looks for a long time with evident pleasure
at the duplicate design--almost as if it were _actually produced_ by the
objects which serve to guide his hand.

Besides all this, the child learns _to trace lines_ determining figures.
There will come a day in which, with still greater surprise and
pleasure, he will trace graphic signs determining words.

After this, he begins the work which directly prepares for the formation
of the muscular mechanism relative to the holding and manipulation of
the instrument of writing. With a  pencil of his own selection,
held as the pen is held in writing, he _fills in_ the figure which he
has outlined. We teach him not to pass outside the contour, and in doing
so we attract his attention to this contour, and thus _fix_ the idea
that a line may determine a figure.

The exercise of filling in one figure alone, causes the child to perform
repeatedly the movement of manipulation which would be necessary to fill
ten copy-book pages with vertical strokes. And yet, the child feels no
weariness, because, although he makes exactly the muscular co-ordination
which is necessary to the work, he does so freely and in any way that he
wishes, while his eyes are fixed upon a large and brightly 
figure. At first, the children fill pages and pages of paper with these
big squares, triangles, ovals, trapezoids; colouring them red, orange,
green, blue, light blue, and pink.

Gradually they limit themselves to the use of the dark blue and brown,
both in drawing the figure and in filling it in, thus reproducing the
appearance of the metal piece itself. Many of the children, quite of
their own accord, make a little orange- circle in the centre of
the figure, in this way representing the little brass button by which
the metal piece is to be held. They take great pleasure in feeling that
they have reproduced exactly, like true artists, the objects which they
see before them on the little shelf.

Observing the successive drawings of a child, there is revealed to us a
duplicate form of progression:

_First._ Little by little, the lines tend less and less to go outside
the enclosing line until, at last, they are perfectly contained within
it, and both the centre and the frame are filled in with close and
uniform strokes.

_Second._ The strokes with which the child fills in the figures, from
being at first short and confused, become gradually _longer, and more
nearly parallel_, until in many cases the figures are filled in by means
of perfectly regular up and down strokes, extending from one side of the
figure to the other. In such a case, it is evident that the child is
_master of the pencil_. The muscular mechanism, necessary to the
management of the instrument of writing, _is established_. We may,
therefore, by examining such designs, arrive at a clear idea of the
maturity of the child in the matter of _holding the pencil or pen in
hand_. To vary these exercises, we use the _outline drawings_ already
described. Through these designs, the manipulation of the pencil is
perfected, for they oblige the child to make lines of various lengths,
and make him more and more secure in his use of the pencil.

If we could count the lines made by a child in the filling in of these
figures, and could transform them into the signs used in writing, they
would fill many, many copy-books! Indeed, the security which our
children attain is likened to that of children in our ordinary third
elementary grade. When for the first time they take a pen or a pencil in
hand, they know how to manage it almost as well as a person who has
written for a long time.

I do not believe that any means can be found which will so successfully
and, in so short a space of time, establish this mastery. And with it
all, the child is happy and diverted. My old method for the deficients,
that of following with a small stick the contours of raised letters,
was, when compared with this, barren and miserable!

Even when the children _know how to write_ they continue these
exercises, which furnish an unlimited progression, since the designs may
be varied and complicated. The children follow in each design
essentially the same movements, and acquire a varied collection of
pictures which grow more and more perfect, and of which they are very
proud. For I not only _provoke_, but perfect, the writing through the
exercises which we call preparatory. The control of the pen is rendered
more and more secure, not by repeated exercises in the writing, but by
means of these filled-in designs. In this way, my children _perfect
themselves in writing, without actually writing_.


SECOND PERIOD: EXERCISES TENDING TO ESTABLISH THE VISUAL-MUSCULAR IMAGE
OF THE ALPHABETICAL SIGNS, AND TO ESTABLISH THE MUSCULAR MEMORY OF THE
MOVEMENTS NECESSARY TO WRITING

_Didactic Material._ Cards upon which the single letters of the alphabet
are mounted in sandpaper; larger cards containing groups of the same
letters.

The cards upon which the sandpaper letters are mounted are adapted in
size and shape to each letter. The vowels are in light-
sandpaper and are mounted upon dark cards, the consonants and the groups
of letters are in black sandpaper mounted upon white cards. The grouping
is so arranged as to call attention to contrasted, or analogous forms.

The letters are cut in clear script form, the shaded parts being made
broader. We have chosen to reproduce the vertical script in use in the
elementary schools.

_Exercises._ In teaching the letters of the alphabet, we begin with the
_vowels_ and proceed to the consonants, pronouncing the _sound_, not the
name. In the case of the consonants, we immediately unite the sound with
one of the vowel sounds, repeating the syllable according to the usual
phonetic method.

The teaching proceeds according to the three periods already
illustrated.

_First._ Association of the visual and muscular-tactile sensation with
the letter sound.

The directress presents to the child two of the cards upon which vowels
are mounted (or two of the consonants, as the case may be). Let us
suppose that we present the letters i and o, saying, "This is i! This is
o!" As soon as we have given the sound of a letter, we have the child
trace it, taking care to show him _how_ to trace it, and if necessary
guiding the index finger of his right hand over the sandpaper letter _in
the sense of writing_.

"_Knowing how to trace_" will consist in _knowing the direction_ in
which a given graphic sign must be followed.

The child learns quickly, and his finger, already expert in the tactile
exercise, _is led_, by the slight roughness of the fine sandpaper, over
the exact track of the letter. _He may then repeat indefinitely_ the
movements necessary to produce the letters of the alphabet, without the
fear of the mistakes of which a child writing with a pencil for the
first time is so conscious. If he deviates, the smoothness of the card
immediately warns him of his error.

The children, as soon as they have become at all expert in this tracing
of the letters, take great pleasure in repeating it _with closed eyes_,
letting the sandpaper lead them in following the form which they do not
see. Thus the perception will be established by the direct
muscular-tactile sensation of the letter. In other words, it is no
longer the visual image of the letter, but the _tactile sensation_,
which guides the hand of the child in these movements, which thus become
fixed in the muscular memory.

There develop, contemporaneously, three sensations when the directress
_shows the letter_ to the child and has him trace it; the visual
sensation, the tactile sensation, and the muscular sensation. In this
way the _image of the graphic sign_ is fixed _in a much shorter space of
time_ than when it was, according to ordinary methods, acquired only
through the visual image. It will be found that the _muscular memory_ is
in the young child the most tenacious and, at the same time, the most
ready. Indeed, he sometimes recognises the letters by touching them,
when he cannot do so by looking at them. These images are, besides all
this, contemporaneously associated with the alphabetical sound.

_Second._ Perception. _The child should know how to compare and to
recognise the figures, when he hears the sounds corresponding to them._

The directress asks the child, for example, "Give me o!--Give me i!" If
the child does not recognise the letters by looking at them, she invites
him to trace them, but if he still does not recognise them, the lesson
is ended, and may be resumed another day. I have already spoken of the
necessity of _not revealing_ the error, and of not insisting in the
teaching when the child does not respond readily.

_Third._ Language. _Allowing the letters to lie for some instants upon
the table, the directress asks the child, "What is this?" and he should
respond, o, i._

In teaching the consonants, the directress pronounces only the _sound_,
and as soon as she has done so unites with it a vowel, pronouncing the
syllable thus formed and alternating this little exercise by the use of
different vowels. She must always be careful to emphasize the sound of
the consonant, repeating it by itself, as, for example, _m_, _m_, _m_,
_ma_, _me_, _mi_, _m_, _m_. When the child _repeats_ the sound he
isolates it, and then accompanies it with the vowel.

It is not necessary to teach all the vowels before passing to the
consonants, and as soon as the child knows one consonant he may begin to
compose words. Questions of this sort, however, are left to the judgment
of the educator.

I do not find it practical _to follow a special rule_ in the teaching of
the consonants. Often the curiosity of the child concerning a letter
leads us to teach that desired consonant; a name pronounced may awaken
in him a desire to know what consonants are necessary to compose it, and
this _will_, or _willingness_, of the pupil is a much more _efficacious_
means than any rule concerning the _progression_ of the letters.

When the child pronounces _the sounds_ of the consonants, he experiences
an evident pleasure. It is a great novelty for him, this series of
sounds, so varied and yet so distinct, _presenting_ such enigmatic signs
as the letters of the alphabet. There is mystery about all this, which
provokes most decided interest. One day I was on the terrace while the
children were having their free games; I had with me a little boy of two
years and a half left with me, for a moment, by his mother. Scattered
about upon a number of chairs, were the alphabets which we use in the
school. These had become mixed, and I was putting the letters back into
their respective compartments. Having finished my work, I placed the
boxes upon two of the little chairs near me. The little boy watched me.
Finally, he drew near to the box, and took one of the letters in his
hand. It chanced to be an f. At that moment the children, who were
running in single file, passed us, and, seeing the letter, called out in
chorus the corresponding sound and passed on. The child paid no
attention to them, but put back the f and took up an r. The children
running by again, looked at him laughing, and then began to cry out "r,
r, r! r, r, r!" Little by little the baby understood that, when he took
a letter in hand, the children, who were passing, cried out a sound.
This amused him so much that I wished to observe how long he would
persist in this game without becoming tired. He kept it up for
_three-quarters of an hour_! The children had become interested in the
child, and grouped themselves about him, pronouncing the sounds in
chorus, and laughing at his pleased surprise. At last, after he had
several times held up f, and had received from his public the same
sound, he took the letter again, showing it to me, and saying, "f, f,
f!" He had learned this from out the great confusion of sounds which he
had heard; the long letter which had first arrested the attention of the
running children, had made a great impression upon him.

It is not necessary to show how the separate pronunciation of the
alphabetical sounds _reveals_ the condition of the child's speech.
Defects, which are almost all related to the _incomplete_ development of
the language itself, manifest themselves, and the directress may take
note of them one by one. In this way she will be possessed of a record
of the child's progress, which will help her in her individual teaching,
and will reveal much concerning the development of the language in this
particular child.

In the matter of _correcting linguistic defects_, we will find it
helpful to follow the physiological rules relating to the child's
development, and to modify the difficulties in the presentation of our
lesson. When, however, the child's speech is sufficiently developed, and
when he _pronounces all the sounds_, it does not matter which of the
letters we select in our lessons.

Many of the defects which have become permanent in adults are due to
_functional errors in the development_ of the language during the period
of infancy. If, for the attention which we pay to the correction of
linguistic defects in children in the upper grades, we would substitute
_a direction of the development of the language_ while the child is
still young, our results would be much more practical and valuable. In
fact, many of the defects in pronunciation arise from the use of a
_dialect_, and these it is almost impossible to correct after the period
of childhood. They may, however, be most easily removed through the use
of educational methods especially adapted to the perfecting of the
language in little children.

We do not speak here of actual linguistic _defects_ related to
anatomical or physiological weaknesses, or to pathological facts which
alter the function of the nervous system. I speak at present only of
those irregularities which are due to a repetition of incorrect sounds,
or to the imitation of imperfect pronunciation. Such defects may show
themselves in the pronunciation of any one of the consonant sounds, and
I can conceive of no more practical means for a methodical correction of
speech defects than this exercise in pronunciation, which is a necessary
part in learning the graphic language through my method. But such
important questions deserve a chapter to themselves.

Turning directly to the method used in teaching writing, I may call
attention to the fact that it is contained in the two periods already
described. Such exercises have made it possible for the child to learn,
and to fix, the muscular mechanism necessary to the proper holding of
the pen, and to the making of the graphic signs. If he has exercised
himself for a sufficiently long time in these exercises, he will be
_potentially_ ready to write all the letters of the alphabet and all of
the simple syllables, without ever having taken chalk or pencil in his
hand.

We have, in addition to this, begun the teaching of _reading_ at the
same time that we have been teaching _writing_. When we present a letter
to the child and enunciate its sound, he fixes the image of this letter
by means of the visual sense, and also by means of the muscular-tactile
sense. He associates the sound with its relative sign; that is, he
relates the sound to the graphic sign. But _when he sees and recognises,
he reads; and when he traces, he writes_. Thus his mind receives as one,
two acts, which, later on, as he develops, will separate, coming to
constitute the two diverse processes of _reading and writing_. By
teaching these two acts contemporaneously, or, better, by their
_fusion_, we place the child _before a new form of language_ without
determining which of the acts constituting it should be most prevalent.

We do not trouble ourselves as to whether the child in the development
of this process, first learns to read or to write, or if the one or the
other will be the easier. We must rid ourselves of all preconceptions,
and must _await from experience_ the answer to these questions. We may
expect that individual differences will show themselves in the
prevalence of one or the other act in the development of different
children. This makes possible the most interesting psychological study
of the individual, and should broaden the work of this method, which is
based upon the free expansion of individuality.


THIRD PERIOD: EXERCISES FOR THE COMPOSITION OF WORDS

_Didactic Material._ This consists chiefly of alphabets. The letters of
the alphabet used here are identical in form and dimension with the
sandpaper ones already described, but these are cut out of cardboard and
are not mounted. In this way each letter represents an object which can
be easily handled by the child and placed wherever he wishes it. There
are several examples of each letter, and I have designed cases in which
the alphabets may be kept. These cases or boxes are very shallow, and
are divided and subdivided into many compartments, in each one of which
I have placed a group of four copies of the same letter. The
compartments are not equal in size, but are measured according to the
dimensions of the letters themselves. At the bottom of each compartment
is glued a letter which is not to be taken out. This letter is made of
black cardboard and relieves the child of the fatigue of hunting about
for the right compartment when he is replacing the letters in the case
after he has used them. The vowels are cut from blue cardboard, and the
consonants from red.

In addition to these alphabets we have a set of the capital letters
mounted in sandpaper upon cardboard, and another, in which they are cut
from cardboard. The numbers are treated in the same way.

[Illustration: (A) TRAINING THE SENSE OF TOUCH. Learning the difference
between rough and smooth by running fingers alternately over sandpaper
and smooth cardboard; distinguishing different shapes by fitting
geometric insets into place; distinguishing textures. (B) LEARNING TO
WRITE AND READ BY TOUCH. The child at the left is tracing sandpaper
letters and learning to know them by touch. The boy and girl are making
words out of cardboard letters.]

[Illustration: (A) CHILDREN TOUCHING LETTERS. The child on the left
has acquired lightness and delicacy of touch by very thorough
preparatory exercises. The one on the right has not had so much
training. (B) MAKING WORDS WITH CARDBOARD SCRIPT.]

_Exercises._ As soon as the child knows some of the vowels and the
consonants we place before him the big box containing all the vowels and
the consonants which he knows. The directress pronounces very clearly a
word; for example, "mama," brings out the sound of the m very
distinctly, repeating the sounds a number of times. Almost always the
little one with an impulsive movement seizes an m and places it upon the
table. The directress repeats "ma--ma." The child selects the a and
places it near the m. He then composes the other syllable very easily.
But the reading of the word which he has composed is not so easy.
Indeed, he generally succeeds in reading it only after a _certain
effort_. In this case I help the child, urging him to read, and reading
the word with him once or twice, always pronouncing very distinctly,
_mama, mama_. But once he has understood the mechanism of the game, the
child goes forward by himself, and becomes intensely interested. We may
pronounce any word, taking care only that the child understands
separately the letters of which it is composed. He composes the new
word, placing, one after the other, the signs corresponding to the
sounds.

It is most interesting indeed to watch the child at this work. Intensely
attentive, he sits watching the box, moving his lips almost
imperceptibly, and taking one by one the necessary letters, rarely
committing an error in spelling. The movement of the lips reveals the
fact that he _repeats to himself an infinite number of times_ the words
whose sounds he is translating into signs. Although the child is able to
compose any word which is clearly pronounced, we generally dictate to
him only those words which are well-known, since we wish his composition
to result in an idea. When these familiar words are used, he
spontaneously rereads many times the word he has composed, repeating its
sounds in a thoughtful, contemplative way.

The importance of these exercises is very complex. The child analyses,
perfects, fixes his own spoken language,--placing an object in
correspondence to every sound which he utters. The composition of the
word furnishes him with substantial proof of the necessity for clear and
forceful enunciation.

The exercise, thus followed, associates the sound which is heard with
the graphic sign which represents it, and lays a most solid foundation
for accurate and perfect spelling.

In addition to this, the composition of the words is in itself an
exercise of intelligence. The word which is pronounced presents to the
child a problem which he must solve, and he will do so by remembering
the signs, selecting them from among others, and arranging them in the
proper order. He will have the _proof_ of the exact solution of his
problem when he _rereads_ the word--this word which he has composed, and
which represents for all those who know how to read it, _an idea_.

When the child hears others read the word he has composed, he wears an
expression of satisfaction and pride, and is possessed by a species of
joyous wonder. He is impressed by this correspondence, carried on
between himself and others by means of symbols. The written language
represents for him the highest attainment reached by his own
intelligence, and is at the same time, the reward of a great
achievement.

When the pupil has finished the composition and the reading of the word
we have him, according to the habits of order which we try to establish
in connection with all our work, "_put away_" all the letters, each one
in its own compartment. In composition, pure and simple, therefore, the
child unites the two exercises of comparison and of selection of the
graphic signs; the first, when from the entire box of letters before him
he takes those necessary; the second, when he seeks the compartment in
which each letter must be replaced. There are, then, three exercises
united in this one effort, all three uniting to _fix the image of the
graphic sign_ corresponding to the sounds of the word. The work of
learning is in this case facilitated in three ways, and the ideas are
acquired in a third of the time which would have been necessary with
the old methods. We shall soon see that the child, on hearing the word,
or on thinking of a word which he already knows, _will see_, with his
mind's eye, all the letters, necessary to compose the word, arrange
themselves. He will reproduce this vision with a facility most
surprising to us. One day a little boy four years old, running alone
about the terrace, was heard to repeat many times, "To make Zaira, I
must have z-a-i-r-a." Another time, Professor Di Donato, in a visit to
the "Children's House," pronounced his own name for a four-year-old
child. The child was composing the name, using small letters and making
it all one word, and had begun, thus--_diton_. The professor at once
pronounced the word more distinctly; di _do_ nato, whereupon the child,
without scattering the letters, picked up the syllable _to_ and placed
it to one side, putting _do_ in the empty space. He then placed an _a_
after the _n_, and, taking up the _to_ which he had put aside, completed
the word with it. This made it evident that the child, when the word was
pronounced more clearly, understood that the syllable _to_ did not
belong at that place in the word, realised that it belonged at the end
of the word, and therefore placed it aside until he should need it. This
was most surprising in a child of four years, and amazed all of those
present. It can be explained by the clear and, at the same time, complex
vision of the signs which the child must have, if he is to form a word
which he hears spoken. This extraordinary act was largely due to the
orderly mentality which the child had acquired through repeated
spontaneous exercises tending to develop his intelligence.

These three periods contain the entire method for the acquisition of
written language. The significance of such a method is clear. The
<DW43>-physiological acts which unite to establish reading and writing
are prepared separately and carefully. The muscular movements peculiar
to the making of the signs or letters are prepared apart, and the same
is true of the manipulation of the instrument of writing. The
composition of the words, also, is reduced to a psychic mechanism of
association between images heard and seen. There comes a moment in which
the child, without thinking of it, fills in the geometric figures with
an up and down stroke, which is free and regular; a moment in which he
touches the letters with closed eyes, and in which he reproduces their
form, moving his finger through the air; a moment in which the
composition of words has become a psychic impulse, which makes the
child, even when alone, repeat to himself "To make Zaira I must have
z-a-i-r-a."

Now this child, it is true, _has never written_, but he has mastered all
the acts necessary to writing. The child who, when taking dictation, not
only knows how to compose the word, but instantly embraces in his
thought its composition as a whole, will be able to write, since he
knows how to make, with his eyes closed, the movements necessary to
produce these letters, and since he manages almost unconsciously the
instrument of writing.

More than this, the freedom with which the child has acquired this
mechanical dexterity makes it possible for the impulse or spirit to act
at any time through the medium of his mechanical ability. He should,
sooner or later, come into his full power by way of a spontaneous
explosion into writing. This is, indeed, the marvellous reaction which
has come from my experiment with normal children. In one of the
"Children's Houses," directed by Signorina Bettini, I had been
especially careful in the way in which writing was taught, and we have
had from this school most beautiful specimens of writing, and for this
reason, perhaps I cannot do better than to describe the development of
the work in this school.

One beautiful December day when the sun shone and the air was like
spring, I went up on the roof with the children. They were playing
freely about, and a number of them were gathered about me. I was sitting
near a chimney, and said to a little five-year-old boy who sat beside
me, "Draw me a picture of this chimney," giving him as I spoke a piece
of chalk. He got down obediently and made a rough sketch of the chimney
on the tiles which formed the floor of this roof terrace. As is my
custom with little children, I encouraged him, praising his work. The
child looked at me, smiled, remained for a moment as if on the point of
bursting into some joyous act, and then cried out, "I can write! I can
write!" and kneeling down again he wrote on the pavement the word
"hand." Then, full of enthusiasm, he wrote also "chimney," "roof." As he
wrote, he continued to cry out, "I can write! I know how to write!" His
cries of joy brought the other children, who formed a circle about him,
looking down at his work in stupefied amazement. Two or three of them
said to me, trembling with excitement, "Give me the chalk. I can write
too." And indeed they began to write various words: _mama_, _hand_,
_John_, _chimney_, _Ada_.

Not one of them had ever taken chalk or any other instrument in hand for
the purpose of writing. It was the _first time_ that they had ever
written, and they traced an entire word, as a child, when speaking for
the first time, speaks the entire word.

The first word spoken by a baby causes the mother ineffable joy. The
child has chosen perhaps the word "mother," seeming to render thus a
tribute to maternity. The first word written by my little ones aroused
within themselves an indescribable emotion of joy. Not being able to
adjust in their minds the connection between the preparation and the
act, they were possessed by the illusion that, having now grown to the
proper size, they knew how to write. In other words, writing seemed to
them only one among the many gifts of nature.

They believe that, as they grow bigger and stronger, there will come
some beautiful day when they _shall know how to write_. And, indeed,
this is what it is in reality. The child who speaks, first prepares
himself unconsciously, perfecting the <DW43>-muscular mechanism which
leads to the articulation of the word. In the case of writing, the child
does almost the same thing, but the direct pedagogical help and the
possibility of preparing the movements for writing in an almost material
way, causes the ability to write to develop much more rapidly and more
perfectly than the ability to speak correctly.

In spite of the ease with which this is accomplished, the preparation is
not partial, but complete. The child possesses _all_ the movements
necessary for writing. And written language develops not gradually, but
in an explosive way; that is, the child can write _any word_. Such was
our first experience in the development of the written language in our
children. Those first days we were a prey to deep emotions. It seemed as
if we walked in a dream, and as if we assisted at some miraculous
achievement.

The child who wrote a word for the first time was full of excited joy.
He might be compared to the hen who has just laid an egg. Indeed, no one
could escape from the noisy manifestations of the little one. He would
call everyone to see, and if there were some who did not go, he ran to
take hold of their clothes forcing them to come and see. We all had to
go and stand about the written word to admire the marvel, and to unite
our exclamations of surprise with the joyous cries of the fortunate
author. Usually, this first word was written on the floor, and, then,
the child knelt down before it in order to be nearer to his work and to
contemplate it more closely.

After the first word, the children, with a species of frenzied joy,
continued to write everywhere. I saw children crowding about one another
at the blackboard, and behind the little ones who were standing on the
floor another line would form consisting of children mounted upon
chairs, so that they might write above the heads of the little ones. In
a fury at being thwarted, other children, in order to find a little
place where they might write, overturned the chairs upon which their
companions were mounted. Others ran toward the window shutters or the
door, covering them with writing. In these first days we walked upon a
carpet of written signs. Daily accounts showed us that the same thing
was going on at home, and some of the mothers, in order to save their
pavements, and even the crust of their loaves upon which they found
words written, made their children presents of _paper_ and _pencil_. One
of these children brought to me one day a little note-book entirely
filled with writing, and the mother told me that the child had written
all day long and all evening, and had gone to sleep in his bed with the
paper and pencil in his hand.

This impulsive activity which we could not, in those first days control,
made me think upon the wisdom of Nature, who develops the spoken
language little by little, letting it go hand in hand with the gradual
formation of ideas. Think of what the result would have been had Nature
acted imprudently as I had done! Suppose Nature had first allowed the
human being to gather, by means of the senses, a rich and varied
material, and to acquire a store of ideas, and had then completely
prepared in him the means for articulate language, saying finally to the
child, mute until that hour, "Go--Speak!" The result would have been a
species of sudden madness, under the influence of which the child,
feeling no restraints, would have burst into an exhausting torrent of
the most strange and difficult words.

I believe, however, that there exists between the two extremes a happy
medium which is the true and practical way. We should lead the child
more gradually to the conquest of written language, yet we should still
have it come as a _spontaneous fact_, and his work should from the first
be almost perfect.

Experience has shown us how to control this phenomenon, and how to lead
the child more _calmly_ to this new power. The fact that the children
_see_ their companions writing, leads them, through imitation, to write
_as soon as_ they can. In this way, when the child writes he does not
have the entire alphabet at his disposal, and the number of words which
he can write is limited. He is not even capable of making all of the
words possible through a combination of the letters which he does know.
He still has the great joy of the _first written word_, but this is no
longer the source of _an overwhelming surprise_, since he sees just such
wonderful things happening each day, and knows that sooner or later the
same gift will come to all. This tends to create a calm and ordered
environment, still full of beautiful and wonderful surprises.

Making a visit to the "Children's House," even during the opening weeks,
one makes fresh discoveries. Here, for instance, are two little
children, who, though they fairly radiate pride and joy, are writing
tranquilly. Yet, these children, until yesterday, had never thought of
writing!

The directress tells me that one of them began to write yesterday
morning at eleven o'clock, the other, at three in the afternoon. We have
come to accept the phenomenon with calmness, and tacitly recognise it as
a _natural form of the child's development_.

The wisdom of the teacher shall decide when it is necessary to encourage
a child to write. This can only be when he is already perfect in the
three periods of the preparatory exercise, and yet does not write of his
own accord. There is danger that in retarding the act of writing, the
child may plunge finally into a tumultuous effort, due to the fact that
he knows the entire alphabet and has no natural check.

The signs by which the teacher may almost precisely diagnose the child's
maturity in this respect are: the _regularity_ of the _parallel_ lines
which fill in the geometric figures; the recognition with closed eyes of
the sandpaper letters; the security and readiness shown in the
composition of words. Before intervening by means of a direct invitation
to write, it is best to wait at least a week in the hope that the child
may write spontaneously. When he has begun to write spontaneously the
teacher may intervene to _guide_ the progress of the writing. The first
help which she may give is that of _ruling_ the blackboard, so that the
child may be led to maintain regularity and proper dimensions in his
writing.

The second, is that of inducing the child, whose writing is not firm, to
_repeat the tracing_ of the sandpaper letters. She should do this
instead of _directly_ correcting his actual writing, for the child does
not perfect himself by repeating the act of writing, but by repeating
the acts preparatory to writing. I remember a little beginner who,
wishing to make his blackboard writing perfect, brought all of the
sandpaper letters with him, and before writing touched two or three
times _all of the letters needed in the words he wished to write_. If a
letter did not seem to him to be perfect he erased it and _retouched_
the letter upon the card before rewriting.

Our children, even after they have been writing for a year, continue to
repeat the three preparatory exercises. They thus learn both to write,
and to perfect their writing, without really going through the actual
act. With our children, actual writing is a test; it springs from an
inner impulse, and from the pleasure of explaining a superior activity;
it is not an exercise. As the soul of the mystic perfects itself through
prayer, even so in our little ones, that highest expression of
civilisation, written language, is acquired and improved through
exercises which are akin to, but which are not, writing.

There is educational value in this idea of preparing oneself before
trying, and of perfecting oneself before going on. To go forward
correcting his own mistakes, boldly attempting things which he does
imperfectly, and of which he is as yet unworthy dulls the sensitiveness
of the child's spirit toward his own errors. My method of writing
contains an educative concept; teaching the child that prudence which
makes him avoid errors, that dignity which makes him look ahead, and
which guides him to perfection, and that humility which unites him
closely to those sources of good through which alone he can make a
spiritual conquest, putting far from him the illusion that the
immediate success is ample justification for continuing in the way he
has chosen.

The fact that all the children, those who are just beginning the three
exercises and those who have been writing for months, daily repeat the
same exercise, unites them and makes it easy for them to meet upon an
apparently equal plane. Here there are no _distinctions_ of beginners,
and experts. All of the children fill in the figures with 
pencils, touch the sandpaper letters and compose words with the movable
alphabets; the little ones beside the big ones who help them. He who
prepares himself, and he who perfects himself, both follow the same
path. It is the same way in life, for, deeper than any social
distinction, there lies an equality, a common meeting point, where all
men are brothers, or, as in the spiritual life, aspirants and saints
again and again pass through the same experiences.

Writing is very quickly learned, because we begin to teach it only to
those children who show a desire for it by spontaneous attention to the
lesson given by the directress to other children, or by watching the
exercises in which the others are occupied. Some individuals _learn_
without ever having received any lessons, solely through listening to
the lessons given to others.

In general, all children of four are intensely interested in writing,
and some of our children have begun to write at the age of three and a
half. We find the children particularly enthusiastic about tracing the
sandpaper letters.

During the first period of my experiments, when the children were shown
the alphabet _for the first time_, I one day asked Signorina Bettini to
bring out to the terrace where the children were at play, all of the
various letters which she herself had made. As soon as the children saw
them they gathered about us, their fingers outstretched in their
eagerness to touch the letters. Those who secured cards were unable to
touch them properly because of the other children, who crowded about
trying to reach the cards in our laps. I remember with what an impulsive
movement the possessors of the cards held them on high like banners, and
began to march, followed by all the other children who clapped their
hands and cried out joyously. The procession passed before us, and all,
big and little, laughed merrily, while the mothers, attracted by the
noise, leaned from the windows to watch the sight.

The average time that elapses between the first trial of the preparatory
exercises and the first written word is, for children of four years,
from a month to a month and a half. With children of five years, the
period is much shorter, being about a month. But one of our pupils
learned to use in writing all the letters of the alphabet in twenty
days. Children of four years, after they have been in school for two
months and a half, can write any word from dictation, and can pass to
writing with ink in a note-book. Our little ones are generally experts
after three months' time, and those who have written for six months may
be compared to the children in the third elementary. Indeed, writing is
one of the easiest and most delightful of all the conquests made by the
child.

If adults learned as easily as children under six years of age, it would
be an easy matter to do away with illiteracy. We would probably find two
grave hinderances to the attainment of such a brilliant success: the
torpor of the muscular sense, and those permanent defects of spoken
language, which would be sure to translate themselves into the written
language. I have not made experiments along this line, but I believe
that one school year would be sufficient to lead an illiterate person,
not only to write, but to express his thoughts in written language.

So much for the time necessary for learning. As to the execution, our
children _write well_ from the moment in which they begin. The _form_ of
the letters, beautifully rounded and flowing, is surprising in its
similarity to the form of the sandpaper models. The beauty of our
writing is rarely equalled by any scholars in the elementary schools,
_who have not had special exercises in penmanship_. I have made a close
study of penmanship, and I know how difficult it would be to teach
pupils of twelve or thirteen years to write an entire word without
lifting the pen, except for the few letters which require this. The up
and down strokes with which they have filled their copy-book make
flowing writing almost impossible to them.

Our little pupils, on the other hand, spontaneously, and with a
marvellous security, write entire words without lifting the pen,
maintaining perfectly the slant of the letters, and making the distance
between each letter equal. This has caused more than one visitor to
exclaim, "If I had not seen it I should never have believed it." Indeed,
penmanship is a superior form of teaching and is necessary to correct
defects already acquired and fixed. It is a long work, for the child,
_seeing_ the model, must follow the _movements_ necessary to reproduce
it, while there is no direct correspondence between the visual sensation
and the movements which he must make. Too often, penmanship is taught at
an age when all the defects have become established, and when the
physiological period in which the _muscular memory_ is ready, has been
passed.

We directly prepare the child, not only for writing, but also for
_penmanship_, paying great attention to the _beauty of form_ (having the
children touch the letters in script form) and to the flowing quality
of the letters. (The exercises in filling-in prepare for this.)


READING

_Didactic Material._ The Didactic Material for the lessons in reading
consists in slips of paper or cards upon which are written in clear,
large script, words and phrases. In addition to these cards we have a
great variety of toys.

Experience has taught me to distinguish clearly between _writing and
reading_, and has shown me that the two acts _are not absolutely
contemporaneous_. Contrary to the usually accepted idea, writing
_precedes reading_. I do not consider as _reading_ the test which the
child makes _when he verifies_ the word that he has written. He is
translating signs into sounds, as he first translated sounds into signs.
In this verification he already knows the word and has repeated it to
himself while writing it. What I understand by reading is the
_interpretation_ of an idea from the written signs. The child who has
not heard the word pronounced, and who recognises it when he sees it
composed upon the table with the cardboard letters, and who can tell
what it means; this child _reads_. The word which he reads has the same
relation to written language that the word which he hears bears to
articulate language. Both serve to _receive the language_ transmitted to
us _by others_. So, until the child reads a transmission of ideas from
the written word, _he does not read_.

We may say, if we like, that writing as described is a fact in which the
<DW43>-motor mechanism prevails, while in reading, there enters a work
which is purely intellectual. But it is evident how our method for
writing prepares for reading, making the difficulties almost
imperceptible. Indeed, writing prepares the child to interpret
mechanically the union of the letter sounds of which the written word is
composed. When a child in our school knows how to write, _he knows how
to read the sounds_ of which the word is composed. It should be noticed,
however, that when the child composes the words with the movable
alphabet, or when he writes, he has _time to think_ about the signs
which he must select to form the word. The writing of a word requires a
great deal more time than that necessary for reading the same word.

The child who _knows how to write_, when placed before a word which he
must interpret by reading, is silent for a long time, and generally
reads the component sounds with the same slowness with which he would
have written them. But _the sense of the word_ becomes evident only when
it is pronounced clearly and with the phonetic accent. Now, in order to
place the phonetic accent the child must recognise the word; that is, he
must recognise the idea which the word represents. The intervention of a
superior work of the intellect is necessary if he is to read. Because of
all this, I proceed in the following way with the exercises in reading,
and, as will be evident, I do away entirely with the old-time primer.

I prepare a number of little cards made from ordinary writing-paper. On
each of these I write in large clear script some well-known word, one
which has already been pronounced many times by the children, and which
represents an object actually present or well known to them. If the word
refers to an object which is before them, I place this object under the
eyes of the child, in order to facilitate his interpretation of the
word. I will say, in this connection, the objects used in these writing
games are for the most part toys of which we have a great many in the
"Children's Houses." Among these toys, are the furnishings of a doll's
house, balls, dolls, trees, flocks of sheep, or various animals, tin
soldiers, railways, and an infinite variety of simple figures.

If writing serves to correct, or better, to direct and perfect the
mechanism of the articulate language of the child, reading serves to
help the development of ideas, and relates them to the development of
the language. Indeed, writing aids the physiological language and
reading aids the social language.

We begin, then, as I have indicated, with the nomenclature, that is,
with the reading of names of objects which are well known or present.

There is no question of beginning with words that are _easy or
difficult_, for the _child already knows how to read any word_; that is,
he knows how to read _the sounds which compose it_. I allow the little
one to translate the written word slowly into sounds, and if the
interpretation is exact, I limit myself to saying, "Faster." The child
reads more quickly the second time, but still often without
understanding. I then repeat, "Faster, faster." He reads faster each
time, repeating the same accumulation of sounds, and finally the word
bursts upon his consciousness. Then he looks upon it as if he recognised
a friend, and assumes that air of satisfaction which so often radiates
our little ones. This completes the exercise for reading. It is a lesson
which goes very rapidly, since it is only presented to a child who is
already prepared through writing. Truly, we have buried the tedious and
stupid A B C primer side by side with the useless copy-books!

When the child has read the word, he places the explanatory card under
the object whose name it bears, and the exercise is finished.

One of our most interesting discoveries was made in the effort to devise
a game through which the children might, without effort, learn to read
words. We spread out upon one of the large tables a great variety of
toys. Each one of them had a corresponding card upon which the name of
the toy was written. We folded these little cards and mixed them up in a
basket, and the children who knew how to read were allowed to take turns
in drawing these cards from the basket. Each child had to carry his card
back to his desk, unfold it quietly, and read it mentally, not showing
it to those about him. He then had to fold it up again, so that the
secret which it contained should remain unknown. Taking the folded card
in his hand, he went to the table. He had then to pronounce clearly the
name of a toy and present the card to the directress in order that she
might verify the word he had spoken. The little card thus became current
coin with which he might acquire the toy he had named. For, if he
pronounced the word clearly and indicated the correct object, the
directress allowed him to take the toy, and to play with it as long as
he wished.

When each child had had a turn, the directress called the first child
and let him draw a card from another basket. This card he read as soon
as he had drawn it. It contained the name of one of his companions who
did not yet know how to read, and for that reason could not have a toy.
The child who had read the name then offered to his little friend the
toy with which he had been playing. We taught the children to present
these toys in a gracious and polite way, accompanying the act with a
bow. In this way we did away with every idea of class distinction, and
inspired the sentiment of kindness toward those who did not possess the
same blessings as ourselves. This reading game proceeded in a
marvellous way. The contentment of these poor children in possessing
even for a little while such beautiful toys can be easily imagined.

But what was my amazement, when the children, having learned to
understand the written cards, _refused_ to take the toys! They explained
that they did not wish to waste time in playing, and, with a species of
insatiable desire, preferred to draw out and read the cards one after
another!

I watched them, seeking to understand the secret of these souls, of
whose greatness I had been so ignorant! As I stood in meditation among
the eager children, the discovery that it was knowledge they loved, and
not the silly _game_, filled me with wonder and made me think of the
greatness of the human soul!

We therefore put away the toys, and set about making _hundreds_ of
written slips, containing names of children, cities, and objects; and
also of colours and qualities known through the sense exercises. We
placed these slips in open boxes, which we left where the children could
make free use of them. I expected that childish inconstancy would at
least show itself in a tendency to pass from one box to another; but no,
each child finished emptying the box under his hand before passing to
another, being verily _insatiable_ in the desire to read.

Coming into the school one day, I found that the directress had allowed
the children to take the tables and chairs out upon the terrace, and was
having school in the open air. A number of little ones were playing in
the sun, while others were seated in a circle about the tables
containing the sandpaper letters and the movable alphabet.

A little apart sat the directress, holding upon her lap a long narrow
box full of written slips, and all along the edge of her box were little
hands, fishing for the beloved cards. "You may not believe me," said the
directress, "but it is more than an hour since we began this, and they
are not satisfied yet!" We tried the experiment of bringing balls, and
dolls to the children, but without result; such futilities had no power
beside the joys of _knowledge_.

Seeing these surprising results, I had already thought of testing the
children with print, and had suggested that the directress _print_ the
word under the written word upon a number of slips. But the children
forestalled us! There was in the hall a calendar upon which many of the
words were printed in clear type, while others were done in Gothic
characters. In their mania for reading the children began to look at
this calendar, and, to my inexpressible amazement, read not only the
print, but the Gothic script.

There therefore remained nothing but the presentation of a book, and I
did not feel that any of those available were suited to our method.

The mothers soon had proofs of the progress of their children; finding
in the pockets of some of them little slips of paper upon which were
written rough notes of marketing done; bread, salt, etc. Our children
were making lists of the marketing they did for their mothers! Other
mothers told us that their children no longer ran through the streets,
but stopped to read the signs over the shops.

A four-year-old boy, educated in a private house by the same method,
surprised us in the following way. The child's father was a Deputy, and
received many letters. He knew that his son had for two months been
taught by means of exercises apt to facilitate the learning of reading
and writing, but he had paid slight attention to it, and, indeed, put
little faith in the method. One day, as he sat reading, with the boy
playing near, a servant entered, and placed upon the table a large
number of letters that had just arrived. The little boy turned his
attention to these, and holding up each letter read aloud the address.
To his father this seemed a veritable miracle.

As to the average time required for learning to read and write,
experience would seem to show that, starting from the moment in which
the child writes, the passage from such an inferior stage of the graphic
language to the superior state of reading averages a fortnight.
_Security_ in reading is, however, arrived at much more slowly than
perfection in writing. In the greater majority of cases the child who
writes beautifully, still reads rather poorly.

Not all children of the same age are at the same point in this matter of
reading and writing. We not only do not force a child, but we do not
even _invite_ him, or in any way attempt to coax him to do that which he
does not wish to do. So it sometimes happens that certain children, _not
having spontaneously presented themselves_ for these lessons, are left
in peace, and do not know how to read or write.

If the old-time method, which tyrannized over the will of the child and
destroyed his spontaneity, does not believe in making a knowledge of
written language _obligatory_ before the age of six, much less do we!

I am not ready to decide, without a wider experience, whether the period
when the spoken language is fully developed is, in every case, the
proper time for beginning to develop the written language.

In any case, almost all of the normal children treated with our method
begin to write at four years, and at five know how to read and write, at
least as well as children who have finished the first elementary. They
could enter the second elementary a year in advance of the time when
they are admitted to first.

_Games for the Reading of Phrases._ As soon as my friends saw that the
children could read print, they made me gifts of beautifully illustrated
books. Looking through these books of simple fairy lore, I felt sure
that the children would not be able to understand them. The teachers,
feeling entirely satisfied as to the ability of their pupils, tried to
show me I was wrong, having different children read to me, and saying
that they read much more perfectly than the children who had finished
the second elementary.

I did not, however, allow myself to be deceived, and made two trials. I
first had the teacher tell one of the stories to the children while I
observed to what extent they were spontaneously interested in it. The
attention of the children wandered after a few words. I had _forbidden_
the teacher to recall to order those who did not listen, and thus,
little by little, a hum arose in the schoolroom, due to the fact that
each child, not caring to listen had returned to his usual _occupation_.

It was evident that the children, who seemed to read these books with
such pleasure, _did not take pleasure in the sense_, but enjoyed the
mechanical ability they had acquired, which consisted in translating the
graphic signs into the sounds of a word they recognised. And, indeed,
the children did not display the same _constancy_ in the reading of
books which they showed toward the written slips, since in the books
they met with so many unfamiliar words.

My second test, was to have one of the children read the book to me. I
did not interrupt with any of those explanatory remarks by means of
which a teacher tries to help the child follow the thread of the story
he is reading, saying for example: "Stop a minute. Do you understand?
What have you read? You told me how the little boy went to drive in a
big carriage, didn't you? Pay attention to what the book says, etc."

I gave the book to a little boy, sat down beside him in a friendly
fashion, and when he had read I asked him simply and seriously as one
would speak to a friend, "Did you understand what you were reading?" He
replied: "No." But the expression of his face seemed to ask an
explanation of my demand. In fact, the idea that _through the reading of
a series of words the complex thoughts of others might be communicated
to us_, was to be for my children one of the beautiful conquests of the
future, a new source of surprise and joy.

The _book_ has recourse to _logical language_, not to the mechanism of
the language. Before the child can understand and enjoy a book, the
_logical language_ must be established in him. Between knowing how to
read the _words_, and how to read the _sense_, of a book there lies the
same distance that exists between knowing how to pronounce a word and
how to make a speech. I, therefore, stopped the reading from books and
waited.

One day, during a free conversation period, _four_ children arose at the
same time and with expressions of joy on their faces ran to the
blackboard and wrote phrases upon the order of the following:

"Oh, how glad we are that our garden has begun to bloom." It was a great
surprise for me, and I was deeply moved. These children had arrived
spontaneously at the art of _composition_, just as they had
spontaneously written their first word.

The mechanical preparation was the same, and the phenomenon developed
logically. Logical articulate language had, when the time was ripe,
provoked the corresponding explosion in written language.

I understood that the time had come when we might proceed to _the
reading of phrases_. I had recourse to the means used by the children;
that is, I wrote upon the blackboard, "Do you love me?" The children
read it slowly aloud, were silent for a moment as if thinking, then
cried out, "Yes! Yes!" I continued to write; "Then make the silence, and
watch me." They read this aloud, almost shouting, but had barely
finished when a solemn silence began to establish itself, interrupted
only by the sounds of the chairs as the children took positions in which
they could sit quietly. Thus began between me and them a communication
by means of written language, a thing which interested the children
intensely. Little by little, they _discovered_ the great quality of
writing--that it transmits thought. Whenever I began to write, they
fairly _trembled_ in their eagerness to understand what was my meaning
without hearing me speak a word.

Indeed, _graphic_ language does not need spoken words. It can only be
understood in all its greatness when it is completely isolated from
spoken language.

This introduction to reading was followed by the following game, which
is greatly enjoyed by the children. Upon a number of cards I wrote long
sentences describing certain actions which the children were to carry
out; for example, "Close the window blinds; open the front door; then
wait a moment, and arrange things as they were at first." "Very politely
ask eight of your companions to leave their chairs, and to form in
double file in the centre of the room, then have them march forward and
back on tiptoe, making no noise." "Ask three of your oldest companions
who sing nicely, if they will please come into the centre of the room.
Arrange them in a nice row, and sing with them a song that you have
selected," etc., etc. As soon as I finished writing, the children seized
the cards, and taking them to their seats read them spontaneously with
great intensity of attention, and all _amid the most complete silence_.

I asked then, "Do you understand?" "Yes! Yes!" "Then do what the card
tells you," said I, and was delighted to see the children rapidly and
accurately follow the chosen action. A great activity, a movement of a
new sort, was born in the room. There were those who closed the blinds,
and then reopened them; others who made their companions run on tiptoe,
or sing; others wrote upon the blackboard, or took certain objects from
the cupboards. Surprise and curiosity produced a general silence, and
the lesson developed amid the most intense interest. It seemed as if
some magic force had gone forth from me stimulating an activity hitherto
unknown. This magic was graphic language, the greatest conquest of
civilisation.

And how deeply the children understood the importance of it! When I went
out, they gathered about me with expressions of gratitude and affection,
saying, "Thank you! Thank you! Thank you for the lesson!"

This has become one of the favourite games: We first establish _profound
silence_, then present a basket containing folded slips, upon each one
of which is written a long phrase describing an action. All those
children who know how to read may draw a slip, and read it _mentally_
once or twice until they are certain they understand it. They then give
the slip back to the directress and set about carrying out the action.
Since many of these actions call for the help of the other children who
do not know how to read, and since many of them call for the handling
and use of the materials, a general activity develops amid marvellous
order, while the silence is only interrupted by the sound of little feet
running lightly, and by the voices of the children who sing. This is an
unexpected revelation of the perfection of spontaneous discipline.

Experience has shown us that _composition_ must _precede logical_
reading, as writing preceded the reading of the word. It has also shown
that reading, if it is to teach the child to _receive an idea_, should
be _mental_ and not _vocal_.

Reading aloud implies the exercise of two mechanical forms of the
language--articulate and graphic--and is, therefore, a complex task. Who
does not know that a grown person who is to read a paper in public
prepares for this by making himself master of the content? Reading aloud
is one of the most difficult intellectual actions. The child, therefore,
who _begins_ to read by interpreting thought _should read mentally_. The
written language must isolate itself from the articulate, when it rises
to the interpretation of logical thought. Indeed, it represents the
language which _transmits thought at a distance_, while the senses and
the muscular mechanism are silent. It is a spiritualised language, which
puts into communication all men who know how to read.


Education having reached such a point in the "Children's Houses," the
entire elementary school must, as a logical consequence, be changed. How
to reform the lower grades in the elementary schools, eventually
carrying them on according to our methods, is a great question which
cannot be discussed here. I can only say that the _first elementary_
would be completely done away with by our infant education, which
includes it.

The elementary classes in the future should begin with children such as
ours who know how to read and write; children who know how to take care
of themselves; how to dress and undress, and to wash themselves;
children who are familiar with the rules of good conduct and courtesy,
and who are thoroughly disciplined in the highest sense of the term,
having developed, and become masters of themselves, through liberty;
children who possess, besides a perfect mastery of the articulate
language, the ability to read written language in an elementary way, and
who begin to enter upon the conquest of logical language.

These children pronounce clearly, write in a firm hand, and are full of
grace in their movements. They are the earnest of a humanity grown in
the cult of beauty--the infancy of an all-conquering humanity, since
they are intelligent and patient observers of their environment, and
possess in the form of intellectual liberty the power of spontaneous
reasoning.

For such children, we should found an elementary school worthy to
receive them and to guide them further along the path of life and of
civilisation, a school loyal to the same educational principles of
respect for the freedom of the child and for his spontaneous
manifestations--principles which shall form the personality of these
little men.

[Illustration: Example of writing done with pen, by a child five years.
One-fourth reduction.

Translation: "We would like to wish a joyous Easter to the civil
engineer Edoardo Talamo and the Princess Maria. We will ask them to
bring their pretty children here. Leave it to me: I will write for all.
April 7, 1909."]




CHAPTER XVIII

LANGUAGE IN CHILDHOOD


Graphic language, comprising dictation and reading, contains articulate
language in its complete mechanism (auditory channels, central channels,
motor channels), and, in the manner of development called forth by my
method, is based essentially on articulate language.

Graphic language, therefore, may be considered from two points of view:

(_a_) That of the conquest of a new language of eminent social
importance which adds itself to the articulate language of natural man;
and this is the cultural significance which is commonly given to graphic
language, which is therefore taught in the schools without any
consideration of its relation to spoken language, but solely with the
intention of offering to the social being a necessary instrument in his
relations with his fellows.

(_b_) That of the relation between graphic and articulate language and,
in this relation, of an eventual possibility of utilising the written
language to perfect the spoken: a new consideration upon which I wish to
insist and which gives to graphic language a _physiological importance_.

Moreover, as spoken language is at the same time a _natural function_ of
man and an instrument which he utilises for social ends, so written
language may be considered in itself, in its _formation_, as an organic
_ensemble_ of new mechanisms which are established in the nervous
system, and as an instrument which may be utilised for social ends.

In short, it is a question of giving to written language not only a
physiological importance, but also a _period of development_ independent
of the high functions which it is destined to perform later.

It seems to me that graphic language bristles with difficulties in its
beginning, not only because it has heretofore been taught by irrational
methods, but because we have tried to make it perform, as soon as it has
been acquired, the high function of teaching _the written language_
which has been fixed by centuries of perfecting in a civilised people.

Think how irrational have been the methods we have used! We have
analysed the graphic signs rather than the physiological acts necessary
to produce the alphabetical signs; and this without considering that
_any graphic sign_ is difficult to achieve, because the visual
representation of the signs have no hereditary connection with the motor
representations necessary for producing them; as, for example, the
auditory representations of the word have with the motor mechanism of
the articulate language. It is, therefore, always a difficult thing to
provoke a stimulative motor action unless we have already established
the movement before the visual representation of the sign is made. It is
a difficult thing to arouse an activity that shall produce a motion
unless that motion shall have been previously established by practice
and by the power of habit.

Thus, for example, the analysis of writing into _little straight lines
and curves_ has brought us to present to the child a sign without
significance, which therefore does not interest him, and whose
representation is incapable of determining a spontaneous motor impulse.
The artificial act constituted, therefore, an _effort_ of the will which
resulted for the child in rapid exhaustion exhibited in the form of
boredom and suffering. To this effort was added the effort of
constituting _synchronously_ the muscular associations co-ordinating the
movements necessary to the holding and manipulating the instrument of
writing.

All sorts of _depressing_ feelings accompanied such efforts and conduced
to the production of imperfect and erroneous signs which the teachers
had to correct, discouraging the child still more with the constant
criticism of the error and of the imperfection of the signs traced.
Thus, while the child was urged to make an effort, the teacher depressed
rather than revived his psychical forces.

Although such a mistaken course was followed, the graphic language, so
painfully learned, was nevertheless to be _immediately_ utilised for
social ends; and, still imperfect and immature, was made to do service
in the _syntactical construction of the language_, and in the ideal
expression of the superior psychic centres. One must remember that in
nature the spoken language is formed gradually; and it is already
established in _words_ when the superior psychic centres use these words
in what Kussmaul calls _dictorium_, in the syntactical grammatical
formation of language which is necessary to the expression of complex
ideas; that is, in the language of the _logical mind_.

In short the mechanism of language is a necessary antecedent of the
higher psychic activities which are to _utilise it_.

There are, therefore, two periods in the development of language: a
lower one which prepares the nervous channel and the central mechanisms
which are to put the sensory channels in relation with the motor
channels; and a higher one determined by the higher psychic activities
which are _exteriorized_ by means of the preformed mechanisms of
language.

[Illustration]

Thus for example in the scheme which Kussmaul gives on the mechanism of
articulate language we must first of all distinguish a sort of cerebral
diastaltic arc (representing the pure mechanism of the word), which is
established in the first formation of the spoken language. Let E be the
ear, and T the motor organs of speech, taken as a whole and here
represented by the tongue, A the auditory centre of speech, and M the
motor centre. The channels EA and MT are peripheral channels, the former
centripetal and the latter centrifugal, and the channel AM is the
inter-central channel of association.

[Illustration]

The centre A in which reside the auditive images of words may be again
subdivided into three, as in the following scheme, viz.: Sound (So),
syllables (Sy), and words (W).

That partial centres for sounds and syllables can really be formed,
the pathology of language seems to establish, for in some forms of
centro-sensory dysphasia, the patients can pronounce only sounds, or at
most sounds and syllables.

Small children, too, are, at the beginning, particularly sensitive to
simple sounds of language, with which indeed, and especially with _s_,
their mothers caress them and attract their attention; while later the
child is sensitive to syllables, with which also the mother caresses
him, saying: "_ba, ba, punf, tuf!_"

[Illustration]

Finally it is the simple word, dissyllabic in most cases, which attracts
the child's attention.

But for the motor centres also the same thing may be repeated; the child
utters at the beginning simple or double sounds, as for example _bl_,
_gl_, _ch_, an expression which the mother greets with joy; then
distinctly syllabic sounds begin to manifest themselves in the child:
_ga_, _ba_; and, finally, the dissyllabic word, usually labial: _mama_.

[Illustration]

We say that the spoken language begins with the child when the word
pronounced by him signifies an _idea_; when for example, seeing his
mother and recognising her he says "_mamma_;" and seeing a dog says,
"_tette_;" and wishing to eat says: "_pappa_."

Thus we consider _language begun_ when it is established in relation to
perception; while the language itself is still, in its <DW43>-motor
mechanism, perfectly rudimentary.

That is, when above the diastaltic arc where the mechanical formation of
the language is still unconscious, the recognition of the word takes
place, that is, the word is perceived and associated with the object
which it represents, language is considered to have begun.

On this level, _later_, language continues the process of perfecting in
proportion as the hearing perceives better the component sounds of the
words and the <DW43>-motor channels become more permeable to
articulation.

This is the first stage of spoken language, which has its own beginning
and its own development, leading, through the perceptions, to the
_perfecting_ of the primordial mechanism of the language itself; and at
this stage precisely is established what we call _articulate language_,
which will later be the means which the adult will have at his disposal
to express his own thoughts, and which the adult will have great
difficulty in perfecting or correcting when it has once been
established: in fact a high stage of culture sometimes accompanies an
imperfect articulate language which prevents the aesthetic expression of
one's thought.

The development of articulate language takes place in the period between
the age of two and the age of seven: the age of _perceptions_ in which
the attention of the child is spontaneously turned towards external
objects, and the memory is particularly tenacious. It is the age also of
_motility_ in which all the <DW43>-motor channels are becoming permeable
and the muscular mechanisms establish themselves. In this period of life
by the mysterious bond between the auditory channel and the motor
channel of the spoken language it would seem that the auditory
perceptions have the direct power of _provoking_ the complicated
movements of articulate speech which develop instinctively after such
stimuli as if awaking from the slumber of heredity. It is well known
that it is only at this age that it is possible to acquire all the
characteristic modulations of a language which it would be vain to
attempt to establish later. The mother tongue alone is well pronounced
because it was established in the period of childhood; and the adult who
learns to speak a new language must bring to it the imperfections
characteristic of the foreigner's speech: only children who under the
age of seven years learn several languages at the same time can receive
and reproduce all the characteristic mannerisms of accent and
pronunciation.

Thus also the _defects_ acquired in childhood such as dialectic defects
or those established by bad habits, become indelible in the adult.

What develops later, the _superior_ language, the _dictorium_, no longer
has its origin in the mechanism of language but in the intellectual
development which makes use of the mechanical language. As the
articulate language develops by the exercise of its mechanism and is
enriched by perception, the _dictorium_ develops with syntax and is
enriched by _intellectual culture_. Going back to the scheme of language
we see that above the arc which defines the lower language, is
established the _dictorium_, _D_,--from which now come the motor
impulses of speech--which is established as _spoken language_ fit to
manifest the ideation of the intelligent man; this language will be
enriched little by little by intellectual culture and perfected by the
grammatical study of syntax.

[Illustration]

Hitherto, as a result of a preconception, it has been believed that
written language should enter only into the development of the
_dictorium_, as the suitable means for the acquisition of culture and of
permitting grammatical analysis and construction of the language. Since
"spoken words have wings" it has been admitted that intellectual culture
could only proceed by the aid of a language which was stable, objective,
and capable of being analysed, such as the graphic language.

But why, when we acknowledge the graphic language as a precious, nay
indispensable, instrument of intellectual education, for the reason that
it _fixes the ideas_ of men and permits of their analysis and of their
assimilation in books, where they remain indelibly written as an
ineffaceable memory of words which are therefore always present and by
which we can analyse the syntactical structure of the language, why
shall we not acknowledge that it is _useful_ in the more humble task of
_fixing_ the _words_ which represent perception and of analysing their
component sounds?

Compelled by a pedagogical prejudice we are unable to separate the idea
of a graphic language from that of a function which heretofore we have
made it exclusively perform; and it seems to us that by teaching such a
language to children still in the age of simple perceptions and of
motility we are committing a serious psychological and pedagogical
error.

But let us rid ourselves of this prejudice and consider the graphic
language in itself, reconstructing its <DW43>-physiological mechanism.
It is far more simple than the <DW43>-physiological mechanism of the
articulate language, and is far more directly accessible to education.

_Writing_ especially is surprisingly simple. For let us consider
_dictated_ writing: we have a perfect parallel with spoken language
since a _motor_ action must correspond with _heard_ speech. Here there
does not exist, to be sure, the mysterious hereditary relations between
the heard speech and the articulate speech; but the movements of writing
are far simpler than those necessary to the spoken word, and are
performed by large muscles, all external, _upon which we can directly
act_, rendering the motor channels permeable, and establishing
<DW43>-muscular mechanisms.

This indeed is what is done by my method, which _prepares the movements
directly_; so that the <DW43>-motor impulse of the heard speech _finds
the motor channels already established_, and is manifested in the act of
writing, like an explosion.

The real difficulty is in the _interpretation of the graphic signs_; but
we must remember that we are in the _age of perceptions_, where the
sensations and the memory as well as the primitive associations are
involved precisely in the characteristic progress of natural
development. Moreover our children are already prepared by various
exercises of the senses, and by methodical construction of ideas and
mental associations to perceive the graphic signs; something like a
patrimony of perceptive ideas offers material to the language in the
process of development. The child who recognises a triangle and calls it
a triangle can recognise a letter _s_ and denominate it by the sound
_s_. This is obvious.

Let us not talk of premature teaching; ridding ourselves of prejudices,
let us appeal to experience which shows that in reality children proceed
without effort, nay rather with evident manifestations of pleasure to
the recognition of graphic signs presented as objects.

[Illustration]

And with this premise let us consider the relations between the
mechanisms of the two languages.

The child of three or four has already long begun his articulate
language according to our scheme. But he finds himself in the period in
which the _mechanism of articulate language is being perfected_; a
period contemporary with that in which he is acquiring a content of
language along with the patrimony of perception.

The child has perhaps not heard perfectly in all their component parts
the words which he pronounces, and, if he has heard them perfectly, they
may have been pronounced badly, and consequently have left an erroneous
auditory perception. It would be well that the child, by exercising the
motor channels of articulate language should establish exactly the
movements necessary to a perfect articulation, _before_ the age of easy
motor adaptations is passed, and, by the fixation of erroneous
mechanisms, the defects become incorrigible.

To this end the _analysis of speech_ is necessary. As when we wish to
perfect the language we first start children at composition and then
pass to grammatical study; and when we wish to perfect the style we
first teach to write grammatically and then come to the analysis of
style--so when we wish to perfect the _speech_ it is first necessary
that the speech _exist_, and then it is proper to proceed to its
analysis. When, therefore, the child _speaks_, but before the completion
of the development of speech which renders it fixed in mechanisms
already established, the speech should be analysed with a view to
perfecting it.

Now, as grammar and rhetoric are not possible with the spoken language
but demand recourse to the written language which keeps ever before the
eye the discourse to be analysed, so it is with speech.

The analysis of the transient is impossible.

The language must be materialised and made stable. Hence the necessity
of the written word or the word represented by graphic signs.

In the third stage of my method for writing, that is, composition of
speech, is included the _analysis of the word_ not only into signs, but
into the component sounds; the signs representing its translation. The
child, that is, _divides_ the heard word which he perceives integrally
as a _word_, knowing also its meanings, into sounds and syllables.

[Illustration]

Let me call attention to the following diagram which represents the
interrelation of the two mechanisms for writing and for articulate
speech.

[Illustration: The peripheric channels are indicated by heavy lines; the
central channels of association by dotted lines; and those referring to
association in relation to the development of the heard speech by light
lines.

_E_ ear; _So_ auditory centre of sounds; _Sy_ auditory centre of
syllables; _W_ auditory centre of word; _M_ motor centre of the
articulate speech; _T_ external organs of articulate speech (tongue);
_H_ external organs of writing (hand); _MC_ motor centre of writing;
_VC_ visual centre of graphic signs; _V_ organ of vision.]

Whereas in the development of spoken language the sound composing the
word might be imperfectly perceived, here in the teaching of the graphic
sign corresponding to the sound (which teaching consists in presenting
to the child a sandpaper letter, naming it _distinctly_ and making the
child _see_ it and _touch_ it), not only is the perception of the heard
sound _clearly_ fixed--separately and clearly--but this perception is
associated with two others: the centro-motor perception and the
centro-visual perception of the written sign.

The triangle _VC_, _MC_, _So_ represents the association of three
sensations in relation with the analysis of speech.

When the letter is presented to the child and he is made to touch and
see it, while it is being named, the centripetal channels _ESo_; _H_,
_MC_, _So_; _V_, _VC_, _So_ are acting and when the child is made to
name the letter, alone or accompanied by a vowel, the external stimulus
acts in _V_ and passes through the channels _V_, _VC_, _So_, _M_, _T_;
and _V_, _CV_, _So_, _Sy_, _M_, _T_.

When these channels of association have been established by presenting
visual stimuli in the graphic sign, the corresponding movements of
articulate language can be provoked and studied one by one in their
defects; while, by maintaining the visual stimulus of the graphic sign
which provokes articulation and accompanying it by the auditory stimulus
of the corresponding _sound_ uttered by the teacher, their articulation
can be perfected; this articulation is by innate conditions connected
with the __heard speech; that is, in the course of the pronunciation
provoked by the visual stimulus, and during the repetition of the
relative movements of the organs of language, the auditory stimulus
which is introduced into the exercise contributes to the perfecting of
the pronunciation of the isolated or syllabic sounds composing the
spoken word.

When later the child writes under dictation, translating into signs the
sounds of speech, he analyses the heard speech into its sounds,
translating them into graphic movements through channels already
rendered permeable by the corresponding muscular sensations.


DEFECTS OF LANGUAGE DUE TO LACK OF EDUCATION

Defects and imperfections of language are in part due to organic causes,
consisting in malformations or in pathological alterations of the
nervous system; but in part they are connected with functional defects
acquired in the period of the formation of language and consist in an
erratic pronunciation of the component sounds of the spoken word. Such
errors are acquired by the child who hears words imperfectly pronounced,
or _hears bad speech_, The dialectic accent enters into this category;
but there also enter vicious habits which make the natural defects of
the articulate language of childhood persist in the child, or which
provoke in him by imitation the defects of language peculiar to the
persons who surrounded him in his childhood.

The normal defects of child language are due to the fact that the
complicated muscular agencies of the organs of articulate language do
not yet function well and are consequently incapable of reproducing the
_sound_ which was the sensory stimulus of a certain innate movement. The
association of the movements necessary to the articulation of the spoken
words is established little by little. The result is a language made of
words with sounds which are imperfect and often lacking (whence
incomplete words). Such defects are grouped under the name _blaesitas_
and are especially due to the fact that the child is not yet capable of
directing the movements of his tongue. They comprise chiefly:
_sigmatism_ or imperfect pronunciation of _s_; _rhotacism_ or imperfect
pronunciation of _r_; _lambdacism_ or imperfect pronunciation of _l_;
_gammacism_ or imperfect pronunciation, of _g_; _iotacism_, defective
pronunciation of the gutturals; _mogilalia_, imperfect pronunciation of
the labials, and according to some authors, as Preyer, mogilalia is made
to include also the suppression of the first sound of a word.

Some defects of pronunciation which concern the utterance of the vowel
sound as well as that of the consonant are due to the fact that the
child _reproduces perfectly_ sounds imperfectly heard.

In the first case, then, it is a matter of functional insufficiencies of
the peripheral motor organ and hence of the nervous channels, and the
cause lies in the individual; whereas in the second case the error is
caused by the auditory stimulus and the cause lies outside.

These defects often persist, however attenuated, in the boy and the
adult: and produce finally an erroneous language to which will later be
added in writing orthographical errors, such for example as dialectic
orthographical errors.

If one considers the charm of human speech one is bound to acknowledge
the inferiority of one who does not possess a correct spoken language;
and an aesthetic conception in education cannot be imagined unless
special care be devoted to perfecting articulate language. Although the
Greeks had transmitted to Rome the art of educating in language, this
practice was not resumed by Humanism which cared more for the aesthetics
of the environment and the revival of artistic works than for the
perfecting of the man.

To-day we are just beginning to introduce the practice of correcting by
pedagogical methods the serious defects of language, such as stammering;
but the idea of _linguistic gymnastics_ tending to its perfection has
not yet penetrated into our schools as a _universal method_, and as a
detail of the great work of the aesthetic perfecting of man.

Some teachers of deaf mutes and intelligent devotees of orthophony are
trying nowadays with small practical success to introduce into the
elementary schools the correction of the various forms of _blaesitas_,
as a result of statistical studies which have demonstrated the wide
diffusion of such defects among the pupils. The exercises consist
essentially in _silence_ cures which procure calm and repose for the
organs of language, and in patient _repetition_ of the _separate_ vowel
and consonant _sounds_; to these exercises is added also respiratory
gymnastics. This is not the place to describe in detail the methods of
these exercises which are long and patient and quite out of harmony with
the teachings of the school. But in my methods are to be found all
exercises for the corrections of language:

(_a_) _Exercises of Silence_, which prepare the nervous channels of
language to receive new stimuli perfectly;

(_b_) _Lessons_ which consist first of the distinct pronunciation by the
teacher of _few words_ (especially of _nouns_ which must be associated
with a concrete idea); by this means clear and perfect _auditory
stimuli_ of language are started, stimuli which are _repeated_ by the
teacher when the child has conceived the idea of the object represented
by the word (recognition of the object); finally of the provocation of
articulate language on the part of the child who must repeat _that word
alone_ aloud, pronouncing its separate sounds;

(_c_) _Exercises in Graphic Language_, which analyse the sounds of
speech and cause them to be repeated separately in several ways: that
is, when the child learns the separate letters of the alphabet and when
he composes or writes words, repeating their sounds which he translates
separately into composed or written speech;

(_d_) _Gymnastic Exercises_, which comprise, as we have seen, both
_respiratory exercises_ and those of _articulation_.

I believe that in the schools of the future the conception will
disappear which is beginning to-day of "_correcting in the elementary
schools_" the defects of language; and will be replaced by the more
rational one of _avoiding them by caring for the development of
language_ in the "Children's Houses"; that is, in the very age in which
language is being established in the child.




CHAPTER XIX

TEACHING OF NUMERATION; INTRODUCTION TO ARITHMETIC


Children of three years already know how to count as far as two or three
when they enter our schools. They therefore _very easily_ learn
numeration, which consists _in counting objects_. A dozen different ways
may serve toward this end, and daily life presents many opportunities;
when the mother says, for instance, "There are two buttons missing from
your apron," or "We need three more plates at table."

One of the first means used by me, is that of counting with money. I
obtain _new_ money, and if it were possible I should have good
reproductions made in cardboard. I have seen such money used in a school
for deficients in London.

The _making of change_ is a form of numeration so attractive as to hold
the attention of the child. I present the one, two, and four centime
pieces and the children, in this way learn to count to _ten_.

No form of instruction is more _practical_ than that tending to make
children familiar with the coins in common use, and no exercise is more
useful than that of making change. It is so closely related to daily
life that it interests all children intensely.

Having taught numeration in this empiric mode, I pass to more methodical
exercises, having as didactic material one of the sets of blocks
already used in the education of the senses; namely, the series of ten
rods heretofore used for the teaching of length. The shortest of these
rods corresponds to a decimetre, the longest to a metre, while the
intervening rods are divided into sections a decimetre in length. The
sections are painted alternately red and blue.

[Illustration]

Some day, when a child has arranged the rods, placing them in order of
length, we have him count the red and blue signs, beginning with the
smallest piece; that is, _one_; one, two; one, two, three, etc., always
going back to one in the counting of each rod, and starting from the
side A. We then have him name the single rods from the shortest to the
longest, according to the total number of the sections which each
contains, touching the rods at the sides B, on which side the stair
ascends. This results in the same numeration as when we counted the
longest rod--1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Wishing to know the number
of rods, we count them from the side A and the same numeration results;
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. This correspondence of the three sides of
the triangle causes the child to verify his knowledge and as the
exercise interests him he repeats it many times.

We now unite to the exercises in _numeration_ the earlier, sensory
exercises in which the child recognised the long and short rods. Having
mixed the rods upon a carpet, the directress selects one, and showing it
to the child, has him count the sections; for example, 5. She then asks
him to give her the one next in length. He selects it _by his eye_, and
the directress has him _verify_ his choice by _placing the two pieces
side by side and by counting their sections_. Such exercises may be
repeated in great variety and through them the child learns to assign a
_particular name to each one of the pieces in the long stair_. We may
now call them piece number one; piece number two, etc., and finally, for
brevity, may speak of them in the lessons as one, two, three, etc.


THE NUMBERS AS REPRESENTED BY THE GRAPHIC SIGNS

At this point, if the child already knows how to write, we may present
the figures cut in sandpaper and mounted upon cards. In presenting
these, the method is the same used in teaching the letters. "This is
one." "This is two." "Give me one." "Give me two." "What _number_ is
this?" The child traces the number with his finger as he did the
letters.

_Exercises with Numbers._ Association of the graphic sign with the
quantity.

I have designed two trays each divided into five little compartments. At
the back of each compartment may be placed a card bearing a figure. The
figures in the first tray should be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and in the second, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9.

The exercise is obvious; it consists in placing within the compartments
a number of objects corresponding to the figure indicated upon the card
at the back of the compartment. We give the children various objects in
order to vary the lesson, but chiefly make use of large wooden pegs so
shaped that they will not roll off the desk. We place a number of these
before the child whose part is to arrange them in their places, one peg
corresponding to the card marked one, etc. When he has finished he takes
his tray to the directress that she may verify his work.

_The Lesson on Zero._ We wait until the child, pointing to the
compartment containing the card marked zero, asks, "And what must I put
in here?" We then reply, "Nothing; zero is nothing." But often this is
not enough. It is necessary to make the child _feel_ what we mean by
_nothing_. To this end we make use of little games which vastly
entertain the children. I stand among them, and turning to one of them
who has already used this material, I say, "Come, dear, come to me
_zero_ times." The child almost always comes to me, and then runs back
to his place. "But, my boy, you came _one_ time, and I told you to come
_zero_ times." Then he begins to wonder. "But what must I do, then?"
"Nothing; zero is nothing." "But how shall I do nothing?" "Don't do
anything. You must sit still. You must not come at all, not any times.
Zero times. No times at all." I repeat these exercises until the
children understand, and they are then, immensely amused at remaining
quiet when I call to them to come to me zero times, or to throw me zero
kisses. They themselves often cry out, "Zero is nothing! Zero is
nothing!"


EXERCISES FOR THE MEMORY OF NUMBERS

When the children recognise the written figure, and when this figure
signifies to them the numerical value, I give them the following
exercise:

I cut the figures from old calendars and mount them upon slips of paper
which are then folded and dropped into a box. The children draw out the
slips, carry them still folded, to their seats, where they look at them
and refold them, _conserving the secret_. Then, one by one, or in
groups, these children (who are naturally the oldest ones in the class)
go to the large table of the directress where groups of various small
objects have been placed. Each one selects _the quantity_ of objects
corresponding to the number he has drawn. The number, meanwhile, has
been left _at the child's place_, a slip of paper mysteriously folded.
The child, therefore, must _remember_ his number not only during the
movements which he makes in coming and going, but while he collects his
pieces, counting them one by one. The directress may here make
interesting individual observations upon the number memory.

When the child has gathered up his objects he arranges them upon his own
table, in columns of two, and if the number is uneven, he places the odd
piece at the bottom and between the last two objects. The arrangement of
the pieces is therefore as follows:--

  o  o  o  o  o  o  o  o  o  o
  X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX
        X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX
              X XX XX XX XX XX
                    X XX XX XX
                          X XX

The crosses represent the objects, while the circle stands for the
folded slip containing the figure. Having arranged his objects, the
child awaits the verification. The directress comes, opens the slip,
reads the number, and counts the pieces.

When we first played this game it often happened that the children took
_more objects_ than were called for upon the card, and this was not
always because they did not remember the number, but arose from a mania
for the having the greatest number of objects. A little of that
instinctive greediness, which is common to primitive and uncultured man.
The directress seeks to explain to the children that it is useless to
have all those things upon the desk, and that the point of the game lies
in taking the exact number of objects called for.

Little by little they enter into this idea, but not so easily as one
might suppose. It is a real effort of self-denial which holds the child
within the set limit, and makes him take, for example, only two of the
objects placed at his disposal, while he sees others taking more. I
therefore consider this game more an exercise of will power than of
numeration. The child who has the _zero_, should not move from his place
when he sees all his companions rising and taking freely of the objects
which are inaccessible to him. Many times zero falls to the lot of a
child who knows how to count perfectly, and who would experience great
pleasure in accumulating and arranging a fine group of objects in the
proper order upon his table, and in awaiting with security the teacher's
verification.

It is most interesting to study the expressions upon the faces of those
who possess zero. The individual differences which result are almost a
revelation of the "character" of each one. Some remain impassive,
assuming a bold front in order to hide the pain of the disappointment;
others show this disappointment by involuntary gestures. Still others
cannot hide the smile which is called forth by the singular situation in
which they find themselves, and which will make their friends curious.
There are little ones who follow every movement of their companions with
a look of desire, almost of envy, while others show instant acceptance
of the situation. No less interesting are the expressions with which
they confess to the holding of the zero, when asked during the
verification, "and you, you haven't taken anything?" "I have zero." "It
is zero." These are the usual words, but the expressive face, the tone
of the voice, show widely varying sentiments. Rare, indeed, are those
who seem to give with pleasure the explanation of an extraordinary fact.
The greater number either look unhappy or merely resigned.

We therefore give lessons upon the meaning of the game, saying, "It is
hard to keep the zero secret. Fold the paper tightly and don't let it
slip away. It is the most difficult of all." Indeed, after awhile, the
very difficulty of remaining quiet appeals to the children, and when
they open the slip marked zero it can be seen that they are content to
keep the secret.


ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION FROM ONE TO TWENTY: MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION

The didactic material which we use for the teaching of the first
arithmetical operations is the same already used for numeration; that
is, the rods graduated as to length which, arranged on the scale of the
metre, contain the first idea of the decimal system.

The rods, as I have said, have come to be called by the numbers which
they represent; one, two, three, etc. They are arranged in order of
length, which is also in order of numeration.

The first exercise consists in trying to put the shorter pieces together
in such a way as to form tens. The most simple way of doing this is to
take successively the shortest rods, from one up, and place them at the
end of the corresponding long rods from nine down. This may be
accompanied by the commands, "Take one and add it to nine; take two and
add it to eight; take three and add it to seven; take four and add it to
six." In this way we make four rods equal to ten. There remains the
five, but, turning this upon its head (in the long sense), it passes
from one end of the ten to the other, and thus makes clear the fact that
two times five makes ten.

These exercises are repeated and little by little the child is taught
the more technical language; nine plus one equals ten, eight plus two
equals ten, seven plus three equals ten, six plus four equals ten, and
for the five, which remains, two times five equals ten. At last, if he
can write, we teach the signs _plus_ and _equals_ and _times_. Then this
is what we see in the neat note-books of our little ones:

  9 + 1 = 10
  8 + 2 = 10      5 x 2 = 10
  7 + 3 = 10
  6 + 4 = 10

When all this is well learned and has been put upon the paper with great
pleasure by the children, we call their attention to the work which is
done when the pieces grouped together to form tens are taken apart, and
put back in their original positions. From the ten last formed we take
away four and six remains; from the next we take away three and seven
remains; from the next, two and eight remains; from the last, we take
away one and nine remains. Speaking of this properly we say, ten less
four equals six; ten less three equals seven; ten less two equals eight;
ten less one equals nine.

In regard to the remaining five, it is the half of ten, and by cutting
the long rod in two, that is dividing ten by two, we would have five;
ten divided by two equals five. The written record of all this reads:

  10 - 4 = 6
  10 - 3 = 7     10 / 2 = 5
  10 - 2 = 8
  10 - 1 = 9

Once the children have mastered this exercise they multiply it
spontaneously. Can we make three in two ways? We place the one after
the two and then write, in order that we may remember what we have done,
2 + 1 = 3. Can we make two rods equal to number four? 3 + 1 = 4, and
4 - 3 = 1; 4 - 1 = 3. Rod number two in its relation to rod number
four is treated as was five in relation to ten; that is, we turn it
over and show that it is contained in four exactly two times: 4 / 2 = 2;
2 x 2 = 4. Another problem: let us see with how many rods we can play
this same game. We can do it with three and six; and with four and
eight; that is,

   2 x 2 = 4    3 x 2 = 6    4 x 2 = 8    5 x 2 = 10
  10 / 2 = 5    8 / 2 = 4    6 / 2 = 3    4 / 2 = 2

At this point we find that the cubes with which we played the number
memory games are of help:

     2      4      6      8     10
  X X|X XX X|X XX X|X XX X|X XX X|X
     |  X  X|X XX X|X XX X|X XX X|X
     |      |  X  X|X XX X|X XX X|X
     |      |      |  X  X|X XX X|X
     |      |      |      |  X  X|X

From this arrangement, one sees at once which are the numbers which can
be divided by two--all those which have not an odd cube at the bottom.
These are the even numbers, because they can be arranged in pairs, two
by two; and the division by two is easy, all that is necessary being to
separate the two lines of twos that stand one under the other. Counting
the cubes of each file we have the quotient. To recompose the primitive
number we need only reassemble the two files thus 2 x 3 = 6. All this is
not difficult for children of five years.

The repetition soon becomes monotonous, but the exercises may be most
easily changed, taking again the set of long rods, and instead of
placing rod number one after nine, place it after ten. In the same way,
place two after nine, and three after eight. In this way we make rods of
a greater length than ten; lengths which we must learn to name eleven,
twelve, thirteen, etc., as far as twenty. The little cubes, too, may be
used to fix these higher numbers.

Having learned the operations through ten, we proceed with no difficulty
to twenty. The one difficulty lies in the _decimal numbers_ which
require certain lessons.


LESSONS ON DECIMALS: ARITHMETICAL CALCULATIONS BEYOND TEN

The necessary didactic material consists of a number of square cards
upon which the figure ten is printed in large type, and of other
rectangular cards, half the size of the square, and containing the
single numbers from one to nine. We place the numbers in a line; 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Then, having no more numbers, we must begin
over again and take the 1 again. This 1 is like that section in the set
of rods which, in rod number 10, extends beyond nine. Counting along
_the stair_ as far as nine, there remains this one section which, as
there are no more numbers, we again designate as 1; but this is a higher
1 than the first, and to distinguish it from the first we put near it a
zero, a sign which means nothing. Here then is 10. Covering the zero
with the separate rectangular number cards in the order of their
succession we see formed: 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19. These
numbers are composed by adding to rod number 10, first rod number 1,
then 2, then 3, etc., until we finally add rod number 9 to rod number
10, thus obtaining a very long rod, which, when its alternating red and
blue sections are counted, gives us nineteen.

The directress may then show to the child the cards, giving the number
16, and he may place rod 6 after rod 10. She then takes away the card
bearing 6, and places over the zero the card bearing the figure 8,
whereupon the child takes away rod 6 and replaces it with rod 8, thus
making 18. Each of these acts may be recorded thus: 10 + 6 = 16; 10 + 8
= 18, etc. We proceed in the same way to subtraction.

When the number itself begins to have a clear meaning to the child, the
combinations are made upon one long card, arranging the rectangular
cards bearing the nine figures upon the two columns of numbers shown in
the figures A and B.

     A        B
  +----+   +----+
  | 10 |   | 10 |
  | 10 |   | 20 |
  | 10 |   | 30 |
  | 10 |   | 40 |
  | 10 |   | 50 |
  | 10 |   | 60 |
  | 10 |   | 70 |
  | 10 |   | 80 |
  | 10 |   | 90 |
  +----+   +----+

Upon the card A we superimpose upon the zero of the second 10, the
rectangular card bearing the 1: and under this the one bearing two, etc.
Thus while the one of the ten remains the same the numbers to the right
proceed from zero to nine, thus:

In card B the applications are more complex. The cards are superimposed
in numerical progression by tens.

  +----+
  | 10 |
  | 11 |
  | 12 |
  | 13 |
  | 14 |
  | 15 |
  | 16 |
  | 17 |
  | 18 |
  | 19 |
  | 20 |
  +----+

Almost all our children count to 100, a number which was given to them
in response to the curiosity they showed in regard to learning it.

I do not believe that this phase of the teaching needs further
illustrations. Each teacher may multiply the practical exercises in the
arithmetical operations, using simple objects which the children can
readily handle and divide.




CHAPTER XX

SEQUENCE OF EXERCISES


In the practical application of the method it is helpful to know the
sequence, or the various series, of exercises which must be presented to
the child successively.

In the first edition of my book there was clearly indicated a
progression for each exercise; but in the "Children's Houses" we began
contemporaneously with the most varied exercises; and it develops that
there exist _grades_ in the presentation of the material in its
entirety. These grades have, since the first publication of the book,
become clearly defined through experience in the "Children's Houses."


SEQUENCE AND GRADES IN THE PRESENTATION OF MATERIAL AND IN THE EXERCISES


_First Grade_

As soon as the child comes to the school he may be given the following
exercises:

Moving the seats, in silence (practical life).

Lacing, buttoning, hooking, etc.

The cylinders (sense exercises).

Among these the most useful exercise is that of the cylinders (solid
insets). The child here begins to _fix his attention_. He makes his
first comparison, his first selection, in which he exercises judgment.
Therefore he exercises his intelligence.

Among these exercises with the solid insets, there exists the following
progression from easy to difficult:

(a) The cylinders in which the pieces are of the same height and of
decreasing diameter.

(b) The cylinders decreasing in all dimensions.

(c) Those decreasing only in height.


_Second Grade_

_Exercises of Practical Life._ To rise and be seated in silence. To walk
on the line.

_Sense Exercises._ Material dealing with dimensions. The Long Stair. The
prisms, or Big Stair. The cubes. Here the child makes exercises in the
recognition of dimensions as he did in the cylinders but under a very
different aspect. The objects are much larger. The differences much more
evident than they were in the preceding exercises, but here, _only the
eye of the child_ recognises the differences and controls the errors. In
the preceding exercises, the errors were mechanically revealed to the
child by the didactic material itself. The impossibility of placing the
objects in order in the block in any other than their respective spaces
gives this control. Finally, while in the preceding exercises the child
makes much more simple movements (being seated he places little objects
in order with his hands), in these new exercises he accomplishes
movements which are decidedly more complex and difficult and makes small
muscular efforts. He does this by moving from the table to the carpet,
rises, kneels, carries heavy objects.

We notice that the child continues to be confused between the two last
pieces in the growing scale, being for a long time unconscious of such
an error after he has learned to put the other pieces in correct order.
Indeed the difference between these pieces being throughout the varying
dimensions the same for all, the relative difference diminishes with the
increasing size of the pieces themselves. For example, the little cube
which has a base of 2 centimetres is double the size, as to base, of the
smallest cube which has a base of 1 centimetre, while the largest cube
having a base of 10 centimetres, differs by barely 1/10 from the base of
the cube next it in the series (the one of 9 centimetres base).

Thus it would seem that, theoretically, in such exercises we should
begin with the smallest piece. We can, indeed, do this with the material
through which size and length are taught. But we cannot do so with the
cubes, which must be arranged as a little "tower." This column of blocks
must always have as its base the largest cube.

The children, attracted above all by the tower, begin very early to play
with it. Thus we often see very little children playing with the tower,
happy in believing that they have constructed it, when they have
inadvertently used the next to the largest cube as the base. But when
the child, repeating the exercise, _corrects himself of his own accord_,
in a permanent fashion, we may be certain that _his eye_ has become
trained to perceive even the slightest differences between the pieces.

In the three systems of blocks through which dimensions are taught that
of length has pieces differing from each other by 10 centimetres,
while in the other two sets, the pieces differ only 1 centimetre.
Theoretically it would seem that the long rods _should be the first to
attract the attention_ and to exclude errors. This, however, is not the
case. The children are attracted by this set of blocks, but they commit
the greatest number of errors in using it, and only after they have for
a long time eliminated every error in constructing the other two sets,
do they succeed in arranging the Long Stair perfectly. This may then be
considered as the most difficult among the series through which
dimensions are taught.

Arrived at this point in his education, the child is capable of fixing
his attention, with interest, upon the thermic and tactile stimuli.

The progression in the sense development is not, therefore, in actual
practice identical with the theoretical progression which psychometry
indicates in the study of its subjects. Nor does it follow the
progression which physiology and anatomy indicate in the description of
the relations of the sense organs.

In fact, the tactile sense is the _primitive_ sense; the organ of touch
is the most _simple_ and the most widely diffused. But it is easy to
explain how the most simple sensations, the least complex organs, are
not the first through which to attract the _attention_ in a didactic
presentation of sense stimuli.

Therefore, when the _education of the attention has been begun_, we may
present to the child the rough and smooth surfaces (following certain
thermic exercises described elsewhere in the book).

These exercises, if presented at the proper time, _interest_ the
children _immensely_. It is to be remembered that these games are of the
_greatest importance_ in the method, because upon them, in union with
the exercises for the movement of the hand, which we introduce later, we
base the acquisition of writing.

Together with the two series of sense exercises described above, we may
begin what we call the "pairing of the colours," that is, the
recognition of the identity of two colours. This is the first exercise
of the chromatic sense.

Here, also, it is only the _eye_ of the child that intervenes in the
judgment, as it was with the exercises in dimension. This first colour
exercise is easy, but the child must already have acquired a certain
grade of education of the attention through preceding exercises, if he
is to repeat this one with interest.

Meanwhile, the child has heard music; has walked on the line, while the
directress played a rhythmic march. Little by little he has learned to
accompany the music spontaneously with certain movements. This of course
necessitates the repetition of the same music. (To acquire the sense of
rhythm _the repetition of the same exercise is necessary_, as in all
forms of education dealing with spontaneous activity.)

The exercises in silence are also repeated.


_Third Grade_

_Exercises of Practical Life._ The children wash themselves, dress and
undress themselves, dust the tables, learn to handle various objects,
etc.

_Sense Exercises._ We now introduce the child to the recognition of
gradations of stimuli (tactile gradations, chromatic, etc.), allowing
him to exercise himself freely.

We begin to present the stimuli for the sense of hearing (sounds,
noises), and also the baric stimuli (the little tablets differing in
weight).

Contemporaneously with the gradations we may present the _plane
geometric insets_. Here begins the education of the movement of the hand
in following the contours of the insets, an exercise which, together
with the other and contemporaneous one of the recognition of tactile
stimuli in gradation, _prepares for writing_.

The series of cards bearing the geometric forms, we give after the child
recognises perfectly the same forms in the wooden insets. These cards
serve to prepare for the _abstract signs_ of which writing consists. The
child learns to recognise a delineated form, and after all the preceding
exercises have formed within him an ordered and intelligent personality,
they may be considered the bridge by which he passes from the sense
exercises to writing, from the _preparation_, to the actual _entrance
into instruction_.


_Fourth Grade_

_Exercises of Practical Life._ The children set and clear the table for
luncheon. They learn to put a room in order. They are now taught the
most minute care of their persons in the making of the toilet. (How to
brush their teeth, to clean their nails, etc.)

They have learned, through the rhythmic exercises on the line, to walk
with perfect freedom and balance.

They know how to control and direct their own movements (how to make the
silence,--how to move various objects without dropping or breaking them
and without making a noise).

_Sense Exercises._ In this stage we repeat all the sense exercises. In
addition we introduce the recognition of musical notes by the help of
the series of duplicate bells.

_Exercises Related to Writing_ / _Design_ / The child passes to the
_plane geometric insets in metal_. He has already co-ordinated the
movements necessary to follow the contours. Here he no longer _follows
them with his finger_, but with a pencil, leaving the double sign upon a
sheet of paper. Then he fills in the figures with  pencils,
holding the pencil as he will later hold the pen in writing.

Contemporaneously the child is taught to _recognise_ and _touch_ some of
the letters of the alphabet made in sandpaper.

_Exercises in Arithmetic._ At this point, repeating the sense exercises,
we present the Long Stair with a different aim from that with which it
has been used up to the present time. We have the child _count_ the
different pieces, according to the blue and red sections, beginning with
the rod consisting of one section and continuing through that composed
of ten sections. We continue such exercises and give other more
complicated ones.

In Design we pass from the outlines of the geometric insets to such
outlined figures as the practice of four years has established and which
will be published as models in design.

These have an educational importance, and represent in their content and
in their gradations one of the most carefully studied details of the
method.

They serve as a means for the continuation of the sense education and
help the child to observe his surroundings. They thus add to his
intellectual refinement, and, as regards writing, they prepare for the
high and low strokes. After such practice it will be _easy for the child
to make high or low letters_, and this will do away with the _ruled
note-books_ such as are used in Italy in the various elementary classes.

In the _acquiring_ of the use of _written language_ we go as far as the
knowledge of the letters of the alphabet, and of composition with the
movable alphabet.

In Arithmetic, as far as a knowledge of the figures. The child places
the corresponding figures beside the number of blue and red sections on
each rod of the Long Stair.

The children now take the exercise with the wooden pegs.

Also the games which consist in placing under the figures, on the table,
a corresponding number of  counters. These are arranged in
columns of twos, thus making the question of odd and even numbers clear.
(This arrangement is taken from Seguin.)


_Fifth Grade_

We continue the preceding exercises. We begin more complicated rhythmic
exercises.

In design we begin:

  (_a_) The use of water colours.

  (_b_) Free drawing from nature (flowers, etc.).

Composition of words and phrases with the movable alphabet.

  (_a_) Spontaneous writing of words and phrases.

  (_b_) Reading from slips prepared by the directress.

We continue the arithmetical operations which we began with the Long
Stair.

The children at this stage present most interesting differences of
development. They fairly _run_ toward instruction, and order their
_intellectual growth_ in a way that is remarkable.

This joyous growth is what we so rejoice in, as we watch in these
children, humanity, growing in the spirit according to its own deep
laws. And only he who experiments can say how great may be the harvest
from the sowing of such seed.




CHAPTER XXI

GENERAL REVIEW OF DISCIPLINE


The accumulated experience we have had since the publication of the
Italian version has repeatedly proved to us that in our classes of
little children, numbering forty and even fifty, the discipline is much
better than in ordinary schools. For this reason I have thought that an
analysis of the discipline obtained by our method--which is based upon
liberty,--would interest my American readers.

Whoever visits a well kept school (such as, for instance, the one in
Rome directed by my pupil Anna Maccheroni) is struck by the discipline
of the children. There are forty little beings--from three to seven
years old, each one intent on his own work; one is going through one of
the exercises for the senses, one is doing an arithmetical exercise; one
is handling the letters, one is drawing, one is fastening and
unfastening the pieces of cloth on one of our little wooden frames,
still another is dusting. Some are seated at the tables, some on rugs on
the floor. There are muffled sounds of objects lightly moved about, of
children tiptoeing. Once in a while comes a cry of joy only partly
repressed, "Teacher! Teacher!" an eager call, "Look! see what I've
done." But as a rule, there is entire absorption in the work in hand.

The teacher moves quietly about, goes to any child who calls her,
supervising operations in such a way that anyone who needs her finds
her at his elbow, and whoever does not need her is not reminded of her
existence. Sometimes, hours go by without a word. They seem "little
men," as they were called by some visitors to the "Children's House";
or, as another suggested, "judges in deliberation."

In the midst of such intense interest in work it never happens that
quarrels arise over the possession of an object. If one accomplishes
something especially fine, his achievement is a source of admiration and
joy to others: no heart suffers from another's wealth, but the triumph
of one is a delight to all. Very often he finds ready imitators. They
all seem happy and satisfied to do what they can, without feeling
jealous of the deeds of others. The little fellow of three works
peaceably beside the boy of seven, just as he is satisfied with his own
height and does not envy the older boy's stature. Everything is growing
in the most profound peace.

If the teacher wishes the whole assembly to do something, for instance,
leave the work which interests them so much, all she needs to do is to
speak a word in a low tone, or make a gesture, and they are all
attention, they look toward her with eagerness, anxious to know how to
obey. Many visitors have seen the teacher write orders on the
blackboard, which were obeyed joyously by the children. Not only the
teachers, but anyone who asks the pupils to do something is astonished
to see them obey in the minutest detail and with obliging cheerfulness.
Often a visitor wishes to hear how a child, now painting, can sing. The
child leaves his painting to be obliging, but the instant his courteous
action is completed, he returns to his interrupted work. Sometimes the
smaller children finish their work before they obey.

A very surprising result of this discipline came to our notice during
the examinations of the teachers who had followed my course of lectures.
These examinations were practical, and, accordingly, groups of children
were put at the disposition of the teachers being examined, who,
according to the subject drawn by lot, took the children through a given
exercise. While the children were waiting their turn, they were allowed
to do just as they pleased. _They worked incessantly_, and returned to
their undertakings as soon as the interruption caused by the examination
was over. Every once in a while, one of them came to show us a drawing
made during the interval. Miss George of Chicago was present many times
when this happened, and Madame Pujols, who founded the first "Children's
House" in Paris, was astonished at the patience, the perseverance, and
the inexhaustible amiability of the children.

One might think that such children had been severely repressed were it
not for their lack of timidity, for their bright eyes, for their happy,
free aspect, for the cordiality of their invitations to look at their
work, for the way in which they take visitors about and explain matters
to them. These things make us feel that we are in the presence of the
masters of the house; and the fervour with which they throw their arms
around the teacher's knees, with which they pull her down to kiss her
face, shows that their little hearts are free to expand as they will.

Anyone who has watched them setting the table must have passed from one
surprise to another. Little four-year-old waiters take the knives and
forks and spoons and distribute them to the different places; they carry
trays holding as many as five water-glasses, and finally they go from
table to table, carrying big tureens full of hot soup. Not a mistake is
made, not a glass is broken, not a drop of soup is spilled. All during
the meal unobtrusive little waiters watch the table assiduously; not a
child empties his soup-plate without being offered more; if he is ready
for the next course a waiter briskly carries off his soup-plate. Not a
child is forced to ask for more soup, or to announce that he has
finished.

[Illustration: MONTESSORI CHILDREN AT DINNER

The tables are set in the grounds of the school of the Franciscan Nuns,
in Rome.]

[Illustration: SCHOOL AT TARRYTOWN, N. Y.

The two girls at the left are constructing the big stair and the tower.
The boy in the center has constructed the long stair, and is placing the
figures beside the corresponding rods. The child to the right is tracing
sandpaper letters.]

Remembering the usual condition of four-year-old children, who cry, who
break whatever they touch, who need to be waited on, everyone is deeply
moved by the sight I have just described, which evidently results from
the development of energies latent in the depths of the human soul. I
have often seen the spectators at this banquet of little ones, moved to
tears.

But such discipline could never be obtained by commands, by
sermonizings, in short, through any of the disciplinary devices
universally known. Not only were the actions of those children set in an
orderly condition, but their very lives were deepened and enlarged. In
fact, such discipline is on the same plane with school-exercises
extraordinary for the age of the children; and it certainly does not
depend upon the teacher but upon a sort of miracle, occurring in the
inner life of each child.

If we try to think of parallels in the life of adults, we are reminded
of the phenomenon of conversion, of the superhuman heightening of the
strength of martyrs and apostles, of the constancy of missionaries, of
the obedience of monks. Nothing else in the world, except such things,
is on a spiritual height equal to the discipline of the "Children's
Houses."

To obtain such discipline it is quite useless to count on reprimands or
spoken exhortations. Such means might perhaps at the beginning have an
appearance of efficacy: but very soon, the instant that real discipline
appears, all of this falls miserably to the earth, an illusion
confronted with reality--"night gives way to day."

The first dawning of real discipline comes through work. At a given
moment it happens that a child becomes keenly interested in a piece of
work, showing it by the expression of his face, by his intense
attention, by his perseverance in the same exercise. That child has set
foot upon the road leading to discipline. Whatever be his
undertaking--an exercise for the senses, an exercise in buttoning up or
lacing together, or washing dishes--it is all one and the same.

On our side, we can have some influence upon the permanence of this
phenomenon, by means of repeated "Lessons of Silence." The perfect
immobility, the attention alert to catch the sound of the names
whispered from a distance, then the carefully co-ordinated movements
executed so as not to strike against chair or table, so as barely to
touch the floor with the feet--all this is a most efficacious
preparation for the task of setting in order the whole personality, the
motor forces and the psychical.

Once the habit of work is formed, we must supervise it with scrupulous
accuracy, graduating the exercises as experience has taught us. In our
effort to establish discipline, we must rigorously apply the principles
of the method. It is not to be obtained by words; no man learns
self-discipline "through hearing another man speak." The phenomenon of
discipline needs as preparation a series of complete actions, such as
are presupposed in the genuine application of a really educative method.
Discipline is reached always by indirect means. The end is obtained, not
by attacking the mistake and fighting it, but by developing activity in
spontaneous work.

This work cannot be arbitrarily offered, and it is precisely here that
our method enters; it must be work which the human being instinctively
desires to do, work towards which the latent tendencies of life
naturally turn, or towards which the individual step by step ascends.

Such is the work which sets the personality in order and opens wide
before it infinite possibilities of growth. Take, for instance, the lack
of control shown by a baby; it is fundamentally a lack of muscular
discipline. The child is in a constant state of disorderly movement: he
throws himself down, he makes queer gestures, he cries. What underlies
all this is a latent tendency to seek that co-ordination of movement
which will be established later. The baby is a man not yet sure of the
movements of the various muscles of the body; not yet master of the
organs of speech. He will eventually establish these various movements,
but for the present he is abandoned to a period of experimentation full
of mistakes, and of fatiguing efforts towards a desirable end latent in
his instinct, but not clear in his consciousness. To say to the baby,
"Stand still as I do," brings no light into his darkness; commands
cannot aid in the process of bringing order into the complex
<DW43>-muscular system of an individual in process of evolution. We are
confused at this point by the example of the adult who through a wicked
impulse _prefers_ disorder, and who may (granted that he can) obey a
sharp admonishment which turns his will in another direction, towards
that order which he recognises and which it is within his capacity to
achieve. In the case of the little child it is a question of aiding the
natural evolution of voluntary action. Hence it is necessary to teach
all the co-ordinated movements, analysing them as much as possible and
developing them bit by bit.

Thus, for instance, it is necessary to teach the child the various
degrees of immobility leading to silence; the movements connected with
rising from a chair and sitting down, with walking, with tiptoeing, with
following a line drawn on the floor keeping an upright equilibrium. The
child is taught to move objects about, to set them down more or less
carefully, and finally the complex movements connected with dressing and
undressing himself (analysed on the lacing and buttoning frames at
school), and for even each of these exercises, the different parts of
the movement must be analysed. Perfect immobility and the successive
perfectioning of action, is what takes the place of the customary
command, "Be quiet! Be still!" It is not astonishing but very natural
that the child by means of such exercises should acquire
self-discipline, so far as regards the lack of muscular discipline
natural to his age. In short, he responds to nature because he is in
action; but these actions being directed towards an end, have no longer
the appearance of disorder but of work. This is discipline which
represents an end to be attained by means of a number of conquests. The
child disciplined in this way, is no longer the child he was at first,
who knows how to _be_ good passively; but he is an individual who has
made himself better, who has overcome the usual limits of his age, who
has made a great step forward, who has conquered his future in his
present.

He has therefore enlarged his dominion. He will not need to have someone
always at hand, to tell him vainly (confusing two opposing conceptions),
"Be quiet! Be good!" The goodness he has conquered cannot be summed up
by inertia: his goodness is now all made up of action. As a matter of
fact, good people are those who advance towards the good--that good
which is made up of their own self-development and of external acts of
order and usefulness.

In our efforts with the child, external acts are the means which
stimulate internal development, and they again appear as its
manifestation, the two elements being inextricably intertwined. Work
develops the child spiritually; but the child with a fuller spiritual
development works better, and his improved work delights him,--hence he
continues to develop spiritually. Discipline is, therefore, not a fact
but a path, a path in following which the child grasps the abstract
conception of goodness with an exactitude which is fairly scientific.

But beyond everything else he savours the supreme delights of that
spiritual _order_ which is attained indirectly through conquests
directed towards determinate ends. In that long preparation, the child
experiences joys, spiritual awakenings and pleasures which form his
inner treasure-house--the treasure-house in which he is steadily storing
up the sweetness and strength which will be the sources of
righteousness.

In short, the child has not only learned to move about and to perform
useful acts; he has acquired a special grace of action which makes his
gestures more correct and attractive, and which beautifies his hands and
indeed his entire body now so balanced and so sure of itself; a grace
which refines the expression of his face and of his serenely brilliant
eyes, and which shows us that the flame of spiritual life has been
lighted in another human being.


It is obviously true that co-ordinated actions, developed spontaneously
little by little (that is, chosen and carried out in the exercises by
the child himself), must call for less effort than the disorderly
actions performed by the child who is left to his own devices. True
rest for muscles, intended by nature for action, is in orderly action;
just as true rest for the lungs is the normal rhythm of respiration
taken in pure air. To take action away from the muscles is to force them
away from their natural motor impulse, and hence, besides tiring them,
means forcing them into a state of degeneration; just as the lungs
forced into immobility, would die instantly and the whole organism with
them.

It is therefore necessary to keep clearly in mind the fact that rest for
whatever naturally acts, lies in some specified form of action,
corresponding to its nature.

To act in obedience to the hidden precepts of nature--that is rest; and
in this special case, since man is meant to be an intelligent creature,
the more intelligent his acts are the more he finds repose in them. When
a child acts only in a disorderly, disconnected manner, his nervous
force is under a great strain; while on the other hand his nervous
energy is positively increased and multiplied by intelligent actions
which give him real satisfaction, and a feeling of pride that he has
overcome himself, that he finds himself in a world beyond the frontiers
formerly set up as insurmountable, surrounded by the silent respect of
the one who has guided him without making his presence felt.

This "multiplication of nervous energy" represents a process which can
be physiologically analysed, and which comes from the development of the
organs by rational exercise, from better circulation of the blood, from
the quickened activity of all the tissues--all factors favourable to the
development of the body and guaranteeing physical health. The spirit
aids the body in its growth; the heart, the nerves and the muscles are
helpful in their evolution by the activity of the spirit, since the
upward path for soul and body is one and the same.

By analogy, it can be said of the intellectual development of the child,
that the mind of infancy, although characteristically disorderly, is
also "a means searching for its end," which goes through exhausting
experiments, left, as it frequently is, to its own resources, and too
often really persecuted. Once in our public park in Rome, the Pincian
Gardens, I saw a baby of about a year and a half, a beautiful smiling
child, who was working away trying to fill a little pail by shoveling
gravel into it. Beside him was a smartly dressed nurse evidently very
fond of him, the sort of nurse who would consider that she gave the
child the most affectionate and intelligent care. It was time to go home
and the nurse was patiently exhorting the baby to leave his work and let
her put him into the baby-carriage. Seeing that her exhortations made no
impression on the little fellow's firmness, she herself filled the pail
with gravel and set pail and baby into the carriage with the fixed
conviction that she had given him what he wanted.

I was struck by the loud cries of the child and by the expression of
protest against violence and injustice which wrote itself on his little
face. What an accumulation of wrongs weighed down that nascent
intelligence! The little boy did not wish to have the pail full of
gravel; he wished to go through the motions necessary to fill it, thus
satisfying a need of his vigorous organism. The child's unconscious aim
was his own self-development; not the external fact of a pail full of
little stones. The vivid attractions of the external world were only
empty apparitions; the need of his life was a reality. As a matter of
fact, if he had filled his pail he would probably have emptied it out
again in order to keep on filling it up until his inner self was
satisfied. It was the feeling of working towards this satisfaction
which, a few moments before, had made his face so rosy and smiling;
spiritual joy, exercise, and sunshine, were the three rays of light
ministering to his splendid life.

This commonplace episode in the life of that child, is a detail of what
happens to all children, even the best and most cherished. They are not
understood, because the adult judges them by his own measure: he thinks
that the child's wish is to obtain some tangible object, and lovingly
helps him to do this: whereas the child as a rule has for his
unconscious desire, his own self-development. Hence he despises
everything already attained, and yearns for that which is still to be
sought for. For instance, he prefers the action of dressing himself to
the state of being dressed, even finely dressed. He prefers the act of
washing himself to the satisfaction of being clean: he prefers to make a
little house for himself, rather than merely to own it. His own
self-development is his true and almost his only pleasure. The
self-development of the little baby up to the end of his first year
consists to a large degree in taking in nutrition; but afterwards it
consists in aiding the orderly establishment of the <DW43>-physiological
functions of his organism.

That beautiful baby in the Pincian Gardens is the symbol of this: he
wished to co-ordinate his voluntary actions; to exercise his muscles by
lifting; to train his eye to estimate distances; to exercise his
intelligence in the reasoning connected with his undertaking; to
stimulate his will-power by deciding his own actions; whilst she who
loved him, believing that his aim was to possess some pebbles, made him
wretched.

A similar error is that which we repeat so frequently when we fancy that
the desire of the student is to possess a piece of information. We aid
him to grasp intellectually this detached piece of knowledge, and,
preventing by this means his self-development, we make him wretched. It
is generally believed in schools that the way to attain, satisfaction is
"to learn something." But by leaving the children in our schools in
liberty we have been able with great clearness to follow them in their
natural method of spontaneous self-development.

To have learned something is for the child only a point of departure.
When he has learned the meaning of an exercise, then he begins to enjoy
repeating it, and he does repeat it an infinite number of times, with
the most evident satisfaction. He enjoys executing that act because by
means of it he is developing his psychic activities.

There results from the observation of this fact a criticism of what is
done to-day in many schools. Often, for instance when the pupils are
questioned, the teacher says to someone who is eager to answer, "No, not
you, because you know it" and puts her question specially to the pupils
who she thinks are uncertain of the answer. Those who do not know are
made to speak, those who do know to be silent. This happens because of
the general habit of considering the act of knowing something as final.

And yet how many times it happens to us in ordinary life to _repeat_ the
very thing we know best, the thing we care most for, the thing to which
some living force in us responds. We love to sing musical phrases very
familiar, hence enjoyed and become a part of the fabric of our lives. We
love to repeat stories of things which please us, which we know very
well, even though we are quite aware that we are saying nothing new. No
matter how many times we repeat the Lord's Prayer, it is always new. No
two persons could be more convinced of mutual love than sweethearts and
yet they are the very ones who repeat endlessly that they love each
other.

But in order to repeat in this manner, there must first exist the idea
to be repeated. A mental grasp of the idea, is indispensable to the
beginning of _repetition_. The exercise which develops life, consists
_in the repetition, not in the mere grasp of the idea_. When a child has
attained this stage, of repeating an exercise, he is on the way to
self-development, and the external sign of this condition is his
self-discipline.

This phenomenon does not always occur. The same exercises are not
repeated by children of all ages. In fact, repetition corresponds to a
_need_. Here steps in the experimental method of education. It is
necessary to offer those exercises which correspond to the need of
development felt by an organism, and if the child's age has carried him
past a certain need, it is never possible to obtain, in its fulness, a
development which missed its proper moment. Hence children grow up,
often fatally and irrevocably, imperfectly developed.

Another very interesting observation is that which relates to the length
of time needed for the execution of actions. Children, who are
undertaking something for the first time are extremely slow. Their life
is governed in this respect by laws especially different from ours.
Little children accomplish slowly and perseveringly, various complicated
operations agreeable to them, such as dressing, undressing, cleaning the
room, washing themselves, setting the table, eating, etc. In all this
they are extremely patient, overcoming all the difficulties presented
by an organism still in process of formation. But we, on the other hand,
noticing that they are "tiring themselves out" or "wasting time" in
accomplishing something which we would do in a moment and without the
least effort, put ourselves in the child's place and do it ourselves.
Always with the same erroneous idea, that the end to be obtained is the
completion of the action, we dress and wash the child, we snatch out of
his hands objects which he loves to handle, we pour the soup into his
bowl, we feed him, we set the table for him. And after such services, we
consider him with that injustice always practised by those who domineer
over others even with benevolent intentions, to be incapable and inept.
We often speak of him as "impatient" simply because we are not patient
enough to allow his actions to follow laws of time differing from our
own; we call him "tyrannical" exactly because we employ tyranny towards
him. This stain, this false imputation, this calumny on childhood has
become an integral part of the theories concerning childhood, in reality
so patient and gentle.

The child, like every strong creature fighting for the right to live,
rebels against whatever offends that occult impulse within him which is
the voice of nature, and which he ought to obey; and he shows by violent
actions, by screaming and weeping that he has been overborne and forced
away from his mission in life. He shows himself to be a rebel, a
revolutionist, an iconoclast, against those who do not understand him
and who, fancying that they are helping him, are really pushing him
backward in the highway of life. Thus even the adult who loves him,
rivets about his neck another calumny, confusing his defence of his
molested life with a form of innate naughtiness characteristic of little
children.

What would become of us if we fell into the midst of a population of
jugglers, or of lightning-change impersonators of the variety-hall? What
should we do if, as we continued to act in our usual way, we saw
ourselves assailed by these sleight-of-hand performers, hustled into our
clothes, fed so rapidly that we could scarcely swallow, if everything we
tried to do was snatched from our hands and completed in a twinkling and
we ourselves reduced to impotence and to a humiliating inertia? Not
knowing how else to express our confusion we would defend ourselves with
blows and yells from these madmen, and they having only the best will in
the world to serve us, would call us haughty, rebellious, and incapable
of doing anything. We, who know our own _milieu_, would say to those
people, "Come into our countries and you will see the splendid
civilisation we have established, you will see our wonderful
achievements." These jugglers would admire us infinitely, hardly able to
believe their eyes, as they observed our world, so full of beauty and
activity, so well regulated, so peaceful, so kindly, but all so much
slower than theirs.

Something of this sort occurs between children and adults.


It is exactly in the repetition of the exercises that the education of
the senses consists; their aim is not that the child shall _know_
colours, forms and the different qualities of objects, but that he
refine his senses through an exercise of attention, of comparison, of
judgment. These exercises are true intellectual gymnastics. Such
gymnastics, reasonably directed by means of various devices, aid in the
formation of the intellect, just as physical exercises fortify the
general health and quicken the growth of the body. The child who trains
his various senses separately, by means of external stimuli,
concentrates his attention and develops, piece by piece, his mental
activities, just as with separately prepared movements he trains his
muscular activities. These mental gymnastics are not merely
<DW43>-sensory, but they prepare the way for spontaneous association of
ideas, for ratiocination developing out of definite knowledge, for a
harmoniously balanced intellect. They are the powder-trains that bring
about those mental explosions which delight the child so intensely when
he makes discoveries in the world about him, when he, at the same time,
ponders over and glories in the new things which are revealed to him in
the outside world, and in the exquisite emotions of his own growing
consciousness; and finally when there spring up within him, almost by a
process of spontaneous ripening, like the internal phenomena of growth,
the external products of learning--writing and reading.

I happened once to see a two-year-old child, son of a medical colleague
of mine, who, fairly fleeing away from his mother who had brought him to
me, threw himself on the litter of things covering his father's desk,
the rectangular writing-pad, the round cover of the ink-well. I was
touched to see the intelligent little creature trying his best to go
through the exercises which our children repeat with such endless
pleasure till they have fully committed them to memory. The father and
the mother pulled the child away, reproving him, and explaining that
there was no use trying to keep that child from handling his father's
desk-furniture, "The child is restless and naughty." How often we see
all children reproved because, though they are told not to, they will
"take hold of everything." Now, it is precisely by means of guiding and
developing this natural instinct "to take hold of everything," and to
recognise the relations of geometrical figures, that we prepare our
little four-year-old men for the joy and triumph they experience later
over the phenomenon of spontaneous writing.

The child who throws himself on the writing-pad, the cover to the
ink-well, and such objects, always struggling in vain to attain his
desire, always hindered and thwarted by people stronger than he, always
excited and weeping over the failure of his desperate efforts, _is
wasting_ nervous force. His parents are mistaken if they think that such
a child ever gets any real rest, just as they are mistaken when they
call "naughty" the little man longing for the foundations of his
intellectual edifice. The children in our schools are the ones who are
really at rest, ardently and blessedly free to take out and put back in
their right places or grooves, the geometric figures offered to their
instinct for higher self-development; and they, rejoicing in the most
entire spiritual calm, have no notion that their eyes and hands are
initiating them into the mysteries of a new language.

The majority of our children become calm as they go through such
exercises, because their nervous system is at rest. Then we say that
such children are quiet and good; external discipline, so eagerly sought
after in ordinary schools is more than achieved.

However, as a calm man and a self-disciplined man are not one and the
same, so here the fact which manifests itself externally by the calm of
the children is in reality a phenomenon merely physical and partial
compared to the real _self-discipline_ which is being developed in them.

Often (and this is another misconception) we think all we need to do, to
obtain a voluntary action from a child, is to order him to do it. We
pretend that this phenomenon of a forced voluntary action exists, and we
call this pretext, "the obedience of the child." We find little children
specially disobedient, or rather their resistance, by the time they are
four or five years old, has become so great that we are in despair and
are almost tempted to give up trying to make them obey. We force
ourselves to praise to little children "the virtue of obedience" a
virtue which, according to our accepted prejudices, should belong
specially to infancy, should be the "infantile virtue" yet we fail to
learn anything from the fact that we are led to emphasize it so strongly
because we can only with the greatest difficulty make children practise
it.

It is a very common mistake, this of trying to obtain by means of
prayers, or orders, or violence, what is difficult, or impossible to
get. Thus, for instance, we ask little children to be obedient, and
little children in their turn ask for the moon.

We need only reflect that this "obedience" which we treat so lightly,
occurs later, as a natural tendency in older children, and then as an
instinct in the adult to realise that it springs spontaneously into
being, and that it is one of the strongest instincts of humanity. We
find that society rests on a foundation of marvellous obedience, and
that civilisation goes forward on a road made by obedience. Human
organisations are often founded on an abuse of obedience, associations
of criminals have obedience as their key-stone.

How many times social problems centre about the necessity of rousing man
from a state of "obedience" which has led him to be exploited and
brutalised!

Obedience naturally is _sacrifice_. We are so accustomed to an infinity
of obedience in the world, to a condition of self-sacrifice, to a
readiness for renunciation, that we call matrimony the "blessed
condition," although it is made up of obedience and self-sacrifice. The
soldier, whose lot in life is to obey if it kills him is envied by the
common people, while we consider anyone who tries to escape from
obedience as a malefactor or a madman. Besides, how many people have had
the deeply spiritual experience of an ardent desire to obey something or
some person leading them along the path of life--more than this, a
desire to sacrifice something for the sake of this obedience.

It is therefore entirely natural that, loving the child, we should point
out to him that obedience is the law of life, and there is nothing
surprising in the anxiety felt by nearly everyone who is confronted with
the characteristic disobedience of little children. But obedience can
only be reached through a complex formation of the psychic personality.
To obey, it is necessary not only to wish to obey, but also to know how
to. Since, when a command to do a certain thing is given, we presuppose
a corresponding active or inhibitive power of the child, it is plain
that obedience must follow the formation of the will and of the mind. To
prepare, in detail, this formation by means of detached exercises is
therefore indirectly, to urge the child towards obedience. The method
which is the subject of this book contains in every part an exercise for
the will-power, when the child completes co-ordinated actions directed
towards a given end, when he achieves something he set out to do, when
he repeats patiently his exercises, he is training his positive
will-power. Similarly, in a very complicated series of exercises he is
establishing through activity his powers of inhibition; for instance in
the "lesson of silence," which calls for a long continued inhibition of
many actions, while the child is waiting to be called and later for a
rigorous self-control when he is called and would like to answer
joyously and run to his teacher, but instead is perfectly silent, moves
very carefully, taking the greatest pains not to knock against chair or
table or to make a noise.

Other inhibitive exercises are the arithmetical ones, when the child
having drawn a number by lot, must take from the great mass of objects
before him, apparently entirely at his disposition, only the quantity
corresponding to the number in his hand, whereas (as experience has
proved) he would _like_ to take the greatest number possible.
Furthermore if he chances to draw the zero he sits patiently with empty
hands. Still another training for the inhibitive will-power is in "the
lesson of zero" when the child, called upon to come up zero times and
give zero kisses, stands quiet, conquering with a visible effort the
instinct which would lead him to "obey" the call. The child at our
school dinners who carries the big tureen full of hot soup, isolates
himself from every external stimulant which might disturb him, resists
his childish impulse to run and jump, does not yield to the temptation
to brush away the fly on his face, and is entirely concentrated on the
great responsibility of not dropping or tipping the tureen. A little
thing of four and a half, every time he set the tureen down on a table
so that the little guests might help themselves, gave a hop and a skip,
then took up the tureen again to carry it to another table, repressing
himself to a sober walk. In spite of his desire to play he never left
his task before he had passed soup to the twenty tables, and he never
forgot the vigilance necessary to control his actions.

Will-power, like all other activities is invigorated and developed
through methodical exercises, and all our exercises for will-power are
also mental and practical. To the casual onlooker the child seems to be
learning exactitude and grace of action, to be refining his senses, to
be learning how to read and write; but much more profoundly he is
learning how to become his own master, how to be a man of prompt and
resolute will.

We often hear it said that a child's will should be "broken" that the
best education for the will of the child is to learn to give it up to
the will of adults. Leaving out of the question the injustice which is
at the root of every act of tyranny, this idea is irrational because the
child cannot give up what he does not possess. We prevent him in this
way from forming his own will-power, and we commit the greatest and most
blameworthy mistake. He never has time or opportunity to test himself,
to estimate his own force and his own limitations because he is always
interrupted and subjected to our tyranny, and languishes in injustice
because he is always being bitterly reproached for not having what
adults are perpetually destroying.

There springs up as a consequence of this, childish timidity, which is a
moral malady acquired by a will which could not develop; and which with
the usual calumny with which the tyrant consciously or not, covers up
his own mistakes, we consider as an inherent trait of childhood. The
children in our schools are never timid. One of their most fascinating
qualities is the frankness with which they treat people, with which they
go on working in the presence of others, and showing their work frankly,
calling for sympathy. That moral monstrosity, a repressed and timid
child, who is at his ease nowhere except alone with his playmates, or
with street urchins, because his will-power was allowed to grow only
in the shade, disappears in our schools. He presents an example of
thoughtless barbarism, which resembles the artificial compression of the
bodies of those children intended for "court dwarfs," museum
monstrosities or buffoons. Yet this is the treatment under which nearly
all the children of our time are growing up spiritually.

As a matter of fact in all the pedagogical congresses one hears that the
great peril of our time is the lack of individual character in the
scholars; yet these alarmists do not point out that this condition is
due to the way in which education is managed, to scholastic slavery,
which has for its specialty the repression of will-power and of force of
character. The remedy is simply to enfranchise human development.

Besides the exercises it offers for developing will-power, the other
factor in obedience is the capacity to perform the act it becomes
necessary to obey. One of the most interesting observations made by my
pupil Anna Maccheroni (at first in the school in Milan and then in that
in the Via Guisti in Rome), relates to the connection between obedience
in a child and his "knowing how." Obedience appears in the child as a
latent instinct as soon as his personality begins to take form. For
instance, a child begins to try a certain exercise and suddenly some
time he goes through it perfectly; he is delighted, stares at it, and
wishes to do it over again, but for some time the exercise is not a
success. Then comes a time when he can do it nearly every time he tries
voluntarily but makes mistakes if someone else asks him to do it. The
external command does not as yet produce the voluntary act. When,
however, the exercise always succeeds, with absolute certainty, then an
order from someone else brings about on the child's part, orderly
adequate action; that is, the child _is able_ each time to execute the
command received. That these facts (with variations in individual cases)
are laws of psychical development is apparent from everyone's experience
with children in school or at home.

One often hears a child say, "I did do such and such a thing but now I
can't!" and a teacher disappointed by the incompetence of a pupil will
say, "Yet that child was doing it all right--and now he can't!"

Finally there is the period of complete development in which the
capacity to perform some operation is permanently acquired. There are,
therefore, three periods: a first, subconscious one, when in the
confused mind of the child, order produces itself by a mysterious inner
impulse from out the midst of disorder, producing as an external result
a completed act, which, however, being outside the field of
consciousness, cannot be reproduced at will; a second, conscious period,
when there is some action on the part of the will which is present
during the process of the development and establishing of the acts; and
a third period when the will can direct and cause the acts, thus
answering the command from someone else.

Now, obedience follows a similar sequence. When in the first period of
spiritual disorder, the child does not obey it is exactly as if he were
psychically deaf, and out of hearing of commands. In the second period
he would like to obey, he looks as though he understood the command and
would like to respond to it, but cannot,--or at least does not always
succeed in doing it, is not "quick to mind" and shows no pleasure when
he does. In the third period he obeys at once, with enthusiasm, and as
he becomes more and more perfect in the exercises he is proud that he
knows how to obey. This is the period in which he runs joyously to obey,
and leaves at the most imperceptible request whatever is interesting him
so that he may quit the solitude of his own life and enter, with the act
of obedience into the spiritual existence of another.

To this order, established in a consciousness formerly chaotic, are due
all the phenomena of discipline and of mental development, which open
out like a new Creation. From minds thus set in order, when "night is
separated from day" come sudden emotions and mental feats which recall
the Biblical story of Creation. The child has in his mind not only what
he has laboriously acquired, but the free gifts which flow from
spiritual life, the first flowers of affection, of gentleness, of
spontaneous love for righteousness which perfume the souls of such
children and give promise of the "fruits of the spirit" of St.
Paul--"The fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace, long-suffering
gentleness, goodness, faith, meekness."

They are virtuous because they exercise patience in repeating their
exercises, long-suffering in yielding to the commands and desires of
others, good in rejoicing in the well-being of others without jealousy
or rivalry; they live, doing good in joyousness of heart and in peace,
and they are eminently, marvellously industrious. But they are not proud
of such righteousness because they were not conscious of acquiring it as
a moral superiority. They have set their feet in the path leading to
righteousness, simply because it was the only way to attain true
self-development and learning; and they enjoy with simple hearts the
fruits of peace that are to be gathered along that path.

These are the first outlines of an experiment which shows a form of
indirect discipline in which there is substituted for the critical and
sermonizing teacher a rational organisation of work and of liberty for
the child. It involves a conception of life more usual in religious
fields than in those of academic pedagogy, inasmuch as it has recourse
to the spiritual energies of mankind, but it is founded on work and on
liberty which are the two paths to all civic progress.




CHAPTER XXII

CONCLUSIONS AND IMPRESSIONS


In the "Children's Houses," the old-time teacher, who wore herself out
maintaining discipline of immobility, and who wasted her breath in loud
and continual discourse, has disappeared.

For this teacher we have substituted the _didactic material_, which
contains within itself the control of errors and which makes
auto-education possible to each child. The teacher has thus become a
_director_ of the spontaneous work of the children. She is not a
_passive_ force, a _silent_ presence.

The children are occupied each one in a different way, and the
directress, watching them, can make psychological observations which, if
collected in an orderly way and according to scientific standards,
should do much toward the reconstruction of child psychology and the
development of experimental psychology. I believe that I have by my
method established the conditions necessary to the development of
scientific pedagogy; and whoever adopts this method opens, in doing so,
a laboratory of experimental pedagogy.

From such work, we must await the positive solution of all those
pedagogical problems of which we talk to-day. For through such work
there has already come the solution of some of these very questions:
that of the liberty of the pupils; auto-education; the establishment of
harmony between the work and activities of home life and school tasks,
making both work together for the education of the child.

The problem of religious education, the importance of which we do not
fully realise, should also be solved by positive pedagogy. If religion
is born with civilisation, its roots must lie deep in human nature. We
have had most beautiful proof of an instinctive love of knowledge in the
child, who has too often been misjudged in that he has been considered
addicted to meaningless play, and games void of thought. The child who
left the game in his eagerness for knowledge, has revealed himself as a
true son of that humanity which has been throughout centuries the
creator of scientific and civil progress. We have belittled the son of
man by giving him foolish and degrading toys, a world of idleness where
he is suffocated by a badly conceived discipline. Now, in his liberty,
the child should show us, as well, whether man is by nature a religious
creature.

To deny, _a priori_, the religions sentiment in man, and to deprive
humanity of the education of this sentiment, is to commit a pedagogical
error similar to that of denying, _a priori_, to the child, the love of
learning for learning's sake. This ignorant assumption led us to
dominate the scholar, to subject him to a species of slavery, in order
to render him apparently disciplined.

The fact that we assume that religions education is only adapted to the
adult, may be akin to another profound error existing in education
to-day, namely, that of overlooking the education of the senses at the
very period when this education is possible. The life of the adult is
practically an application of the senses to the gathering of sensations
from the environment. A lack of preparation for this, often results in
inadequacy in practical life, in that lack of poise which causes so many
individuals to waste their energies in purposeless effort. Not to form a
parallel between the education of the senses as a guide to practical
life, and religious education as a guide to the moral life, but for the
sake of illustration, let me call attention to how often we find
inefficiency, instability, among irreligious persons, and how much
precious individual power is miserably wasted.

How many men have had this experience! And when that spiritual awakening
comes late, as it sometimes does, through the softening power of sorrow,
the mind is unable to establish an equilibrium, because it has grown too
much accustomed to a life deprived of spirituality. We see equally
piteous cases of religious fanaticism, or we look upon intimate dramatic
struggles between the heart, ever seeking its own safe and quiet port,
and the mind that constantly draws it back to the sea of conflicting
ideas and emotions, where peace is unknown. These are all psychological
phenomena of the highest importance; they present, perhaps, the gravest
of all our human problems. We Europeans are still filled with prejudices
and hedged about with preconceptions in regard to these matters. We are
very slaves of thought. We believe that liberty of conscience and of
thought consists in denying certain sentimental beliefs, while liberty
never can exist where one struggles to stifle some other thing, but only
where unlimited expansion is granted; where life is left free and
untrammelled. He who really does not believe, does not fear that which
he does not believe, and does not combat that which for him does not
exist. If he believes and fights, he then becomes an enemy to liberty.

In America, the great positive scientist, William James, who expounds
the physiological theory of emotions, is also the man who illustrates
the psychological importance of religious "conscience." We cannot know
the future of the progress of thought: here, for example, in the
"Children's Houses" the triumph of _discipline_ through the conquest of
liberty and independence marks the foundation of the progress which the
future will see in the matter of pedagogical methods. To me it offers
the greatest hope for human redemption through education.

Perhaps, in the same way, through the conquest of liberty of thought and
of conscience, we are making our way toward a great religious triumph.
Experience will show, and the psychological observations made along this
line in the "Children's Houses" will undoubtedly be of the greatest
interest.

This book of methods compiled by one person alone, must be followed by
many others. It is my hope that, starting from the _individual study of
the child_ educated with our method, other educators will set forth the
results of their experiments. These are the pedagogical books which
await us in the future.

From the practical side of the school, we have with our methods the
advantage of being able to teach in one room, children of very different
ages. In our "Children's Houses" we have little ones of two years and a
half, who cannot as yet make use of the most simple of the sense
exercises, and children of five and a half who because of their
development might easily pass into the third elementary. Each one of
them perfects himself through his own powers, and goes forward guided by
that inner force which distinguishes him as an individual.

One great advantage of such a method is that it will make instruction in
the rural schools easier, and will be of great advantage in the schools
in the small provincial towns where there are few children, yet where
all the various grades are represented. Such schools are not able to
employ more than one teacher. Our experience shows that one directress
may guide a group of children varying in development from little ones of
three years old to the third elementary. Another great advantage lies in
the extreme facility with which written language may be taught, making
it possible to combat illiteracy and to cultivate the national tongue.

As to the teacher, she may remain for a whole day among children in the
most varying stages of development, just as the mother remains in the
house with children of all ages, without becoming tired.

The children work by themselves, and, in doing so, make a conquest of
active discipline, and independence in all the acts of daily life, just
as through daily conquests they progress in intellectual development.
Directed by an intelligent teacher, who watches over their physical
development as well as over their intellectual and moral progress,
children are able with our methods to arrive at a splendid physical
development, and, in addition to this, there unfolds within them, in all
its perfection, the soul, which distinguishes the human being.

We have been mistaken in thinking that the natural education of children
should be purely physical; the soul, too, has its nature, which it was
intended to perfect in the spiritual life,--the dominating power of
human existence throughout all time. Our methods take into consideration
the spontaneous psychic development of the child, and help this in ways
that observation and experience have shown us to be wise.

If physical care leads the child to take pleasure in bodily health,
intellectual and moral care make possible for him the highest spiritual
joy, and send him forward into a world where continual surprises and
discoveries await him; not only in the external environment, but in the
intimate recesses of his own soul.

It is through such pleasures as these that the ideal man grows, and only
such pleasures are worthy of a place in the education of the infancy of
humanity.

Our children are noticeably different from those others who have grown
up within the grey walls of the common schools. Our little pupils have
the serene and happy aspect and the frank and open friendliness of the
person who feels himself to be master of his own actions. When they run
to gather about our visitors, speaking to them with sweet frankness,
extending their little hands with gentle gravity and well-bred
cordiality, when they thank these visitors for the courtesy they have
paid us in coming, the bright eyes and the happy voices make us feel
that they are, indeed, unusual little men. When they display their work
and their ability, in a confidential and simple way, it is almost as if
they called for a maternal approbation from all those who watch them.
Often, a little one will seat himself on the floor beside some visitor
silently writing his name, and adding a gentle word of thanks. It is as
if they wished to make the visitor feel the affectionate gratitude which
is in their hearts.

When we see all these things and when, above all, we pass with these
children from the busy activity of the schoolroom at work, into the
absolute and profound silence which they have learned to enjoy so
deeply, we are moved in spite of ourselves and feel that we have come in
touch with the very souls of these little pupils.

The "Children's House" seems to exert a spiritual influence upon
everyone. I have seen here, men of affairs, great politicians
preoccupied with problems of trade and of state, cast off like an
uncomfortable garment the burden of the world, and fall into a simple
forgetfulness of self. They are affected by this vision of the human
soul growing in its true nature, and I believe that this is what they
mean when they call our little ones, wonderful children, happy
children--the infancy of humanity in a higher stage of evolution than
our own. I understand how the great English poet Wordsworth, enamoured
as he was of nature, demanded the secret of all her peace and beauty. It
was at last revealed to him--the secret of all nature lies in the soul
of a little child. He holds there the true meaning of that life which
exists throughout humanity. But this beauty which "lies about us in our
infancy" becomes obscured; "shades of the prison house, begin to close
about the growing boy ... at last the man perceives it die away, and
fade into the light of common day."

Truly our social life is too often only the darkening and the death of
the natural life that is in us. These methods tend to guard that
spiritual fire within man, to keep his real nature unspoiled and to set
it free from the oppressive and degrading yoke of society. It is a
pedagogical method informed by the high concept of Immanuel Kant:
"Perfect art returns to nature."


THE END






End of Project Gutenberg's The Montessori Method, by Maria Montessori

*** 